An Introduction to the Atomic Theory

Transcription

1 An Introduction to the Atomic Theory Sophomore Natural Science Thomas Aquinas College Revised

2 2017 This Thomas Aquinas College Sophomore Natural Science Manual is a modified and expanded version of the St. John s College Freshman Laboratory Atomic Theory Manual. We thank St. John s College for permission to use much of their manual. The original source for many, but not all, of the selections and editorial footnotes in the present manual is A Source Book in Chemistry: , eds. H. Leicester and H. Klickstein (Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1952).

3 TABLE OF CONTENTS ATOMIC THEORY MANUAL Introduction.. 3 CHAPTER I: Aristotle s Account of Chemistry and the Elements. 5 St. Thomas Aquinas, Proemium to In Libros De Generatione et Corruptione 6 St. Thomas Aquinas, De Principiis Naturae, ch. 3, on element.. 8 St. Thomas Aquinas, De Mixtione Elementorum 9 Aristotle, Selections from On Coming to Be and Passing Away, bk. 1, chs. 1-4 and 10; bk. 2, chs CHAPTER II: Modern Chemistry, Its New Language, and the Elements 31 The Problem of Classifying Substances.. 31 An Introduction to the Phlogiston Theory 35 Lavoisier, Memoir on the Calcination of Tin and on the Cause of the Gain in Weight.. 38 Lavoisier, Memoir on the Nature of the Principle that Combines with Metals During Calcination 48 Lavoisier, Memoir on Combustion in General. 52 Lavoisier, Elements of Chemistry, Preface Morveau, Memoir on Chemical Names 65 Morveau, Lavoisier, Berthollet, Fourcroy, Method of Chemical Nomenclature. 66 Lavoisier, Elements of Chemistry, chs Is Heat a Substance? Two Papers to the Contrary (Davy and Rumford). 87 Lavoisier, Elements of Chemistry, ch Lavoisier, Elements of Chemistry, chs. 5-7 and On the Acidifying Principle.120 APPENDIX: St. Thomas Aquinas on Change of Density (optional reading).122 CHAPTER III: Further Developments in the New Chemistry: Weight Laws.123 Berthollet, Essay on Chemical Statics 123 Proust, Researches on Copper 128 Richter, Stoichiometry.132 CHAPTER IV: Atoms Proposed.135 Dalton, A New System of Chemical Philosophy..135 Gay-Lussac, Memoir on the Combination of Gaseous Substances With Each Other.142 APPENDIX: Dalton, On Gay-Lussac s Laws (optional reading) 152 CHAPTER V: Revisiting the Law of Equivalence and the Law of Multiple Proportions Wollaston, A Synoptic Scale of Chemical Equivalents CHAPTER VI: Chemical Combination and Electricity Davy s Decomposition of the Alkalis and Salifiable Earths Berzelius, The Electrochemical Theory

4 CHAPTER VII: Determination of Atomic and Molecular Weights Avogadro, Essay on a Manner of Determining the Relative Masses of the Elementary Molecules Modern Chemical Symbols. 189 Dulong and Petit, Researches on Certain Important Points about the Theory of Heat..192 Cannizzaro, Sketch of A Course of Chemical Philosophy Mendeleev: Letter to Voskresenski.223 CHAPTER VIII: Structural Formulas and Valence Gerhardt s System of Types 225 Couper, On A New Chemical Theory..230 CHAPTER IX: The Periodic Table Mendeleev, The Relation Between the Properties and Atomic Weights of the Elements 249 Mendeleev, The Periodic Law of the Chemical Elements Mendeleev s 1879 Periodic Table Notes on the Modern Periodic Table Philosophical Questions regarding the Atomic Theory APPENDIX: Relative Atomic Weight (1962).279 AFTERWORD: Is the Atom Really an Atom? J. J. Thomson..281 The Modern Periodic Table

5 It is of great advantage to the student of any subject to read the original memoirs on the subject, for the science is most completely assimilated when it is in the nascent state. James Clerk Maxwell Treatise on Electricity and Magnetism Preface, p. xi INTRODUCTION The central issue in this laboratory is the atomic theory of matter. We will deal with (1) the questions to which the theory provides some sort of answer, (2) the background from which it developed, and (3) part of the explanatory and predictive power of the theory. Apparently the theory cannot be logically proved starting from undeniable premises. In what sense the theory may be considered right or true will probably only become clear by learning a great deal about the theory as it has been developed and modified. The belief that this is true has directed the way in which this laboratory has been organized. Some progress should be made in understanding the interaction between experimental work and the theory that both explains (in some sense) the experimental results and suggests further experimental work. To emphasize this interaction the laboratory has been arranged so that there is a general alternation between experimental work and discussions based on original papers that deal with theory and experimental work. We will not examine the support for a particle theory of matter provided by the kinetic molecular theory. To do this would require more sophistication in mathematics and mechanics on your part than you could be legitimately expected to possess now. However, a consistent case for atomism can be and was made without direct appeals to the kinetic molecular theory. This is the case we will examine. We have chosen to deal almost exclusively with the 18th and 19th century chemistry not because we have an interest in the past history as such, but because this seems to us the best way to learn something about the ways of this physical science. We will ask what the ideas and experimental results are, how they are come by, and how they fit together in a phase of science in which we have a good chance of finding answers to some of our questions. This laboratory will not concern itself with any 20th century developments in the atomic theory. Our concern is with understanding the building up and justification of this great theory as an example of scientific theory. The scientists of the 20th century generally accepted and still accept most of the essentials of the atomic theory as we will leave it. You may find it helpful to think of our task as, to a large extent, unpacking the meaning of four terms: element (Chapters I and II), compound as distinguished from mixture as well as from element (Chapter III, IV, V), atom (Chapter IV), and molecule (Chapters IV, VI, VII). Chapters VIII and IX, using the understanding of the terms now established, further the explanation of the nature of chemical change, and make some remarkable predictions on the basis of these explanations. 3

6 There is perhaps no theory of more pervasive importance in modern natural science than the atomic theory. How one can defend this theory one positing entities that are not perceivable even sub-microscopically should be of interest. * * * Measurement is the major link between mathematics and natural science. During the first weeks of this semester we were primarily concerned with studying measurement as such. In this lab we will be concerned with studying a science chemical atomism as such. However, the work of this lab is related to that of the measurement segment of the Freshman and Sophomore Natural Science in a variety of ways. Four of these are mentioned here. I. Many kinds of measurement previously studied will be used or referred to this semester length, weight, volume, density, specific gravity, center of gravity, pressure, buoyancy, heat, temperature, specific heat, and the gas laws. Here all the measurements will serve a single major concern. II. In considering which characteristics of material are to be held as most important in explaining chemical composition, which are measurable in the light of what you now understand about measurement? Does this, in any way, direct which characteristics one chooses to emphasize? III. Consider the use made of measurement in the arguments presented. Compare, for example, the role of measurement in the readings from Aristotle and in the readings from Lavoisier. What significance can be attributed to the difference? IV. During the first part of this semester you probably tacitly (or explicitly) assumed all magnitudes were continuous, rather than composed of distinguishable parts (recall in the Measurement Manual Question 5, p. 10, and Question 3, p. 33). Should you reconsider this assumption in the face of a generally accepted atomic theory of matter? 4

7 CHAPTER I Aristotle s Account of Chemistry and the Elements READINGS: FIRST: Introduction to this Manual (3-4) Aristotle, On Coming to Be and Passing Away, Book I, ch. 1, 314a1-7 (14) St. Thomas Aquinas, Prologue to the Commentary of On Coming to Be and Passing Away (6-7) St. Thomas Aquinas, on the meaning of element, On the Principles of Nature, n. 21 (8) SECOND: Aristotle, On Coming to Be and Passing Away, Book I, ch. 2, 315a30-32; 315b16-316a34; 316b17-18; 316b32-317a32 (16-19) THIRD: Ibid., ch. 3, 317a33-318a30; 319a3-319b5 (19-23) Ibid., ch. 4, in toto (23-24) FOURTH and FIFTH: Ibid., Book I, ch. 10 (24-26) Ibid., Book II, ch. 7, 334b4-18; 334b26-31 (27) St. Thomas Aquinas, On the Combination of the Elements (9-13) SIXTH: Aristotle, On Coming to Be and Passing Away, Book II, selections from chapters 1-3 (28-30) 5

8 St. Thomas Aquinas In Libros De Generatione et Corruptione {Commentary on the Books On Coming to Be and Passing Away} Proemium [Translation by C. Decaen] 1. Sicut tradit Philosophus in iii De Anima, scientiae secantur quemadmodum et res: Nam omnes habitus distinguuntur per obiecta, ex quibus speciem habent. Res autem quas considerat naturalis, sunt motus et mobile; dicit enim Philosophus in ii Physic. quod quaecumque mota movent, sunt physicae speculationis. Et ideo oportet quod secundum differentiam motuum et mobilium, distinguantur et ordinentur partes scientiae naturalis. Primus autem motuum est motus localis, qui est perfectior ceteris, et communis omnibus corporibus naturalibus, ut probatur in viii Physic.. Et ideo post considerationem motuum et mobilium in communi, quae fuit tradita in libro Physicorum, primo oportuit quod tractaretur de corporibus secundum quod moventur motu locali, in libro De Caelo; quae est secunda pars scientiae naturalis. Restat igitur consideratio de motibus aliis consequentibus, qui non sunt communes omnibus corporibus, sed inveniuntur in solis inferioribus. Inter quos principatum obtinet generatio et corruptio. Alteratio enim ordinatur ad generationem sicut ad finem, qui est perfectior naturaliter his quae sunt ad finem. Augmentum etiam consequenter se habet ad generationem: Nam augmentum non fit sine quadam particulari generatione, qua scilicet nutrimentum convertitur in nutritum; sicut Philosophus dicit in ii De Anima quod cibus nutrit inquantum est potentia caro, augmentat autem inquantum est potential quanta caro. Et ideo necesse est, quia hi motus quodammodo consequenter se habent ad generationem, quod simul de his 1. Just as the Philosopher treats it in the third book On the Soul, the sciences are divided in the same way things are: For all habits are distinguished through the objects from which they have their species. However, the things that the naturalist considers are motion and the mobile; for the Philosopher says in the second book of Physics that whatever moved things move are of the contemplation of physics. And therefore it is necessary that the parts of natural science be distinguished and ordered according to the differences of motions and mobiles. But the first of the motions is local motion, which is more perfect than the others, and is common to all natural bodies, as is shown in the eighth book of Physics. And therefore after the universal consideration of motions and mobiles, which has been treated in the book of Physics, it was necessary that one treat first of bodies according as they are moved with local motion, in the book of On the Heavens, which is the second part of natural science. There remains, therefore, the consideration of the other consequent motions, which are not common to all bodies, but are found in the lower bodies alone. Among which generation and corruption {alt. coming to be and passing away} hold the chief place. For alteration is ordered to generation as to an end, which is naturally more perfect than those things that are for the end. Growth also bears itself as consequent to generation: For growth does not come to be without some particular generation by which, namely, the nutriment is converted into the one nourished, just as the Philosopher says in the second book of On the Soul that food nourishes inasmuch as it is potentially flesh, but it causes growth inasmuch as it is potentially so much flesh. And therefore it is necessary, because these motions bear themselves in some way as 6

9 et de generatione et corruptione tractetur. 2. Est autem considerandum quod de unoquoque quod in pluribus invenitur, prius est considerandum in communi, quam ad species descendere: Alioquin oporteret idem dicere multoties, ita scilicet quod in singulis id quod est commune repeteretur, sicut probat Philosophus in i De Partibus Animalium. Et ideo prius oportuit de generatione et corruptione in communi determinare, quam ad partes eius descendere. Similiter etiam considerare oportet quod, si in aliquo genere aliquod primum invenitur quod sit causa aliorum, eiusdem considerationis est commune genus et id quod est primum in genere illo. Quia illud primum est causa totius generis, oportet autem eum qui considerat genus aliquod, causas totius generis considerare. Et inde est quod Philosophus in metaphysica simul determinat de ente in communi et de ente primo, quod est a materia separatum. Sunt autem in genere generabilium et corruptibilium quaedam prima principia, scilicet elementa, quae sunt causa generationis et corruptionis et alterationis in omnibus aliis corporibus. Et inde est quod Aristoteles in hoc libro, qui est tertia pars scientiae naturalis, determinat non solum de generatione et corruptione in communi et aliis motibus consequentibus, sed etiam de generatione et corruptione elementorum. His igitur praelibatis ad demonstrandum intentionem Aristotelis in hoc libro, accedendum est ad expositionem eius. consequent to generation, that one treat of them and of generation and corruption together. 2. However, one should consider that, of each and every thing that is found in many, one should make a general consideration before descending to the species. Otherwise it would be necessary to say the same things many times, such that that which is common in the particulars would be repeated, as the Philosopher shows in the first book of On the Parts of Animals. And therefore it was necessary to determine of generation and corruption in general before descending to its parts. Likewise also one must consider that if in some genus something first is found which is the cause of the others [in the genus], the common genus and that which is first in that genus are of the same consideration. But because that first one is the cause of the whole genus, it is necessary that he who considers some genus consider the causes of the whole genus. And thence it is that in metaphysics the Philosopher determines simultaneously of being in common and of the first being, which is separate from matter. In the genus of things that can be generated and corrupted, however, there are certain first principles, namely the elements, which are the cause of generation and corruption and alteration in all other bodies. And thence it is that Aristotle, in this book, which is the third part of natural science, determines not only generally of generation and corruption and the other consequent motions, but also of the generation and corruption of the elements. So with these things settled first for demonstrating the intention of Aristotle in this book, let us now approach toward expounding it. 7

10 St. Thomas Aquinas on the Meaning of Element De Principiis Naturae, ch. 3, nn [Translation by C. Decaen] 24. Elementum vero non dicitur proprie nisi de causis ex quibus est compositio rei, quae proprie sunt materiales. Et iterum non de qualibet causa materiali, sed de illa ex qua est prima compositio: sicut nec membra elementa sunt hominis, quia membra etiam sunt composita ex aliis; sed dicimus quod terra et aqua sunt elementa, quia haec non componuntur ex aliis corporibus, sed ex ipsis est prima compositio corporum naturalium. 25. Unde Aristoteles in quinto Metaph. dicit quod elementum est id ex quo componitur res primo, et est in ea, et non dividitur secundum formam. Expositio primae particulae, ex quo componitur res primo, patet per ea quae diximus. Secunda particula, scilicet et est in ea, ponitur ad differentiam illius materiae quae ex toto corrumpitur per generationem: sicut panis est materia sanguinis, sed non generatur sanguis nisi corrumpatur panis; unde panis non remanet in sanguine: unde non potest dici panis elementum sanguinis. Sed elementa oportet aliquo modo manere, cum non corrumpantur, ut dicitur in libro de Gener. Tertia particula, scilicet et non dividitur secundum formam, ponitur ad differentiam eorum scilicet quae habent partes diversas in forma, idest in specie, sicut manus, cuius partes sunt caro et ossa, quae differunt secundum speciem. Sed elementum non dividitur in partes diversas secundum speciem, sicut aqua, cuius quaelibet pars est aqua. Non enim oportet ad esse elementi ut non dividatur secundum quantitatem, sed sufficit si non dividatur secundum speciem: et si etiam non dividitur, dicitur elementum, sicut litterae dicuntur elementa dictionum. 24. Element can be properly said only of the causes from which a thing is composed, which are properly material causes. Further, it is not [said] of just any material cause, but of that from which the thing is first composed, just as neither are the [bodily] members of a man elements, since the members are also composed from other things. But we do say that earth and water are elements, since these are not composed from other bodies, but the first composition of natural bodies is from them. 25. Whence Aristotle, in the fifth book of the Metaphysics, says that an element is that from which a thing is first composed, and is in it, and is not divided according to form. The explanation of the first phrase, from which a thing is first composed, is clear from what we have said. The second phrase, namely and is in it, is posited for distinguishing [an element] from that matter which is wholly corrupted through generation, just as bread is the matter of blood, but blood is not generated unless the bread is corrupted; whence bread does not remain in blood, whence bread cannot be called an element of blood. But elements in some manner must remain, since they are not corrupted, as is said in the [first] book of On Coming to Be and Passing Away. The third phrase, namely and is not divided according to form, is posited for distinguishing [elements] from those things that have parts diverse in form, that is, in species, such as a hand, the parts of which are flesh and bone, which differ according to species. But an element is not divided into parts diverse according to species, such as water, any part of which is water. For it is not necessary for the being of an element that it not be divided according to quantity, but it suffices that it not be divided according to species. And even if it is not divided it is called an element, just as letters are called elements of speech. 8

11 St. Thomas Aquinas De Mixtione Elementorum {On the Combination of the Elements} [Translated by J. F. Nieto; with minor emendations.] I 1. Dubium apud multos esse solet quomodo elementa sint in mixto. 2. Videtur autem quibusdam quod, qualitatibus activis et passivis elementorum ad medium aliqualiter reductis per alterationem, formae substantiales elementorum manent: 3. Si enim formae substantiales non maneant, corruptio quaedam elementorum esse videbitur et non mixtio. 4. Rursus si forma substantialis corporis mixti sit actus materiae non praesuppositis formis simplicium corporum, simplicia corpora elementorum rationem amittent. 5. Est enim elementum ex quo componitur aliquid primo, et est in eo, et est indivisibile secundum speciem; sublatis enim formis substantialibus, non sic ex simplicibus corporibus corpus mixtum componetur, quod in eo remaneant. 1. To many, how the elements are in a combined thing is usually uncertain. 2. However, it seems to certain men that, with the active and passive qualities of the elements having been by alteration reduced to a mean of some sort, the substantial forms of the elements remain. 3. For if the substantial forms do not remain, there would seem to be a certain corruption of the elements and not a combination. 4. Again, if the substantial form of the combined body be the actuality of the matter, without the forms of the simple bodies having been presupposed, the simple bodies would lose the notion of elements. 5. For an element is that from which something is first composed, and is in it, and is indivisible according to species; for with the substantial forms destroyed, the combined body would not be so composed from the simple bodies that they would remain in it. II 6. Est autem impossibile sic se habere. 7. Impossibile est enim materiam secundum idem diversas formas elementorum suscipere. Si igitur in corpore mixto formae elementorum salventur, oportebit diversis partibus materiae eas inesse. 8. Materiae autem diversas partes accipere est impossibile, nisi praeintellecta quantitate 6. But it is impossible that it be this way. 7. For it is impossible that matter insofar as it is the same take on the diverse forms of the elements. Therefore, if the substantial forms of the elements be preserved in the combined body, they must be in diverse parts of matter. 8. But it is impossible to take diverse parts of matter except with quantity previously 9

12 in materia; sublata enim quantitate, substantia indivisibilis permanet, ut patet in primo Physic., ex materia autem sub quantitate existente, et forma substantiali adveniente, corpus physicum constituitur. Diversae igitur partes materiae formis elementorum subsistentes plurium corporum rationem suscipiunt. 9. Multa autem corpora impossibile est esse simul. Non igitur in qualibet parte corporis mixti erunt quatuor elementa; et sic non erit vera mixtio, sed secundum sensum, sicut accidit in aggregatione corporum insensibilium propter parvitatem. 10. Amplius, omnis forma substantialis propriam dispositionem in materia requirit, sine qua esse non potest: Unde alteratio est via ad generationem et corruptionem. Impossibile est autem in idem convenire propriam dispositionem, quae requiritur ad formam ignis, et propriam dispositionem quae requiritur ad formam aquae, quia secundum huiusmodi dispositiones ignis et aqua sunt contraria. Contraria autem impossibile est esse in eodem. Impossibile est igitur quod in eadem parte mixti sint formae substantiales ignis et aquae. Si igitur mixtum fiat remanentibus formis substantialibus simplicium corporum, sequitur quod non sit vera mixtio, sed solum ad sensum, quasi iuxta se positis partibus insensibilibus propter parvitatem. understood to be in the matter, for with quantity having been taken away substance remains indivisible, as is clear in the first book of the Physics. But a physical body is constituted from matter existing under quantity and a substantial form coming [to it]. Therefore the diverse parts of matter subsisting by the forms of the elements take on the notion of many bodies. 9. But it is impossible for many bodies to be together. Therefore the four elements will not be in any part of the combined body. And so there will not be a true combination, but one according to sense, as happens in an aggregate of bodies insensible on account of smallness. 10. Additionally, every substantial form requires a proper disposition in the matter, without which it cannot be. Whence alteration is the path to generation and corruption. But it is impossible that in the same thing there come together the proper disposition that is required for the form of fire and the proper disposition that is required for the form of water, since according to dispositions of this sort fire and water are contraries. But it is impossible that contraries be in the same thing. Therefore it is impossible that in the same part of a combined thing there be the substantial forms of fire and water. If, therefore, there come to be a combined thing with the substantial forms of the simple bodies remaining, it follows that it will not be a true combination, but one only according to sense, as if with parts insensible on account of smallness having been placed next to each other. III 11. Quidam autem utrasque rationes vitare volentes, in maius inconveniens inciderunt. Ut enim mixtionem ab elementorum corruptione distinguerent, dixerunt formas substantiales elementorum aliqualiter remanere in mixto. 11. But some, wishing to avoid both ar- guments, have fallen into a greater incongruity. For, in order that they might distinguish the combination of the elements from their corruption, they have said that the substantial forms of the elements remain in the combined thing in some way. 10

13 12. Sed rursus ne cogerentur dicere esse mixtionem ad sensum, et non secundum veritatem, posuerunt quod formae elementorum non manent in mixto secundum suum complementum, sed in quoddam medium reducuntur; dicunt enim quod formae elementorum suscipiunt magis et minus et habent contrarietatem ad invicem. 13. Sed quia hoc manifeste repugnat communi opinioni et dictis Aristotelis dicentis in Praedic., quod substantiae nihil est contrarium, et quod non recipit magis et minus; ulterius procedunt, dicentes quod formae elementorum sunt imperfectissimae, utpote materiae primae propinquiores: Unde sunt mediae inter formas substantiales et accidentales; et sic, inquantum accedunt ad naturam formarum accidentalium, magis et minus suscipere possunt. 12. But again, lest they be forced to say that there is a combination according to sense and not according to truth, they have posited that the forms of the elements do not remain in the combined thing according to their fullness, but are reduced into a certain mean. For they say that the forms of the elements take on more and less, and have contrariety toward each other. 13. But because this is manifestly repugnant to common opinion and to the words of Aristotle saying, in the Categories, that nothing is contrary to substance and that it does not receive more and less, they proceed further, saying that the forms of the elements are the most imperfect, as they are closer to first matter. Whence they are means between substantial and accidental forms, and thus, inasmuch as they approach the nature of accidental forms, they can take on more and less. IV 14. Haec autem positio multipliciter improbabilis est. 15. Primo quidem quia esse aliquid medium inter substantiam et accidens est omnino impossibile: 16. Esset enim aliquid medium inter affirmationem et negationem. Proprium enim accidentis est in subiecto esse, substantiae vero in subiecto non esse. Formae autem substan-tiales sunt quidem in materia, non autem in subiecto: Nam subiectum est hoc aliquid; forma autem substantialis est quae facit hoc aliquid, non autem praesupponit ipsum. 17. Item ridiculum est dicere medium esse inter ea quae non sunt unius generis; ut probatur in decimo Metaph., medium enim et extrema ex eodem genere esse oportet; nihil 14. But this position can be disproven in many ways. 15. First, because that there be some mean between substance and accident is altogether impossible. 16. For there would be some mean between affirmation and negation. For it is proper to accident to be in a subject, but to substance not to be in a subject. Moreover, substantial forms are in fact in matter, but not in a subject, for a subject is a this something, but a substantial form is what makes a this something, and does not presuppose it. 17. Again, to say there is a mean between things that are not of one genus is ridiculous, as is proved in the tenth book of the Metaphysics, for the mean and the extremes must be from the 11

14 igitur medium esse potest inter substantiam et accidens. 18. Deinde impossibile est formas substantiales elementorum suscipere magis et minus. Omnis enim forma suscipiens magis et minus est divisibilis per accidens, inquantum scilicet subiectum eam potest participare vel magis vel minus. Secundum autem id quod est divisibile per se vel per accidens, contingit esse motum continuum, ut patet in VI Physic.. Est enim loci mutatio et augmentum et decrement-tum, secundum quantitatem et locum quae sunt per se divisibilia; alteratio autem secundum qualitates quae suscipiunt magis et minus, ut calidum et album. Si igitur formae elementorum suscipiunt magis et minus, tam generatio quam corruptio elementorum erit motus continuus. Quod est impossibile, nam motus continuus non est nisi in tribus generibus, scilicet in quantitate et qualitate, et ubi, ut probatur in V Physic. 19. Amplius, omnis differentia secundum formam substantialem variat speciem. Quod autem recipit magis et minus, differt quod est magis ab eo quod est minus et quodammodo est ei contrarium, ut magis album et minus album. Si igitur forma ignis suscipiat magis et minus, magis facta vel minus facta speciem variabit, et non erit eadem forma, sed alia. Et hinc est quod Philosophus dicit in VIII Metaph., quod sicut in numeris variatur species per additionem et subtractionem, ita in substantiis. same genus. Nothing, therefore, can be a mean between substance and accident. 18. Further, it is impossible that the substantial forms of the elements take on more and less. For every form taking on more and less is divisible accidentally, inasmuch as the subject can share it either more or less. But continuous motion occurs according to what is divisible through itself or accidentally, as is clear in the sixth book of the Physics. For change of place and growth and decrease are according to quantity and place, which are divisible through themselves, but alteration [is divisible] according to the qualities that take on more and less, such as the hot and the white. So if the forms of the elements take on more and less, then both the generation and the corruption of the elements will be a continuous motion; which is impossible, for continuous motion is not but in three genera, namely in quantity, quality, and where, as is proved in the fifth book of the Physics. 19. Further, every difference according to substantial form varies the species. But that which receives more and less differentiates that which is more from that which is less, and in a certain way is contrary to it, as the more white and the less white. So if the form of fire were to take on more and less, then having been made more or having been made less will vary the species, and it will not be the same form, but another. And so it is that the Philosopher says in the eighth book of the Metaphysics that, just as in numbers the species is varied through addition and subtraction, so also in substances. V 20. Oportet igitur alium modum invenire, quo et veritas mixtionis salvetur, et tamen elementa non totaliter corrumpantur, sed aliqualiter in mixto remaneant. 20. Therefore another manner must be found by which both the truth of the combination might be preserved, and yet the elements might not be totally corrupted, but remain in the combined thing in some way. 12

15 21. Considerandum est igitur quod qualitates activae et passivae elementorum contrariae sunt ad invicem et magis et minus recipiunt. Ex contrariis autem qualitatibus quae recipiunt magis et minus constitui potest media qualitas, quae sapiat utriusque extremi naturam, sicut pallidum inter album et nigrum, et tepidum inter calidum et frigidum. Sic igitur, remissis excellentiis qualitatum elementarium, constituitur ex his quaedam qualitas media, quae est propria qualitas corporis mixti, differens tamen in diversis secundum diversam mixtionis proportionem: Et haec quidem qualitas est propria dispositio ad formam corporis mixti, sicut qualitas simplex ad formam corporis simplicis. 22. Sicut igitur extrema inveniuntur in medio, quod participat naturam utriusque, sic qualitates simplicium corporum inveniuntur in propria qualitate corporis mixti. Qualitas autem simplicis corporis est quidem aliud a forma substantiali ipsius, agit tamen in virtute formae substantialis, alioquin calor calefaceret tantum, non autem per eius actionem forma substantialis educeretur in actum; cum nihil agat ultra suam speciem. Sic igitur virtutes formarum substantialium simplicium corporum in corporibus mixtis salvantur. 23. Sunt igitur formae elementorum in corporibus mixtis non quidem actu, sed virtute: Et hoc est quod Aristoteles dicit in I De Gener.: Non manent igitur, elementa scilicet in mixto, actu, ut corpus et album, nec corrumpuntur nec alterum nec ambo: Salvatur enim virtus eorum. 21. So one must consider that the active and passive qualities of the elements are contrary to each other and allow of more and less. But from contrary qualities that allow of more and less can be constituted a mean quality that tastes of the nature of each extreme, just as the pallid between the white and the black, and the tepid between the hot and the cold. So, with the extremes of the qualities of the elements having been so remitted, there is constituted from these a certain mean quality that is the proper quality of the combined body, differing nevertheless in diverse ones according to the diverse proportion of the combination. And this quality is indeed the proper disposition for the form of the combined body, just as the simple quality is for the form of the simple body. 22. So just as extremes are found in a mean that shares the nature of each, so the qualities of the simple bodies are found in the proper quality of the combined body. The quality of the simple body, however, is something other than its substantial form, yet it acts in virtue [alt. power] of the substantial form, otherwise heat would only heat, and through its action a substantial form would not be led forth into actuality, since nothing acts beyond its own species. So in this way the virtues [alt. powers] of the substantial forms of the simple bodies are preserved in the combined bodies. 23. So the forms of the elements are in combined bodies not actually, but virtually [alt. by power]. And this is what Aristotle says in the first book of On Coming to Be and Passing Away: Therefore they do not remain, that is, the elements in the combined thing, actually, as [do] the body and the white, and neither are they corrupted, neither one nor both. For their virtue is preserved. 13

16 Aristotle De Generatione et Corruptione (On Coming to be and Passing Away) [H. Joachim translation (taken from the Basic Works of Aristotle, McKeon edition), with emendations by C. Decaen; passages in brackets indicate implied words or, if in italics, the Greek of the immediately preceding word(s). Occasionally when the Greek is given, an alternate rendering is included (indicated by the abbreviation alt. ). Paragraph numbering follows that in the Moerbeke translation in St. Thomas s commentary.] Note: the grayed text is not part of the assigned reading. B O O K I 314a b Chapter About coming to be and passing away [geneseōs kai phthoras], we must distinguish the causes and the accounts of these things in general as they apply uniformly to all the things that come to be and pass away by nature. Further, we are to study growth and alteration, what each of them is, and whether alteration has the same nature as coming to be, or whether there are separate things corresponding to these different names Of the ancients, some say that what is called unqualified coming to be is alteration, while others say that alteration and coming to be are distinct. For those who say that all is one thing, and who generate all things out of one thing, must assert that coming to be is alteration, and that whatever comes to be in the proper sense is being altered, but those like Empedocles, Anaxagoras, and Leucippus, who make the matter of things more than one, [must assert] that coming to be is different than alteration. 7. And yet Anaxagoras ignored his own utterance. He says, at all events, that coming to be and passing away are the same as being altered; yet, in common with the others, he affirms that the elements are many. 8. Thus Empedocles holds that the bodily elements are four, while all the elements with the movers are six in number; whereas Anaxagoras agrees with Leucippus and Democritus that the elements are infinite. 9. Anaxagoras posits as elements the like-parted things, for example, bone, flesh, marrow, and everything else which is such that part and whole take the same name; while Democritus and Leucippus say that these are composed of indivisible bodies, being infinite both in multitude and in forms, the compounds differing one from another according to their constituents, and their position and arrangement. 10. And the views of the school of Anaxagoras seem contrary to those of the followers of Empedocles. Empedocles says that fire, water, air, and earth are the four elements, and are thus simple, rather than flesh, bone, and bodies which, like these, are like-parted. But the followers of Anaxagoras regard like-parted things as simple and 14

17 a elements, whilst they affirm that earth, fire, water, and air are composite; for each of these is (according to them) a universal seed-bed of like-parted things On the one hand, then, those who construct all things out of one must say that coming to be and passing away are alteration, for the underlying always remains the same and one, and such a thing we say is being altered. But, on the other hand, those who make the genera of things more than one [must] distinguish alteration from coming to be, for coming to be and passing away result from them being together and being separated. That is why Empedocles also speaks this way when he says, There is no birth [physis] of anything, but only a mixing and a divorce of what have been mixed. Thus it is clear that their account in these terms is in accordance with their assumption, and that they do in fact speak this way Nevertheless, it is necessary even for them to say that alteration is something besides coming to be, though it is impossible for them to do so consistently with what they say. That we are right in this criticism is easy to perceive. For just as while the substance remains unchanged, we see a change in it according to magnitude, called growth and diminution, so also it is with alteration. Nevertheless, the statements of those who posit more principles than one make alteration impossible. For the passions according to which we say that alteration occurs (I mean, e.g., hot and cold, white and black, dry and moist, soft and hard, and so forth) are differences of the elements. As Empedocles says, The sun everywhere bright to see, and hot; the rain everywhere dark and cold, and he characterizes his remaining elements in a similar manner. If, therefore, it is impossible for fire to become water, or water to become earth, neither will it be possible for anything white to become black, or anything soft to become hard; and the same account applies to all the other [qualities]. Yet this is what alteration was. 15. Also, it is apparent that there is always a single matter underlying the contraries, whether in change according to place, or according to growth and diminution, or according to alteration; further, the being of this [matter] and alteration likewise need each other. For if there is alteration, then the underlying is one element, and all things that admit of change into one another have one matter. And, conversely, if the underlying is one, there is alteration. 16. Empedocles, then, seems to speak contrary both to the appearance and to himself. For he denies that any one of his elements comes to be out of any other, insisting that they are the things out of which everything else comes to be; and yet (having brought the entirety of nature, except Strife, together into one) he maintains, simultaneously with this denial, that each thing once more comes to be out of the One. Hence it was clearly out of a one that this became water and that fire, various portions of it being separated off by certain differences or passions, as indeed he calls the sun white and hot, and the earth heavy and hard. If, therefore, these differences be taken away (for they can be taken away, since they came to be), it will clearly be inevitable for earth to come to be out of water and water out of earth, and for each of the other elements to undergo a similar transformation not only then, but also now if they change their passions. And, to judge by what he says, they can be attached to things and can again be separated from them, especially since Strife and Love are still fighting with one another. It was owing to this same conflict that the elements were generated from a One at the former period, for presumably fire, earth, and water were no longer beings while they were one in the All. 15

18 17. But it is not clear either whether we should regard his principle as one or many I mean fire and earth, and the other elements. For, on the one hand, there is one element insofar as it underlies as matter, as that out of which earth and fire come to be, changing through motion. On the other hand, insofar as the one results from composition [ek syntheseōs] by them being together, whereas they result from coming apart, the many are more elemental and prior by nature. Chapter b We have therefore to inquire generally of unqualified coming to be and passing away: whether it exists or does not exist, and how it exists, and also of the other simple motions, like growth and alteration. 19. Thus Plato, on the one hand, looked into coming to be and passing away, but only at how it is present in things, and the coming to be of the elements, but not of all things; as to how flesh or bones or any of the other things of this sort [come to be] he said nothing; nor about in what way alteration or growth are present in things. In general, no one except Democritus has applied himself to any of these things in a more than superficial way. Democritus, however, does seem not only to have thought about all of them, but also to be distinguished from the outset by how he does it. For, as we were saying, no one else said anything distinctly about growth, except such as any chance man might have said such as, that things grow by the accession of like to like ([saying] nothing of how this happens) and nothing about combining [mixeōs], and absolutely nothing about each of the others, such as about acting or undergoing, in what way in natural actions the one acts and the other undergoes. 20. Democritus and Leucippus, however, postulating the figures, make alteration and coming to be from them, coming to be and passing away by their dissociation and association, but alteration by their order and position. 21. And since they thought that the truth is in that which appears, and the appearances are contrary and infinite, they made the figures infinite. Hence, with the changes of what came together, the same thing seems different to different people, and it is transposed by a small addition to the compound, and appears utterly other by the transposition of one thing. For tragedy and comedy come to be from the same letters. 22. Since almost all men are of the opinion that coming to be is distinct from alteration, and that, associating and dissociating, things come to be and pass away, but that, passions changing, they are altered, we must stop to contemplate these things. For they present both many and well-reasoned obstacles. For if, on the one hand, coming to be is association, many impossible things happen; and yet, on the other hand, there are other compelling arguments that are not easy to get through and overcome such that it cannot be anything else. And if coming to be is not association, either coming to be simply does not exist, or it is alteration, or else we must try to overcome this obstacle too, it being a difficult one. 23. The starting-point [archē] of all these things is whether beings come to be and are altered and grow, and undergo the contraries of these, because the first things are indivisible magnitudes, or is there no indivisible magnitude for this makes the greatest 16

19 35 316a difference. And again, if the first things are indivisible magnitudes, are these bodies, as Democritus and Leucippus maintain, or are they planes, as is asserted in the Timaeus? 24. To resolve bodies all the way to planes, as we have also remarked elsewhere, is itself unreasonable. Hence, that there are indivisible bodies is far more reasonable. Yet even this involves much that is unreasonable. Still, as we have said, it is possible to make alteration and coming to be with them, if one transposes the same thing by turning and order and by the varieties of the figures, as Democritus does whence he denies that color is a nature, for things become colored by turning. But [to explain alteration and coming to be] is no longer possible for those who divide [bodies] into planes, for nothing except solids results from putting them together; for they do not even attempt to generate any passion from them. 25. The cause of a comparative inability to see wholly the things every one agrees about is a lack of experience. Hence, those who are more at home among natural things are more able to lay down principles such as to bring together a great many things; while those whom attention to great accounts [alt., long speeches; tōn pollōn logōn] has diverted from beings are too ready to draw conclusions from looking at only a few things. One can also see from this how great is the difference between looking into things naturally and logically [alt. dialectically; logikōs]. For concerning those saying there are uncuttable [alt. atomic; atoma] magnitudes they say that [otherwise] triangle itself will be many Democritus would appear to have been persuaded by accounts both appropriate and natural. What we are saying will become clear as we proceed. 26. For a difficulty arises if one supposes that a body with magnitude is divisible through and through, and that this division is possible. For what will there be that escapes the division? For if it is divisible through and through, and this division is possible, then it could be being divided through and through simultaneously, even if it is not divided simultaneously; and there would be nothing impossible if this were to occur. 27. Hence whenever a body is by nature divisible through and through, whether by bisection, or generally by any method whatever, nothing impossible will have resulted if it has been so divided. For if it has been divided into innumerable parts, themselves divided innumerable times, nothing impossible will have resulted, though perhaps nobody in fact could so divide it. Since, therefore, the body is divisible through and through, let it have been divided. 28. What, then, will remain? A magnitude? No, since then there will be something not divided, whereas it was divisible through and through. But if it be admitted that neither a body nor a magnitude will remain, and yet division is to take place, the body will either consist of points (and its constituents will be without magnitude), or it will be absolutely nothing. If the latter, then it might both come to be out of nothing and exist as a composite of nothing; and thus the whole will be nothing but an appearance. Likewise, if it consists of points, it will not be a quantity. For when the points were in contact and there was just one thing with magnitude and they were together, they did not make the whole any bigger; for when the body was divided into two or more parts, the whole was not a bit smaller or bigger than it was before the division. Hence, even if all the points be put together, they will not make any magnitude. 17

20 316b a But suppose that, as the body is being divided, something like sawdust is produced, and that in this sense a body gets away from the magnitude, even then the same argument applies. For in what sense is that divisible? 30. But if what came away was not a body but some separable form or passion, and if the magnitude is points or contacts thus qualified, it is absurd that a magnitude should consist of things that are not magnitudes. 31. Moreover, where will the points be? And are they immobile or mobile? And every contact is always a contact of two things, as of some being besides the contact or the division or the point. These, then, are the difficulties resulting from the supposition that any and every body, whatever its size, is divisible through and through. 32. Further still, if, having divided a piece of wood or anything else, I put it together, it is again equal to what it was, and is one. Clearly this is so, whatever the point at which I cut the wood. The wood, therefore, has been divided potentially through and through. What, then, is there in the wood besides the division? For even if we suppose there is some passion, yet how is the wood dissolved into or come to be from such things? Or how are such things separated? 33. Since, therefore, it is impossible for magnitudes to consist of contacts or points, there must be indivisible bodies and magnitudes. 34. Yet, if we do postulate these, we are confronted with equally impossible consequences, which we have examined in other works. But we must try to disentangle these perplexities, and must therefore restate the problem from the starting-point [alt. principle; archē]. 35. On the one hand, then, it is in no way absurd that every sensible body should be indivisible [alt. undivided] as well as divisible [alt. divided] at any and every point. For the second predicate will attach to it in potency, but the first in actuality On the other hand, it would seem to be impossible for a body to be potentially divisible at all points simultaneously. For if it were possible, then it might actually occur, with the result, not that the body would simultaneously be actually both indivisible and divided, but that it would be simultaneously divided at any and every point. Consequently, nothing will remain and the body will have passed away into the nonbodily; and so it might come to be again either out of points or wholly out of nothing. And how is that possible? But it is clear that a body is in fact divided into separable magnitudes that are smaller at each division, i.e., into ones that are set apart from one another and are separated. Hence, dividing a body part by part is not a breaking up that could continue into infinity; nor can a body be simultaneously divided at every point (for that is not possible), but only up to a certain limit. The necessary consequence, especially if coming to be and passing away occur by association and dissociation, is that a body must contain invisible uncuttable magnitudes [atoma megethē]. Such is the argument that is believed to establish the necessity of uncuttable magnitudes. 38. We must now show that it conceals a faulty inference, and exactly where it conceals it. For, since no point is in contact with another point, magnitudes are divisible through and through in one sense, and yet not in another. When, however, it is admitted that a magnitude is divisible through and through, it is thought that there is a point not only anywhere, but also everywhere, in it; hence it follows that the magnitude must be divided away into nothing. For there is a point everywhere within it, so that it consists 18

21 either of contacts or points. But it is only in one sense that the magnitude is divisible through and through, namely insofar as there is one point anywhere within it and all its points are everywhere within it if you take them singly. But there are not more points than one anywhere within it, for points are not consecutive; in this way it is not divisible through and through. For if it were, then, if it were divisible at its center, it will be divisible also at a contiguous point. But it is not so divisible; for position is not contiguous to position, nor point to point. (This is a division or a composition.) Hence there exist both dissociation and association, but neither into uncuttables [alt. atoms; atoma] nor out of uncuttables for that involves many impos-sibilities nor such that division takes place through and through for this would have resulted if point had been touching point. Rather, dissociation takes place into smaller parts, and association takes place out of smaller parts. 39. Nevertheless, unqualified and complete coming to be is not defined by association and dissociation, as some say; nor is a change in what is continuous the same thing as alteration. On the contrary, this is where all the mistakes are made. For unqualified coming to be and passing away occur, not by association and dissociation, but when a thing changes from this thing to that thing as a whole. But they suppose that all such change is alteration, whereas in fact there is a difference. For in that which underlies there is both something corresponding to the account [kata ton logon] and something corresponding to the matter [kata tēn hulēn]. Accordingly, whenever the change is in these, it will be a coming to be or passing away, but whenever it is in the passions and accidental, it will be an alteration. 40. However, dissociating and associating things come to pass away more readily. For if water has first been dissociated into small drops, air comes to be out of it more quickly, while if drops of water have first been associated, air comes to be more slowly. This will become clearer in what follows. 41. For now, let so much be taken as determined: that coming to be cannot be association, as some say it is. Chapter b Having determined these things, we must first contemplate whether there is anything that unqualifiedly comes to be and passes away, or whether nothing comes to be in this chief sense [alt. properly speaking; kyriōs], but everything always comes to be something and out of something I mean, for example, coming to be healthy out of being ill and ill out of being healthy, coming to be small out of being big and big out of being small, and so on in every other instance For if there is to be unqualified coming to be, something must come to be from unqualified non-being, so that it would be true to say that non-being belongs to some things. For qualified coming to be is from qualified non-being (e.g., out of non-white or non-beautiful), but unqualified coming to be is from unqualified non-being. 19

22 a Now unqualified [alt. simply; haplōs] means either the first thing with respect to each category, or the universal and includes everything. Hence, if the former, there will be a coming to be of a substance out of non-substance. But where there is not a substance or a this something, clearly there is not any of the other categories either, such as of this sort, or so much, or where [alt. quality, or quantity, or place where]. Otherwise, passions would exist in separation from substances. If, on the other hand, it means what is not in any sense at all, it will be a universal negation of everything, so that what comes to be will have to come to be out of nothing. 48. Although we have rehearsed and settled these problems at greater length elsewhere, we must mention them by way of summary here too. For in one sense things unqualifiedly come to be out of that which unqualifiedly is not; yet in another sense they come to be always out of what is. For that which is in potency, but not in actuality, must necessarily pre-exist, being spoken of in both ways. 49. But even with these distinctions made, it is extraordinarily difficult to see how there can be unqualified coming to be, whether out of what potentially is, or in some other way. And we must recall this problem for further examination For the question might be raised whether substance and a this something comes to be at all, as opposed to the of a sort, the so much, or the where that come to be. And the same question might be raised about passing away also. For if something comes to be, it is clear that there will be (not actually, but potentially) a substance from which it comes to be and into which that which passes away must necessarily change. Then will any of the remaining [categories] be present in this actually? In other words, will that which is only potentially a this something and a being, while without qualification it is not a this something and a being, be of a sort, or so much, or somewhere? For if it is none of them, but all of them potentially, the result will be that that which in this sense is not is capable of being separated, and further, the greatest fear of the first philosophers will follow: that coming to be will be out of nothing pre-existing. On the other hand, if being a this something and a substance do not belong to it, but some of the other things said do, then (as we said) there will be passions separable from substances. 52. We must therefore concentrate all our powers on the discussion of these difficulties and on the solution of a further question: What is the cause of there always being coming to be, both the unqualified as well as partial? 53. Now, the cause is either that whence, as we say, the motion begins, or it is the matter. It is the latter cause that should be discussed here. For, as to the other cause, we have already explained (in our accounts on motion) that it involves something immobile through all time and something always being moved. And the treatment of the first of these of the immobile principle belongs to another, and prior philosophy; while as regards that which sets everything else in motion by being itself continuously moved, we shall have to explain later which amongst the particular causes exhibits this character. But at present we are speaking of the cause placed in the species of matter, to which it is due that passing away and coming to be never fail to occur in nature. For perhaps, if we succeed in clearing up this question, it will simultaneously become clear what account we ought to give of that which perplexed us just now about unqualified passing away and coming to be. 20

23 b Enough difficulty is involved in determining the cause of the continuity of coming to be, if in fact what passes away vanishes into what is not, and what is not is nothing since what is not is neither something, nor of a sort, nor so much, nor somewhere. If, then, some beings are always going away, why has not the universe [alt. the All; to pan] been used up long ago and vanished away, assuming of course that there is a limit to that out of which comes to be each thing that comes to be? For one ought not assume that it is on account of an infinite being out of which it all comes to be, for that is impossible. For nothing is actually infinite, and things are potentially infinite [only] by way of division; so that we should have to suppose there is only one species of coming to be, one which never fails such that what comes to be is on each successive occasion smaller than before. But in fact this is not what we see occurring. 57. Accordingly, then, is not change necessarily ceaseless because the passing away of something is the coming to be of something else, and the coming to be of something is the passing away of something else? The cause implied in this solution would seem to be adequate to account for coming to be and passing away as they occur in all existing things alike. 58. Yet, if the coming to be of this is a passing away of that, and a passing away of this but a coming to be of that, why are some things said to come to be and pass away without qualification, but others only with a qualification? This question must be investigated once more, for it demands some account. For we say it is now passing away without qualification, and not merely this is passing away ; and we call this change coming to be, and that one passing away, without qualification. And this comes to be something, but does not come to be without qualification; for we say the student comes to be knowledgeable, not comes to be without qualification. 59. Now, we often make a distinction in things we say because some [sayings] signify a this something but others do not. And the issue we are investigating results from this, for it makes a difference into what the changing thing changes. Perhaps, for example, the path leading into fire [alt. the passage to fire; hodos eis pyr] is unqualified coming to be, but a passing away of something else, such as earth, but the coming to be of earth is qualified (not unqualified) coming to be, through unqualified passing away, such as of fire. Thus Parmenides speaks of the two what is and what is not as being fire and earth. Whether we postulate these or other things of a similar kind makes no difference. For we are trying to discover not what underlies these changes, but the way [ton tropon] [the change happens]. Thus, the path leading into what without qualification is not is unqualified passing away, while the path leading into what is without qualification is unqualified coming to be. Hence, however they are characterized, whether as fire and earth or as some other couple, the one of them will be a being and the other a non-being. This is one way in which what comes to be and passes away without qualification is distinguished from what does not. 60. Another is according to the sort of quality of the matter. For if the differences [of the matter] signify more a this something, [it is] more substance; but if they signify privation, more non-being. For example, hot is a predicament and a form, whereas cold is a privation, and earth and fire differ from one another by these differences. 21

24 a The opinion, however, which most people are inclined to prefer is that the distinction depends upon the difference between the sensible and the insensible. Thus, when there is a change into sensible matter, people say there is coming to be; but when there is a change into invisible matter, they call it passing away. For they distinguish what is and what is not by their sensing and not sensing, just as what is knowable is and what is unknowable is not, for sensation is a power of knowledge. 62. Hence, just as they deem themselves to live and to be in virtue of their sensing or their power to sense, so too they deem things to be, and in this they are in a way on the track of the truth, though what they actually say is not true. 63. Thus unqualified coming to be and passing away according to opinion turns out to be different from what they are in truth. For wind and air are in truth more a this something or form than is earth, but according to sensation they are less [a this something and form], which explains why things are commonly said to pass away without qualification when they change into wind and air, and to come to be when they change into what is tangible, that is, into earth. 64. We have now stated the cause of unqualified coming to be, which is a passing away of something else, and of unqualified passing away, which it is a coming to be of something else. For this is due to a difference of the matter being either a substance or not, or more or less such and such, or the matter out of which and into which the change occurs being more or less sensible But why are some things said to come to be without qualification, and others only qualifiedly to come to be, in cases different from the one we have been considering where two things come to be reciprocally out of one another? For at present we have determined merely why, when they come to be reciprocally out of one another, we do not attribute coming to be and passing away equally to them both, although every coming to be is a passing away of something else and every passing away is some other thing s coming to be. But the latter question is different: Why, although the one learning is said to come to be knowledgeable but not to come to be without qualification, yet the one being born [alt. the one growing; phuomenon] is said to come to be? These things are distinguished by the categories. For some things signify a this something, others a sort, and others a so much. Those things, then, that do not signify substance are not said to come to be without qualification, but only to come to be with qualification. Nevertheless, in all things alike we speak of coming to be according to one of the two columns, 1 such as in substance, if [it comes to be] fire but not if [it comes to be] earth; and in quality, if learned but not if ignorant. 67. We have explained why some things come to be without qualification, but not others both in general, and also when the changing things are substances; and we have said why the underlying is the cause, as matter, of the continuous occurrence of coming to be: namely, because it is able to change into contraries and because, in substances, the coming to be of one thing is always a passing away of another, and the passing away of one thing is always coming to be of another. 68. But there is no need even to discuss why coming to be continues though things are constantly being destroyed. For just as people speak of a passing away without 1 See Metaphysics 986a

25 b 5 qualification when a thing has passed into what is insensible and non-being, so also they speak of a coming to be out of a non-being when a thing emerges from an insensible. Whether, therefore, the underlying is or is not something, things come to be from nonbeing, such that a thing comes to be out of what is not just as much as a thing passes away into what is not. Hence it is reasonable enough that coming to be should never fail. For coming to be is a passing away of what is not and passing away is a coming to be of what is not. 69. But someone might be at a loss about whether that which without qualification is not is one of the two contraries. For example, is earth (which is heavy) a non-being, but fire (which is light) a being? Or, on the contrary, is not earth also a being, whereas the matter of the earth and the fire is the non-being? 70. And again, is the matter of each different? Or is it not the same, since otherwise they would not come to be reciprocally out of one another, contraries out of contraries? For these things fire, earth, water, and air are characterized by the contraries. Or is there one way in which the matter is the same and another in which it is different? For while that which underlies, whatever being it has, is the same, nevertheless its being is not the same. Let this much be said about these things, then. Chapter Next we must state what the difference is between coming to be and alteration, for we say that these changes are distinct from one another. 72. Since, then, we must distinguish the underlying and the passion that is naturally apt to be said of the underlying, and since change of each of these occurs, there is alteration when the underlying, being something sensible, remains but the passions that belong to it change, the passions being either contraries or intermediates. The body, for example, although persisting as the same body, is now healthy and now ill; and the bronze is now spherical and at another time angular, and yet remains the same bronze. 73. However, when the whole is changed, there being nothing sensible of it remaining as underlying like when the seed is entirely converted into blood, or water into air, or air entirely into water this is rightaway a coming to be of the one and a passing away of the other. 74. This is especially [said to be so] if the change is from an insensible thing to something sensible either to touch or to all the senses, as when water comes to be out of air or passes away into it; for air is pretty well insensible. 75. If, however, in such cases, in the thing that has come to be any passion that is one of a pair of contraries remains the same as it was in the thing that has passed away (such as when out of air comes to be water, if both are transparent or cold), then it is not necessary that that into which the one changes have the other as a passion. 2 Otherwise the change will be alteration, for example, if the musical man passed away and an unmusical man came to be, and the man remains the same. Now, if being musical and unmusical were not a passion through itself of this one, there would have been a coming to be of the 2 Grammatically, the other (thateron) could refer back to the water, or it could refer to the pair transparent or cold. 23

26 30 320a 5 one and a passing away of the other; and hence, this is a passion of man, but there is coming to be and passing away of the musical man and the unmusical man; now this is a passion of what remains. Consequently such changes are alteration. 76. When the change from contrary to contrary is with respect to the how much [alt. quantity], it is growth and diminution; when it is with respect to place, it is locomotion; when it is with respect to passion and being such and such, it is alteration; but when nothing remains of which the resultant is a passion, or in whatever way an accident, it is coming to be and passing away. 77. What is matter most of all and in the chief sense is the underlying receptive of coming to be and passing away; but in a way so is that of the other changes, since all underlying things are receptive of contrarieties of some sort. 78. Let this way, then, be the determinations about coming to be whether it exists or not, and how and about alteration. Chapter a b Let us look into what combination 3 is, and what it is to be combinable, and to which beings does it belong, and how. And, further, does combination exist, or is this false? 166. For, according to some, it is impossible for one thing to be combined with another. For if things combined still exist and are unaltered, they are no more combined now than they were before, but are in the same state; and if one has passed away, they have not been combined, but one is and the other is not, whereas combination is of things in the same state. And it makes no difference even if both things combined, when they have come together, have passed away, because they cannot be things that have combined if they are not beings at all What this account is looking for, it would seem, is a clarification of the difference between combination and coming to be and passing away, and between what is combined and what has come to be and passed away. For it is clear that they must differ, if they exist. Therefore once these distinctions are clear, the difficulties should find a solution Now, we do not speak of the wood as combined with the fire, nor of its burning as a combining either of its parts with one another or of itself with the fire. Rather, we say the fire is coming to be, but the wood is passing away. 3 Mixis: The Greek word is broad enough to include the English derivative mixing, but the English word mixture, especially in the context of chemistry, is used to name an aggregate of substances; thus, the meaning here seems to be closer to blending and combination. The related word to mikton is correspondingly translated as the combinable, or the combined thing. (Note also that St. Thomas s Latin cognates mixtio and mixtum in the related readings have been translated analogously.) Mixis should not to be confused with synthesis, which Aristotle uses to name both the coming together of form and matter, and the juxtaposition of the parts of an aggregate. When Aristotle uses the word synthesis to name the latter, we have translated it as mixture. 24

27 a Similarly, we speak neither of the food as combining with the body, nor of the shape as combining with the wax and thus fashioning the lump. Nor can body combine with whiteness, nor in general can the passions and dispositions combine with things; for we see that they are preserved. Nor can whiteness and knowledge be combined either, nor anything else which is not separable. (Indeed, this is a blemish in the theory of those who assert that once all things were together and combined. For not everything can combine with everything. On the contrary, both of the things combined must originally have existed in separation; but no passion is separable.) 170. Since, however, some things that are exist in potency, and some exist in actuality, the things combined can in a way be and not be. The thing that came to be from them is in actuality, while each of the things that were before being combined still is in potency [alt. in ability, in power; dynamei], and has not been destroyed utterly [apolōlota]. This account is the way out of the previous difficulty. Moreover, it is evident that things combined not only come together from having formerly been separate, but also are able to be separated again. So neither do they both remain apart in actuality, as body and white [do]; nor do they pass away (neither one nor both), for their potential [alt. ability, power; dynamis] is preserved. Whence these difficulties can be set aside However, the problem connected with them whether combination is something relative to sensation must be discussed. When things combining have been divided into parts so small, and have been juxtaposed in such a manner that each of them is not apparent to sensation, have they then been combined? 172. Or is it rather when each and every part of one thing being combined is beside a part of the other? It is in that way that it is said that wheat combined with barley is such that each grain of the one is beside a grain of the other But if every body is divisible, and if a body combined with a body is like-parted [alt. homogeneous; homoiomeres], then each and every part of each thing combined should be beside a part of the other. But since no body can be divided into least parts, and mixture is not the same as combination, but different, it is clearly wrong to say that things have been combined when the things being combined are preserved in small bits. For this will be a mixture instead of a blending [krasis] or combination, nor will the part have the same account as the whole. But we say that if there has been a combination, the combined thing must be like-parted, and that, just as any part of water is water, any part of such a blend is the same as the whole. However, if combination is merely a mixture of small bits, none of these consequences will follow, but [the bits] will be combined merely relative to sensation And the same thing will be combined to one man whose eyes are not sharp, and nothing will be combined to the eye of Lynceus It is also [clearly wrong to say that they are combined] by being divided such that each and every part of each is beside a part of the other; for it is impossible for things to be so divided Either, then, there is no combination, or we must again say how it can come to be. Now, there are, as we admit, some things that can act and others that can be acted upon by these former ones. Moreover, on the one hand, for some things there is changing back and forth namely, those of which the matter is the same, being able both to act upon one another and to be acted upon by one another. On the other hand, other things, though they 25

28 b can act, cannot be acted upon namely, those things that do not have the same matter [as their patients] Of these latter ones there is no combination. (Hence, neither the art of healing nor health itself produces health by combining with the bodies.) Of those things that can act and be acted upon, however, those that are easily divisible, when many of them are placed together with few, or large ones with small, then there is no combining but rather growth of the dominant one. For the other changes into the dominant one. (Thus a drop of wine does not combine with ten thousand gallons of water; for its form is lost, and it is changed into the whole of the water.) 178. On the other hand, whenever the two are more or less equal in potency [alt. ability, power; dynamesin], then each of them changes from its own nature towards the one dominating [alt. ruling; to kratoun]; yet neither becomes the other, but something intermediate, and common to both. Thus it is clear that only those things that have a contrariety can be combined, for only these are capable of being acted upon by each other Further, they combine more so if small bits of each of them are placed beside one another. For [in that condition] they change one another more easily and more quickly, whereas it takes a long time when the agent and the patient are present in bulk. Hence, of things divisible and capable of being acted upon, those that are easily bounded are able to be combined. For they are easily divided into small bits, since that is what it is to be easily bounded. For instance, liquids are the bodies most capable of combination, since, of all divisible things, the liquid is the most easily bounded (unless it be viscous, for these produce no effect except to multiply and increase the bulk) But when only one [of the things combined] is capable of being acted upon, or is superlatively capable and the other is only slightly capable, what is combined from both is either no greater in size or only a little. (This is what happens with tin and copper [alt. bronze; chalkon].) For certain existing things are indistinct and ambiguous [alt. stutter and waver; psellizetai kai epamphatoreizei] in relation to one another. For it is apparent how they are both slightly combined and also as though one is receptive and the other is form. This is how it happens for these [metals]. For the tin nearly vanishes, as though it were a passion of the copper, but one existing without matter; and having been combined [with the copper], it is no longer present, merely having colored the copper. The same thing happens in other instances too It is clear, then, from the foregoing that combination exists, what it is, through what it is, and what sort of thing can be combined. For some things are such that they can be acted upon by each other, and are easily bounded and easily divisible. For it is not necessary either that, when they are combined, such things pass away or that they are without qualification. And neither need they be a mixture, nor merely relative to sensation. Rather, anything is combinable which, being easily bounded, is capable of both being acted upon and of acting; and it is combinable with another of the same sort (for the combinable is relative to something of the same name); and combination is the union of those things combined that have also been altered. 26

29 For further development of Aristotle's teaching in GC I.10 we append this excerpt from GC II.7: 334b b26-31 [T]here is a certain difficulty in explaining how anything is to result from two [elements] taken together e.g. from cold and hot, or from Fire and Earth. For if flesh consists of both and is neither of them, nor again is a mixture of them in which they are preserved unaltered, what alternative is left except to identify the product of the two elements with their matter? For the passing-away of either element produces either the other or the matter. Now since there are differences of degree in hot and cold, then although when either is actual without qualification, the other will exist potentially; yet, when neither exists in the full completeness of its being, but both by combining destroy one another's excesses so that there exist instead a hot which (for a hot) is cold and a cold which (for a cold) is hot; then there will exist neither their matter, nor either of the contraries in actuality without qualification, but rather an intermediate; and this intermediate, according as it is potentially more hot than cold or vice versa, will in accordance with that proportion be potentially twice as hot or as cold or three times or whatever. Thus all the other bodies will be produced from the contraries, or from the elements, in so far as these have been combined. [O]ut of the elements there come-to-be flesh and bones and the like the hot becoming cold and the cold becoming hot when they have been brought to the mean. For at the mean is neither hot nor cold. The mean, however, is of considerable extent and not indivisible. Similarly, it is in virtue of a mean condition that the dry and the moist and the rest produce flesh and bone and the remaining combinations. 27

30 Book II Chapter a b It has been said now how in natural changes there is present combination, contact, acting and being acted upon, and moreover, of coming to be and passing away unqualifiedly, how and through what cause this exists. Likewise, this has been said of alteration, both what being altered is and how it differs from the others. It remains to contemplate the so-called elements of bodies. For coming to be and passing away of all substances brought together by nature do not happen without sensible bodies [being brought together] But as to the matter that underlies these sensible bodies, some say it is one, supposing it to be something like air or fire or an intermediate between these two, but still a body and separable. Others, however, hold that it is more than one, some naming fire and earth, others adding air to these to make three, others adding a fourth to these, namely water, as Empedocles did. From the association and dissociation or alteration of these comes the coming to be and passing away of things Let there be total agreement that [saying] the first things, the change of which (whether it be association and dissociation or some other change) results in coming to be and passing away, are principles and elements is well said. But they err who postulate, besides the bodies we have mentioned, a single bodily and separable matter. For it is impossible that this body exist without a sensible contrariety. For this indefinite thing [alt. infinite; to apeiron touto] that some say is the principle must be either light or heavy, cold or hot We do say, however, that there is a certain matter of the sensible bodies, but it is not separable rather, it is always with a contrariety and it is that out of which the socalled elements come to be. A more precise account of this has been given in other works, but because this is the way that the first bodies are from the matter, we must discuss them as well. We must regard as a principle and first thing the inseparable matter underlying the contraries. For the hot is not matter for the cold, nor the cold for the hot, but the underlying is matter for them both. Thus, as principles we have first, that which is potentially a sensible body, and second, the contrarieties (I mean, for example, heat and cold), and third, fire, water, and the like. For these bodies change into one another, and they are not as Empedocles and others say, since alteration would then have been impossible; but the contrarieties do not change Nevertheless, even so the question remains: What sorts of contrarieties, and how many of them, are the principles of body? For all the other thinkers assume and use them without explaining why they are these or why they are just so many. 28 Chapter Since, then, we are looking for principles of sensible body, that is, of the tangible, and that of which the sensation is touch is the tangible, it is clear that not all the contrarieties of bodies make forms and principles, but only those in reference to touch.

31 a For it is in reference to a contrariety, and indeed a tangible contrariety, that they differ [from each other]. Whence neither whiteness and blackness, nor sweetness and bitterness, nor similarly any of the other sensible contrarieties either, makes an element It might be said that vision is prior to touch, so that its underlying is also prior, but this is a passion of tangible body not as tangible, but in reference to something else, even if it happens to be prior by nature Accordingly, first of the tangibles themselves let us distinguish which qualities are the first differences and contraries. The contrarieties in reference to touch are the following: hot-cold, dry-moist, heavy-light, hard-soft, viscous-brittle, rough-smooth, coarse-fine Of these, heavy and light are neither capable of acting nor of being acted upon; they are not said of bodies in virtue of being able to act upon something or being able to be acted upon. But the elements must be able to act upon and be acted upon in turn by each other, since they combine and change into one another On the other hand, hot and cold, and dry and moist, are said of things of which the one pair is able to act, and the other to be acted upon. Hot is that which associates things of the same kind (for dissociating, which some say fire does, is associating things of the same type, since its effect is to eliminate what is foreign), while cold is that which brings together and associates things of the same kind and things of different type alike And moist is that which is not bounded by any boundary of its own, but is easily bounded; while dry is that which is easily bounded by its own boundary, but is bounded with difficulty Fine and coarse, viscous and brittle, hard and soft, and the remaining differences, come from these For the ability to fill things comes from [alt. is of] the moist because it has no boundaries and is easily bounded and follows after that with which it is in contact, and the fine [alt. subtle, thin, delicate; to lepton] is what is able to fill things up (for its parts are fine, and that which has tiny parts is able to fill things up, for the whole of it touches the whole, and that which is fine is most of all like this). Hence it is evident that the fine comes from the moist, while the coarse [alt. bulky, thick, cumbersome; to pachy] comes from the dry Again, the viscous comes from the moist, for the viscous, such as oil, is a moist thing modified in a certain way. The brittle, on the other hand, comes from the dry, for the brittle is that which is dry so completely that it has actually solidified due to lack of moisture Further, the soft derives from the moist. For soft is that which yields by retiring into itself, though it does not change position, as the moist does, which is why the moist is not soft, although the soft comes from the moist. The hard, on the other hand, comes from the dry, for the hard is that which is solidified, and the solidified is dry It is clear, then, that all the other differences can be led back to the first four It is also clear that these admit of no further reduction. For the hot is not the same as the moist or dry, nor the moist the same as the hot or cold; nor are the cold and the dry from one another or from the hot and the moist. Hence these must be four. 29

32 Chapter b a Since the elements are four, and of the four six couples can be made, but contraries are not naturally apt to be coupled, as it is impossible for the same thing to be hot and cold, or moist and dry, it is therefore evident that the couplings of the elements will be four: hot with dry, and moist with hot, and again cold with dry, and cold with moist. And, according to the account, they are in agreement with the things appearing to be simple bodies: fire, air, water, and earth. For fire is hot and dry, air is hot and moist (for air is a sort of a vapor), water is cold and moist, while earth is cold and dry. Thus the differences are reasonably distributed to the first bodies, and their number is in accord with the account In fact, however, fire and air and each of the bodies we have mentioned are not simple, but combined things. The simple bodies are indeed like these, but they are not the same as them; that which is like fire is fiery [alt. fire-looking; pyroeides], but not fire; that which is like air is aeriform [alt. air-looking; aeroeides]; and so on with the rest. But fire is the superlative [alt. excess; hyperbolē] of heat, just as ice is the superlative of cold. For freezing [alt. solidifying; pēxis] and boiling are superlatives of a sort, the one of cold and the other of heat. Therefore if ice is a freezing of moist and cold, fire analogously will be a boiling of dry and hot, which is why nothing comes to be either out of ice or out of fire And, further, two of them are contrary to the other two, water being contrary to fire and earth to air; for they are brought together from contrary passions Nevertheless, each of them, being four, belongs without qualification to one of them: Earth belongs to {lit. is of} the dry more than to the cold, water to the cold more than to the moist, air to the moist more than to the hot, and fire to the hot more than to the dry. 30

33 CHAPTER II Modern Chemistry, Its New Language, and the Elements The Problem of Classifying Substances Introduction At the beginning, we must define the names we shall use. This is especially important here, since the meanings of many of our basic names have changed somewhat since Aristotle s time, though not altogether. This shift in meanings creates much confusion, though a study of how and why it has occurred is very instructive indeed. However, we cannot yet profitably examine the reasons for this shift; here it is enough to clarify the meanings of the names. When you have become more familiar with the rudiments of Aristotle s doctrine of nature in your philosophy class, it will be fruitful to examine the shift in meanings more deeply. In Aristotle, the basic meaning of substance is clearly expressed in his Categories: that which is neither in a subject nor predicated of a subject in other words, the individual existing thing, such as this man, or this tree, or this stone, which in common speech are usually named things or beings (without qualification). Such things as these are clearly distinguished from color, shape, size, and the like, which can only exist by inhering in other things. By this definition, then, such things as men or horses or other living things are obviously substances, and it is no paradox to speak of angels as incorporeal substances. In present usage and especially in modern chemistry the name substance tends to have the same meaning, but is limited in its use. Those substances that are also persons or living things are always called by the latter names, and the rest keep the common name, just as the name animal is often restricted to the animals other than man, though by so doing no one means to deny that man is an animal in the more general sense. The Greek equivalent of the name matter is (hyle), which originally meant lumber. Aristotle s use of this word follows its original sense: Matter means that from which something is made or comes to be, and thus, in general, whatever can become something more perfect, or is potential in some way. Present day use of the English noun material, as in raw material, building material, and material for a dress, corresponds closely to the notion Aristotle is intentending when he speaks of matter. On the other hand, since about the beginning of the 20 th century matter has come to mean almost exclusively that which has mass and occupies space, and Aristotle s sense of the word is now less common. But a thing occupies space because it has size length, breadth, and depth. Thus we may say that matter is now defined by two characteristics: mass and size. Accordingly matter, as the term is now used, roughly 31

34 corresponds to what Aristotle calls natural body (or natural substance). For the natural is what has an intrinsic tendency to move, and weight seems to be the most universal and obvious example of such a tendency. And since mass is a certain principle of weight, that which has mass, and is thus now called matter, is a natural body (or natural substance).] It is obvious that there cannot be weight without size i.e., without body. But can there be body without weight? The answer is not obvious. You will see that when Lavoisier speaks of the matter of heat (caloric) in Chapter 1 of his Elements of Chemistry, he conceives it as made up of tiny, weightless particles. Thus, he (like many of his contemporaries, you will find) is using an even more general and basic notion of matter as substance with size what Aristotle would simply call body. In summary, then, it is clear that with Aristotle s terminology one and the same thing a lump of clay, for example may be called a substance, body, and matter, but for three different reasons: It is a substance because it does not exist in a subject, a body because it has size, and matter because it can become something else. These may be three names for the same thing, but they are not synonyms. Next, we must recall the meaning of property. As Porphyry defines it, a property is what belongs only to a given species, or to every member of that species, or both of these, whether sometimes or always. Thus, to be a doctor and to be two-footed are both properties of man, but to be risible is even more a property, since it belongs only to man, to every man, and always. This is property in the strictest sense, which is correlative with its species. It is distinguished from the specific difference inasmuch as it does not constitute the nature or the essence of the species, but follows from it; risibility does not make man what he is, but is a consequence of what he is. However, the specific natures of most things are not knowable to us directly, but only through their properties, and often the properties we know are insufficient to manifest the nature. Thus, a definition by properties, though not ideal, is often the best we can do. When we are investigating natural things in detail, and considering the most special species, our definitions will often be of this type i.e., where properties are given in place of specific differences. (Might there be exceptions to this rule?) Although modern chemistry usually uses property the same way as does Porphyry, in common usage property tends to be used more loosely, to stand for any perceptible attribute. Thus, to compensate for this ambiguity, one sometimes speaks of constant and specific properties, constant meaning constant under given conditions. For example, water is transparent under all conditions, but its boiling point is only a constant for a given set of conditions 212 F at one atmosphere of pressure, etc. We must now turn to those names that have a special relevance to modern chemistry, as it investigates the elements. Since the more elementary is the more simple, all these names concern the simplicity and the complexity that matter may have. (Note that many of these distinctions will not begin to be clearly formulated by the authors we will be reading until we enter the dispute between Berthollet and Proust in Chapter III. Thus, as you read the following, try to evaluate the prima facie plausibility of these distinctions.) A mixture is two or more substances mixed together. To mix is to bring together and intermingle substances such that the parts of one are contained evenly within the 32

35 parts of the other (or others). For example, when we pour salt on top of pepper in a jar, we have brought them together, but we have not yet made a mixture. But when we shake the jar, so that the grains of salt are evenly distributed among the grains of pepper, we produce a mixture. Evidently, then, as the parts become finer and more evenly distributed, they become more perfectly mixed. A solution is a homogeneous mixture. Now, it is not certain that any mixture is truly homogeneous; it may be that we cannot discern the distinct parts because of their smallness compare what St. Thomas calls a combination ad sensum such as a mixture of salt and pepper might appear a uniform gray when viewed from a distance. Perhaps there is even reason to fear that the very idea of a homogeneous mixture is incoherent. However, there are certainly mixtures that appear to be homogeneous, even with the test of experiment; for example, salty water, which in every part is both wet and salty. In addition to immediate sensation, there are two basic ways of testing whether a mixture is homogeneous. One way is to allow the mixture to stand, and see whether one substance settles out of the other; the other way is to filter, and see whether the filter separates particles that are perceptibly different from the mixture. This leads to another experimental definition of a solution as a sensibly homogeneous mixture in which the constituents do not settle out of one another on standing, and are not separated by filtration. In many solutions, it seems that one substance has dissolved the other. Then the former is called the solvent, and the latter, the solute. For example, in salt water, water is the solvent and salt is the solute, since the water has dissolved the salt. In other cases, however, the distinction is not clear; for example, in a solution of alcohol and water, it is not clear which, if either, is the solvent, and which the solute. (As a result, chemists sometimes designate as the solvent whatever there is more of, and the solute whatever there is less of, by volume.) Usually the amount of solute that will dissolve in a given amount of solvent may be increased only up to a certain limit; for example, 35.7 g of table salt is as much as will dissolve in 100 ml of water at 0 C. 1 When this limit is reached, the solvent is said to be saturated with the solute. But in other cases (e.g., grain alcohol in water) the substances will dissolve in one another in all proportions; that is, one will never become saturated with the other. On the opposite extreme among mixtures, a suspension is an apparently heterogeneous mixture in which the constituents settle out of one another or may be separated by filtration, or even with tweezers, since we can see the distinction of the parts. An example would be the aforementioned mixed salt and pepper, or a handful of sand stirred into a glass of water. Intermediate between these two mixtures is what is sometimes called a colloid, or colloidal dispersion, 2 where the mixture is apparently homogeneous, and yet the parts will 1 Note that the following conventions in designating units will be followed in this manual: g = gram, L = liter, ml = milliliter. Note also that 1 cubic centimeter (cm 3 ) is equal to one milliliter. 2 Colloid is from the Greek (kola), glue, and ς (-oeidos), meaning form : hence, as it 33

36 slowly settle out or may be separated by filtration. Examples include smoke, milk, and paint. A pure substance is one that is not mixed with other substances. For example, when we say that water is pure, we mean that nothing other than water has been mixed with it. However, as mentioned above, the name substance is now often limited to materials that are not as such living substances. For example, water is still called a substance, but flesh or bone is not. Now, since all non-living substances are at least visibly homogeneous, it is customary to make homogeneity part of the meaning of pure substance. Furthermore, since we know the natures of things only through their properties, it is not possible to determine whether a given portion of matter is a pure substance without a consideration of its properties. For if it is a pure substance, it will have properties of its own, while if it is a mixture, it will have only the properties of its constituents. For example, insofar as salt water is only wet and salty (to taste) and so forth, we might reasonably regard it as only a mixture, though a homogeneous one. This leads to another, more experimental definition of pure substance as a homogeneous substance with a constant set of specific properties. A composite substance, or compound, is a substance that is made up of two or more substances. These substances have become a single, new substance, in contrast to a mixture, where the original substances remain. Thus, it is proper to call a compound a substance, but not to call a mixture a substance. The latter is still many substances. Water and table salt are examples of compounds, as we shall see in our work in the laboratory. Even when we can see that a given sample is not simple, it is often difficult to determine whether it is a compound or a mixture, especially when it is a solution as well. Two very simple tests are to evaporate the sample (if it is a liquid) and to dissolve it in something else. If the sample is a compound, it should evaporate altogether or not at all, or dissolve altogether, or not at all. (Why is this a reasonable claim?) From this we get another, more experimental definition of a compound: a substance whose components are not separable by evaporation or selective dissolution that is, by a solvent that will dissolve one but not the other. (Given these distinctions, would Aristotle s example 3 of a combination bronze, which is composed from copper and tin be a compound or a mixture?) A simple substance, or element, is a substance that is not made up of any other substances. This does not mean that it has no components of any sort, but only that it has no components that are themselves substances, and can exist separately. (Compare this with our earlier reading from St. Thomas on element. ) Examples of elements are easy to come by, but hard to be sure of. The most obvious criterion is negative: The substance in question has never been seen to result from combination, nor has it ever been broken down. Likely examples are gold and sulfur. were, glue-formed or glue-like. 3 See Manual, p. 26, 328b

37 An Introduction to the Phlogiston Theory The phlogiston theory was primarily the work of Georg E. Stahl in the late 17 th and early 18 th centuries. He posits and describes phlogiston in the following: it is the corporeal fire, the essential fire material, the true basis of fire movement in all flammable compounds. However, except in [these inflammable] compounds, no fire at all occurs, but it dissipates and volatilizes in invisible particles, or at least, develops and forms a finely divided and invisible fire, namely, heat. On the other hand, it is very important to note that this fire material, of and by itself and apart from other things, especially air and water, is not found united and active, either as a liquid or in an attenuated state. But if once by the movement of fire, with the addition of free air, it is attenuated and volatilized, then by this in all such conditions it is lost through unrecognizable subtlety and immeasurable attenuation... [It is] the first, unique, basic, inflammable principle. But since it cannot, until this hour, be found by itself, outside of all compounds and unions with other materials, and so there are no grounds or basis for giving a descriptive name based on properties, I have felt that it is most fitting to name it from its general action, which it customarily shows in all compounds. And therefore I have chosen the Greek name phlogiston [, flammable ] 1 Stahl did not further commit himself concerning its nature and properties except to say that all corporeal compounded things have more or less of this substance, some (such as animal and vegetable matter, coal, sulfur, and bitumen) having more, others (such as sand and stone) less. He left it an open question whether it could ever be isolated for study. The phlogiston theory was successful in explaining a wide variety of phenomena: (1) combustion or burning; (2) calcination (the burning of a metal or mineral); (3) reduction (the reverse of calcination) of calces; (4) reduction (the reverse of combustion) of burnt substances; (5) the dissolution (i.e., corrosion) of metals and/or calces in acids. (1) Combustible substances such as sulfur and phosphorus lose phlogiston on heating in the air. The resulting materials, sulfuric acid and phosphoric acid, are burnt substances. Charcoal is considered to be almost pure phlogiston. After burning it leaves almost no residue. Wood, coal, oils, and dry organic materials burn very well, giving off a great deal of phlogiston, and leave very little residue because they are composed largely of charcoal. (2) Metals are those substances that possess a grayish luster, 2 malleability and good heat conduction properties. When most metals are heated in air they yield calces. 1 Zymotechnia fundamentalis seu Fermentationis Theoria generalis, ch. 12 (1697). 2 All well-characterized metals are some shade of gray except copper and gold, which are, respectively, copper-colored and gold-colored. 35

38 Calces are not lustrous; they are usually white, though some are colored very few are gray; they are generally poor heat conductors; and they are friable rather than malleable. The conversion of a metal to a calx is explained as the departure of the phlogiston from the metal. Thus a metal is a composite substance; it is composed of a calx and phlogiston. (3) When a calx is heated with charcoal, the phlogiston in the carbon passes into the calx and converts it into a metal. This works best in the absence of air. (Why might this be?) (4) When sulfuric acid or phosphoric acid is heated with charcoal a similar transfer of phlogiston regenerates the original sulfur or phosphorus. (5) When some metals dissolve (i.e., corrode) in acids they produce a gas, sometimes called inflammable air. This gas is considered to be almost pure phlogiston (in spite of its very different appearance from charcoal) because of its considerable inflammability in air. In addition to the inflammable air, the metal in the acid produces a white grainy substance sometimes called a salt which is identical with the substance produced when a calx is dissolved in an acid, though in the latter case no phlogiston (inflammable gas) is produced. Of course! The calx is dephlogisticated metal so it has no phlogiston to lose during the process of dissolving (i.e., corroding) in an acid. Heating a calx (or sulfuric acid, etc.) with inflammable air regenerates the metal (or sulfur, etc.) which is what one would predict from the theory. To summarize (5): Metal (phlogisticated calx) plus acid yields inflammable gas plus a salt (calx plus acid). Calx plus acid yields a salt. Calx plus inflammable air yields metal. Some observers noted that metals gained weight on being converted into calces. The theory required that something (or at least some principle) depart from the metal in calcination. Stahl, among others, considered this an unimportant issue in view of the considerable explanatory power of the theory. Others were disturbed by this weight gain and held that the theory was defective to the extent that it did not explain it. Yet others held that phlogiston had levity (a negative weight ), which would account for the weight gain. As Johann J. Becher put it in 1661, phlogiston weighs less than nothing. Naturally, then, the ash of your metals weighs more than the metals you burned. Something minus another thing that weighs less than nothing weighs more than that original something. 3 In support of this latter position, it was pointed out that flame consistently has an upward tendency. Further, Henry Cavendish in 1766 weighed a sealed vessel containing common air and then the same vessel containing inflammable air and found that the latter weighed significantly less. (Could this phenomenon be explained in any other way than by positing levity?) As you later read through the memoirs of Antoine Lavoisier that criticize the phlogiston theory, consider the importance of weight in the arguments. As we can see above, it was generally appreciated (by Stahl among others) that air was usually needed for the departure of phlogiston from a substance (an exception is mentioned in (3) above). This was explained by asserting that air was necessary as a receiver for phlogiston. Also, there was a certain limit to the amount of phlogiston a 3. Natur-Kundigung der Metallen,

39 given amount of air could receive. This explained why a candle would extinguish in a sealed vessel of air after a short time, even though only a part of the wax had been consumed. Joseph Priestley, in a famous series of experiments with air started in 1774, made a remarkable discovery studying the calx of mercury (also called red calx, red precipitate, and precipitated mercury per se the latter two names derive from a way of preparing the substance other than by direct calcination). This calx is unusual in that it may be reduced without the addition of a phlogiston-rich substance such as charcoal. He found that when this substance was heated (always in the presence of some common air) mercury metal and a somewhat different air were produced. This air was shown by Priestley to be between four- and five-times as good as common air. This superior goodness was established by three tests: by the greater length of time candles would burn in the air; by the greater length of time mice could live in the air; and by a test with nitrous airs, which we will not examine further here. As a result of his studies, Priestley concluded that common (atmospheric) air is not the element it was long thought to be, but is actually elemental air that has been about four-fifths saturated with phlogiston in other words, it is a mixture. The air he prepared from the mercury calx, and later from other substances as well, was thus considered pure air or dephlogisticated air. In Priestley s view, when red calx and atmospheric air are heated, phlogiston passes from the air to the calx, leaving the air less phlogisticated (thus, dephlogisticated air) and producing a phlogisticated calx, that is, a metal. Priestley also carried out studies with animal and plant respiration. Lavoisier wrote in 1772: Dr. Priestley, by a paper published last year in London, has greatly widened the field of our knowledge, and has endeavored to prove by ingenious, delicate, and very novel experiments, that the respiration of animals has the effect of phlogisticating the air just as happened in the calcination of metals and other chemical processes, and that the air ceases to be respirable when it becomes overcharged and in some way saturated with phlogiston. This was Priestley s explanation: When animals inhale they take in common air (which is about four-fifths phlogisticated). This air is used for combustion in the body and air of a greater degree of phlogistication is exhaled. He understood thus, plants, instead of affecting the air in the same manner with animal respiration, reverse the effects of breathing, and tend to keep the atmosphere sweet and wholesome, when it is becoming noxious, in consequence of animals either living and breathing or dying and putrefying in it. Thus plants take in, in the presence of sunlight, common air, remove some of the phlogiston from it, and expel the air in a purer (that is, freer of phlogiston) form. Thus plants become phlogiston-rich substances. This is consistent with the eminent combustibility of plants, at least when dry, with only a small amount of ash (earth) left as a residue. Thus Priestly was able to explain in terms of the phlogiston theory the nature of common air, and to explain the respiration of plants and animals. 37

40 Antoine Laurent Lavoisier Memoir on the Calcination of Tin in Closed Vessels and on the Cause of the Gain in Weight that this metal acquires in the operation 1 It was shown in the experiments that I described in Chapters V & VI of the work that I published at the beginning of this year under the title of Opuscules physique et chimiques, that when lead or tin is calcined with a burning glass [i.e., a magnifying glass] under a glass bell immersed in water or mercury, the volume of the air is diminished about a twentieth by the calcination, and the weight increase of the metal is in weight nearly equal to that of the air destroyed or absorbed. I thought that I could conclude from these experiments that a portion of the air itself or some material contained in an elastic state in the air combined with the metals during their calcination, and that this was the cause of the increase in weight of metallic calces. The effervescence that consistently occurs in all revivification of metallic calces, that is, wherever a metallic substance changes from the state of a calx to that of a metal, lends support to this theory. I think that I have proved that this effervescence is caused by the disengagement of an elastic fluid [i.e., a gas], of a species of air that can be retained and measured, and, as a result of the many experiments that I have carried out, that when this fluid is separated from metals by the addition of powdered charcoal or of any other matter containing phlogiston, it does not differ at all from the substance that has been given the name of fixed air 2, mephitic gas, mephitic acid, all of which are synonymous expressions, and that this gas was exactly the same whether it be disengaged from metallic calces by powdered charcoal, from vegetables by fermentation, or from saline or earth alkalis by solution in acids. However decisive these experiments may have appeared, they were in contradiction with those published by Boyle in his treatise on the weight of flame and fire. That celebrated natural philosopher tried to calcine lead and tin in glass vessels closed hermetically. He succeeded, in part at least, and found the calx that he obtained weighed several grains more than the metal that he had used. From this Boyle concluded that the material of the flame and fire penetrated through the substance of the glass and that it combined with the metals and caused them to be converted into calces and 1 [Read at the public meeting of Martinmas: November 11, 1774 at the Royal Academy of Sciences. Throughout this manual, the footnotes in square brackets [ ] should be understood to be those of the editor, and all others to be those of the original author.] 2 [An air or gas is called fixed to signify merely that it had been affixed to a solid, as is indicated at the top of the next page, which refers to the fixation of a portion of the air. ] 38

41 increased their weights. Such precise experiments made by a philosopher like Boyle were well able to put me on guard against my own opinion, however it was evidenced to my eyes, and I proposed, in consequence, not only to repeat them as they were made by Boyle but, if possible, to add all the circumstances that appeared to me proper to render them even more conclusive. This is, first, how I reasoned with myself: If the increase in weight of metals calcined in closed vessels is due, as Boyle thought, to the addition of the matter of the flame and fire that penetrates through the pores of the glass and combines with the metal, it follows that if, after having introduced a known quantity of metal in a glass vessel and having closed it hermetically and weighed it exactly, on calcining by a fire of coals, as Boyle did, and finally reweighing the same vessel after calcination, before opening it, its weight should be found increased by the quantity of the matter of fire that is introduced during the calcination. If on the contrary, I further said to myself, the increase in weight of the metallic calx is not due to the combination of the material of the fire nor to any exterior matter, but to the fixation of a portion of the air contained in the vessel, the vessel should not weigh more after calcination than before; it should simply be partly evacuated and only increase in weight at the moment when the vacuum is released. After these reflections I supplied myself with very pure lead and tin, which I cast into rods or cylinders at most 3 or 4 lignes 3 in diameter, in order to introduce them easily into retorts with narrow openings. In order to cast them thus into cylinders I operated as follows: With scissors I cut out little bands of paper 6 to 8 lignes wide and I rolled these in spirals so as to form molds or hollow cylinders. To give greater strength to these molds I wound them many times with fine thread and finally I closed the end that was to form the bottom of the mold by drawing a turn of the string tight. Then, my molds being thus prepared, I poured into each of them by a funnel of cardboard the lead or tin, and when the metal was sufficiently cooled I removed the enveloping paper and cleaned the surface of the cylinders very carefully by scraping them with a knife. This initial operation done, I collected a certain number of new white glass retorts of a convenient capacity and perfectly clean within. In each I placed eight onces 4 of lead or tin weighed with scrupulous exactness and then by means of an enameler s lamp drew out the ends of their necks into a very fine capillary that I left open. Of a large number of retorts of various capacities that I have prepared thus, more than three-quarters have broken, either over the enameler s lamp or during the fusion or cooling of the metal, and I ought to note, moreover, that this kind of experiment is not without danger and that once the vessels have been sealed hermetically one should never operate without having the face covered with a solid mask, for example, of tin plate equipped with very thick glasses for the eyes. 3 [A ligne is 1/12 pouce and is approximately 2.26 millimeters.] 4 [1 livre = 16 onces; 1 once = 8 gros; 1 gros = 72 grains. A Paris livre was equivalent to grams.] 39

42 These difficulties in carrying out the operations are such that I have been able to carry out well only two experiments with tin and scarcely one with lead, but aside from the precise and certain conclusions that I have been able to draw from those which were completely successful, some of the others have not been completely useless either for the purpose of this memoir or for other, less immediate objectives. Calcination of Tin in a Glass Retort of 43 Cubic Pouces Capacity I took one of the retorts prepared as I have just described, namely, with a neck drawn down to a capillary by means of a lamp; this retort contained, like all of the others, 8 onces of very carefully weighed tin, and having weighed it in order to find the weight of the retort, independent of the 8 onces of tin that it contained, I obtained the following results, namely: Onces Gros Grains Weight of the tin Weight of the retort Sum The balance that served me for all of the experiments contained in this memoir was constructed with particular care by Mr. Chemin, inspector of coinage; it can weigh up to 8 to 10 livres, and I have reason to believe that no more perfect instrument of this sort exists. I have already had occasion to speak of this same balance in a memoir on the conversion of water into earth that was published in the memoirs of this Academy for Having thus determined the weight of the retort and of the tin therein, I held it by the neck at a suitable distance over a fire of charcoal and thus heated it slowly in order to prevent its shattering. When the tin had just begun to melt, I closed the capillary opening at the end of the neck of the retort by means of a blowpipe without removing the retort from above the fire, and then I cooled the vessel as slowly as I had heated it. 40

43 This precaution of driving out a portion of the air contained in the retort before closing it hermetically is essential, since without doing so, dangerous explosions are liable to occur, or else one is obliged to use retorts of very thick glass, which because of their great weight render the balance less sensitive and give rise to a new source of uncertainty and error. When the retort was thus rid of a part of the air that it contained and sealed hermetically, I returned it to the balance and found for its weight: Average Weight Onces Gros Grains Onces Gros Grains In the pans: No No I repeated the same weighing 3 days afterwards, and I had In the pans: No No Sum of the two averages And for the average which I regarded as the effective weight No matter how exact the balance that one may use, this manner of weighing by changing pans and taking the average is the sole one yielding rigorously exact results. Onces Gros Grains The weight before dispelling the air and closing the retort hermetically It is thereafter found to be The difference being the weight of the air dispelled by the heat This weight being nearly equivalent to 12 cubic pouces and the capacity of the retort being about 43 pouces, it follows that before the retort was closed hermetically, I 41

44 expelled by heat about two-sevenths of the total quantity of air contained in it. These various preliminary operations being done, I proceeded to the calcination and for this I will transcribe what is recorded in laboratory journal for February 14 of this year, The retort was placed on the fire at 10:45 in the morning, but the tin was not melted completely until 10:52, so that is to say, after seven minutes. Soon the surface lost the brilliance that it had at first and became covered with a pellicle that grew little by little and appeared to wrinkle, while at the same time a kind of black flake was formed. Shortly afterward I noticed that there was formed, at the bottom of the vessel beneath the tin, a black powder heavier than the melted metal. This species of calx did not appear to form on the surface of the metal, as happens in calcination in the open air, but on the contrary, on the bottom underneath the metal. At the end of a half hour the quantity of the black powder ceased to increase and the surface of the metal became clear, no longer displaying a pellicle or black flakes, but was simply a little less brilliant than the metal had been at the first moment of fusion. The black powder of which I have just spoken, although heavier than the melted metal, was in such a fine state of division that when the retort was agitated, some of it arose and fluttered in the interior like a kind of very light soot and settled on the inside walls of the vessel. At the end of an hour and ten minutes, seeing that no further change was taking place, I began to allow the vessel to cool. Although I had very carefully regulated the fire during the course of this operation, the bottom of the retort was nevertheless a little deformed and elongated in the form of a pear. This seemed to indicate that there had been during the course of the operation no exterior pressure tending to force it in, or at least, if so, that this pressure was more than counterbalanced by the 8 onces that weighed on the bottom of the retort. When the vessel had cooled sufficiently I had only to weigh it again without opening it, and even before it was entirely cooled I had the following results. Total Weight Before Opening AVERAGE WEIGHT Onces Gros Grains On. Gro. Gra. In the pans: No. 1 No The same retort closed hermetically before the calcination weighed.... Difference The difference is so small that it may be regarded as zero; moreover, it will be seen below that there exist other causes of uncertainty and error of which I did not then know and which may give rise to considerable differences. 42

45 From this first observation one may already be certain that nothing exterior to the retort combines with metals during their calcination. If we suppose, then, as will be shown later, that the metal gained in weight, we must search for the cause in the interior of the retort. This first fact established, I then proceeded to open the flask by heating it strongly toward the middle of its belly with a glowing coal and then wetting the heated place with a little water. I succeeded in this way in making a crack that I conducted around with a glowing coal and thus divided the retort into two nearly equal portions. I took pains to carry out this operation on a large sheet of white paper in order to make certain that not the least fragment of the retort was lost. When the retort had been opened thus and the air in the interior of the vessel had come to equilibrium with the atmosphere, I weighed anew the whole comprising the retort, the lead, 5 and the black powder or calx. I found: Total Weight After the Entrance of the Air Average Weight Onces Gros Grains On. Gro. Gra. In the pans: No No This same retort, full of air before the calcination Whence, the increase in weight during the calcination It has just been said that while the retort remained closed hermetically, it suffered no increase in weight as a result of the calcination, and that the increase in weight did not take place until after the entrance of the exterior air. Whence, in this operation more air is found in the retort after than before the calcination, and it is evident that this excess of air causes the increase in weight. If, then, just this increase be found in the metal, it will be proved that the excess of air that entered served to replace the portion that combined with the metal during the calcination and increased its weight. Therefore I weighed separately the retort, the lead, 6 and the calx that I obtained and obtained the results which follow, namely: 5 [This is apparently an error. Tin is meant.] 6 [See previous note.] 43

46 Weight of the Tin Average Weight Onces Gros Grains Onces Gros grains In the pans No. 1 No No. 1 No Sum of the weights Mean or effective weight Weight of black powder or calx of tin Total of the tin and the calx Same tin before calcination weighed Increase 3.12 To make the proof I weighed the two fragments of the retort and had: Onces Gros Grains Weight of the retort alone Weight of the tin Weight of the black powder or calx of tin Total weight after the calcination Weight before the calcination Increase 3.12 The quantity of air contained in the retort was 43 cubic pouces, that is to say, about 21 grains. We forced out, as was seen above, 5 2/3 grains of air, and of this about a 44

47 fifth had been absorbed. The following experiment, having been made in a larger vessel, will present a more marked increase in weight and in consequence will give more satisfying results. [Lavoisier here describes a similar experiment involving a retort of 250 cubic pouces capacity. The conclusions are the same as those arrived at in the first experiment.] I tried to repeat with lead the experiments that I have just described, but, as I said, I succeeded well only once and then with such uncertain and extraordinary results that I am induced to postpone its publication. To summarize the conclusions that may be drawn from the two experiments on the calcination of tin that I have just described, it appears to me that we cannot refuse to conclude that: First, only a certain quantity of tin may be calcined in a given quantity of air. Second, this quantity of metal calcined is greater in a larger retort than a smaller one, although we cannot yet be certain that the quantity of metal calcined is exactly proportional to the capacity of the vessels. Third, retorts sealed hermetically and weighed before and after the calcination of a portion of the tin that they contain present no change in weight, proving that the increase in weight that the metal undergoes evidently does not arise from the matter of fire nor from any material exterior to the retort. Fourth, in all calcinations of tin, the increase in weight of the metal is practically exactly equal to the weight of the air absorbed; which proves that the portion of the air that combines with the metal during the calcination is nearly equal in specific gravity to the air of the atmosphere. I might add that certain considerations arising from these experiments that I made on the calcination of metals in closed vessels, considerations that would be very difficult for me to explain to the reader without entering into too long detail, incline me to believe that the portion of the air that combines with metals is slightly heavier than the air of the atmosphere, and that that which remains after the calcination, on the other hand, is a little lighter. The specific gravity of the air, according to this supposition, would be the resultant mean between these two airs, but more direct evidence is needed on this matter, especially since such small differences are involved, before I can speak of it with certainty. The reader will easily see, as I have only too well myself, that, despite all the care and precision that I have tried to employ in these experiments, they still leave very much to be desired. It is the fate of all those who occupy themselves with physical and chemical researches that they perceive a new step as soon as they have already made one, and they would never give anything to the public if they waited until they reached the end of the path that continually unfolds before them and continues to lengthen as they advance along it. I know, for instance, that it would be important in order to complete this work to carry out a series of calcinations of metals in a great number of vessels of different capacities in order to determine with some precision the law that governs the increase in weight of a metal in relation to the volume of the air in which it is calcined. It would be 45

48 no less interesting to try calcinations in very small vessels and even in the vacuum of the pneumatic pump, but experiments of this kind demand so much time and attention for their proper pursuit, they are so tiresome and require so much apparatus that is cumbersome and difficult to make, that I had not the courage to carry this work further. This was not true of a new route that these experiments have opened to me. It has just been seen that a portion of the air is susceptible to combination with metallic substances to form calces, while another portion of this same air always refuses to combine thus. This calcination has made me suspect that the air of the atmosphere is not a simple substance at all but is composed of very different substances, and the work that I have undertaken on the calcination and the revivification of the calx of mercury has singularly confirmed me in this opinion. Without anticipating the conclusions that result from this work, I think that I may announce here that all the air of the atmosphere is not in a respirable state; that it is the salubrious portion that combines with metals during their calcination; and that that which remains after the calcination is a kind of noxious gas, incapable of maintaining either the respiration of animals or the combustion of bodies. Not only does the air of the atmosphere appear to me to be apparently composed of two elastic fluids of very different nature, but I suspect, further, that the noxious and mephitic part is itself very compound. 7 * * * * * 7 [During this period the publication of the Memoires de l Academie royale des sciences was several years in arrears, and the papers, especially in Lavoisier s case, were often drastically revised before publication. Thus this memoir, read in 1774, was not published until the Memoires for 1774 appeared in In the meanwhile Lavoisier had learned of Priestley s discovery of pure or dephlogisticated air (see pp ) and had conducted similar experiments on his own, and had revised his paper accordingly. This may explain why here Lavoisier says that the principle that combines with metal in calcination is the salubrious air, whereas at the beginning of this essay he had said that it is the mephitic fixed air.] 46

49 Questions and Problems 1. How does Boyle s theory differ from Stahl s phlogiston theory? 2. Why does Lavoisier (on p. 41) interchange pans? 3. On p. 42 he states that the 0.27 grains may be regarded as zero. How might this statement be justified? At first glance it seems he is distorting his data to support a preconceived result. 4. How might a phlogistonist counter Lavoisier s claim on p. 43 that the excess of air that entered served to replace the portion that combined with the metal during the calcination and increased its weight? 5. What is Lavoisier s criterion for something being a member of the general class of metallic calces? 6. Can you justify Lavoisier s stress on weight in his arguments? If one held to levity or if one held that weight was not to be considered a significant factor in changes of this kind, could you convince him that Lavoisier s position was superior to that of a phlogistonist? 47

50 Lavoisier Memoir on the Nature of the Principle that Combines with Metals During Their Calcination and that Increases Their Weight 1, 2 Are there different species of air? Is it sufficient that a body be in a durable state of expansibility (état d expansibilité 3 durable) in order to be a species of air? Finally, are the different airs that occur in nature or that we may produce separate substances or merely modifications of the air of the atmosphere? Such are the principal questions that encompass the plan I have formed and whose successive development I propose to bring before the eyes of the Academy. But the time devoted to our public meetings does not permit me to treat any of these questions extensively, and I will confine myself today to a particular case and limit myself to showing that the principle that combines with metals during their calcination, which increases their weight and constitutes them in the state of a calx, is nothing other than the most salubrious and purest portion of the air and such that, if the air, after having engaged in a metallic combination, becomes free again, it appears in an eminently respirable state more capable than the air of the atmosphere of sustaining ignition and combustion. The majority of the metallic calces are not to be reduced, that is, returned to the metallic state, without the immediate contact of a carbonaceous material or any substance whatsoever containing what we call phlogiston. The charcoal that is used is completely destroyed in this operation if it be present in suitable proportion; whence it follows that the air that is evolved in metallic reductions with carbon is not a simple substance but in some manner is the result of the combination of the elastic fluid disengaged from the metal and that disengaged from the carbon. Therefore the fact that this fluid is obtained as fixed air gives us no right to conclude that it existed in this form in the metallic calx before its combination with the carbon. These considerations showed me that in order to clear up the mystery of the reduction of metallic calces it would be necessary to experiment with those calces that are 1 [This is part of one of the most famous of all Lavoisier s memoirs. Here we have the result of the stimulus of Priestley s communication to Lavoisier of his discovery of dephlogisticated air (October 1774). Lavoisier read it at the Rentrée Publique of the Academy on April 27, It was first revised and read again on August 8, The following selection is taken from this later paper, which was finally printed in the Mémoires de l Académie royale des sciences, 1775: , published in 1778.] 2 The first experiments relative to this memoir were made more than a year ago; those on precipitated mercury per se were first tried with a burning glass in the month of November, 1774, and made afterwards with all necessary precaution and care conjointly with Mr. Trudaine in the laboratory at Montigny February 28 and March 1 and 2 of this year. Finally they have been repeated anew in the presence of the Duke of Rochefoucault, Messrs. Trudaine, de Montigny, Macquer, and Cadet. 3. The word expansibilité, which I will use in this memoir, has today a definite meaning for physicists and chemists since a modern author has defined it in a very extensive article embodying the widest and newest viewpoints. (See Encyclopédie, vol. VI, p. 274). 48

51 reducible without the addition of anything. The calx of iron offered me this property and actually, of all those calces, either natural or artificial, which we have exposed at the foci of the large burning glasses either of the Regent or of Mr. Trudaine, there have been none that have not been completely reduced without addition. I tried, consequently, to reduce by means of a burning glass several species of the calx of iron under large glass bells inverted in mercury, and I succeeded in disengaging by this means a large quantity of elastic fluid. But at the same time this elastic fluid became mixed with the common air contained in the bell, and this circumstance threw much uncertainty on my results, so that none of the tests that I conducted upon this air were perfectly conclusive and it was impossible for me to be certain whether the phenomena I obtained arose from the common air, from that disengaged from the calx of iron, or from the combination of the two. The experiments having failed of fully filling my purpose, I omit their details here; they will, however, find their natural place in other memoirs. As much of these difficulties arise from the nature of the thing itself, from the refractory nature of its calces, and from the difficulty of reducing them without addition, I regarded them as insurmountable and therefore thought that I ought to direct my attention to another species of calx, more easily treatable and being, like the calces of iron, reducible without addition. Precipitated mercury per se, which is nothing else than a calx of mercury, as several authors have already advanced and as will appear even more convincingly by the reading of this memoir, precipitated mercury per se, as I said, appeared to me to be completely appropriate for the object that I had in view, for everyone knows today that this substance is reducible without addition at a very medium degree of heat. Although I have repeated a great many times the experiments that I am about to describe, I have not thought it appropriate to give the details of the each of them here for the fear of extending the memoir too far, and consequently I have combined into a single account the circumstances pertaining to many repetitions of the same experiment. First, to assure myself that the precipitated mercury per se was a genuine metallic calx, that it gave the same results, the same species of air on reduction according to the ordinary method (that is, to use the customary expression, with the addition of phlogiston), I mixed an once of this calx with 48 grains of powdered charcoal and introduced the mixture into a little glass retort of 2 cubic pouces or more capacity. This I placed in a reverberatory furnace of proportionate size. The neck of this retort was about a pied 4 and 3 to 4 lignes in diameter and was bent in 4. [12 pouces = 1 pied.] 49

52 various places by means of an enameler s lamp in such a manner that its end was disposed beneath an ample glass bell filled with water and inverted in a tub of the same. The apparatus that is here before the eyes of the Academy will suffice to illustrate its operation. This apparatus, simple as it is, is even more accurate in that it has neither joints nor lute nor any passage through which the air may enter or escape. As soon as a fire was placed beneath the retort and the first effects of the heat felt, the common air that it contained expanded and some little of it passed into the bell. However, in view of the small volume of the empty part of the retort, this air made no sensible error, and its quantity taken at the most can scarcely amount to a cubic pouce. As the retort is heated further the air is evolved with much speed and rises through the water in the bell. The operation did not last for more than three-quarters of an hour, the fire being kept up during this interval. When all the calx of mercury had been reduced and the air ceased to come forth, I marked the height of the water in the bell and found that the quantity of air evolved had been 64 cubic pouces without counting that which was unavoidably absorbed in traversing the water. I submitted this air to a large number of tests, the details of which I omit, and found that 1) it can, by shaking, combine with water and give to the water all the properties of acidulated, gaseous, or aerated waters such as those of Seltz, Pougues, Bussang, Pirmont, etc.; 2) it kills in some seconds animals that were placed in it; 3) candles and all combustible bodies in general are extinguished in an instant; 4) it precipitates lime water; 5) it combines with great ease with either fixed or volatile alkalis, 5 depriving them of their causticity and making them capable of crystallizing. All these properties are precisely those of that species of air known under the name of fixed air that I obtained by the reduction of minium by powdered charcoal, which calcareous earths and effervescent alkalis evolve in combining with acids, and which vegetable materials evolve in fermenting. It was thus established that precipitated mercury per se gives the same products as other metallic calces when reduced with the addition of phlogiston, and that it belongs, therefore, in the general class of metallic calces. It then only remained to examine this calx alone, to reduce it without adding anything, to see if some elastic fluid were evolved from it, and, supposing there were, to determine its nature. To this end I placed in a retort of 2 cubic pouces capacity 1 once of precipitated mercury per se alone, arranged the apparatus in the same manner as in the preceding experiment, and operated so that all the circumstances would be exactly the same. The reduction took place this time with a little more difficulty than when the charcoal was added; more heat was required, and there was no sensible change until the retort began to become slightly red. Then the air was evolved little by little, passed into the bell, and, holding the same degree of fire during two and one-half hours, all the mercury was reduced. The operation completed, there was found, on the one hand, partly in the neck of the retort and partly in a glass vessel that I placed beneath the water under the exit of the retort, 7 gros and 18 grains of fluid mercury, and on the other hand, the quantity of air that had passed into the bell was found to be 78 pouces; whence it follows that by 5 [ Alkalis are soluble salts obtained from the ashes of plants.] 50

53 supposing that the whole loss of weight should be attributed to the air, each cubic pouce should weigh a little less than two-thirds of a grain a value not far removed from that of common air. After having thus fixed the first results, I had only to submit the 78 cubic pouces of air that I had obtained to all the tests necessary to determine its nature, and I found with much surprise: 1. That it would not combine with water on shaking; 2. That it did not precipitate limewater but only gave it a nearly imperceptible turbidity; 3. That it failed to unite at all with fixed or volatile alkalis; 4. That it failed entirely to diminish the causticity of these; 5. That it could be used again to calcine metals; 6. Finally, that it had none of the properties of fixed air. In contrast to the latter, animals did not perish in it and it seemed more suitable to their respiration. Candles and inflamed materials were not only not extinguished, but the flame widened in a very remarkable manner and shed much more light and brilliancy than in common air. Charcoal burned therein with a brilliance nearly like that of phosphorus, and all combustible materials in general were consumed with astonishing rapidity. All these circumstances have fully convinced me that this air, far from being fixed air, is in a more respirable, more combustible state and in consequence is more pure even than the air that sustains us. It appears to be proved from the above that the principle that combines with and increases the weight of metals when they are calcined is nothing other than the purest portion of the air itself that surrounds us and that we breathe this it is which in calcination passes from the expansible state to the solid one. If, then, this principle is obtained in the form of fixed air in all metallic reductions where carbon is used, it follows that this is due to the combination of this latter with the pure portion of the air, and it is very probable that all metallic calces would, like mercury, give only eminently respirable air if we could reduce them all as we do precipitated mercury per se. Since charcoal disappears completely in the revivification of the calx of mercury, and since one retrieves in this operation only mercury and fixed air, one is forced to conclude that the principle to which has been given till now the name fixed air is the result of the combination of the eminently respirable portion of the air with the charcoal. I propose to develop this in a more satisfying manner in a series of memoirs that I shall give on the topic. * * * * * 51

54 Lavoisier Memoir on Combustion in General 1 As dangerous as is the desire to systematize in the physical sciences, it is, nevertheless, to be feared that in storing without order a great multiplicity of experiments we obscure the science rather than clarify it, render it difficult of access to those desirous of entering upon it, and, finally, obtain at the price of long and tiresome work only disorder and confusion. Facts, observations, experiments these are the materials of a great edifice, but in assembling them we must combine them into classes, distinguish which belongs to which order and to which part of the whole each pertains. Systems in physical science, considered from this point of view, are no more than appropriate instruments to aid the weakness of our organs; they are, properly speaking, approximate methods that put us on the path to the solution of the problem; these are the hypotheses which, successfully modified, corrected, and changed in proportion as they are found false, should lead us infallibly one day, by a process of exclusion, to the knowledge of the true laws of nature. Encouraged by these reflections, I venture to propose to the Academy today a new theory of combustion, or rather, to speak with the reserve that I customarily impose upon myself, a hypothesis by the aid of which we may explain in a very satisfactory manner all the phenomena of combustion and of calcination, and in part even the phenomena that accompany the respiration of animals. I have already laid out the initial foundations of this hypothesis on pages 279 and 280 of the first volume of my Opuscules physiques et chimiques, but I acknowledge that, having little confidence in my own ability, I did not then dare to put forward an opinion that might appear peculiar and was directly contrary to the theory of Stahl and to those of many celebrated men who have followed him. While some of the reasons that held me back perhaps remain today, facts that appear to me to be favorable to my ideas have increased in number since and have strengthened me in my opinion. These facts, without perhaps being too strong, have made me more confident, and I believe that the proof or at least the probability is sufficient so that even those who are not of my opinion will not be able to blame me for having written. We observe in the combustion of bodies generally four recurring phenomena that would appear to be invariable laws of nature; while these phenomena are implied in other memoirs that I have presented, I must recall them here in a few words. First Phenomena: In all combustions the matter of fire or light is evolved. Second Phenomena: Materials may not burn except in a very few kinds of air, or rather, combustion may take place in only a single variety of air: that which Mr. Priestley has named dephlogisticated air and which I name here pure air. Not only do these bodies 1 [Read on September 5 th, Printed in 1780 in the Mémoires de l Académie royale des sciences, 1777: ] 52

55 that we call combustible not burn in either vacuum or in any other species of air, but on the contrary, they are extinguished just as rapidly as if they had been plunged into water or any other liquid. Third Phenomena: In all combustion, pure air in which the combustion takes place is destroyed or decomposed and the burning body increases in weight exactly in proportion to the quantity of air destroyed or decomposed. Fourth Phenomena: In all combustion the body that is burned changes into an acid by the addition of the substance that increases its weight. Thus, for example, if sulfur is burned under a bell, the product of the combustion is vitriolic acid; if phosphorous is burned, the product of the combustion is phosphoric acid; if a carbonaceous substance is burned, the product of the combustion is fixed air, formerly called acid of chalk, etc. 2 The calcination of metals follows precisely the same laws, and it is with very good reason that Mr. Macquer considers the process as a slow combustion. Thus (1) in all metallic calcinations the matter of fire is evolved; (2) genuine calcination may take place only in pure air; (3) air combines with the calcined body, but with this difference, that instead of forming an acid with it, a particular combination results that is known by the name of metallic calx. This is not the place to show the analogy that exists between the respiration of animals, combustion, and calcination. I will return to it in the sequel to this memoir. These different phenomena of the calcination of metals and of combustion are explained in a very nice manner by the hypothesis of Stahl, but it is necessary to suppose with Stahl that the material of fire, of phlogiston, is fixed in metals, in sulfur, and in all bodies that are regarded as combustible. Now if we demand of the partisans of the doctrine of Stahl that they prove the existence of the matter of fire in combustible bodies, they necessarily fall into a vicious circle and are obliged to reply that combustible bodies contain the matter of fire because they burn and that they burn because they contain the matter of fire. Now it is easy to see that in the last analysis this is explaining combustion by combustion. The existence of the matter of fire, of phlogiston in metals, sulfur, etc., is then actually nothing but a hypothesis, a supposition that, once admitted, explains, it is true, some of the phenomena of calcination and combustion; but if I am able to show that these phenomena may be explained in just as natural a manner by an opposing hypothesis, that is to say without supposing that the matter of fire or phlogiston exists in combustible materials, the system of Stahl will be found to be shaken to its foundations. Undoubtedly it will not be amiss to ask first what is meant by the matter of fire. I reply with Franklin, Boerhaave, and some of the philosophers of antiquity that the matter of fire or of light is a very subtle, very elastic fluid that surrounds all parts of the planet that we inhabit, that penetrates bodies composed of it with greater or less ease, and that tends when free to be in equilibrium in everything. I will add, borrowing the language of chemistry, that this fluid is the dissolvent of a large number of bodies; that it combines with them in the same manner as water combines with salt and as acids combine with metals; and that the bodies thus combined and dissolved by the igneous fluid lose in part the properties that they had before the 2 I will observe here in passing that the number of acids is infinitely greater than we think. 53

56 combination and acquire new ones that make them more like the matter of fire. Thus, as I showed in a memoir deposited with the secretary of this Academy, all aeriform liquids, all species of air are the result of the combination of any substance whatsoever, solid or liquid, with the matter of fire or light. It is to this combination that the aeriform liquids owe their elasticity, their specific lightness, their rarity, and all other properties that make them like the igneous fluid. Pure air, according to this, that which Mr. Priestley calls dephlogisticated air, is an igneous combination in which the matter of fire or of light enters as a dissolvent and in which another substance enters as a base. Now if in any dissolution whatsoever we present to the base a substance with which it has more affinity, it unites instantly and the dissolvent that it has left becomes free; it regains all its properties and escapes with the characteristics by which it is known, that is to say, with flame, heat, and light. To clarify whatever may be obscure about this theory let us apply it to several examples. When a metal is calcined in pure air the base of the air, which has less affinity with its dissolvent than with the metal, unites with the latter as soon as it is melted and converts it into a metallic calx. This combination of the base of the air with the metal is shown, (1) by the increase in weight that the latter undergoes during calcination, (2) by the nearly complete destruction of the air beneath the bell. But if the base of the air were dissolved by the matter of fire, then in proportion as this base combines with the metal the matter of fire should become free and should produce, in evolving, flame and light. It is concluded that the more rapid the calcination of the metal, that is to say, the more of the base of the air is fixed in a given time, the more matter of fire will be freed at the same time and consequently the more noticeable will be the combustion. These phenomena, which are extremely slow and difficult to perceive during the calcination of metals, are almost instantaneous in the combustion of sulfur and phosphorous. I have shown by experiments, against which it appears to me rather difficult to make any reasonable objection, that in these two combustions air, or rather the base of air, was absorbed; that it combined with the sulfur and with the phosphorous to form vitriolic and phosphoric acids. However, the base of the air may not pass into a new combination without leaving its dissolvent free, and this dissolvent, which is the matter of fire itself, should evolve with light and flame. Carbon and all carbonaceous materials have the same effect on the base of the air: They appropriate it for themselves and form with it by combustion an acid sui generis known under the name of fixed air or acid of chalk. The solvent of the base of the air, the material of the fire, is then evolved in this operation, but in less quantity than in the combustion of sulfur and phosphorous because a portion of it combines with the mephitic acid [i.e., fixed air] to render it into the vaporous and elastic state in which we find it. I will observe here, in passing, that the combustion of charcoal under a bell inverted in mercury does not occasion a very great diminution in the volume of the air even when pure air is used in the experiment, for the reason that the mephitic acid that is formed remains in an aeriform state, in contrast to vitriolic acid and phosphoric acids, which condense into a concrete form as they are produced. I might apply the same theory successfully to all combustions, but as I shall have frequent occasion to return to this subject, I will let these general examples suffice for the moment. Thus, to continue, the air is composed, according to me, of the matter of fire as 54

57 dissolvent combined with a substance that serves it as a base and in some manner neutralizes it. Whenever a substance toward which it has more affinity is presented to this base, it quits its dissolvent, and then the matter of fire regains its properties and reappears before our eyes with heat, flame, and light. Pure air, the dephlogisticated air of Mr. Priestley, is then, from this point of view, the true combustible body and perhaps the only one in nature, and we see that there is no longer need, in explaining the phenomena of combustion, in supposing that there exists an immense quantity of fixed fire in all bodies that we call combustible, that on the contrary it is very probable that little of this fire exists in metals, sulfur, and phosphorous and in the majority of very solid, heavy, and compact bodies; perhaps even that only the matter of free fire exists in these substances by virtue of the property that this matter has of coming into [thermal] equilibrium with neighboring bodies. Another striking reflection that supports the foregoing is that nearly all bodies may exist in three different states, namely, in the solid, the liquid, which is to say, melted state, or the state of air and vapor. These three states depend only on the greater or lesser quantity of the matter of fire with which these bodies are penetrated and with which they are combined. Fluidity, vaporization, and elasticity characterize the presence of fire in great abundance; solidity, compactness, on the contrary, evidence its absence. As much, then, as it is proved that aeriform substances and the air itself contain a large quantity of fire, so much is it probable that solid bodies contain little. I would be overstepping the limits that I have prescribed and that the circumstances demand were I to undertake to show how this theory throws light on all the great phenomena of nature. However, I cannot omit remarking upon the ease with which it explains why the air is an elastic and rare fluid. Indeed, fire being the most subtle, elastic, and rare of all fluids, it should communicate a part of its properties to the substance with which it unites, and, as solutions of salts always partake of some of the properties of water, so dissolutions by fire should retain some igneous properties. It will be seen, then, why we cannot have combustion either in a vacuum or in any aeriform combination where the matter of fire has a very great affinity with the base with which it is combined. We are no longer obliged, following these principles, to admit the presence of a large quantity of the matter of fixed and combined fire even in the diamond itself and in a great number of substances that have no quality like that of the matter of fire or that possess properties incompatible with it. Finally, we are not at all obliged to maintain, as did Stahl, that bodies that increase in weight lose a part of their substance. I remarked above that the theory proposed in this memoir could be applied to the explanation of a part of the phenomena of respiration, and with this I will finish. I showed in the memoir that I read at the public meeting of last Easter that pure air, after having entered into the lungs, leaves in part as fixed air, or the acid of chalk. Pure air, in passing through the lungs, undergoes then a decomposition analogous to that which takes place in the combustion of charcoal. Now in the combustion of charcoal the matter of fire is evolved, whence the matter of fire should likewise be evolved in the lungs in the interval between inhalation and exhalation, and it is this matter of fire without doubt which, distributed with the blood throughout the animal economy, maintains a constant heat of about 32 ½ degrees Réamur. This idea will appear to be 55

58 hazarded at first glance, but before it be rejected or condemned I beg you to consider that it is founded on two certain and incontestable facts, namely, on the decomposition of the air in the lungs and on the evolution of the matter of fire that accompanies all decompositions of pure air, that is to say, all changes of pure air to the state of fixed air. But that which further confirms that the heat of animals stems from the decomposition of the air in the lungs is that only those animals in nature that respire habitually are warmblooded, and that their warmth is the greater as respiration is more frequent; that is to say, that there is a constant relation between the warmth of an animal and the quantity of air entering, or at least converted into fixed air in, its lungs. Furthermore, I repeat, in attacking here Stahl s doctrine my object is not to substitute a rigorously demonstrated theory but solely a hypothesis that appears to me more probable, more conformable to the laws of nature, and that appears to me to contain fewer forced explanations and fewer contradictions. Circumstances have permitted me to give here but a general outline of the system and a glance at its consequences, but I propose to take up successively each point, to develop each in different memoirs, and I venture to assert in advance that the hypothesis that I propose explains in a very satisfactory and very simple manner the principal phenomena of physics and chemistry. [It was not until 1783 that Lavoisier attacked the phlogiston theory in force in a memoir entitled Reflections on Phlogiston, Serving to Develop the Theory of Combustion and Calcination, Mémoires de l Académie royale des sciences, 1783: published in He describes it as a sequel to his paper published in 1777, cited above. It is a notable document, asserting that the phlogiston theory was not only unnecessary but was incorrect, for it was in conflict with all the facts. The conclusion of this paper follows.] My only object in this memoir has been to give the new development of the theory of combustion that I published in 1777 and to show that the phlogiston of Stahl is an imaginary thing whose existence has been gratuitously supposed in metals, sulfur, phosphorous, and all combustible bodies; that all the phenomena of combustion and calcination may be explained in a far simpler and easier manner without phlogiston than with it. I do not expect that my ideas will be adopted all at once; human nature bends toward one viewpoint, and those who have envisaged nature from a certain point of view during a part of their career change only with difficulty to new ideas: It is for time, then, to confirm or destroy the opinions that I have presented. In the meanwhile I see with great satisfaction that the young people who are commencing to study without prejudice, the geometers and the natural philosophers who bring fresh minds to bear on chemical truths, believe no longer in a phlogiston in the sense that Stahl presented it and regard all the doctrine as a scaffolding more encumbering than useful for continuing the edifice of chemical science. * * * * * 56

59 Lavoisier Elements of Chemistry 1 Preface of the Author When I began the following Work, my only object was to extend and explain more fully the Memoir which I read at the public meeting of the Academy of Sciences in the month of April 1787, on the necessity of reforming and completing the Nomenclature of Chemistry. While engaged in this employment, I perceived, better than I had ever done before, the justice of the following maxims of the Abbé de Condillac, in his System of Logic, and some other of his works. We think only through the medium of words. Languages are true analytical methods. Algebra, which is adapted to its purpose in every species of expression, in the most simple, most exact, and best manner possible, is at the same time a language and an analytical method. The art of reasoning is nothing more than a language well arranged. Thus, while I thought myself employed only in forming a Nomenclature, and while I proposed to myself nothing more than to improve the chemical language, my work transformed itself by degrees, without my being able to prevent it, into a treatise upon the Elements of Chemistry. The impossibility of separating the nomenclature of a science from the science itself, is owing to this, that every branch of physical science must consist of three things; the series of facts which are the objects of the science, the ideas which represent these facts, and the words by which these ideas are expressed. Like three impressions of the same seal, the word ought to produce the idea, and the idea to be a picture of the fact. And, as ideas are preserved and communicated by means of words, it necessarily follows that we cannot improve the language of any science without at the same time improving the science itself; neither can we, on the other hand, improve a science, without improving the language or nomenclature which belongs to it. However certain the facts of any science may be, and, however just the ideas we may have formed of these facts, we can only communicate false impressions to others, while we want words by which these may be properly expressed. To those who will consider it with attention, the first part of this treatise will afford frequent proofs of the truth of the above observations. But as, in the conduct of my work, I have been obliged to observe an order of arrangement essentially differing from what has been adopted in any other chemical work yet published, it is proper that I should 1 [Lavoisier published his Traité Élementaire de Chimie in An English translation by Robert Kerr was published in 1790 under the title Elements of Chemistry. The selections that appear in this manual are taken from Kerr s translation with slight modifications: the spelling and punctuation have been modernized, some typographical errors have been corrected, and some minor changes have been made to the translation.] 57

60 explain the motives which have led me to do so. It is a maxim universally admitted in geometry, and indeed in every branch of knowledge, that in the progress of investigation we should proceed from known facts to what is unknown. In early infancy, our ideas spring from our wants; the sensation of want excites the idea of the object by which it is to be gratified. In this manner, from a series of sensations, observations, and analyses, a successive train of ideas arises, so linked together that an attentive observer may trace back to a certain point the order and connection of the whole sum of human knowledge. When we begin the study of any science, we are in a situation, respecting that science, similar to that of children; and the course by which we have to advance is precisely the same which Nature follows in the formation of their ideas. In a child, the idea is merely an effect produced by a sensation; and, in the same manner, in commencing the study of a physical science, we ought to form no idea but what is a necessary consequence, and immediate effect, of an experiment or observation. Besides, he that enters upon the career of science, is in a less advantageous situation than a child who is acquiring his first ideas. To the child, Nature gives various means of rectifying any mistakes he may commit respecting the salutary or hurtful qualities of the objects which surround him. On every occasion his judgments are corrected by experience; want and pain are the necessary consequences arising from false judgment; gratification and pleasure are produced by judging aright. Under such masters, we cannot fail to become well informed; and we soon learn to reason justly, when want and pain are the necessary consequences of a contrary conduct. In the study and practice of the sciences it is quite different; the false judgments we form neither affect our existence nor our welfare; and we are not forced by any physical necessity to correct them. Imagination, on the contrary, which is ever wandering beyond the bounds of truth, joined to self-love and that self-confidence we are so apt to indulge, prompt us to draw conclusions which are not immediately derived from facts; so that we become in some measure interested in deceiving ourselves. Hence it is by no means to be wondered, that, in the science of physics in general, men have often made suppositions, instead of forming conclusions. These suppositions, handed down from one age to another, acquire additional weight from the authorities by which they are supported, till at last they are received, even by men of genius, as fundamental truths. The only method of preventing such errors from taking place, and of correcting them when formed, is to restrain and simplify our reasoning as much as possible. This depends entirely upon ourselves, and the neglect of it is the only source of our mistakes. We must trust to nothing but facts: These are presented to us by Nature, and cannot deceive. We ought, in every instance, to submit our reasoning to the test of experiment, and never to search for truth but by the natural road of experiment and observation. Thus mathematicians obtain the solution of a problem by the mere arrangement of data, and by reducing their reasoning to such simple steps, to conclusions so very obvious, as never to lose sight of the evidence which guides them. Thoroughly convinced of these truths, I have imposed upon myself, as a law, never to advance but from what is known to what is unknown; never to form any conclusion which is not an immediate consequence necessarily flowing from observation 58

61 and experiment; and always to arrange the facts, and the conclusions which are drawn from them, in such an order as shall render it most easy for beginners in the study of chemistry thoroughly to understand them. Hence I have been obliged to depart from the usual order of courses of lectures and of treatises upon chemistry, which always assume the first principles of the science, as known, when the pupil or the reader should never be supposed to know them till they have been explained in subsequent lessons. In almost every instance, these begin by treating of the elements of matter, and by explaining the table of affinities, without considering, that, in so doing, they must bring the principal phenomena of chemistry into view at the very outset: They make use of terms which have not been defined, and suppose the science to be understood by the very persons they are only beginning to teach. It ought likewise to be considered, that very little of chemistry can be learned in a first course, which is hardly sufficient to make the language of the science familiar to the ears, or the apparatus familiar to the eyes. It is almost impossible to become a chemist in less than three or four years of constant application. These inconveniencies are occasioned not so much by the nature of the subject, as by the method of teaching it; and, to avoid them, I was chiefly induced to adopt a new arrangement of chemistry, which appeared to me more consonant to the order of Nature. I acknowledge, however, that in thus endeavoring to avoid difficulties of one kind, I have found myself involved in others of a different species, some of which I have not been able to remove; but I am persuaded that such as remain do not arise from the nature of the order I have adopted, but are rather consequences of the imperfection under which chemistry still labors. This science still has many chasms, which interrupt the series of facts, and often render it extremely difficult to reconcile them with each other: It has not, like the elements of geometry, the advantage of being a complete science, the parts of which are all closely connected together: Its actual progress, however, is so rapid, and the facts, under the modern doctrine, have assumed so happy an arrangement, that we have ground to hope, even in our own times, to see it approach near to the highest state of perfection of which it is susceptible. The rigorous law from which I have never deviated, of forming no conclusions which are not fully warranted by experiment, and of never supplying the absence of facts, has prevented me from comprehending in this work the branch of chemistry which treats of affinities, although it is perhaps the best calculated of any part of chemistry for being reduced into a completely systematic body. Messrs. Geoffroy, Gellert, Bergman, Scheele, De Morveau, Kirwan, and many others, have collected a number of particular facts upon this subject, which only wait for a proper arrangement; but the principal data are still wanting, or, at least, those we have are either not sufficiently defined, or not sufficiently proved, to become the foundation upon which to build so very important a branch of chemistry. This science of affinities, or elective attractions, holds the same place with regard to the other branches of chemistry, as the higher or transcendental geometry does with respect to the simpler and elementary part; and I thought it improper to involve those simple and plain elements, which I flatter myself the greatest part of my readers will easily understand, in the obscurities and difficulties which still attend that other very useful and necessary branch of chemical science. Perhaps a sentiment of self-love may, without my perceiving it, have given additional force to these reflections. Mr. de Morveau is at present engaged in publishing 59

62 the article Affinity in the Methodical Encyclopedia; and I had more reasons than one to decline entering upon a work in which he is employed. It will, no doubt, be a matter of surprise, that in a treatise upon the elements of chemistry, there should be no chapter on the constituent and elementary parts of matter; but I shall take occasion, in this place, to remark that the fondness for reducing all the bodies in nature to three or four elements proceeds from a prejudice which has descended to us from the Greek Philosophers. The notion of four elements, which, by the variety of their proportions, compose all the known substances in nature, is a mere hypothesis, assumed long before the first principles of experimental philosophy or of chemistry had any existence. In those days, without possessing facts, they framed systems; while we, who have collected facts, seem determined to reject them, when they do not agree with our prejudices. The authority of these fathers of human philosophy still carry great weight, and there is reason to fear that it will even bear hard upon generations yet to come. It is very remarkable that, notwithstanding of the number of philosophical chemists who have supported the doctrine of the four elements, there is not one who has not been led by the evidence of facts to admit a greater number of elements into their theory. The first chemists that wrote after the revival of letters, considered sulfur and salt as elementary substances entering into the composition of a great number of substances; hence, instead of four, they admitted the existence of six elements. Beccher assumes the existence of three kinds of earth, from the combination of which, in different proportions, he supposed all the varieties of metallic substances to be produced. Stahl gave a new modification to this system; and succeeding chemists have taken the liberty to make or to imagine changes and additions of a similar nature. All these chemists were carried along by the influence of the genius of the age in which they lived, which contented itself with assertions without proofs; or, at least, often admitted as proofs the slighted degrees of probability, unsupported by that strictly rigorous analysis required by modern philosophy. All that can be said upon the number and nature of elements is, in my opinion, confined to discussions entirely of a metaphysical nature. The subject only furnishes us with indefinite problems, which may be solved in a thousand different ways, not one of which, in all probability, is consistent with nature. I shall therefore only add upon this subject, that if, by the term elements, we mean to express those simple and indivisible atoms of which matter is composed, it is extremely probable we know nothing at all about them; but, if we apply the term elements, or principles of bodies, to express our idea of the last point which analysis is capable of reaching, we must admit, as elements, all the substances into which we are capable, by any means, to reduce bodies by decomposition. Not that we are entitled to affirm, that these substances we consider as simple may not be compounded of two, or even of a greater number of principles; but, since these principles cannot be separated, or rather since we have not hitherto discovered the means of separating them, they act with regard to us as simple substances, and we ought never to suppose them compounded until experiment and observation has proved them to be so. The foregoing reflections upon the progress of chemical ideas naturally apply to the words by which these ideas are to be expressed. Guided by the work which, in the year 1787, Messrs. de Morveau, Berthollet, de Fourcroy, and I composed upon the 60

63 Nomenclature of Chemistry, I have endeavored, as much as possible, to denominate simple bodies by simple terms, and I was naturally led to name these first. It will be recollected that we were obliged to retain that name of any substance by which it had been long known in the world, and that in two cases only we took the liberty of making alterations; first, in the case of those which were but newly discovered, and had not yet obtained names, or at least which had been known but for a short time, and the names of which had not yet received the sanction of the public; and, secondly, when the names which had been adopted, whether by the ancients or the moderns, appeared to us to express evidently false ideas, when they confounded the substances, to which they were applied, with others possessed of different, or perhaps opposite qualities. We made no scruple, in this case, of substituting other names in their room, and the greatest number of these were borrowed from the Greek language. We endeavored to frame them in such a manner as to express the most general and the most characteristic quality of the substances; and this was attended with the additional advantage both of assisting the memory of beginners, who find it difficult to remember a new word which has no meaning, and of accustoming them early to admit no word without connecting with it some determinate idea. To those bodies which are formed by the union of several simple substances we gave new names, compounded in such a manner as the nature of the substances directed; but, as the number of double combinations is already very considerable, the only method by which we could avoid confusion, was to divide them into classes. In the natural order of ideas, the name of the class or genus is that which expresses a quality common to a great number of individuals: The name of the species, on the contrary, expresses a quality peculiar to certain individuals only. These distinctions are not, as some may imagine, merely metaphysical, but are established by Nature. A child, says the Abbé de Condillac, is taught to give the name tree to the first one which is pointed out to him. The next one he sees presents the same idea, and he gives it the same name. This he does likewise to a third and a fourth, till at last the word tree, which he first applied to an individual, comes to be employed by him as the name of a class or a genus, an abstract idea, which comprehends all trees in general. But, when he learns that all trees serve not the same purpose, that they do not all produce the same kind of fruit, he will soon learn to distinguish them by specific and particular names. This is the logic of all the sciences, and is naturally applied to chemistry. The acids, for example, are compounded of two substances, of the order of those which we consider as simple; the one constitutes acidity, and is common to all acids, and, from this substance, the name of the class or the genus ought to be taken; the other is peculiar to each acid, and distinguishes it from the rest, and from this substance is to be taken the name of the species. But, in the greatest number of acids, the two constituent elements, the acidifying principle, and that which it acidifies, may exist in different proportions, constituting all the possible points of equilibrium or of saturation. This is the case in the sulfuric and the sulfurous acids; and these two states of the same acid we have marked by varying the termination of the specific name. Metallic substances which have been exposed to the joint action of the air and of fire, lose their metallic luster, increase in weight, and assume an earthy appearance. In 61

64 this state, like the acids, they are compounded of a principle which is common to all, and one which is peculiar to each. In the same way, therefore, we have thought proper to class them under a generic name, derived from the common principle; for which purpose we adopted the term oxide; and we distinguish them from each other by the particular name of the metal to which each belongs. Combustible substances, which in acids and metallic oxides are a specific and particular principle, are capable of becoming, in their turn, common principles of a great number of substances. The sulfurous combinations have been long the only known ones in this kind. Now, however, we know, from the experiments of Messrs. Vandermonde, Monge, and Berthollet, that charcoal may be combined with iron, and perhaps with several other metals; and that, from this combination, according to the proportions, may be produced steel, plumbago, &c. We know likewise, from the experiments of M. Pelletier, that phosphorus may be combined with a great number of metallic substances. These different combinations we have classed under generic names taken from the common substance, with a termination which marks this analogy, specifying them by another name taken from that substance which is proper to each. The nomenclature of bodies compounded of three simple substances was attended with still greater difficulty, not only on account of their number, but, particularly, because we cannot express the nature of their constituent principles without employing more compound names. In the bodies which form this class, such as the neutral salts, for instance, we had to consider, 1st, The acidifying principle, which is common to them all; 2d, The acidifiable principle which constitutes their peculiar acid; 3d, The saline, earthy, or metallic basis, which determines the particular species of salt. Here we derived the name of each class of salts from the name of the acidifiable principle common to all the individuals of that class; and distinguished each species by the name of the saline, earthy, or metallic basis, which is peculiar to it. A salt, though compounded of the same three principles, may, nevertheless, by the mere difference of their proportion, be in three different states. The nomenclature we have adopted would have been defective, had it not expressed these different states; and this we attained chiefly by changes of termination uniformly applied to the same state of the different salts. In short, we have advanced so far, that from the name alone may be instantly found what the combustible substance is which enters into any combination; whether that combustible substance be combined with the acidifying principle, and in what proportion; what is the state of the acid; with what basis it is united; whether the saturation be exact, or whether the acid or the basis be in excess. It may be easily supposed that it was not possible to attain all these different objects without departing, in some instances, from established custom, and adopting terms which at first sight will appear uncouth and barbarous. But we considered that the ear is soon habituated to new words, especially when they are connected with a general and rational system. The names, besides, which were formerly employed, such as powder of algaroth, salt of alembroth, pompholix, phagadenic water, turbith mineral, colcathar, and many others, were neither less barbarous nor less uncommon. It required a great deal of practice, and no small degree of memory, to recollect the substances to which they 62

65 were applied, much more to recollect the genus of combination to which they belonged. The names of oil of tartar per deliquium, oil of vitriol, butter of arsenic and of antimony, flowers of zinc, &c. were still more improper, because they suggested false ideas: For, in the whole mineral kingdom, and particularly in the metallic class, there exists no such thing as butters, oils, or flowers; and, in short, the substances to which they give these fallacious names, are nothing less than rank poisons. When we published our essay on the nomenclature of chemistry, we were reproached for having changed the language which was spoken by our masters, which they distinguished by their authority, and handed down to us. But those who reproach us on this account have forgotten that it was Bergman and Macquer themselves who urged us to make this reformation. In a letter which the learned Professor of Upsal, M. Bergman, wrote, a short time before he died, to M. de Morveau, he bids him spare no improper names; those who are learned, will always be learned, and those who are ignorant will thus learn sooner. There is an objection to the work which I am going to present to the public, which is perhaps better founded, that I have given no account of the opinion of those who have gone before me; that I have stated only my own opinion, without examining that of others. By this I have been prevented from doing that justice to my associates, and more especially to foreign chemists, which I wished to render them. But I beseech the reader to consider, that, if I had filled an elementary work with a multitude of quotations; if I had allowed myself to enter into long dissertations on the history of the science, and the works of those who have studied it, I must have lost sight of the true object I had in view, and produced a work, the reading of which must have been extremely tiresome to beginners. It is not to the history of the science, or of the human mind, that we are to attend in an elementary treatise: Our only aim ought to be ease and perspicuity, and with the utmost care to keep every thing out of view which might draw aside the attention of the student; it is a road which we should be continually rendering more smooth, and from which we should endeavor to remove every obstacle which can occasion delay. The sciences, from their own nature, present a sufficient number of difficulties, though we add not those which are foreign to them. But, besides this, chemists will easily perceive, that, in the first part of my work, I make very little use of any experiments but those which were made by myself: If at any time I have adopted, without acknowledgment, the experiments or the opinions of M. Berthollet, M. Fourcroy, M. de la Place, M. Monge, or, in general, of any of those whose principles are the same with my own, it is owing to this circumstance, that frequent intercourse, and the habit of communicating our ideas, our observations, and our way of thinking to each other, has established between us a sort of community of opinions, in which it is often difficult for everyone to know his own. The remarks I have made on the order which I thought myself obliged to follow in the arrangement of proofs and ideas are to be applied only to the first part of this work. It is the only one which contains the general sum of the doctrine I have adopted, and to which I wished to give a form completely elementary. The second part is composed chiefly of tables of the nomenclature of the neutral salts. To these I have only added general explanations, the object of which was to point out the most simple processes for obtaining the different kinds of known acids. This part contains nothing which I can call my own, and presents only a very short abridgment of 63

66 the results of these processes, extracted from the works of different authors. In the third part, I have given a description, in detail, of all the operations connected with modern chemistry. I have long thought that a work of this kind was much wanted, and I am convinced it will not be without use. The method of performing experiments, and particularly those of modern chemistry, is not so generally known as it ought to be; and had I, in the different memoirs which I have presented to the Academy, been more particular in the detail of the manipulations of my experiments, it is probable I should have made myself better understood, and the science might have made a more rapid progress. The order of the different matters contained in this third part appeared to me to be almost arbitrary; and the only one I have observed was to class together, in each of the chapters of which it is composed, those operations which are most connected with one another. I need hardly mention that this part could not be borrowed from any other work, and that, in the principal articles it contains, I could not derive assistance from anything but the experiments which I have made myself. I shall conclude this preface by transcribing, literally, some observations of the Abbé de Condillac, which I think describe, with a good deal of truth, the state of chemistry at a period not far distant from our own. These observations were made on a different subject; but they will not, on this account, have less force, if the application of them be thought just. Instead of applying observation to the things we wished to know, we have chosen rather to imagine them. Advancing from one ill-founded supposition to another, we have at last bewildered ourselves amidst a multitude of errors. These errors becoming prejudices, are, of course, adopted as principles, and we thus bewilder ourselves more and more. The method, too, by which we conduct our reasonings is as absurd; we abuse words which we do not understand, and call this the art of reasoning. When matters have been brought this length, when errors have been thus accumulated, there is but one remedy by which order can be restored to the faculty of thinking; this is, to forget all that we have learned, to trace back our ideas to their source, to follow the train in which they rise, and, as my Lord Bacon says, to frame the human understanding anew. This remedy becomes the more difficult in proportion as we think ourselves more learned. Might it not be thought that works which treated of the sciences with the utmost perspicuity, with great precision and order, must be understood by everybody? The fact is, those who have never studied anything will understand them better than those who have studied a great deal, and especially than those who have written a great deal. At the end of the fifth chapter, the Abbé de Condillac adds: But, after all, the sciences have made progress, because philosophers have applied themselves with more attention to observe, and have communicated to their language that precision and accuracy which they have employed in their observations: In correcting their language they reason better. 64

67 Louis de Morveau Memoir on Chemical Names 1 First Principle: A phrase is not a name; chemicals and chemical products should have names that denominate them on all occasions, without recourse to circumlocutions. Second Principle: Denominations should, as far as possible, conform to nature of things. (Corollaries) Firstly, the substantive name preferably belongs to the simplest object, to the entire, unaltered object, and the expression that modifies it and makes it specific should be placed as an epithet, or in a similar manner. Secondly, the denomination of a chemical compound is only clear and exact in as much as it recalls the constituent parts by names conforming to their nature. Thirdly, the names of discoverers that cannot conform with any things, either individual or generic, should be forbidden from all important nomenclature. Third Principle: When we have no certain understanding of the character that ought chiefly to determine the denomination, a name that expresses nothing is preferable to one which may express a false idea. Fourth Principle: In choosing new denominations, those having roots from the most widespread dead languages should be preferred in order that the word may easily be recalled by the sense and the sense by the word. Fifth Principle: Denominations should be matched with care with regard to the genius of the language for which they are formed. 1 [This is an edited form of Morveau s rules for the establishment of a new nomenclature as they appeared in his Memoir on Chemical Names, the Necessity for Perfecting the System,the Rules for Attaining it, Followed by a Table of Chemical Nomenclature, published in The explanatory text has been omitted.] 65

68 Morveau, Lavoisier, Claude Berthollet, and Antoine de Fourcroy Method of Chemical Nomenclature 1 The principles of which the general exposition was contained in the memoir of Mr. Lavoisier without doubt are sufficient to justify our design of reforming the chemical nomenclature; these principles have appeared to us to carry with them such convictions as cannot fail to acquire universal approbation, after which it would seem that we had nothing more to do but present to the Academy the result of our common labor, or the synopsis formed according to those principles. But we were of opinion that it was incumbent on us to give an account to the Academy of the reasons that have directed us, and even thereby to acquire information to determine us in the choice of the principal denominations; that it especially was of importance to the success of the undertaking to surmount the difficulties of retaining and hearing the new denominations by reducing to a single sheet the entire system containing all the necessary examples for the formation of compound names; in fine, that it was necessary to add to it the Latin version of the new nomenclature, thereby to demonstrate how this system when once adopted would become agreeable to every idiom, and to contribute as much as possible to the regulation of that uniformity of language that is so essentially necessary to the communication of discoveries and to the progress of the science. Such are the subjects of the present memoir, which shall be no more than the expression of the unanimous wish, and the result of all the discussions and conferences that we have had on the subject. When I published an essay on the chemical nomenclature in the Journal de Physique for the month of May 1782, I did not think that the simple merit of having perceived the necessity of correcting the nomenclature would at this day have procured me the satisfaction of being occupied with some of the members of the Academy, of being charged by them to present the plan, and to be able to gain that kind attention that the Academy has always been pleased to show. In the order which we have proposed to ourselves, the simple substances, that is to say, such as chemists to the present time have not been able to decompose, ought chiefly to fix our attention, because the denominations of bodies that by exact analysis can be reduced to their elements are properly expressed by the re-union of the names of those same principles. The substances that we have not as yet been able to decompose may be divided into five classes. The first class contains the principles that, without presenting any remarkable analogy with each other, have notwithstanding one thing in common, that is to say, that they appear to approach the nearest to a state of simplicity, which makes them resist all further analysis, and at the same time renders them so active in their combinations. The second class includes all the acidifiable bases or radical principles of the acids. In the third class we place all the substances whose remarkable characteristic is to appear in a metallic form. The fourth contains all the different earths. 1 [Published in 1787.] 66

69 The fifth is occupied by the alkalis. After these five classes we shall indicate in an appendix the more compound bodies, which, combining as simple substances or without undergoing any sensible decomposition, have appeared to us worthy of occupying a place in the methodical nomenclature for the completion of the system. We shall here give some general notions of each of these classes. FIRST SECTION: OF THE SUBSTANCES THAT APPROACH NEAREST TO A STATE OF SIMPLICITY The substances of the first class are five in number: light, matter of heat, dephlogisticated air or vital air, inflammable gas, and phlogisticated air; this last shall be placed in the nomenclature among the acidifiable bases, because it is really the basis of nitrous acid; but it is evident that it also possesses properties of a different nature, which induce us to place it in this class. Light and heat appear in many circumstances to be productive of the same effects; but as our knowledge is not perfect enough to be able to determine their identity or their difference, we have preserved for each its particular name: We have supposed that we ought to distinguish heat only, which is generally thought to be a sensation produced by a material principle, and we have expressed this latter by the word caloric. Thus we shall say that the caloric passed from one body into another without producing a sensible heat, or that the caloric produced heat, etc. This manner of expression will be as clear, and will cause less embarrassment in discourse than that of the matter of heat, which the necessity of speaking so as to be understood has for some time past introduced. When the appellation of dephlogisticated air was changed into that of vital air, a choice more agreeable to reason was made, by substituting for an expression founded upon mere hypothesis, a term derived from one of the most remarkable properties of that substance, and which is so essentially characteristic of it that one should never hesitate to use it whenever it be necessary to indicate simply that portion of the atmospherical air that maintains respiration and combustion; but it is at present well demonstrated that this portion of the atmospherical fluid is not always present in the state of air or gas, that it is decomposed in a great many operations, and loses, at least in part, the light and caloric that are what principally constitute it vital air; this substance should be considered and represented in that state of its greatest simplicity; the logic of the nomenclature requires even that it be named the first, that the word that would recall the idea become the model for the denominations of its compounds. We have agreed to those conditions by adopting the word oxygen, deriving it, as Mr. Lavoisier proposed, from the Greek words (oxys) acid, and (geinomai) I beget, 2 on account of the property of this principle, the basis of vital air, to change a great many of the substances with which it unites into the state of acid, or rather because it appears to be a principle necessary to 2 [The first meaning of the Greek word (oxys) is sharp, applied to stones, sounds, and flavors, and thence it also came to mean sour, from which it was applied to the sharp-tasting or sour corrosive substances. (Note that the German for oxygen is Sauerstoff, literally, sour substance. Lavoisier implicitly notes this origin of the name in Elements of Chemistry (p. 101). Note also that geinomai) is the passive infinitive to be begotten, whereas (gennao) is I beget. ] 67

70 acidity. We shall therefore say that vital air is oxygen gas, and that oxygen unites with sulfur, and with phosphorous during their combustion, and to metals in their calcination, etc., and this language will be at the same time both exact and perspicuous. On applying the same principles to the aeriform substance called inflammable gas, the necessity of having a more explicit appellation is evident at the first view; it is true that this fluid is capable of being consumed, but this property does not exclusively belong to it, notwithstanding that it is the only substance that produces water by its combustion with oxygen gas. This is the property that appeared to us to be the most worthy of affording a name, but not for the oxygen gas itself, which is a composition, but for the more fixed principle that constitutes the basis, and we have therefore called it hydrogen, from (hydor) water and (geinomai) I beget; experiments having proved that water is nothing but oxygenated hydrogen, or the immediate production of the combustion of oxygen gas with hydrogen gas, deprived of the light and caloric that disengage during the combustion. The denomination of phlogisticated air has been abandoned by the greater number of chemists who thought that it expressed more than it ought, even a long time before it was known to express an error. It is at present well known that this fluid, which makes so considerable a part of the atmospherical air, is not vitiated vital air; that it has nothing in common with respirable air but its state of elastic fluidity, which is caused by its union with caloric: in short, that in losing this state of gas it becomes an element proper to many combinations. As there are several proofs of its being a distinct substance, a particular name for it was necessary, and in searching for one we endeavored to avoid at the same time the inconvenience of one of those perfectly insignificant words that are not connected with any known idea, and that offer no hold to the memory, and the inconvenience, perhaps the more considerable, of prematurely affirming what has been only foreseen. It results from some synthetical experiments made by the Hon. Mr. Cavendish, and confirmed by a great number of analyses, that this principle is a component part of the nitrous acid. Mr. Berthollet has proved its existence in the volatile alkali, 3 and in animal substances; it is probable that the fixed alkali also contains it, and from this it appears to deserve the appellation of alkali-gen, as was proposed by Mr. de Fourcroy. But the analysis of these compositions is not sufficiently advanced to determine positively the manner of existence of this principle in those different substances, and from thence to attribute to it a constant and uniform property; besides, it was not possible by a single word to express the double property of forming the radical of a certain acid, and assisting in the production of an alkali; there did not appear any reasons for considering the latter of these properties in preference to the former, and by admitting the one in a manner to exclude the other. In this situation we thought it were the better way to derive the denomination from its other property, which it manifests in a very great degree, viz. not to maintain the existence of animals, to be really non-vital; in short, to be so in a more considerable respect than the hepatic and acid gases, which do not like it constitute an essential part of the atmospherical mass, and therefore we have denominated it azot from the Greek privative (a) and (zoe) life. After this it may not appear difficult to remember that the air that we breathe is a composition of oxygen gas and azotic gas. 3 [What we now call ammonia. This highly toxic gas is derived from from sal ammoniac (also called salt of Ammon ), a salt first found in large quantities near the temple of Ammon in Egypt.] 68

71 SECOND SECTION: OF THE ACIDIFIABLE BASES OR RADICAL PRINCIPLES OF THE ACIDS The class of the substances whose principal characteristic is to be capable of being transformed into the state of acid is much more extensive; but at the same time it has more uniformity, and the considering of a few substances and the following of them in their various compositions is sufficient to give a perfect idea of all this part of the nomenclature. In this class are to be distinguished the acids whose acidifiable bases have not as yet been separated by chemical process from the general acidifying principle. The acidifiable bases that are known are azot, the basis of the nitrous acid, which we have mentioned in the preceding section, charcoal, sulfur, and phosphorus. On these bases we have established the method of naming, because their combinations are the most numerous, the most familiar to us, and the most easy to follow; as to the others, the base of the marine acid, of the acid of borax, of the acid of vinegar etc., we have only expressed the simple substance of each acid that modifies the oxygen by the expression of acidifiable base, or, for more conciseness, radical of the acid; thereby to continue the same analogy, and to be able to consider each of these substances in order and in an abridged manner, without hazarding anything on their essential properties until they shall have been discovered and proved by decisive experiments. It is probable that many of these acids have compound bases, or that they differ from one another merely by the diversity of proportion of the same principles: When their elements and the order of their descent shall be discovered by exact analyses, it will without doubt be necessary to reduce them to their proper situations, but nevertheless it therefore shall not be thought useless to study their properties and attractions in their present compound state, and therefore we cannot avoid giving them a place in the system of our nomenclature. Those things being premised, let us take for example sulfur, or in other words the acidifiable base of vitriolic acid, which is the third in the class; the numerous productions of its combinations, known this long time past, will enable us to explain the rules that we have formed, and follow the application in the most advantageous manner, to show the progress of the compositions and the general system of the table. Sulfur by combining with oxygen produces an acid: It is evident that to preserve the idea of this oxygen, and to express clearly the first degree of composition, the name of the acid should be derived from the name of its base; but this acid presents itself in two states of saturation, and therefore manifests different properties. That they should not be confounded, a name ought to be given to each of these states, which always retaining its primitive root, would yet express this difference: And the same should be done for the salts formed by these two acids; after this the other direct combinations should be considered: The five different states of the same principle are expressed by as many different terminations adapted to the same original word, in the manner that appeared to us least inharmonious to the ear. Sulfuric acid signifies sulfur as much as possible saturated with oxygen; which composition was formerly called vitriolic acid. Sulfureous acid means sulfur united to a lesser quantity of oxygen; which before was called volatile sulfurous vitriolic acid, or phlogisticated vitriolic acid. 69

72 Sulfat is the general name for all the salts formed by sulfuric acid. Sulfite signifies the salts formed by the sulfureous acid. Sulfuret denominates all the combinations of sulfur not advanced to the state of acid, and regularly displaces the improper and absurd appellations of liver of sulfur, hepar, pyrite, etc. Every one must perceive, at the first glance, all the advantages of such a nomenclature, which at the same time that it indicates the different substances, defines them, points out their constituent principles, classes them in their order of composition, and indicates, in a manner, even the proportions that diversify their properties. Some persons perhaps may be astonished that we should not include in this reformation the words vitriolic acid and vitriol, which custom appears to have rendered sacred; in reality, it is the most considerable innovation, and the only one of the kind to be found in the whole nomenclature: We have felt all the force of the objection, we have considered it for a long time, and we would not have hesitated to suffer these words, although improper, to remain, through respect for established custom, if we were to consider them only in respect to themselves; but it was necessary to form a system for the entire class of acids, a class the most numerous and important; and surely no person will reproach us for not having sacrificed all the advantages of this method to the preservation of the word vitriol. Precisely it is because the acid formed by sulfur is that which is the most frequently employed, which enters into the greatest number of compositions, and especially because it is that which learners first begin to study, that we judged it the more necessary to be submitted to the rigorous application of our rules, thereby that it might serve to facilitate the study of the other acids by an agreeable conformity. Instead of creating a new word, we had only to modify by a new termination of the word sulfur, which has been for a long time admitted by every chemist. We have likewise considered that the words vitriolic acid, vitriol of iron, and vitriol of zinc, are expressions of spirit of sulfur, green copperas, white copperas, etc., and we take it for granted that the chemists who already have abandoned these latter terms, will at present voluntarily surrender a few terms to render the language of chemistry pure and uniform. As to the other acids, we had much less to do in reducing their appellations to our systematical rules, as is evident from the words nitrous acids, tartareous acid, phosphoric acid, etc. There is no substance whatever that has received so many different appellations as the gas that Dr. Black has called fixed air; at the same time expressly reserving the liberty of changing the denomination, which he confessed was improperly applied. The disagreement of the chemists of every country gives us, without doubt, a more perfect liberty, because it shows the necessity of motives being presented capable of making them all unanimous: And we have made use of that liberty according to our principles. As fixed air has been perceived to be produced by the direct combination of charcoal and vital air, by the assistance of combustion, the name of this gaseous acid can no longer be arbitrary, but necessarily must be derived from its radical, which is the pure carbonic matter; therefore it is called carbonic acid, 4 and its compositions with different bases are carbonats, and, for the sake of greater precision in the demonstration of this radical, by distinguishing it from charcoal, according to the vulgar acceptance, in idea to isolate it 4 [Carbonic acid (gas) is the most highly oxygenated form of carbon.] 70

73 from the small quantity of foreign matter that it generally contains, and which constitutes the ashes, we adapt to it the modified name carbon, 5 which indicates the pure and essential principle of charcoal, and which has the advantage of expressing it by a single word, so as to prevent all equivocation. Plumbago, which is only iron united to charcoal, shall take the appellation of carburet of iron, according to the established analogy. Muriatic acid, derived from the Latin muria, muriaticum, has already taken the place of marine acid in the writings of several chemists; but it is well known that it is an acid of a particular nature, because it imbibes an excess of oxygen, and because in this state its acidity seems rather to decrease than to augment, which perhaps is occasioned by the oxygen s retaining in that combination a greater quantity of caloric. Whatever be the cause of this phenomenon, it was necessary that it have a denomination appropriated to so particular a property, which to the present time has been very falsely expressed by the term dephlogisticated marine acid. The appellations of oxygenated muriatic acid, and oxygenated muriats have appeared to us more simple and more conformable to our intention of not expressing any more than the most positive facts. Likewise according to this rule, we have formed the names of all the other combinations of the muriatic acid: Thus corrosive sublimate, becomes corrosive mercurial muriat; the mercurious dulcis, mild mercurial muriat; the salt produced by the dissolution of tin in this acid, muriat of tin; the butter of tin, sublimated muriat of tin; Libavius s liquor, smoking muriat of tin, etc. Analogy induces us to think that the muriatic acid has an acidifiable base, as well as the carbonic, sulfuric, and phosphoric acids, which, like the bases of these latter, serves to give a distinct and particular property to the product of a combination of oxygen. We could not express this substance otherwise than by the name of muriatic radical or muriatic radical principle; in fine, that a name should not be given to an unknown substance, and that the expression should be limited to the simple property with which we are acquainted, and which is to produce this acid. We have had the same caution in respect to the other acids with which we are not yet well acquainted, some of whose bases will probably be discovered in the substances that we have already named. We are obliged to include in this class even the bases of the vegetable and animal acids, of which we have not as yet any exact analysis, notwithstanding the facility with which they are reduced to their elements. The nature of the acidifiable base being independent of the proportion in which it be united to the oxygen, it is evident that the sulfur is at the same time sulfuric radical, and sulfureous radical: But it was also necessary to render that expression uniform for all the acids; and we have gone no farther than the first termination, which signifies the most complete saturation of the acidifiable base. Thus we say boracic radical, and even tartaric radical, etc., although we are acquainted only with the tartareous acid, which is the tartaric radical united to a very small portion of oxygen, if we can judge from all that has as yet been observed in the phenomena of its combustion. The choice of the one or the other of these terminations became very important to indicate, in the combinations of the acids themselves, the different degrees of saturation. As soon as they were known we have not hesitated to make the authority of the rule 5 [The French word being proposed here is carbone, a modified version of charbon, the French word for charcoal.] 71

74 prevail over that of the custom by naming, for example, nitrous acid for that much weaker acid where the same base is united to a much less quantity of oxygen. According to this analogy, phlogisticated or volatile phosphoric acid becomes phosphorus acid; the experiments of Mr. Berthollet upon radical vinegar having demonstrated that it was no more than the common vinegar saturated with oxygen, we thought it proper to distinguish the acetic acid and the acetous acid. This distinction, being once established, has afforded us the nitrats and the nitrites, the phosphats and the phosphites, the acetats, and the acetites, as has been shown in the denomination of the salts formed by the acid of sulfur: The word nitre is the only exception, which, through respect to custom, we have retained as synonymous with nitrat of potash... 72

75 Notes on the Reading 1. It is not intended that your discussion will concentrate on the details of the new nomenclature. But you should study the details in order that you may read with comfort the subsequent papers in this laboratory all of them use the new nomenclature. You will find most of the basic vocabulary you will need in Lavoisier s Preface, Morveau s Method of Chemical Nomenclature (much of which is repeated by Lavoisier), and in the note below. 2. The committee on nomenclature chaired by Morveau had Lavoisier as its leading member. The system devised by Lavoisier is basically the one used today. Below are some of the changes in, or additions to, the system, which will be of use to you in subsequent readings: (a) Some of the changes in spelling: from sulfureous to sulfurous, nitrats to nitrates, phosphats to phosphates, acetats to acetates, and carbonats to carbonates. (b) The first and second classes (omitting caloric and light) mentioned in Morveau s memoir together constitute what are now called the non-metals. (c) About the year 1800 it was decided that those new elements discovered which had metallic properties would have a stem name given according to the idiosyncracy of the discoverer but always with the ending: -ium: potassium, sodium, magnesium, germanium, etc. Those newly discovered elements that were non-metals were to have the ending -on: boron, silicon, neon, etc. The only exceptions to this latter rule occurred in naming the group of elements obtained by decomposing sea salts and were known as the halogens (halys = salt, genesthai = producer). These were given names ending in -ine: fluorine, chlorine, bromine, and iodine. This system of naming was not retroactive. Those substances established by Lavoisier as elements that continued to be so considered kept the names he established for them. 1 (d) When a substance is formed by the combination of only two elements (called a binary substance), the metallic element is named first with its usual full name. The second element is then named, but with its stem plus the ending -ide; e.g., zinc chloride, lead sulfide, silver oxide, etc. There are only a few binary substances formed from two metals. There are many binary substances formed from a metal and a non-metal, or a non-metal and another non-metal. If the binary substance is composed of two non-metals and one is oxygen, then it is an oxide; e.g., carbon oxide. The ending -et, as in carburet of iron, is no longer used. (e) Following a later trend of naming by putting the name of the metallic element present first, such names as sulfate of zinc became, by convention, zinc sulfate. (f) The change in the name of the substance here called oxygenated muriatic acid (Morveau, et al., p. 71) will be considered when we discuss the Acidifying Principle later in Chapter II. (g) The endings -ic and -ous (Morveau et al., p. 69) are not limited to specifying binary substances having different degrees of oxygenation. The -ic ending is added to the stem name of the first element (sometimes modified, as with copper below) to indicate that it has a lower weight ratio to the second element combined with it than has the -ous ending substance. Thus cupric sulfide has a lower weight ratio of copper to sulfur than has cuprous sulfide; mercuric chloride has a lower weight ratio of mercury to chlorine than has mercurous chloride; etc. 1 For the etymology of the names of the elements, see W.E. Floo, The Origin of Chemical Names (1963). 73

76 (h) Shortly after Morveau et al. published this essay, fixed air, the newly renamed element azot, came to be called azote. Cavendish named this substance nitrogen I beget nitre although this name did not come into common use in English until a few decades later. See, for example, Dalton s table of elements on p. 138 (1808), where the word azote is still in use. In France it is still called azote. In German it is Stickstoff, literally, suffocating substance. 3. Heat is not now considered to be a substance, and the term indicating the matter of heat, caloric, is no longer used. However, we still measure heat in calorimeters and the calorie is the most common unit of heat. The history of the abandonment of the caloric theory is a fascinating and important story but not especially relevant to our concerns here, although you will read two papers presenting experimental evidence that heat is not substance (see pp ). If you wish to study this issue on your own initiative, you might start with Harvard Case Histories in Experimental Science, No. 3, The Rise and Decline of Caloric Theory. Questions and Problems 1. Consider the role measurement plays in Lavoisier s classification of substances. 2. What presuppositions do these scientists make about the role of language in science? 3. In what way is Lavoisier rejecting Aristotle? In what way agreeing with him? * * * * * 74

77 Lavoisier Elements of Chemistry PART I CHAPTER I. Of the Combinations of Caloric, and the Formation of Elastic Aeriform Fluids. That every body, whether solid or fluid, is augmented in all its dimensions by any increase of its sensible heat, was long ago fully established as a physical axiom or universal proposition by the celebrated Boerhaave. Such facts as have been adduced for controverting the generality of this principle offer only fallacious results, or, at least, such as are so complicated with foreign circumstances as to mislead the judgment: But, when we separately consider the effects, so as to deduce each from the cause to which they separately belong, it is easy to perceive that the separation of particles by heat is a constant and general law of nature. When we have heated a solid body to a certain degree, and have thereby caused its particles to separate from each other, if we allow the body to cool, its particles again approach each other in the same proportion in which they were separated by the increased temperature; the body returns through the same degrees of expansion which it before extended through; and, if it be brought back to the same temperature from which we set out at the commencement of the experiment, it recovers exactly the same dimensions which it formerly occupied. But, as we are still very far from being able to arrive at the degree of absolute cold, or deprivation of all heat, being unacquainted with any degree of coldness which we cannot suppose capable of still farther augmentation, it follows that we are still incapable of causing the ultimate particles of bodies to approach each other as near as is possible; and, consequently, that the particles of all bodies do not touch each other in any state hitherto known, which, though a very singular conclusion, is yet impossible to be denied. It is supposed, that, since the particles of bodies are thus continually impelled by heat to separate from each other, they would have no connection between themselves; and, of consequence, that there could be no solidity in nature, unless they were held together by some other power which tends to unite them, and, so to speak, to chain them together; which power, whatever be its cause, or manner of operation, we name Attraction. Thus the particles of all bodies may be considered as subjected to the action of two opposite powers, the one repulsive, the other attractive, between which they remain in equilibrium. So long as the attractive force remains stronger, the body must continue in a state of solidity; but if, on the contrary, heat has so far removed these particles from 75

78 each other as to place them beyond the sphere of attraction, they lose the adhesion they before had with each other, and the body ceases to be solid. Water gives us a regular and constant example of these facts; whilst below Zero 1 of the French thermometer, or 32 of Fahrenheit, it remains solid, and is called ice. Above that degree of temperature, its particles being no longer held together by reciprocal attraction, it becomes liquid; and, when we raise its temperature above 80 (212 ), its particles, giving way to the repulsion caused by the heat, assume the state of vapor or gas, and the water is changed into an aeriform fluid. The same may be affirmed of all bodies in nature: They are either solid or liquid, or in the state of elastic aeriform vapor, according to the proportion which takes place between the attractive force inherent in their particles, and the repulsive power of the heat acting upon these; or, what amounts to the same thing, in proportion to the degree of heat to which they are exposed. It is difficult to comprehend these phenomena, without admitting them as the effects of a real and material substance, or very subtle fluid, which, insinuating itself between the particles of bodies, separates them from each other; and, even allowing the existence of this fluid to be hypothetical, we shall see in the sequel, that it explains the phenomena of nature in a very satisfactory manner. This substance, whatever it is, being the cause of heat, or, in other words, the sensation which we call warmth being caused by the accumulation of this substance, we cannot, in strict language, distinguish it by the term heat; because the same name would then very improperly express both cause and effect. For this reason, in the memoir which I published in 1777, 2 I gave it the names of igneous fluid and matter of heat. And, since that time, in the work 3 published by Mr. de Morveau, Mr. Berthollet, Mr. de Fourcroy, and myself, upon the reformation of chemical nomenclature, we thought it necessary to banish all periphrastic expressions, which both lengthen physical language, and render it more tedious and less distinct, and which even frequently does not convey sufficiently just ideas of the subject intended. Wherefore, we have distinguished the cause of heat, or that exquisitely elastic fluid which produces it, by the term of caloric. Besides, that this expression fulfils our object in the system which we have adopted, it possesses this farther advantage, that it accords with every species of opinion, since, strictly speaking, we are not obliged to suppose this to be a real substance; it being sufficient, as will more clearly appear in the sequel of this work, that it be considered as the repulsive cause, whatever that may be, which separates the particles of matter from each other; so that we are still at liberty to investigate its effects in an abstract and mathematical manner. In the present state of our knowledge, we are unable to determine whether light be a modification of caloric, or if caloric be, on the contrary, a modification of light. This, 1 Whenever the degree of heat occurs in this work, it is stated by the author according to Reaumur's scale. The degrees within brackets are the correspondent degrees of Fahrenheit's scale, added by the translator. Translator. 2 Collections of the French Academy of Sciences for that year, p Chemical Nomenclature. 76

79 however, is indisputable, that, in a system where only decided facts are admissible, and where we avoid, as far as possible, to suppose anything to be that is not really known to exist, we ought provisionally to distinguish, by distinct terms, such things as are known to produce different effects. We therefore distinguish light from caloric; though we do not therefore deny that these have certain qualities in common, and that, in certain circumstances, they combine with other bodies almost in the same manner, and produce, in part, the same effects. What I have already said may suffice to determine the idea affixed to the word caloric; but there remains a more difficult attempt, which is to give a just conception of the manner in which caloric acts upon other bodies. Since this subtle matter penetrates through the pores of all known substances; since there are no vessels through which it cannot escape, and, consequently, as there are none which are capable of retaining it, we can only come at the knowledge of its properties by effects which are fleeting, and difficultly ascertainable. It is in these things which we neither see nor feel, that it is especially necessary to guard against the extravagancy of our imagination, which forever inclines to step beyond the bounds of truth, and is very difficultly restrained within the narrow line of facts. We have already seen, that the same body becomes solid, or fluid, or aeriform, according to the quantity of caloric by which it is penetrated; or, to speak more strictly, according as the repulsive force exerted by the caloric is equal to, stronger, or weaker, than the attraction of the particles of the body it acts upon. But, if these two powers only existed, bodies would become liquid at an indivisible degree of the thermometer, and would almost instantaneously pass from the solid state of aggregation to that of aeriform elasticity. Thus water, for instance, at the very moment when it ceases to be ice, would begin to boil, and would be transformed into an aeriform fluid, having its particles scattered indefinitely through the surrounding space. That this does not happen must depend upon the action of some third power. The pressure of the atmosphere prevents this separation, and causes the water to remain in the liquid state till it be raised to a temperature of 80 (212 ) above zero of the French thermometer, the quantity of caloric which it receives in the lowest temperature being insufficient to overcome the pressure of the atmosphere. Whence it appears that, without this atmospheric pressure, we should not have any permanent liquid, and should only be able to see bodies in that state of existence in the very instant of melting, as the smallest additional caloric would instantly separate their particles, and dissipate them through the surrounding medium. Besides, without this atmospheric pressure, we should not even have any aeriform fluids, strictly speaking, because the moment the force of attraction is overcome by the repulsive power of the caloric, the particles would separate themselves indefinitely, having nothing to give limits to their expansion, unless their own gravity might collect them together, so as to form an atmosphere. Simple reflection upon the most common experiments is sufficient to evince the truth of these positions. They are more particularly proved by the following experiment, which I published in the Memoirs of the French Academy for 1777, p

80 Having filled with sulfuric ether 4 a small narrow glass vessel, A, (Fig. 17.), standing upon its stalk P, the vessel, which is from twelve to fifteen lines diameter, is to be covered by a wet bladder, tied round its neck with several turns of strong thread; for greater security, fix a second bladder over the first. The vessel should be filled in such a manner with the ether, as not to leave the smallest portion of air between the liquor and the bladder. It is now to be placed under the recipient BCD of an air-pump, of which the upper part B ought to be fitted with a leathern lid, through which passes a wire EF, having its point F very sharp; and in the same receiver there ought to be placed the barometer GH. The whole being thus disposed, let the recipient be exhausted, and then, by pushing down the wire EF, we make a hole in the bladder. Immediately the ether begins to boil with great violence, and is changed into an elastic aeriform fluid, which fills the receiver. If the quantity of ether be sufficient to leave a few drops in the phial after the evaporation is finished, the elastic fluid produced will sustain the mercury in the barometer attached to the air-pump, at eight or ten inches in winter, and from twenty to twenty-five in summer. To render this experiment more complete, we may introduce a small thermometer into the phial A, containing the ether, which will descend considerably during the evaporation. The only effect produced in this experiment is the taking away the weight of the atmosphere, which, in its ordinary state, presses on the surface of the ether; and the effects resulting from this removal evidently prove that, in the ordinary temperature of the earth, ether would always exist in an aeriform state, but for the pressure of the atmosphere, and that the passing of the ether from the liquid to the aeriform state is accompanied by a considerable lessening of heat; because, during the evaporation, a part of the caloric, which was before in a free state, or at least in equilibrium in the surrounding bodies, combines with the ether, and causes it to assume the aeriform state. The same experiment succeeds with all evaporable fluids, such as alcohol, water, and even mercury; with this difference, that the atmosphere formed in the receiver by alcohol only supports the attached barometer about one inch in winter, and about four or five inches in summer; that formed by water, in the same situation, raises the mercury only a few lines, and that by quicksilver but a few fractions of a line. There is therefore less fluid evaporated from alcohol than from ether, less from water than from alcohol, and still less from mercury than from either; consequently there is less caloric employed, and less cold produced, which quadrates exactly with the results of these experiments. 4 As I shall afterwards give a definition, and explain the properties of the liquor called ether, I shall only premise here, that it is a very volatile inflammable liquor, having a considerably smaller specific gravity than water, or even spirit of wine. Author. 78

81 Another species of experiment proves very evidently that the aeriform state is a modification of bodies dependent on the degree of temperature, and on the pressure which these bodies undergo. In a Memoir read by Mr. de la Place and me to the Academy in 1777, which has not been printed, we have shown that when ether is subjected to a pressure equal to twenty-eight inches of the barometer, or about the medium pressure of the atmosphere, it boils at the temperature of about 32 (104 ), or 33 ( ), of the thermometer. Mr. de Luc, who has made similar experiments with spirit of wine, finds it boils at 67 ( ). And all the world knows that water boils at 80 (212 ). Now, boiling being only the evaporation of a liquid, or the moment of its passing from the fluid to the aeriform state, it is evident that, if we keep ether continually at the temperature of 33 ( ), and under the common pressure of the atmosphere, we shall have it always in an elastic aeriform state; and that the same thing will happen with alcohol when above 67 ( ), and with water when above 80 (212 ); all which are perfectly conformable to the following experiment. 5 I filled a large vessel ABCD (Fig. 15.) with water, at 35 ( ), or 36 (113 ); I suppose the vessel transparent, that we may see what takes place in the experiment; and we can easily hold the hands in water at that temperature without inconvenience. Into it I plunged some narrow necked bottles F, G, which were filled with the water, after which they were turned up, so as to rest on their mouths on the bottom of the vessel. Having next put some ether into a very small matrass, with its neck a b c, twice bent as in the figure, I plunged this matrass into the water, so as to have its neck inserted into the mouth of one of the bottles F. Immediately upon feeling the effects of the heat communicated to it by the water in the vessel ABCD it began to boil; and the caloric entering into combination with it, changed it into elastic aeriform fluid, with which I filled several bottles successively, F, G, &c. This is not the place to enter upon the examination of the nature and properties of this aeriform fluid, which is extremely inflammable; but, confining myself to the object at present in view, without anticipating circumstances, which I am not to suppose the reader to know, I shall only observe that the ether, from this experiment, is almost only capable of existing in the aeriform state in our world; for, if the weight of our atmosphere was only equal to between 20 and 24 inches of the barometer, instead of 28 inches, we should never be able to obtain ether in the liquid state, at least in summer; and the formation of ether would consequently be impossible upon mountains of a moderate degree of elevation, as it would be converted into gas immediately upon being produced, unless we employed recipients of extraordinary strength, together with refrigeration and compression. And, lastly, the temperature of the blood being nearly that at which ether passes from the liquid to the aeriform state, it must evaporate in the primae viae, and consequently it is very probable the medical properties of this fluid depend chiefly upon its mechanical effect. 5 See Memoirs of the French Academy, 1780, p Author. 79

82 These experiments succeed better with nitrous ether, because it evaporates in a lower temperature than sulfuric ether. It is more difficult to obtain alcohol in the aeriform state; because, as it requires 67 ( ) to reduce it to vapor, the water of the bath must be almost boiling, and consequently it is impossible to plunge the hands into it at that temperature. It is evident that if water were used in the foregoing experiment, it would be changed into gas when exposed to a temperature superior to that at which it boils. Although thoroughly convinced of this, Mr. de la Place and myself judged it necessary to confirm it by the following direct experiment. We filled a glass jar A, (Fig. 5.) with mercury, and placed it with its mouth downwards in a dish B, likewise filled with mercury, and having introduced about two gross of water into the jar, which rose to the top of the mercury at CD; we then plunged the whole apparatus into an iron boiler EFGH, full of boiling sea-water of the temperature of 85 ( ), placed upon the furnace GHIK. Immediately upon the water over the mercury attaining the temperature of 80 (212 ), it began to boil; and, instead of only filling the small space ACD, it was converted into an aeriform fluid, which filled the whole jar; the mercury even descended below the surface of that in the dish B; and the jar must have been overturned, if it had not been very thick and heavy, and fixed to the dish by means of iron-wire. Immediately after withdrawing the apparatus from the boiler, the vapor in the jar began to condense, and the mercury rose to its former station; but it returned again to the aeriform state a few seconds after replacing the apparatus in the boiler. We have thus a certain number of substances, which are convertible into elastic aeriform fluids by degrees of temperature, not much superior to that of our atmosphere. We shall afterwards find that there are several others which undergo the same change in similar circumstances, such as muriatic or marine acid, ammoniac or volatile alkali, the carbonic acid or fixed air, the sulfurous acid, &c. All of these are permanently elastic in or about the mean temperature of the atmosphere, and under its common pressure. All these facts, which could be easily multiplied if necessary, give me full right to assume, as a general principle, that almost every body in nature is susceptible of three several states of existence, solid, liquid, and aeriform, and that these three states of existence depend upon the quantity of caloric combined with the body. Henceforwards I shall express these elastic aeriform fluids by the generic term gas; and in each species of gas I shall distinguish between the caloric, which in some measure serves the purpose of a solvent, and the substance, which in combination with the caloric forms the base of the gas. To these bases of the different gases, which are hitherto but little known, we have been obliged to assign names; these I shall point out in Chap. IV of this work, when I 80

83 have previously given an account of the phenomena attendant upon the heating and cooling of bodies, and when I have established precise ideas concerning the composition of our atmosphere. We have already shown that the particles of every substance in nature exist in a certain state of equilibrium, between that attraction which tends to unite and keep the particles together, and the effects of the caloric which tends to separate them. Hence the caloric not only surrounds the particles of all bodies on every side, but fills up every interval which the particles of bodies leave between each other. We may form an idea of this, by supposing a vessel filled with small spherical leaden bullets, into which a quantity of fine sand is poured, which, insinuating into the intervals between the bullets, will fill up every void. The balls, in this comparison, are to the sand which surrounds them exactly in the same situation as the particles of bodies are with respect to the caloric; with this difference only, that the balls are supposed to touch each other, whereas the particles of bodies are not in contact, being retained at a small distance from each other, by the caloric. If, instead of spherical balls, we substitute solid bodies of a hexahedral, octohedral, or any other regular figure, the capacity of the intervals between them will be lessened, and consequently will no longer contain the same quantity of sand. The same thing takes place, with respect to natural bodies; the intervals left between their particles are not of equal capacity, but vary in consequence of the different figures and magnitude of their particles, and of the distance at which these particles are maintained, according to the existing proportion between their inherent attraction, and the repulsive force exerted upon them by the caloric. In this manner we must understand the following expression, introduced by the English philosophers, who have given us the first precise ideas upon this subject; the capacity of bodies for containing the matter of heat. As comparisons with sensible objects are of great use in assisting us to form distinct notions of abstract ideas, we shall endeavor to illustrate this, by instancing the phenomena which take place between water and bodies which are wetted and penetrated by it, with a few reflections. If we immerse equal pieces of different kinds of wood, suppose cubes of one foot each, into water, the fluid gradually insinuates itself into their pores, and the pieces of wood are augmented both in weight and magnitude: But each species of wood will imbibe a different quantity of water; the lighter and more porous woods will admit a larger, the compact and closer grained will admit of a lesser quantity; for the proportional quantities of water imbibed by the pieces will depend upon the nature of the constituent particles of the wood, and upon the greater or lesser affinity subsisting between them and water. Very resinous wood, for instance, though it may be at the same time very porous, will admit but little water. We may therefore say that the different kinds of wood possess different capacities for receiving water; we may even determine, by means of the augmentation of their weights, what quantity of water they have actually absorbed; but, as we are ignorant how much water they contained, previous to immersion, we cannot determine the absolute quantity they contain, after being taken out of the water. The same circumstances undoubtedly take place, with bodies that are immersed in caloric; taking into consideration, however, that water is an incompressible fluid, whereas 81

84 caloric is, on the contrary, endowed with very great elasticity; or, in other words, the particles of caloric have a great tendency to separate from each other, when forced by any other power to approach; this difference must of necessity occasion very considerable diversities in the results of experiments made upon these two substances. Having established these clear and simple propositions, it will be very easy to explain the ideas which ought to be affixed to the following expressions, which are by no means synonymous, but possess each a strict and determinate meaning, as in the following definitions: Free caloric is that which is not combined in any manner with any other body. But, as we live in a system to which caloric has a very strong adhesion, it follows that we are never able to obtain it in the state of absolute freedom. Combined caloric is that which is fixed in bodies by affinity or elective attraction, so as to form part of the substance of the body, even part of its solidity. By the expression specific caloric of bodies we understand the respective quantities of caloric requisite for raising a number of bodies of the same weight to an equal degree of temperature. This proportional quantity of caloric depends upon the distance between the constituent particles of bodies, and their greater or lesser degrees of cohesion; and this distance, or rather the space or void resulting from it, is, as I have already observed, called the capacity of bodies for containing caloric. Heat, considered as a sensation, or, in other words, sensible heat, is only the effect produced upon our sentient organs, by the motion or passage of caloric, disengaged from the surrounding bodies. In general, we receive impressions only in consequence of motion, and we might establish it as an axiom, That without motion there is no sensation. This general principle applies very accurately to the sensations of heat and cold: When we touch a cold body, the caloric which always tends to become in equilibrium in all bodies, passes from our hand into the body we touch, which gives us the feeling or sensation of cold. The direct contrary happens, when we touch a warm body, the caloric then passing from the body into our hand, produces the sensation of heat. If the hand and the body touched be of the same temperature, or very nearly so, we receive no impression, either of heat or cold, because there is no motion or passage of caloric; and thus no sensation can take place, without some correspondent motion to occasion it. When the thermometer rises, it shows that free caloric is entering into the surrounding bodies: The thermometer, which is one of these, receives its share in proportion to its mass, and to the capacity which it possesses for containing caloric. The change therefore which takes place upon the thermometer, only announces a change of place of the caloric in those bodies, of which the thermometer forms one part; it only indicates the portion of caloric received, without being a measure of the whole quantity disengaged, displaced, or absorbed. The most simple and most exact method for determining this latter point, is that described by Mr. de la Place, in the Memoirs of the Academy, 1780, p. 364; a summary explanation of which will be found towards the conclusion of this work. This method consists in placing a body, or a combination of bodies, from which caloric is disengaging, in the midst of a hollow sphere of ice; and the quantity of ice melted becomes an exact 82

85 measure of the quantity of caloric disengaged. It is possible, by means of the apparatus which we have caused to be constructed upon this plan, to determine, not as has been pretended, the capacity of bodies for containing heat, but the ratio of the increase or diminution of capacity produced by determinate degrees of temperature. It is easy with the same apparatus, by means of diverse combinations of experiments, to determine the quantity of caloric requisite for converting solid substances into liquids, and liquids into elastic aeriform fluids; and, vice versa, what quantity of caloric escapes from elastic vapors in changing to liquids, and what quantity escapes from liquids during their conversion into solids. Perhaps, when experiments have been made with sufficient accuracy, we may one day be able to determine the proportional quantity of caloric necessary for producing the several species of gasses. I shall hereafter, in a separate chapter, give an account of the principal results of such experiments as have been made upon this head. It remains, before finishing this article, to say a few words relative to the cause of the elasticity of gasses, and of fluids in the state of vapor. It is by no means difficult to perceive that this elasticity depends upon that of caloric, which seems to be the most eminently elastic body in nature. Nothing is more readily conceived, than that one body should become elastic by entering into combination with another body possessed of that quality. We must allow that this is only an explanation of elasticity, by an assumption of elasticity, and that we thus only remove the difficulty one step farther, and that the nature of elasticity, and the reason for caloric being elastic, remains still unexplained. Elasticity in the abstract is nothing more than that quality of the particles of bodies by which they recede from each other when forced together. This tendency in the particles of caloric to separate, takes place even at considerable distances. We shall be satisfied of this, when we consider that air is susceptible of undergoing great compression, which supposes that its particles were previously very distant from each other; for the power of approaching together certainly supposes a previous distance, at least equal to the degree of approach. Consequently, those particles of the air, which are already considerably distant from each other, tend to separate still farther. In fact, if we produce Boyle's vacuum in a large receiver, the very last portion of air which remains spreads itself uniformly through the whole capacity of the vessel, however large, fills it completely throughout, and presses everywhere against its sides: We cannot, however, explain this effect, without supposing that the particles make an effort to separate themselves on every side, and we are quite ignorant at what distance, or what degree of rarefaction, this effort ceases to act. Here, therefore, exists a true repulsion between the particles of elastic fluids; at least, circumstances take place exactly as if such a repulsion actually existed; and we have very good right to conclude, that the particles of caloric mutually repel each other. When we are once permitted to suppose this repelling force, the rationale of the formation of gasses, or aeriform fluids, becomes perfectly simple; though we must, at the same time, allow, that it is extremely difficult to form an accurate conception of this repulsive force acting upon very minute particles placed at great distances from each other. It is, perhaps, more natural to suppose, that the particles of caloric have a stronger mutual attraction than those of any other substance, and that these latter particles are forced asunder in consequence of this superior attraction between the particles of the 83

86 caloric, which forces them between the particles of other bodies, that they may be able to reunite with each other. We have somewhat analogous to this idea in the phenomena which occur when a dry sponge is dipped into water: The sponge swells; its particles separate from each other; and all its intervals are filled up by the water. It is evident, that the sponge, in the act of swelling, has acquired a greater capacity for containing water than it had when dry. But we cannot certainly maintain, that the introduction of water between the particles of the sponge has endowed them with a repulsive power, which tends to separate them from each other; on the contrary, the whole phenomena are produced by means of attractive powers; and these are, first, The gravity of the water, and the power which it exerts on every side, in common with all other fluids; 2dly, The force of attraction which takes place between the particles of the water, causing them to unite together; 3dly, The mutual attraction of the particles of the sponge with each other; and, lastly, The reciprocal attraction which exists between the particles of the sponge and those of the water. It is easy to understand, that the explanation of this fact depends upon properly appreciating the intensity of, and connection between, these several powers. It is probable that the separation of the particles of bodies, occasioned by caloric, depends in a similar manner upon a certain combination of different attractive powers, which, in conformity with the imperfection of our knowledge, we endeavor to express by saying, that caloric communicates a power of repulsion to the particles of bodies. CHAPTER II. General Views relative to the Formation and Composition of our Atmosphere. These views which I have taken of the formation of elastic aeriform fluids or gasses throw great light upon the original formation of the atmospheres of the planets, and particularly that of our earth. We readily conceive, that it must necessarily consist of a mixture of the following substances: First, Of all bodies that are susceptible of evaporation, or, more strictly speaking, which are capable of retaining the state of aeriform elasticity in the temperature of our atmosphere, and under a pressure equal to that of a column of twenty-eight inches of quicksilver in the barometer; and, secondly, Of all substances, whether liquid or solid, which are capable of being dissolved by this mixture of different gasses. The better to determine our ideas relating to this subject, which has not hitherto been sufficiently considered, let us, for a moment, conceive what change would take place in the various substances which compose our earth, if its temperature were suddenly altered. If, for instance, we were suddenly transported into the region of the planet Mercury, where probably the common temperature is much superior to that of boiling water, the water of the earth, and all the other fluids which are susceptible of the gaseous state, at a temperature near to that of boiling water, even quicksilver itself, would become rarified; and all these substances would be changed into permanent aeriform fluids or gasses, which would become part of the new atmosphere. These new species of airs or gasses would mix with those already existing, and certain reciprocal decompositions and new combinations would take place, until such time as all the elective attractions or affinities subsisting amongst all these new and old gaseous 84

87 substances had operated fully; after which, the elementary principles composing these gasses, being saturated, would remain at rest. We must attend to this, however, that, even in the above hypothetical situation, certain bounds would occur to the evaporation of these substances, produced by that very evaporation itself; for as, in proportion to the increase of elastic fluids, the pressure of the atmosphere would be augmented, as every degree of pressure tends, in some measure, to prevent evaporation, and as even the most evaporable fluids can resist the operation of a very high temperature without evaporating, if prevented by a proportionally stronger compression, water and all other liquids being able to sustain a red heat in Papin s digester; we must admit, that the new atmosphere would at last arrive at such a degree of weight, that the water which had not hitherto evaporated would cease to boil, and, of consequence, would remain liquid; so that, even upon this supposition, as in all others of the same nature, the increasing gravity of the atmosphere would find certain limits which it could not exceed. We might even extend these reflections greatly farther, and examine what change might be produced in such situations upon stones, salts, and the greater part of the fusible substances which compose the mass of our earth. These would be softened, fused, and changed into fluids, &c.: But these speculations carry me from my object, to which I hasten to return. By a contrary supposition to the one we have been forming, if the earth were suddenly transported into a very cold region, the water which at present composes our seas, rivers, and springs, and probably the greater number of the fluids we are acquainted with, would be converted into solid mountains and hard rocks, at first diaphanous and homogeneous, like rock crystal, but which, in time, becoming mixed with foreign and heterogeneous substances, would become opaque stones of various colors. In this case, the air, or at least some part of the aeriform fluids which now compose the mass of our atmosphere, would doubtless lose its elasticity for want of a sufficient temperature to retain them in that state: They would return to the liquid state of existence, and new liquids would be formed, of whose properties we cannot, at present, form the most distant idea. These two opposite suppositions give a distinct proof of the following corollaries: First, That solidity, liquidity, and aeriform elasticity, are only three different states of existence of the same matter, or three particular modifications which almost all substances are susceptible of assuming successively, and which solely depend upon the degree of temperature to which they are exposed; or, in other words, upon the quantity of caloric with which they are penetrated. 6 2dly, That it is extremely probable that air is a fluid naturally existing in a state of vapor; or, as we may better express it, that our atmosphere is composed of all the fluids which are susceptible of the vaporous or permanently elastic state, in the usual temperature, and under the common pressure. 3dly, That it is not impossible we may discover, in our atmosphere, certain substances naturally very compact, even metals themselves; as a metallic substance, for instance, only a little more volatile than mercury, might exist in that situation. Amongst the fluids with which we are acquainted, some, as water and alcohol, are susceptible of mixing with each other in all proportions; whereas others, on the contrary, as quicksilver, water, and oil, can only form a momentary union; and, after being mixed 6 The degree of pressure which they undergo must be taken into account. Translator. 85

88 together, separate and arrange themselves according to their specific gravities. The same thing ought to, or at least may, take place in the atmosphere. It is possible, and even extremely probable, that, both at the first creation, and every day, gasses are formed, which are difficultly miscible with atmospheric air, and are continually separating from it. If these gasses be specifically lighter than the general atmospheric mass, they must, of course, gather in the higher regions, and form strata that float upon the common air. The phenomena which accompany igneous meteors induce me to believe, that there exists in the upper parts of our atmosphere a stratum of inflammable fluid in contact with those strata of air which produce the phenomena of the aurora borealis and other fiery meteors. I mean hereafter to pursue this subject in a separate treatise. Questions and Problems, etc. 1. Distinguish between phlogiston (which Lavoisier rejects) and caloric (which he does not reject). Is Lavoisier s acceptance of caloric as an element a violation of his own standard by which he rejects phlogiston? 2. Though Lavoisier considers caloric as an element, it has a special characteristic (or characteristics) that seems to separate it (and light) as a special kind of element. What is special about caloric (and light)? * * * * * 86

89 Is Heat a Substance? Two Papers to the Contrary Sir Humphry Davy Excerpts from An Essay on Heat, Light, and the Combinations of Light 1 Matter is possessed of the power of attraction. By this power the particles of bodies tend to approximate, and to exist in a state of contiguity. The particles of all bodies with which we are acquainted can be made to approach nearer to each other by peculiar means, that is, the specific gravity of all bodies can be increased by diminishing their temperatures. Consequently (on the supposition of the impenetrability of matter), the particles of bodies are not in actual contact. There must then act on the corpuscles of bodies some other power which prevents their actual contact; this may be called repulsion. The phenomena of repulsion have been supposed, by the greater part of chemical philosophers, to depend on a peculiar elastic fluid, to which the names of latent heat 2 and caloric have been given. The peculiar modes of existence of bodies solidity, fluidity, and gasity depend (according to the calorists) on the quantity of the fluid of heat entering into their composition; this substance insinuating itself between their corpuscles, separating them from each other, and preventing their actual contact, is by them supposed to be the cause of repulsion. Other philosophers, dissatisfied with the evidences produced in favor of the existence of this fluid, and perceiving the generation of heat by friction and percussion, have supposed it to be motion. Considering the discovery of the true cause of the repulsive power as highly important to philosophy, I have endeavored to investigate this art of chemical science by experiments: From these experiments (of which I am now about to give a detail) I conclude that heat, or the power of repulsion, is not matter.... Experiment I The Phenomena of Repulsion Are Not Dependent on a Peculiar Elastic Fluid for Their Existence, or Caloric Does not Exist Without considering the effects of the repulsive power on bodies, or endeavoring to prove from these effects that it is motion, I shall attempt to demonstrate by experiments that it is not matter; and in doing this, I shall use the method called by mathematicians reductio ad absurdum. Let heat be considered as matter, and let it be granted that the temperature of bodies cannot be increased unless their [heat] capacities are diminished from some cause, 1 [Contributions to Physical and Medical Knowledge, Principally from the West of England, collected by Thomas Beddoes, M.D., 1799, taken from William Francis Magie, ed., A Source Book in Physics (New York: McGraw-Hill, 1935), ]. 2 [ Latent heat is here used in a non-technical sense, meaning only heat that is hidden. Black s papers on specific and latent heat were not published until 1803.] 87

90 or heat added to them from some bodies in contact. Now the temperatures of bodies are uniformly raised by friction and percussion. And since an increase of temperature is consequent on friction and percussion, it must consequently be generated in one of these modes: First, either from a diminution of the capacities of the acting bodies from some change induced in them by friction, a change producing in them an increase of temperature. Secondly, or from heat communicated from the decomposition of the oxygen gas in contact by one or both of the bodies, and then friction must effect some change in them (similar to an increase of temperature) enabling them to decompose oxygen gas, and they must be found after friction partially or wholly oxydated. Thirdly, or from a communication of caloric from the bodies in contact, produced by a change induced by friction in the acting bodies, enabling them to attract caloric from the surrounding bodies. Now first let the increase of temperature produced by friction and percussion be supposed to arise from a diminution of the capacities of the acting bodies. In this case it is evident some change must be induced in the bodies by the action, which [change] lessens their capacities and increases their temperatures.... Experiment II I procured two parallelopipedons of ice of the temperature of 29, six inches long, two wide, and two-thirds of an inch thick; they were fastened by wires to two bars of iron. By a peculiar mechanism their surfaces were placed in contact and kept in a continued and violent friction for some minutes. They were almost entirely converted into water, which water was collected, and its temperature ascertained to be 35, after remaining in an atmosphere of a lower temperature for some minutes. The fusion [i.e., melting] took place only at the plane of contact of the two pieces of ice, and no bodies were in friction but ice. From this experiment it is evident that ice by friction is converted into water, and, according to the supposition, its capacity is diminished; but it is a well-known fact, that the capacity of water for heat is much greater than that of ice; and ice must have an absolute quantity of heat added to it before it can be converted into water. Friction consequently does not diminish the capacities of bodies for heat. From this experiment it is likewise evident that the increase of temperature consequent on friction cannot arise from the decomposition of the oxygen gas in contact, for ice has no attraction for oxygen. Since the increase of temperature consequent on friction cannot arise from the diminution of capacity or oxydation of the acting bodies, the only remaining supposition is that it arises from an absolute quantity of heat added to them, which heat must be attracted from the bodies in contact. Then friction must induce some change in bodies, enabling them to attract heat from the bodies in contact. 88

91 Experiment III I procured a piece of clock-work so constructed as to be set to work in the exhausted receiver; 3 one of the external wheels of this machine came in contact with a thin metallic plate. A considerable degree of sensible heat was produced by friction between the wheel and plate when the machine worked uninsulated from bodies capable of communicating heat. I next procured a small piece of ice; round the superior edge of this a small canal was made and filled with water. The machine was placed on the ice, but not in contact with the water. Thus disposed, the whole was placed under the receiver (which had been previously filled with carbonic acid), a quantity of potash (i.e., caustic vegetable alkali) being at the same time introduced. The receiver was now exhausted. From the exhaustion, and from the attraction of the carbonic acid gas by the potash, a vacuum nearly perfect was, I believe, made. The machine was now set to work. The wax rapidly melting proved the increase of temperature. 4 Caloric then was collected by friction; which caloric, on the supposition, was communicated by the bodies in contact with the machine. In this experiment, ice was the only body in contact with the machine. Had this ice given out caloric, the water on the top of it must have been frozen. The water on the top of it was not frozen; consequently the ice did not give out caloric. The caloric could not come from the bodies in contact with the ice; for it must have passed through the ice to penetrate the machine, and an addition of caloric to the ice would have converted it into water. Heat, when produced by friction, cannot be collected from the bodies in contact, and it was proved by the second experiment that the increase of temperature consequent on friction cannot arise from diminution of capacity or from oxydation. But if it be considered as matter, it must be produced in one of these modes. Since (as is demonstrated by these experiments) it is produced in neither of these modes, it cannot be considered as matter. It has then been experimentally demonstrated that caloric, or the matter of heat, does not exist. Solids, by long and violent friction, become expanded and, if of a higher temperature than our bodies, affect the sensory organs with the peculiar sensation known by the common name of heat. Since bodies become expanded by friction, it is evident that their corpuscles must move or separate from each other. Now a motion or vibration of the corpuscles of bodies must be necessarily generated by friction and percussion. Therefore we may reasonably conclude that this motion or vibration is heat, or the repulsive power. Heat, then, or that power which prevents the actual contact of the corpuscles of bodies, and which is the cause of our peculiar sensations of heat and cold, may be defined as a peculiar motion, probably a vibration, of the corpuscles of bodies, tending to separate them. It may with propriety be called the repulsive motion. 3 [That is, a sealed receptacle that can be evacuated of air, probably with a vacuum pump. This evacuation is executed on the following page.] 4 [Evidently Davy failed to mention that there is also a piece of wax somewhere within the receiver.] 89

92 Benjamin Thompson (Count Rumford) Excerpt from Heat is a Form of Motion: An Experiment in Boring Cannon 1 It frequently happens that in the ordinary affairs and occupations of life opportunities present themselves of contemplation of some of the most curious operations of nature; and very interesting philosophical experiments might often be made, almost without trouble or expense, by means of machinery contrived for the mere mechanical purposes of the arts and manufactures.... Being engaged lately in superintending the boring of cannon in the workshops of the military arsenal at Munich, I was struck with the very considerable degree of heat which a brass gun acquires, in a short time, in being bored; and with the still more intense heat (much greater than that of boiling water, as I found by experiment) of the metallic chips separated from it by the borer. The more I meditated on these phenomena, the more they appeared to me to be curious and interesting. A thorough investigating of them seemed even to bid fair to give a farther insight into the hidden nature of heat, and to enable us to form some reasonable conjectures respecting the existence, or non-existence, of an igneous fluid a subject on which the opinions of philosophers have, in all ages, been much divided. In order that the [Royal] Society may have clear and distinct ideas of the speculations and also of the specific objects of philosophical investigation they suggested to me, I must beg leave to state them at some length and in such manner as I shall think best to answer this purpose. From whence comes the heat actually produced in the mechanical operation above mentioned? Is it furnished by the metallic chips which are separated by the borer from the solid mass of metal? If this were the case, then, according to the modern doctrines of latent heat and of caloric, the capacity for the heat of the parts of the metal, so reduced to chips, ought not only to be changed, but the change undergone by them should be sufficiently great to account for all the heat produced. But no such change had taken place; for I found, upon taking equal quantities, by weight, of these chips, and of thin slips of the same block of metal separated by means of a fine saw, and putting them at the same temperature (that of boiling water) into equal quantities of cold water (that is to say, at the temperature of 59½ F), the portion of the water into which the chips were put was not, to all appearance, heated either less or more than the other portion in which the slips of metal were to put. This experiment being repeated several times, the results were always so nearly the same that I could not determine whether any or what change had been produced in the metal, in regard to its capacity for heat, by being reduced to chips by the borer. From hence it is evident that the heat produced could not possibly have been furnished at the expense of the latent heat of the metallic chips.... By meditating on the results of all these experiments, we are naturally brought to that great question which has so often been the subject of speculation among philosophers; namely: What is heat? Is there any such thing as an igneous fluid? Is there anything that 1 [Philosophical Transactions (vol. 88), 1798, from William Francis Magie, ed., A Source Book in Physics, , ]. 90

93 can with propriety be called caloric? We have seen that a very considerable quantity of heat may be excited in the friction of two metallic surfaces and given off in a constant stream or flux, in all directions, without iteration or intermission, and without any signs of diminution or exhaustion. From whence came the heat which was continually given off in this manner in the foregoing experiments? Was it furnished by the small particles of metal, detached from the larger solid masses, on their being rubbed together? This, as we have already seen, could not possibly have been the case. Was it furnished by the air? This could not have been the case; for in three of the experiments, the machinery being kept immersed in water, the access of the air of the atmosphere was completely prevented. Was it furnished by the water which surrounded the machinery? That this could not have been the case is evident: first, because this water was continually receiving heat from the machinery and could not, at the same time, be giving to, and receiving heat from, the same body; and secondly, because there was no chemical decomposition of any part of this water. Had any such decomposition taken place (which indeed could not reasonably have been expected), one of its component elastic fluids (most probably inflammable air) must, at the same time, have been set at liberty, and in making its escape into the atmosphere would have been detected; but though I frequently examined the water to see if any air bubbles rose up through it, and had even made preparations for catching them in order to examine them if any should appear, I could perceive none; nor was there any sign of decomposition of any kind whatever, or other chemical process, going on in the water. Is it possible that the heat could have been supplied by means of the iron bar to the end of which the blunt steel borer was fixed? Or by the small neck of gun metal by which the hollow cylinder was united to the cannon? These suppositions appear more improbable even than either of these before mentioned; for heat was continually going off, or out of the machinery, by both these passages, during the whole time the experiment lasted. And, in reasoning on this subject, we must not forget to consider that most remarkable circumstance: that the source of the heat generated by friction in these experiments appeared evidently to be inexhaustible. It is indeed hardly necessary to add that anything which any insulated body, or system of bodies, can continue to furnish without limitation cannot possibly be a material substance, and it appears to me to be extremely difficult, if not quite impossible, to form any distinct idea of anything capable of being excited and communicated in the manner the heat was excited and communicated in these, except it be MOTION. 2 2 [Despite the publication of these papers, the notion that heat is a substance endured for more than half a century after, so you will see it in many of the authors we ll be reading in the next few months. Black, for one, argued that if heat is a motion, then one would then expect the densest bodies to have the greatest heat capacities the idea being that a denser body would have particles that would be harder to get moving whereas the reverse is often the case. Nevertheless, the position of Davy and Rumford has been accepted by modern science since the mid-to-late nineteenth century.] 91

94 Lavoisier Elements of Chemistry PART I CHAPTER VIII Of the Radical Principle of Water, and of its Decomposition by Charcoal and Iron. Until very lately, water has always been thought a simple substance, insomuch that the older chemists considered it as an element. Such it undoubtedly was to them, as they were unable to decompose it; or, at least, since the decomposition which took place daily before their eyes was entirely unnoticed. But we mean to prove that water is by no means a simple or elementary substance. I shall not here pretend to give the history of this recent and hitherto contested discovery, which is detailed in the Memoirs of the Academy for 1781, but shall only bring forward the principal proofs of the decomposition and composition of water; and I may venture to say that these will be convincing to such as consider them impartially. Experiment First. Having fixed the glass tube EF (Fig. 11.), of from 8 to 12 lines diameter, across a furnace, with a small inclination from E to F, sealed the superior extremity E to the glass retort A, containing a determinate quantity of distilled water, and to the inferior extremity F, the worm SS fixed into the neck of the doubly tubulated bottle H, which has the bent tube KK adapted to one of its openings, in such a manner as to convey such aeriform fluids or gasses as may be disengaged, during the experiment, into a proper apparatus for determining their quantity and nature. To render the success of this experiment certain, it is necessary that the tube EF be made of well annealed and difficultly fusible glass, and that it be coated with a lute composed of clay mixed with powdered stone-ware; besides which, it must be supported about its middle by means of an iron bar passed through the furnace, lest it should soften 92

95 and bend during the experiment. A tube of China-ware, or porcelain, would answer better than one of glass for this experiment, were it not difficult to procure one so entirely free from pores as to prevent the passage of air or of vapors. When things are thus arranged, a fire is lighted in the furnace EFCD, which is supported of such a strength as to keep the tube EF red hot, but not to make it melt; and, at the same time, such a fire is kept up in the furnace VVXX, as to keep the water in the retort A continually boiling. In proportion as the water in the retort A is evaporated, it fills the tube EF and drives out the air it contained by the tube KK; the aqueous gas formed by evaporation is condensed by cooling in the worm SS, and falls, drop by drop, into the tubed bottle H. Having continued this operation until all the water be evaporated from the retort, and having carefully emptied all the vessels employed, we find that a quantity of water has passed over into the bottle H, exactly equal to what was before contained in the retort A, without any disengagement of gas whatsoever: So that this experiment turns out to be a simple distillation; and the result would have been exactly the same, if the water had been run from one vessel into the other, through the tube EF, without having undergone the intermediate incandescence. Experiment Second. The apparatus being disposed, as in the former experiment, 28 grs. of charcoal, broken into moderately small parts, and which has previously been exposed for a long time to a red heat in close vessels, are introduced into the tube EF. Everything else is managed as in the preceding experiment. The water contained in the retort A is distilled, as in the former experiment, and, being condensed in the worm, falls into the bottle H; but, at the same time, a considerable quantity of gas is disengaged, which, escaping by the tube KK, is received in a convenient apparatus for that purpose. After the operation is finished, we find nothing but a few atoms of ashes remaining in the tube EF; the 28 grs. of charcoal having entirely disappeared. When the disengaged gasses are carefully examined, they are found to weigh grs. 1 ; these are of two kinds, viz. 144 cubical inches of carbonic acid gas, weighing 100 grs. and 380 cubical inches of a very light gas, weighing only 13.7 grs. which takes fire when in contact with air, by the approach of a lighted body; and, when the water which has passed over into the bottle H is carefully examined, it is found to have lost 85.7 grs. of its weight. Thus, in this experiment, 85.7 grs. of water, joined to 28 grs. of charcoal, have combined in such a way as to form 100 grs. of carbonic acid, and 13.7 grs. of a particular gas capable of being burnt. I have already shown that 100 grs. of carbonic acid gas consists of 72 grs. of oxygen, combined with 28 grs. of charcoal; hence the 28 grs. of charcoal placed in the glass tube have acquired 72 grs. of oxygen from the water; and it follows that 85.7 grs. of water are composed of 72 grs. of oxygen, combined with 13.7 grs. of a gas susceptible of 1 In the latter part of this work will be found a particular account of the processes necessary for separating the different kinds of gasses, and for determining their quantities. Author. 93

96 combustion. We shall see presently that this gas cannot possibly have been disengaged from the charcoal, and must, consequently, have been produced from the water. I have suppressed some circumstances in the above account of this experiment, which would only have complicated and obscured its results in the mind of the reader. For instance, the inflammable gas dissolves a very small part of the charcoal, by which means its weight is somewhat augmented, and that of the carbonic gas proportionally diminished. Although the alteration produced by this circumstance is very inconsiderable, yet I have thought it necessary to determine its effects by rigid calculation, and to report, as above, the results of the experiment in its simplified state, as if this circumstance had not happened. At any rate, should any doubts remain respecting the consequences I have drawn from this experiment, they will be fully dissipated by the following experiments, which I am going to adduce in support of my opinion. Experiment Third. The apparatus being disposed exactly as in the former experiment, with this difference, that instead of the 28 grs. of charcoal, the tube EF is filled with 274 grs. of soft iron in thin plates, rolled up spirally. The tube is made red hot by means of its furnace, and the water in the retort A is kept constantly boiling till it be all evaporated, and has passed through the tube EF, so as to be condensed in the bottle H. No carbonic acid gas is disengaged in this experiment, instead of which we obtain 416 cubical inches, or 15 grs. of inflammable gas, thirteen times lighter than atmospheric air. By examining the water which has been distilled, it is found to have lost 100 grs. and the 274 grs. of iron confined in the tube are found to have acquired 85 grs. additional weight, and its magnitude is considerably augmented. The iron is now hardly at all attractable by the magnet; it dissolves in acids without effervescence; and, in short, it is converted into a black oxide, precisely similar to that which has been burnt in oxygen gas. In this experiment we have a true oxidation of iron, by means of water, exactly similar to that produced in air by the assistance of heat. One hundred grains of water having been decomposed, 85 grs. of oxygen have combined with the iron, so as to convert it into the state of black oxide, and 15 grs. of a peculiar inflammable gas are disengaged: From all this it clearly follows, that water is composed of oxygen combined with the base of an inflammable gas, in the respective proportions of 85 parts, by weight of the former, to 15 parts of the latter. Thus water, besides the oxygen, which is one of its elements in common with many other substances, contains another element as its constituent base or radical, and for which we must find an appropriate term. None that we could think of seemed better adapted than the word hydrogen, which signifies the generative principle of water, from υδορ (aqua), and γεινομας (gignor). 2 We call the combination of this element with 2 This expression Hydrogen has been very severely criticized by some, who pretend that it signifies engendered by water, and not that which engenders water. The experiments related in this chapter prove, that, when water is decomposed, hydrogen is produced, and that, when hydrogen is combined with oxygen, water is produced: So that we may say, with equal truth, that water is produced from hydrogen, or hydrogen is produced from water. Author. 94

97 caloric hydrogen gas; and the term hydrogen expresses the base of that gas, or the radical of water. This experiment furnishes us with a new combustible body, or, in other words, a body which has so much affinity with oxygen as to draw it from its connection with caloric, and to decompose air or oxygen gas. This combustible body has itself so great affinity with caloric, that, unless when engaged in a combination with some other body, it always subsists in the aeriform or gaseous state, in the usual temperature and pressure of our atmosphere. In this state of gas it is about 1/13 of the weight of an equal bulk of atmospheric air; it is not absorbed by water, though it is capable of holding a small quantity of that fluid in solution, and it is incapable of being used for respiration. As the property this gas possesses, in common with all other combustible bodies, is nothing more than the power of decomposing air, and carrying off its oxygen from the caloric with which it was combined, it is easily understood that it cannot burn, unless in contact with air or oxygen gas. Hence, when we set fire to a bottle full of this gas, it burns gently, first at the neck of the bottle, and then in the inside of it, in proportion as the external air gets in: This combustion is slow and successive, and only takes place at the surface of contact between the two gasses. It is quite different when the two gasses are mixed before they are set on fire: If, for instance, after having introduced one part of oxygen gas into a narrow-mouthed bottle, we fill it up with two parts of hydrogen gas, and bring a lighted taper, or other burning body, to the mouth of the bottle, the combustion of the two gasses takes place instantaneously with a violent explosion. This experiment ought only to be made in a bottle of very strong green glass, holding not more than a pint, and wrapped round with twine, otherwise the operator will be exposed to great danger from the rupture of the bottle, of which the fragments will be thrown about with great force. If all that has been related above, concerning the decomposition of water, be exactly conformable to truth; if, as I have endeavored to prove, that substance be really composed of hydrogen, as its proper constituent element, combined with oxygen, it ought to follow, that, by reuniting these two elements together, we should recompose water; and that this actually happens may be judged of by the following experiment. Experiment Fourth. I took a large crystal balloon A (Fig. 5) holding about 30 pints, having a large opening to which was cemented the plate of copper BC, pierced with four holes in which four tubes terminate. The first tube, H h, is intended to be adapted to an air pump, by which the balloon is to be exhausted of its air. The second tube gg, communicates, by its extremity MM, with a reservoir of oxygen gas, with which the balloon is to be filled. The third tube d D d', communicates, by its extremity d NN, with a reservoir of hydrogen gas. The extremity d' of this tube terminates in a capillary opening, through which the hydrogen gas contained in the reservoir is forced, with a moderate degree of quickness, by the pressure of one or two inches of water. The fourth tube contains a metallic wire FL, having a knob at its extremity L, intended for giving an electrical spark from L to d', on purpose to set fire to the hydrogen gas: This wire is moveable in the tube, that we may be able to separate the knob L from the extremity d' of the tube D d'. The three tubes d D d', gg, and H h, are all provided with stopcocks. 95

98 That the hydrogen gas and oxygen gas may be as much as possible deprived of water, they are made to pass, in their way to the balloon A, through the tubes MM, NN, of about an inch diameter, and filled with salts, which, from their deliquescent nature, greedily attract the moisture of the air: Such are the acetate of potash, and the muriate or nitrate of lime. 3 These salts must only be reduced to a coarse powder, lest they run into lumps, and prevent the gasses from getting through their interstices. We must be provided beforehand with a sufficient quantity of oxygen gas, carefully purified from all admixture of carbonic acid, by long contact with a solution of potash. 4 We must likewise have a double quantity of hydrogen gas, carefully purified in the same manner by long contact with a solution of potash in water. The best way of obtaining this gas free from mixture is by decomposing water with very pure soft iron, as directed in Exp. 3. of this chapter. Having adjusted everything properly, as above directed, the tube H h is adapted to an air-pump, and the balloon A is exhausted of its air. We next admit the oxygen gas so as to fill the balloon, and then, by means of pressure, as is before mentioned, force a small stream of hydrogen gas through its tube D d', which we immediately set on fire by an electric spark. By means of the above described apparatus, we can continue the mutual combustion of these two gasses for a long time, as we have the power of supplying them to the balloon from their reservoirs, in proportion as they are consumed. I have in another place 5 given a description of the apparatus used in this experiment, and have explained the manner of ascertaining the quantities of the gasses consumed with the most scrupulous exactitude. In proportion to the advancement of the combustion, there is a deposition of water upon the inner surface of the balloon or matrass A: The water gradually increases in 3 See the nature of these salts in the second part of this book. Author. 4 By potash is here meant, pure or caustic alkali, deprived of carbonic acid by means of quick-lime: In general, we may observe here, that all the alkalis and earths must invariably be considered as in their pure or caustic state, unless otherwise expressed. Translator. The method of obtaining this pure alkali of potash will be given in the sequel. Author. 5 See the third part of this work. Author. 96

99 quantity, and, gathering into large drops, runs down to the bottom of the vessel. It is easy to ascertain the quantity of water collected, by weighing the balloon both before and after the experiment. Thus we have a twofold verification of our experiment, by ascertaining both the quantities of the gasses employed and of the water formed by their combustion: These two quantities must be equal to each other. By an operation of this kind, Mr. Meusnier and I ascertained that it required 85 parts, by weight, of oxygen, united to 15 parts of hydrogen, to compose 100 parts of water. This experiment, which has not hitherto been published, was made in the presence of a numerous committee from the Royal Academy. We exerted the most scrupulous attention to its accuracy, and have reason to believe that the above propositions cannot vary a two hundredth part from absolute truth. From these experiments, both analytical and synthetic, we may now affirm that we have ascertained, with as much certainty as is possible in physical or chemical subjects, that water is not a simple elementary substance, but is composed of two elements, oxygen and hydrogen; which elements, when existing separately, have so strong affinity for caloric, as only to subsist under the form of gas in the common temperature and pressure of our atmosphere. This decomposition and recomposition of water is perpetually operating before our eyes, in the temperature of the atmosphere, by means of compound elective attraction. We shall presently see that the phenomena attendant upon vinous fermentation, putrefaction, and even vegetation, are produced, at least in a certain degree, by decomposition of water. It is very extraordinary that this fact should have hitherto been overlooked by natural philosophers and chemists: Indeed, it strongly proves that in chemistry, as in moral philosophy, it is extremely difficult to overcome prejudices imbibed in early education, and to search for truth in any other road than the one we have been accustomed to follow. I shall finish this chapter by an experiment much less demonstrative than those already related, but which has appeared to make more impression than any other upon the minds of many people. When 16 ounces of alcohol are burnt in an apparatus 6 properly adapted for collecting all the water disengaged during the combustion, we obtain from 17 to 18 ounces of water. As no substance can furnish a product larger than its original bulk, it follows, that something else has united with the alcohol during its combustion; and I have already shown that this must be oxygen, or the base of air. Thus alcohol contains hydrogen, which is one of the elements of water; and the atmospheric air contains oxygen, which is the other element necessary to the composition of water. This experiment is a new proof that water is a compound substance. 6 See an account of this apparatus in the third part of this work. Author. 97

100 Lavoisier Elements of Chemistry PART I CHAPTER V Of the Decomposition of Oxygen Gas by Sulfur, Phosphorus, and Charcoal and of the Formation of Acids in general. In performing experiments, it is a necessary principle, which ought never to be deviated from, that they be simplified as much as possible, and that every circumstance capable of rendering their results complicated be carefully removed. Wherefore, in the experiments which form the object of this chapter, we have never employed atmospheric air, which is not a simple substance. It is true that the azotic gas, which forms a part of its mixture, appears to be merely passive during combustion and calcination; but, besides that it retards these operations very considerably, we are not certain but it may even alter their results in some circumstances; for which reason I have thought it necessary to remove even this possible cause of doubt, by only making use of pure oxygen gas in the following experiments, which show the effects produced by combustion in that gas; and I shall advert to such differences as take place in the results of these, when the oxygen gas, or pure vital air, is mixed, in different proportions, with azotic gas. Having filled a bell-glass (Fig. 3), of between five and six pints measure, with oxygen gas, I removed it from the water trough, where it was filled, into the quicksilver bath, by means of a shallow glass dish slipped underneath, and having dried the mercury, I introduced 61¼ grains of Kunkel's phosphorus in two little China cups, like that represented at D, Fig. 3. under the glass A; and that I might set fire to each of the portions of phosphorus separately, and to prevent the one from catching fire from the other, one of the dishes was covered with a piece of flat glass. I next raised the quicksilver in the bellglass up to E F, by sucking out a sufficient portion of the gas by means of the syphon G H I. After this, by means of the crooked iron wire (Fig. 16.), made red hot, I set fire to the two portions of phosphorus successively, first burning that portion which was not covered with the piece of glass. The combustion was extremely rapid, attended with a very brilliant flame, and considerable disengagement of light and heat. In consequence of the great heat induced, the gas was at first much dilated, but soon after the mercury returned to its level, and a considerable absorption of gas took place; at the same time, the whole inside of the glass became covered with white light flakes of concrete phosphoric acid. 98

101 At the beginning of the experiment, the quantity of oxygen gas, reduced, as above directed, to a common standard, amounted to 162 cubic inches; and, after the combustion was finished, only 23¼ cubic inches, likewise reduced to the standard, remained; so that the quantity of oxygen gas absorbed during the combustion was 138¾ cubic inches, equal to grains. A part of the phosphorus remained unconsumed in the bottom of the cups, which being washed on purpose to separate the acid, weighed about 16¼ grains; so that about 45 grains of phosphorus had been burned: But, as it is hardly possible to avoid an error of one or two grains, I leave the quantity so far qualified. Hence, as nearly 45 grains of phosphorus had, in this experiment, united with grains of oxygen, and as no gravitating matter could have escaped through the glass, we have a right to conclude, that the weight of the substance resulting from the combustion in form of white flakes, must equal that of the phosphorus and oxygen employed, which amounts to grains. And we shall presently find, that these flakes consisted entirely of a solid or concrete acid. When we reduce these weights to hundredth parts, it will be found, that 100 parts of phosphorus require 154 parts of oxygen for saturation, and that this combination will produce 254 parts of concrete phosphoric acid, in form of white fleecy flakes. This experiment proves, in the most convincing manner, that, at a certain degree of temperature, oxygen possesses a stronger elective attraction, or affinity, for phosphorus than for caloric; that, in consequence of this, the phosphorus attracts the base of oxygen gas from the caloric, which, being set free, spreads itself over the surrounding bodies. But, though this experiment be so far perfectly conclusive, it is not sufficiently rigorous, as, in the apparatus described, it is impossible to ascertain the weight of the flakes of concrete acid which are formed; we can therefore only determine this by calculating the weights of oxygen and phosphorus employed; but as, in physics, and in chemistry, it is not allowable to suppose what is capable of being ascertained by direct experiment, I thought it necessary to repeat this experiment, as follows, upon a larger scale, and by means of a different apparatus. I took a large glass balloon (Fig. 4.) with an opening three inches diameter, to which was fitted a crystal stopper ground with emery, and pierced with two holes for the tubes yyy, xxx. Before shutting the balloon with its stopper, I introduced the support BC, surmounted by the china cup D, containing 150 grs. of phosphorus; the stopper was then fitted to the opening of the balloon, coated with a fat lute, and covered with slips of linen spread with quick-lime and white of eggs: When the lute was perfectly dry, the weight of the whole apparatus was determined to within a grain, or a grain and a half. I next exhausted the balloon, by means of an air pump applied to the tube xxx, and then introduced oxygen gas by means of the tube yyy, having a stop cock adapted to it. This kind of experiment is most readily and most exactly performed by means of the hydro-pneumatic machine described by Mr. Meusnier and me in the Memoirs of the Academy for 1782, p. 466, and explained in the 99

102 latter part of this work, with several important additions and corrections since made to it by Mr. Meusnier. With this instrument we can readily ascertain, in the most exact manner, both the quantity of oxygen gas introduced into the balloon, and the quantity consumed during the course of the experiment. When all things were properly disposed, I set fire to the phosphorus with a burning glass. The combustion was extremely rapid, accompanied with a bright flame and much heat; as the operation went on, large quantities of white flakes attached themselves to the inner surface of the balloon, so that at last it was rendered quite opaque. The quantity of these flakes at last became so abundant, that, although fresh oxygen gas was continually supplied, which ought to have supported the combustion, yet the phosphorus was soon extinguished. Having allowed the apparatus to cool completely, I first ascertained the quantity of oxygen gas employed, and weighed the balloon accurately, before it was opened. I next washed, dried, and weighed the small quantity of phosphorus remaining in the cup, on purpose to determine the whole quantity of phosphorus consumed in the experiment; this residuum of the phosphorus was of a yellow ochre color. It is evident that by these several precautions I could easily determine, 1st, the weight of the phosphorus consumed; 2d, the weight of the flakes produced by the combustion; and, 3d, the weight of the oxygen which had combined with the phosphorus. This experiment gave very nearly the same results with the former, as it proved that the phosphorus, during its combustion, had absorbed a little more than one and a half its weight of oxygen; and I learned with more certainty, that the weight of the new substance, produced in the experiment, exactly equaled the sum of the weights of the phosphorus consumed, and oxygen absorbed, which indeed was easily determinable a priori. If the oxygen gas employed be pure, the residuum after combustion is as pure as the gas employed; this proves that nothing escapes from the phosphorus, capable of altering the purity of the oxygen gas, and that the only action of the phosphorus is to separate the oxygen from the caloric, with which it was before united. I mentioned above, that when any combustible body is burnt in a hollow sphere of ice, or in an apparatus properly constructed upon that principle, the quantity of ice melted during the combustion is an exact measure of the quantity of caloric disengaged. Upon this head, the memoir given by M. de la Place and me, Aº. 1780, p. 355, may be consulted. Having submitted the combustion of phosphorus to this trial, we found that one pound of phosphorus melted a little more than 100 pounds of ice during its combustion. The combustion of phosphorus succeeds equally well in atmospheric air as in oxygen gas, with this difference, that the combustion is vastly slower, being retarded by the large proportion of azotic gas mixed with the oxygen gas, and that only about onefifth part of the air employed is absorbed, because as the oxygen gas only is absorbed, the proportion of the azotic gas becomes so great toward the close of the experiment, as to put an end to the combustion. I have already shown, that phosphorus is changed by combustion into an extremely light, white, flakey matter; and its properties are entirely altered by this transformation: From being insoluble in water, it becomes not only soluble, but so greedy of moisture as to attract the humidity of the air with astonishing rapidity; by this means it is converted into a liquid, considerably more dense, and of more specific gravity than 100

103 water. In the state of phosphorus before combustion, it had scarcely any sensible taste; by its union with oxygen it acquires an extremely sharp and sour taste. In a word, from one of the class of combustible bodies it is changed into an incombustible substance, and becomes one of those bodies called acids. This property of a combustible substance to be converted into an acid, by the addition of oxygen, we shall presently find belongs to a great number of bodies: Wherefore, strict logic requires that we should adopt a common term for indicating all these operations which produce analogous results; this is the true way to simplify the study of science, as it would be quite impossible to bear all its specific details in the memory, if they were not classically arranged. For this reason, we shall distinguish this conversion of phosphorus into an acid, by its union with oxygen, and in general every combination of oxygen with a combustible substance, by the term of oxygenation: from which I shall adopt the verb to oxygenate, and of consequence shall say, that in oxygenating phosphorus we convert it into an acid. Sulfur is likewise a combustible body, or, in other words, it is a body which possesses the power of decomposing oxygen gas, by attracting the oxygen from the caloric with which it was combined. This can very easily be proved, by means of experiments quite similar to those we have given with phosphorus; but it is necessary to premise, that in these operations with sulfur, the same accuracy of result is not to be expected as with phosphorus; because the acid which is formed by the combustion of sulfur is difficultly condensable, and because sulfur burns with more difficulty, and is soluble in the different gasses. But I can safely assert, from my own experiments, that sulfur in burning absorbs oxygen gas; that the resulting acid is considerably heavier than the sulfur burnt; that its weight is equal to the sum of the weights of the sulfur which has been burnt, and of the oxygen absorbed; and, lastly that this acid is weighty, incombustible, and miscible with water in all proportions: The only uncertainty remaining upon this head, is with regard to the proportions of sulfur and of oxygen which enter into the composition of the acid. Charcoal, which, from all our present knowledge regarding it, must be considered as a simple combustible body, has likewise the property of decomposing oxygen gas, by absorbing its base from the caloric: But the acid resulting from this combustion does not condense in the common temperature; under the pressure of our atmosphere, it remains in the state of gas, and requires a large proportion of water to combine with or be dissolved in. This acid has, however, all the known properties of other acids, though in a weaker degree, and combines, like them, with all the bases which are susceptible of forming neutral salts. The combustion of charcoal in oxygen gas may be effected like that of phosphorus in the bell glass (Fig. 3) placed over mercury: but, as the heat of red hot iron is not sufficient to set fire to the charcoal, we must add a small morsel of tinder, with a minute particle of phosphorus, in the same manner as directed in the experiment for the combustion of iron. A detailed account of this experiment will be found in the memoirs of the academy for 1781, p By that experiment it appears that 28 parts by weight of charcoal require 72 parts of oxygen for saturation and that the aeriform acid produced is precisely equal in weight to the sum of the weights of the charcoal and oxygen gas employed. This aeriform acid was called fixed or fixable air by the chemists who first 101

104 discovered it; they did not then know whether it was air resembling that of the atmosphere, or some other elastic fluid, vitiated and corrupted by combustion; but since it is now ascertained to be an acid, formed like all others by the oxygenation of its peculiar base, it is obvious that the name of fixed air is quite ineligible. 1 By burning charcoal in the apparatus mentioned [p. 100], Mr. de la Place and I found that one lib. of charcoal melted 96 libs. 6 oz. of ice; that, during the combustion, 2 libs. 9 oz. 1 gros. 10 grs. of oxygen were absorbed, and that 3 libs. 9 oz. 1 gros. 10 grs. of acid gas were formed. This gas weighs parts of a grain for each cubic inch, in the common standard temperature and pressure mentioned above, so that 34,242 cube inches of acid gas are produced by the combustion of one pound of charcoal. I might multiply these experiments, and show by a numerous succession of facts that all acids are formed by the combustion of certain substances; but I am prevented from doing so in place, by the plan which I have laid down, of proceeding only from facts already ascertained, to such as are unknown, and of drawing my examples only from circumstances already explained. In the meantime, however, the three examples above cited may suffice for giving a clear and accurate conception of the manner in which acids are formed. By these it may be clearly seen that oxygen is an element common to them all, which constitutes their acidity; and that they differ from each other, according to the nature of the oxygenated or acidified substance. We must therefore, in every acid, carefully distinguish between the acidifiable base, which Mr. de Morveau calls the radical, and the acidifiing principle, or oxygen. CHAPTER VI Of the Nomenclature of Acids in general, and particularly of those drawn from Nitre and Sea-Salt. It becomes extremely easy, from the principles laid down in the preceding chapter, to establish a systematic nomenclature for the acids: The word acid, being used as a generic term, each acid falls to be distinguished in language, as in nature, by the name of its base or radical. Thus, we give the generic name of acids to the products of the combustion or oxygenation of phosphorus, of sulfur, and of charcoal; and these products are respectively named the phosphoric acid, the sulfuric acid, and the carbonic acid. There is however, a remarkable circumstance in the oxygenation of combustible bodies, and of a part of such bodies as are convertible into acids, that they are susceptible of different degrees of saturation with oxygen, and that the resulting acids, though formed by the union of the same elements, are possessed of different properties, depending upon that difference of proportion. Of this, the phosphoric acid, and more especially the sulfuric, furnishes us with examples. When sulfur is combined with a small proportion of oxygen, it forms, in this first or lower degree of oxygenation, a volatile acid, having a penetrating odor, and possessed of very particular qualities. By a larger proportion of oxygen, it is changed into a fixed, heavy acid, without any odor, and which, by 1 It may be proper to remark, though here omitted by the author, that, in conformity with the general principles of the new nomenclature, this acid is by Mr. Lavoisier and his colleagues called the carbonic acid, and when in the aeriform state carbonic acid gas. Translator. 102

105 combination with other bodies, gives products quite different from those furnished by the former. In this instance, the principles of our nomenclature seem to fail; and it seems difficult to derive such terms from the name of the acidifiable base, as shall distinctly express these two degrees of saturation, or oxygenation, without circumlocution. By reflection, however, upon the subject, or perhaps rather from the necessity of the case, we have thought it allowable to express these varieties in the oxygenation of the acids, by simply varying the termination of their specific names. The volatile acid produced from sulfur was anciently known to Stahl under the name of sulfurous acid. 2 We have preserved that term for this acid from sulfur under-saturated with oxygen; and distinguish the other, or completely saturated or oxygenated acid, by the name of sulfuric acid. We shall therefore say, in this new chemical language, that sulfur, in combining with oxygen, is susceptible of two degrees of saturation; that the first, or lesser degree, constitutes sulfurous acid, which is volatile and penetrating; whilst the second, or higher degree of saturation, produces sulfuric acid, which is fixed and inodorous. We shall adopt this difference of termination for all the acids which assume several degrees of saturation. Hence we have a phosphorous and a phosphoric acid, an acetous and an acetic acid; and so on, for others in similar circumstances. This part of chemical science would have been extremely simple, and the nomenclature of the acids would not have been at all perplexed, as it is now in the old nomenclature, if the base or radical of each acid had been known when the acid itself was discovered. Thus, for instance, phosphorus being a known substance before the discovery of its acid, this latter was rightly distinguished by a term drawn from the name of its acidifiable base. But when, on the contrary, an acid happened to be discovered before its base, or rather, when the acidifiable base from which it was formed remained unknown, names were adopted for the two, which have not the smallest connection; and thus, not only the memory became burthened with useless appellations, but even the minds of students, nay even of experienced chemists, became filled with false ideas, which time and reflection alone is capable of eradicating. We may give an instance of this confusion with respect to the acid sulfur: The former chemists, having procured this acid from the vitriol of iron, gave it the name of the vitriolic acid from the name of the substance which produced it; and they were then ignorant that the acid procured from sulfur by combustion was exactly the same. The same thing happened with the aeriform acid formerly called fixed air; it not being known that this acid was the result of combining charcoal with oxygen, a variety of denominations have been given to it, not one of which conveys just ideas of its nature or origin. We have found it extremely easy to correct and modify the ancient language with respect to these acids proceeding from known bases, having converted the name of vitriolic acid into that of sulfuric, and the name of fixed air into that of carbonic acid; but it is impossible to follow this plan with the acids whose bases are still unknown; with these we have been obliged to use a contrary plan, and, instead of forming the name of the acid from that of its base, have been forced to denominate the unknown base from the 2 The term formerly used by the English chemists for this acid was written sulfureous; but we have thought proper to spell it as above, that it may better conform with the similar terminations of nitrous, carbonous, &c. to be used hereafter. In general, we have used the English terminations ic and ous to translate the terms of the Author which end with ique and cux, with hardly any other alterations. Translator. 103

106 name of the known acid, as happens in the case of the acid which is procured from sea salt. To disengage this acid from the alkaline base with which it is combined, we have only to pour sulfuric acid upon sea-salt, immediately a brisk effervescence takes place, white vapors arise, of a very penetrating odor, and, by only gently heating the mixture, all the acid is driven off. As, in the common temperature and pressure of our atmosphere, this acid is naturally in the state of gas, we must use particular precautions for retaining it in proper vessels. For small experiments, the most simple and most commodious apparatus consists of a small retort G (Fig. 5.) into which the sea-salt is introduced, well dried, 3 we then pour on some concentrated sulfuric acid, and immediately introduce the beak of the retort under little jars or bell-glasses A, (same Fig.), previously filled with quicksilver. In proportion as the acid gas is disengaged, it passes into the jar, and gets to the top of the quicksilver, which it displaces. When the disengagement of the gas slackens, a gentle heat is applied to the retort, and gradually increased till nothing more passes over. This acid gas has a very strong affinity with water, which absorbs an enormous quantity of it, as is proved by introducing a very thin layer of water into the glass which contains the gas; for, in an instant, the whole acid gas disappears, and combines with the water. This latter circumstance is taken advantage of in laboratories and manufactures, on purpose to obtain the acid of sea-salt in a liquid form; and for this purpose the apparatus (Fig. 1.) is employed. It consists, first, of a tubulated retort A, into which the sea-salt, and after it the sulfuric acid, are introduced through the opening H; second, of the balloon or recipient c, b, intended for containing the small quantity of liquid which passes over during the process; and third, of a set of bottles, with two mouths, L, L, L, L, half filled with water, intended for absorbing the gas disengaged by the distillation. This apparatus will be more amply described in the latter part of this work. Although we have not yet been able, either to compose or to decompound this acid of sea-salt, we cannot have the smallest doubt that it, like all other acids, is 3 For this purpose, the operation called decrepitation is used, which consists in subjecting it to nearly a red heat, in a proper vessel, so as to evaporate all its water of crystallization. Translator. 104

107 composed by the union of oxygen with an acidifiable base. We have therefore called this unknown substance the muriatic base, or muriatic radical, deriving this name, after the example of Mr. Bergman and Mr. de Morveau, from the Latin word muria, which was anciently used to signify sea-salt. Thus, without being able exactly to determine the component parts of muriatic acid, we design, by that term, a volatile acid, which retains the form of gas in the common temperature and pressure of our atmosphere, which combines with great facility, and in great quantity, with water, and whose acidifiable base adheres so very intimately with oxygen, that no method has hitherto been devised for separating them. If ever this acidifiable base of the muriatic acid is discovered to be a known substance, though now unknown in that capacity, it will be requisite to change its present denomination for one analogous with that of its base. In common with sulfuric acid, and several other acids, the muriatic is capable of different degrees of oxygenation; but the excess of oxygen produces quite contrary effects upon it from what the same circumstance produces upon the acid of sulfur. The lower degree of oxygenation converts sulfur into a volatile gaseous acid, which only mixes in small proportions with water, whilst a higher oxygenation forms an acid possessing much stronger acid properties, which is very fixed and cannot remain in the state of gas but in a very high temperature, which has no smell, and which mixes in large proportion with water. With muriatic acid, the direct reverse takes place; an additional saturation with oxygen renders it more volatile, of a more penetrating odor, less miscible with water, and diminishes its acid properties. We were at first inclined to have denominated these two degrees of saturation in the same manner as we had done with the acid of sulfur, calling the less oxygenated muriatous acid, and that which is more saturated with oxygen muriatic acid: But, as this latter gives very particular results in its combinations, and as nothing analogous to it is yet known in chemistry, we have left the name of muriatic acid to the less saturated, and give the latter the more compounded appellation of oxygenated muriatic acid. Although the base or radical of the acid which is extracted from nitre or saltpetre be better known, we have judged proper only to modify its name in the same manner with that of the muriatic acid. It is drawn from nitre, by the intervention of sulfuric acid, by a process similar to that described for extracting the muriatic acid, and by means of the same apparatus (Fig. 1.). In proportion as the acid passes over, it is in part condensed in the balloon or recipient, and the rest is absorbed by the water contained in the bottles L, L, L, L; the water becomes first green, then blue, and at last yellow, in proportion to the concentration of the acid. During this operation, a large quantity of oxygen gas, mixed with a small proportion of azotic gas, is disengaged. This acid, like all others, is composed of oxygen, united to an acidifiable base, and is even the first acid in which the existence of oxygen was well ascertained. Its two constituent elements are but weakly united, and are easily separated, by presenting any substance with which oxygen has a stronger affinity than with the acidifiable base peculiar to this acid. By some experiments of this kind, it was first discovered that azote, or the base of mephitis or azotic gas, constituted its acidifiable base or radical; and consequently that the acid of nitre was really an azotic acid, having azote for its base, combined with oxygen. For these reasons, that we might be consistent with our principles, it appeared necessary, either to call the acid by the name of azotic, or to name 105

108 the base nitric radical; but from either of these we were dissuaded, by the following considerations. In the first place, it seemed difficult to change the name of nitre or saltpetre, which has been universally adopted in society, in manufactures, and in chemistry; and, on the other hand, azote having been discovered by Mr. Berthollet to be the base of volatile alkali, or ammoniac, as well as of this acid, we thought it improper to call it nitric radical. We have therefore continued the term of azote to the base of that part of atmospheric air which is likewise the nitric and ammoniacal radical; and we have named the acid of nitre, in its lower and higher degrees of oxygenation, nitrous acid in the former, and nitric acid in the latter state; thus preserving its former appellation properly modified. Several very respectable chemists have disapproved of this deference for the old terms, and wished us to have persevered in perfecting a new chemical language, without paying any respect for ancient usage; so that, by thus steering a kind of middle course, we have exposed ourselves to the censures of one sect of chemists, and to the expostulations of the opposite party. The acid of nitre is susceptible of assuming a great number of separate states, depending upon its degree of oxygenation, or upon the proportions in which azote and oxygen enter into its composition. By a first or lowest degree of oxygenation, it forms a particular species of gas, which we shall continue to name nitrous gas; this is composed nearly of two parts, by weight, of oxygen combined with one part of azote; and in this state it is not miscible with water. In this gas, the azote is by no means saturated with oxygen, but, on the contrary, has still a very great affinity for that element, and even attracts it from atmospheric air, immediately upon getting into contact with it. This combination of nitrous gas with atmospheric air has even become one of the methods for determining the quantity of oxygen contained in air, and consequently for ascertaining its degree of salubrity. This addition of oxygen converts the nitrous gas into a powerful acid, which has a strong affinity with water, and which is itself susceptible of various additional degrees of oxygenation. When the proportions of oxygen and azote is below three parts, by weight, of the former, to one of the latter, the acid is red colored, and emits copious fumes. In this state, by the application of a gentle heat, it gives out nitrous gas; and we term it, in this degree of oxygenation, nitrous acid. When four parts, by weight, of oxygen, are combined with one part of azote, the acid is clear and colorless, more fixed in the fire than the nitrous acid, has less odor, and its constituent elements are more firmly united. This species of acid, in conformity with our principles of nomenclature, is called nitric acid. Thus, nitric acid is the acid of nitre, surcharged with oxygen; nitrous acid is the acid of nitre surcharged with azote; or, what is the same thing, with nitrous gas; and this latter is azote not sufficiently saturated with oxygen to possess the properties of an acid. To this degree of oxygenation, we have afterwards, in the course of this work, given the generic name of oxide. 4 4 In strict conformity with the principles of the new nomenclature, but which the Author has given his reasons for deviating from in this instance, the following ought to have been the terms for azote, in its several degrees of oxygenation: Azote, azotic gas (azote combined with caloric), azotic oxide gas, nitrous 106

109 CHAPTER VII Of the Decomposition of Oxygen Gas by means of Metals, and the Formation of Metallic Oxides Oxygen has a stronger affinity with metals heated to a certain degree than with caloric; in consequence of which, all metallic bodies, excepting gold, silver, and platina, have the property of decomposing oxygen gas, by attracting its base from the caloric with which it was combined. We have already shown in what manner this decomposition takes place, by means of mercury and iron; having observed, that, in the case of the first, it must be considered as a kind of gradual combustion, whilst in the latter, the combustion is extremely rapid and attended with a brilliant flame. The use of the heat employed in these operations is to separate the particles of the metal from each other, and to diminish their attraction of cohesion or aggregation, or, what is the same thing, their mutual attraction for each other. The absolute weight of metallic substances is augmented in proportion to the quantity of oxygen they absorb; they, at the same time, lose their metallic splendor, and are reduced into an earthy pulverulent matter. In this state metals must not be considered as entirely saturated with oxygen, because their action upon this element is counterbalanced by the power of affinity between it and caloric. During the calcination of metals, the oxygen is therefore acted upon by two separate and opposite powers, that of its attraction for caloric, and that exerted by the metal, and only tends to unite with the latter in consequence of the excess of the latter over the former, which is, in general, very inconsiderable. Wherefore, when metallic substances are oxygenated in atmospheric air, or in oxygen gas, they are not converted into acids like sulfur, phosphorus, and charcoal, but are only changed into intermediate substances, which, though approaching to the nature of salts, have not acquired all the saline properties. The old chemists have affixed the name of calx not only to metals in this state, but to every body which has been long exposed to the action of fire without being melted. They have converted this word calx into a generic term, under which they confound (1) calcareous earth, which, from a neutral salt, which it really was before calcination, has been changed by fire into an earthy alkali, by losing half of its weight, with (2) metals which, by the same means, have joined themselves to a new substance, whose quantity often exceeds half their weight, and by which they have been changed almost into the nature of acids. This mode of classifying substances of so very opposite natures, under the same generic name, would have been quite contrary to our principles of nomenclature, especially as, by retaining the above term for this state of metallic substances, we must have conveyed very false ideas of its nature. We have, therefore, laid aside the expression metallic calx altogether, and have substituted in its place the term oxide, from the Greek word οξυς. By this may be seen, that the language we have adopted is both copious and expressive. The first or lowest degree of oxygenation in bodies, converts them into oxides; a second degree of additional oxygenation constitutes the class of acids, of which the specific names, drawn from their particular bases, terminate in ous, as the nitrous and sulfurous acids; the third degree of oxygenation changes these into the species of acids distinguished by the termination in ic, as the nitric and sulfuric acids; and, lastly, we can acid, and nitric acid. Translator. 107

110 express a fourth, or highest degree of oxygenation, by adding the word oxygenated to the name of the acid, as has been already done with the oxygenated muriatic acid. We have not confined the term oxide to expressing the combinations of metals with oxygen, but have extended it to signify that first degree of oxygenation in all bodies, which, without converting them into acids, causes them to approach to the nature of salts. Thus, we give the name of oxide of sulfur to that soft substance into which sulfur is converted by incipient combustion; and we call the yellow matter left by phosphorus, after combustion, by the name of oxide of phosphorus. In the same manner, nitrous gas, which is azote in its first degree of oxygenation, is the oxide of azote. We have likewise oxides in great numbers from the vegetable and animal kingdoms; and I shall show, in the sequel, that this new language throws great light upon all the operations of art and nature. We have already observed that almost all the metallic oxides have peculiar and permanent colors. These vary not only in the different species of metals, but even according to the various degrees of oxygenation in the same metal. Hence we are under the necessity of adding two epithets to each oxide, one of which indicates the metal oxidized, while the other indicates the peculiar color of the oxide. Thus, we have the black oxide of iron, the red oxide of iron, and the yellow oxide of iron; which expressions respectively answer to the old unmeaning terms of martial ethiops, colcothar, and rust of iron, or ochre. We have likewise the gray, yellow, and red oxides of lead, which answer to the equally false or insignificant terms, ashes of lead, massicot, and minium. These denominations sometimes become rather long, especially when we mean to indicate whether the metal has been oxidized in the air, by detonation with nitre, or by means of acids; but then they always convey just and accurate ideas of the corresponding object which we wish to express by their use. All this will be rendered perfectly clear and distinct by means of the tables which are added to this work. CHAPTER XVI Of the Formation of Neutral Salts, and of their different Bases We have just seen that all the oxides and acids from the animal and vegetable kingdoms are formed by means of a small number of simple elements, or at least of such as have not hitherto been susceptible of decomposition, by means of combination with oxygen; these are azote, sulfur, phosphorus, charcoal, hydrogen, and the muriatic radical. 1 We may justly admire the simplicity of the means employed by nature to multiply qualities and forms, whether by combining three or four acidifiable bases in different proportions, or by altering the dose of oxygen employed for oxidizing or acidifying them. We shall find the means no less simple and diversified, and as abundantly productive of forms and qualities, in the order of bodies we are now about to treat of. 1 I have not ventured to omit this element, as here enumerated with the other principles of animal and vegetable substances, though it is not at all taken notice of in the preceding chapters as entering into the composition of these bodies. Translator. 108

111 Acidifiable substances, by combining with oxygen, and their consequent conversion into acids, acquire great susceptibility of farther combination; they become capable of uniting with earthy and metallic bodies, by which means neutral salts are formed. Acids may therefore be considered as true salifying principles, and the substances with which they unite to form neutral salts may be called salifiable bases: The nature of the union which these two principles form with each other is meant as the subject of the present chapter. This view of the acids prevents me from considering them as salts, though they are possessed of many of the principal properties of saline bodies, as solubility in water, &c. I have already observed that they are the result of a first order of combination, being composed of two simple elements, or at least of elements which act as if they were simple, and we may therefore rank them, to use the language of Stahl, in the order of mixts. The neutral salts, on the contrary, are of a secondary order of combination, being formed by the union of two mixts with each other, and may therefore be termed compounds. Hence I shall not arrange the alkalis 2 or earths in the class of salts, to which I allot only such as are composed of an oxygenated substance united to a base. I have already enlarged sufficiently upon the formation of acids in the preceding chapter, and shall not add anything farther upon that subject; but having as yet given no account of the salifiable bases, which are capable of uniting with them to form neutral salts, I mean in this chapter to give an account of the nature and origin of each of these bases. These are potash, soda, ammoniac, lime, magnesia, barytes, alumina, and all the metallic bodies. 1. Of Potash We have already shown that when a vegetable substance is submitted to the action of fire in distilling vessels, its component elements, oxygen, hydrogen, and charcoal, which formed a threefold combination in a state of equilibrium, unite, two and two, in obedience to affinities which act conformable to the degree of heat employed. Thus, at the first application of the fire, whenever the heat produced exceeds the temperature of boiling water, part of the oxygen and hydrogen unite to form water; soon after the rest of the hydrogen, and part of the charcoal, combine into oil; and, lastly, when the fire is pushed to the red heat, the oil and water, which had been formed in the early part of the process, become again decomposed, the oxygen and charcoal unite to form carbonic acid, a large quantity of hydrogen gas is set free, and nothing but charcoal remains in the retort. A great part of these phenomena occur during the combustion of vegetables in the open air; but, in this case, the presence of the air introduces three new substances, the oxygen and azote of the air and caloric, of which two at least produce considerable changes in the results of the operation. In proportion as the hydrogen of the vegetable, or that which results from the decomposition of the water, is forced out in the form of hydrogen gas by the progress of the fire, it is set on fire immediately upon getting in contact with the air, water is again formed, and the greater part of the caloric of the two gasses becoming free produces flame. When all the hydrogen gas is driven out, burnt, and 2 Perhaps my thus rejecting the alkalis from the class of salts may be considered as a capital defect in the method I have adopted, and I am ready to admit the charge; but this inconvenience is compensated by so many advantages, that I could not think it of sufficient consequence to make me alter my plan. Author. 109

112 again reduced to water, the remaining charcoal continues to burn, but without flame; it is formed into carbonic acid, which carries off a portion of caloric sufficient to give it the gaseous form; the rest of the caloric, from the oxygen of the air, being set free, produces the heat and light observed during the combustion of charcoal. The whole vegetable is thus reduced into water and carbonic acid, and nothing remains but a small portion of gray earthy matter called ashes, being the only really fixed principles which enter into the constitution of vegetables. The earth, or rather ashes, which seldom exceeds a twentieth part of the weight of the vegetable, contains a substance of a particular nature, known under the name of fixed vegetable alkali, or potash. To obtain it, water is poured upon the ashes, which dissolves the potash and leaves the ashes which are insoluble; by afterwards evaporating the water, we obtain the potash in a white concrete form: It is very fixed even in a very high degree of heat. I do not mean here to describe the art of preparing potash or the method of procuring it in a state of purity, but have entered upon the above detail that I might not use any word not previously explained. The potash obtained by this process is always less or more saturated with carbonic acid, which is easily accounted for: As the potash does not form, or at least is not set free, but in proportion as the charcoal of the vegetable is converted into carbonic acid by the addition of oxygen, either from the air or the water, it follows that each particle of potash, at the instant of its formation, or at least of its liberation, is in contact with a particle of carbonic acid, and, as there is a considerable affinity between these two substances, they naturally combine together. Although the carbonic acid has less affinity with potash than any other acid, yet it is difficult to separate the last portions from it. The most usual method of accomplishing this is to dissolve the potash in water; to this solution add two or three times its weight of quick-lime, then filtrate the liquor and evaporate it in close vessels; the saline substance left by the evaporation is potash almost entirely deprived of carbonic acid. In this state it is soluble in an equal weight of water, and even attracts the moisture of the air with great avidity; by this property it furnishes us with an excellent means of rendering air or gas dry by exposing them to its action. In this state it is soluble in alcohol, though not when combined with carbonic acid; and Mr. Berthollet employs this property as a method of procuring potash in the state of perfect purity. All vegetables yield less or more of potash in consequence of combustion, but it is furnished in various degrees of purity by different vegetables; usually, indeed, from all of them it is mixed with different salts from which it is easily separable. We can hardly entertain a doubt that the ashes, or earth which is left by vegetables in combustion, preexisted in them before they were burnt, forming what may be called the skeleton, or osseous part of the vegetable. But it is quite otherwise with potash; this substance has never yet been procured from vegetables but by means of processes or intermedia capable of furnishing oxygen and azote, such as combustion, or by means of nitric acid; so that it is not yet demonstrated that potash may not be a produce from these operations. I have begun a series of experiments upon this object, and hope soon to be able to give an account of their results. 110

113 2. Of Soda Soda, like potash, is an alkali procured by lixiviation from the ashes of burnt plants, but only from those which grow upon the sea-side, and especially from the herb kali, whence is derived the name alkali, given to this substance by the Arabians. It has some properties in common with potash, and others which are entirely different: In general, these two substances have peculiar characters in their saline combinations which are proper to each, and consequently distinguish them from each other; thus soda, which, as obtained from marine plants, is usually entirely saturated with carbonic acid, does not attract the humidity of the atmosphere like potash, but, on the contrary, desiccates, its crystals effloresce, and are converted into a white powder having all the properties of soda, which it really is, having only lost its water of crystallization. Hitherto we are not better acquainted with the constituent elements of soda than with those of potash, being equally uncertain whether it previously existed ready formed in the vegetable or is a combination of elements effected by combustion. Analogy leads us to suspect that azote is a constituent element of all the alkalis, as is the case with ammoniac; but we have only slight presumptions, unconfirmed by any decisive experiments, respecting the composition of potash and soda. 3. Of Ammoniac We have, however, very accurate knowledge of the composition of ammoniac, or volatile alkali, as it is called by the old chemists. Mr. Berthollet, in the Memoirs of the Academy for 1784, p. 316, has proved by analysis that 1000 parts of this substance consist of about 807 parts of azote combined with 193 parts of hydrogen. Ammoniac is chiefly procurable from animal substances by distillation, during which process the azote and hydrogen necessary to its formation unite in proper proportions; it is not, however, procured pure by this process, being mixed with oil and water, and mostly saturated with carbonic acid. To separate these substances it is first combined with an acid, the muriatic for instance, and then disengaged from that combination by the addition of lime or potash. When ammoniac is thus produced in its greatest degree of purity it can only exist under the gaseous form, at least in the usual temperature of the atmosphere; it has an excessively penetrating smell; it is absorbed in large quantities by water, especially if cold and assisted by compression. Water thus saturated with ammoniac has usually been termed volatile alkaline fluor; we shall call it either simply ammoniac, or liquid ammoniac, and ammoniacal gas when it exists in the aeriform state. 4. Of Lime, Magnesia, Barytes, and Alumina The composition of these four earths is totally unknown, and, until by new discoveries their constituent elements are ascertained, we are certainly authorized to consider them as simple bodies. Art has no share in the production of these earths, as they are all procured ready formed from nature; but, as they have all, especially the three first, great tendency to combination, they are never found pure. Lime is usually saturated with carbonic acid in the state of chalk, calcareous spars, most of the marbles, &c.; sometimes with sulfuric acid, as in gypsum and plaster stones; at other times with fluoric acid forming vitreous or fluor spars; and lastly, it is found in the waters of the sea and of 111

114 saline springs, combined with muriatic acid. Of all the salifiable bases it is the most universally spread through nature. Magnesia is found in mineral waters, for the most part combined with sulfuric acid; it is likewise abundant in sea-water, united with muriatic acid; and it exists in a great number of stones of different kinds. Barytes is much less common than the two preceding earths; it is found in the mineral kingdom, combined with sulfuric acid, forming heavy spars, and sometimes, though rarely, united to carbonic acid. Alumina, or the base of alum, having less tendency to combination than the other earths, is often found in the state of alumina, uncombined with any acid. It is chiefly procurable from clays, of which, properly speaking, it is the base, or chief ingredient. 5. Of Metallic Bodies The metals, except gold, and sometimes silver, are rarely found in the mineral kingdom in their metallic state, being usually less or more saturated with oxygen, or combined with sulfur, arsenic, sulfuric acid, muriatic acid, carbonic acid, or phosphoric acid. Metallurgy, or the docimastic art, teaches the means of separating them from these foreign matters; and for this purpose we refer to such chemical books as treat upon these operations. We are probably only acquainted as yet with a part of the metallic substances existing in nature, as all those which have a stronger affinity to oxygen, than charcoal possesses, are incapable of being reduced to the metallic state, and, consequently, being only presented to our observation under the form of oxides, are confounded with earths. It is extremely probable that barytes, which we have just now arranged with earths, is in this situation; for in many experiments it exhibits properties nearly approaching to those of metallic bodies. It is even possible that all the substances we call earths may be only metallic oxides, irreducible by any hitherto known process. Those metallic bodies we are at present acquainted with, and which we can reduce to the metallic or reguline state, are the following seventeen: 1. Arsenic 7. Bismuth 13. Copper 2. Molybdenum 8. Antimony 14. Mercury 3. Tungsten 9. Zinc 15. Silver 4. Manganese 10. Iron 16. Platina 5. Nickel 11. Tin 17. Gold 6. Cobalt 12. Lead I only mean to consider these as salifiable bases, without entering at all upon the consideration of their properties in the arts, and for the uses of society. In these points of view each metal would require a complete treatise, which would lead me far beyond the bounds I have prescribed for this work. 112

115 CHAPTER XVII Continuation of the Observations upon Salifiable Bases, and the Formation of Neutral Salts. It is necessary to remark that earths and alkalis unite with acids to form neutral salts without the intervention of any medium, whereas metallic substances are incapable of forming this combination without being previously less or more oxygenated; strictly speaking, therefore, metals are not soluble in acids, but only metallic oxides. Hence, when we put a metal into an acid for solution, it is necessary, in the first place, that it become oxygenated, either by attracting oxygen from the acid or from the water; or, in other words, that a metal cannot be dissolved in an acid unless the oxygen, either of the acid, or of the water mixed with it, has a stronger affinity to the metal than to the hydrogen or the acidifiable base; or, what amounts to the same thing, that no metallic solution can take place without a previous decomposition of the water or the acid in which it is made. The explanation of the principal phenomena of metallic solution depends entirely upon this simple observation, which was overlooked even by the illustrious Bergman. The first and most striking of these is the effervescence, or, to speak less equivocally, the disengagement of gas which takes place during the solution; in the solutions made in nitric acid, this effervescence is produced by the disengagement of nitrous gas; in solutions with sulfuric acid, it is either sulfurous acid gas or hydrogen gas, according as the oxidation of the metal happens to be made at the expense of the sulfuric acid or of the water. As both nitric acid and water are composed of elements which, when separate, can only exist in the gaseous form, at least in the common temperature of the atmosphere, it is evident that, whenever either of these is deprived of its oxygen, the remaining element must instantly expand and assume the state of gas; the effervescence is occasioned by this sudden conversion from the liquid to the gaseous state. The same decomposition, and consequent formation of gas, takes place when solutions of metals are made in sulfuric acid: In general, especially by the humid way, metals do not attract all the oxygen it contains; they therefore reduce it, not into sulfur, but into sulfurous acid, and as this acid can only exist as gas in the usual temperature, it is disengaged, and occasions effervescence. The second phenomenon is that when the metals have been previously oxidized, they all dissolve in acids without effervescence: This is easily explained; because, not having now any occasion for combining with oxygen, they neither decompose the acid nor the water by which, in the former case, the effervescence is occasioned. A third phenomenon, which requires particular consideration is that none of the metals produce effervescence by solution in oxygenated muriatic acid. During this process the metal, in the first place, carries off the excess of oxygen from the oxygenated muriatic acid, by which it becomes oxidized, and reduces the acid to the state of ordinary muriatic acid. In this case there is no production of gas, not that the muriatic acid does not tend to exist in the gaseous state in the common temperature, which it does equally with the acids formerly mentioned, but because this acid, which otherwise would expand into gas, finds more water combined with the oxygenated muriatic acid than is necessary to retain it in the liquid form; hence it does not disengage like the sulfurous acid, but 113

116 remains, and quietly dissolves and combines with the metallic oxide previously formed from its superabundant oxygen. The fourth phenomenon is that metals are absolutely insoluble in such acids as have their bases joined to oxygen by a stronger affinity than these metals are capable of exerting upon that acidifying principle. Hence silver, mercury, and lead, in their metallic states, are insoluble in muriatic acid, but, when previously oxidized, they become readily soluble without effervescence. From these phenomena it appears that oxygen is the bond of union between metals and acids; and from this we are led to suppose that oxygen is contained in all substances which have a strong affinity with acids: Hence it is very probable the four eminently salifiable earths contain oxygen, and their capability of uniting with acids is produced by the intermediation of that element. What I have formerly noticed relative to these earths is considerably strengthened by the above considerations, viz. that they may very possibly be metallic oxides, with which oxygen has a stronger affinity than with charcoal, and consequently not reducible by any known means. All the acids hitherto known are enumerated in the following table, the first column of which contains the names of the acids according to the new nomenclature, and in the second column are placed the bases or radicals of these acids, with observations. Names of the Acids 1. Sulphurous Sulfur. 2. Sulphuric 3. Phosphorous Phosphorus. 4. Phosphoric Names of the Bases, with Observations 5. Muriatic Muriatic radical or base, hitherto unknown. 6. Oxygenated muriatic 7. Nitrous 8. Nitric Azote. 9. Oxygenated nitric 10. Carbonic Charcoal. 11. Acetous 12. Acetic The bases or radicals of all these acids seem to be 13. Oxalic formed by a combination of charcoal and hydrogen; 14. Tartarous and the only difference seems to be owing to the different 15. Pyro-tartarous proportions in which these elements combine to form 16. Citric their bases, and to the different doses of oxygen in 17. Malic their acidification. A connected series of accurate 18. Pyro-lignous experiments is still wanted upon this subject. 19. Pyro-mucous 114

117 20. Gallic 21. Prussic Our knowledge of the bases of these acids 22. Benzoic is hitherto imperfect; we only know that 23. Succinic they contain hydrogen and charcoal as 24. Camphoric principal elements, and that the prussic acid 25. Lactic contains azote. 26. Saccholactic 27. Bombic The base of these and all acids procured from 28. Formic animal substances seems to consist of charcoal, 29. Sebacic hydrogen, phosphorous, and azote. 30. Boracic The bases of these two are hitherto 31. Fluoric entirely unknown. 32. Antimonic Antimony. 33. Argentic Silver. 34. Arseniac Arsenic. 35. Bismuthic Bismuth. 36. Cobaltic Cobalt. 37. Cupric Copper. 38. Stannic Tin. 39. Ferric Iron. 40. Manganic Manganese. 41. Mercuric Mercury. 42. Molybdic Molybdena. 43. Nickolic Nickel. 44. Auric Gold. 45. Platinic Platina. 46. Plumbic Lead. 47. Tungstic Tungsten. 48. Zincic Zinc. In this list, which contains 48 acids, I have enumerated 17 metallic acids hitherto very imperfectly known, but upon which Mr. Berthollet is about to publish a very important work. It cannot be pretended that all the acids which exist in nature, or rather all the acidifiable bases, are yet discovered; but, on the other hand, there are considerable grounds for supposing that a more accurate investigation than has hitherto been attempted will diminish the number of the vegetable acids, by showing that several of these, at present considered as distinct acids, are only modifications of others. All that can be done in the present state of our knowledge is to give a view of chemistry as it really is, and to establish fundamental principles, by which such bodies as may be discovered in future may receive names, in conformity with one uniform system. The known salifiable bases, or substances capable of being converted into neutral salts by union with acids, amount to 24; viz. 3 alkalis, 4 earths, and 17 metallic substances; so that, in the present state of chemical knowledge, the whole possible 115

118 number of neutral salts amounts to This number is upon the supposition that the metallic acids are capable of dissolving other metals, which is a new branch of chemistry not hitherto investigated, upon which depends all the metallic combinations named vitreous. There is reason to believe that many of these supposable saline combinations are not capable of being formed, which must greatly reduce the real number of neutral salts producible by nature and art. Even if we suppose the real number to amount only to five or six hundred species of possible neutral salts, it is evident that, were we to distinguish them, after the manner of the ancients, either by the names of their first discoverers, or by terms derived from the substances from which they are procured, we should at last have such a confusion of arbitrary designations, as no memory could possibly retain. This method might be tolerable in the early ages of chemistry, or even till within these twenty years, when only about thirty species of salts were known; but, in the present times, when the number is augmenting daily, when every new acid gives us 24 or 48 new salts, according as it is capable of one or two degrees of oxygenation, a new method is certainly necessary. The method we have adopted, drawn from the nomenclature of the acids, is perfectly analogical and, following nature in the simplicity of her operations, gives a natural and easy nomenclature applicable to every possible neutral salt. In giving names to the different acids, we express the common property by the generic term acid, and distinguish each species by the name of its peculiar acidifiable base. Hence the acids formed by the oxygenation of sulfur, phosphorus, charcoal, &c. are called sulfuric acid, phosphoric acid, carbonic acid, &c. We thought it likewise proper to indicate the different degrees of saturation with oxygen, by different terminations of the same specific names. Hence we distinguish between sulfurous and sulfuric, and between phosphorous and phosphoric acids, &c. By applying these principles to the nomenclature of neutral salts, we give a common term to all the neutral salts arising from the combination of one acid, and distinguish the species by adding the name of the salifiable base. Thus, all the neutral salts having sulfuric acid in their composition are named sulfats; those formed by the phosphoric acid, phosphats, &c. The species being distinguished by the names of the salifiable bases gives us sulfat of potash, sulfat of soda, sulfat of ammoniac, sulfat of lime, sulfat of iron, &c. As we are acquainted with 24 salifiable bases, alkaline, earthy, and metallic, we have consequently 24 sulfats, as many phosphats, and so on through all the acids. Sulfur is, however, susceptible of two degrees of oxygenation, the first of which produces sulfurous, and the second, sulfuric acid; and, as the neutral salts produced by these two acids, have different properties, and are in fact different salts, it becomes necessary to distinguish these by peculiar terminations; we have therefore distinguished the neutral salts formed by the acids in the first or lesser degree of oxygenation, by changing the termination at into ite, as sulfites, phosphites, 4 &c. Thus, oxygenated or 3 This number excludes all triple salts, or such as contain more than one salifiable base, all the salts whose bases are over or under saturated with acid, and those formed by the nitro-muriatic acid. Translator. 4 As all the specific names of the acids in the new nomenclature are adjectives, they would have applied severally to the various salifiable bases, without the invention of other terms, with perfect distinctness. Thus, sulfurous potash, and sulfuric potash, are equally distinct as sulfite of potash, and sulfat of potash; and have the advantage of being more easily retained in the memory, because more naturally arising from the acids themselves, than the arbitrary terminations adopted by Mr. Lavoisier. Translator. 116

119 acidified sulfur, in its two degrees of oxygenation is capable of forming 48 neutral salts, 24 of which are sulfites, and as many sulfats; which is likewise the case with all the acids capable of two degrees of oxygenation. 5 It were both tiresome and unnecessary to follow these denominations through all the varieties of their possible application; it is enough to have given the method of naming the various salts, which, when once well understood, is easily applied to every possible combination. The name of the combustible and acidifiable body being once known, the names of the acid it is capable of forming, and of all the neutral combinations the acid is susceptible of entering into, are most readily remembered. Such as require a more complete illustration of the methods in which the new nomenclature is applied will, in the Second Part of this book, find Tables which contain a full enumeration of all the neutral salts, and, in general, all the possible chemical combinations, so far as is consistent with the present state of our knowledge. To these I shall subjoin short explanations, containing the best and most simple means of procuring the different species of acids, and some account of the general properties of the neutral salts they produce. I shall not deny that to render this work more complete, it would have been necessary to add particular observations upon each species of salt, its solubility in water and alcohol, the proportions of acid and of salifiable base in its composition, the quantity of its water of crystallization, the different degrees of saturation it is susceptible of, and, finally, the degree of force or affinity with which the acid adheres to the base. This immense work has been already begun by Messrs. Bergman, Morveau, Kirwan, and other celebrated chemists, but is hitherto only in a moderate state of advancement, even the principles upon which it is founded are not perhaps sufficiently accurate. These numerous details would have swelled this elementary treatise to much too great a size; besides that, to have gathered the necessary materials, and to have completed all the series of experiments requisite, must have retarded the publication of this book for many years. This is a vast field for employing the zeal and abilities of young chemists, whom I would advise to endeavor rather to do well than to do much, and to ascertain, in the first place, the composition of the acids, before entering upon that of the neutral salts. Every edifice which is intended to resist the ravages of time should be built upon a sure foundation; and, in the present state of chemistry, to attempt discoveries by experiments, either not perfectly exact, or not sufficiently rigorous, will serve only to interrupt its progress, instead of contributing to its advancement. 5 There is yet a third degree of oxygenation of acids, as the oxygenated muriatic and oxygenated nitric acids. The terms applicable to the neutral salts resulting from the union of these acids with salifiable bases is supplied by the Author in the Second Part of this Work. These are formed by prefixing the word oxygenated to the name of the salt produced by the second degree of oxygenation. Thus, oxygenated muriat of potash, oxygenated nitrat of soda, &c. Translator. 117

120 Notes on the Reading 1. You may also want to compare your results from burning the sulfur in Demonstration 6 with those Lavoisier describes on p You have seen the great emphasis Lavoisier places on the weights being equal before and after a reaction. This is apparent in his memoirs and in the portions of the Elements of Chemistry that you read. Also consider the following quotations from Chapter XIII of the Elements of Chemistry: We may lay it down as an incontestable axiom that in all the operations of art and nature nothing is created; an equal quantity of matter exists both before and after the experiment ; the quality and quantity of the elements remain precisely the same; and nothing takes place beyond changes and modifications in the combination of these elements. Upon this principle the whole art of performing chemical experiments depends. We must always suppose an exact equality between the elements of the body examined and those of the products of its analysis. We may consider the substances submitted to fermentation, and the products resulting from that operation, as forming an algebraic equation; and, by successively supposing each of the elements in this equation unknown, we can calculate their values in succession, and thus verify our experiments by calculation, and our calculation by experiment reciprocally. I have often successfully employed this method for correcting the first results of my experiments, and to direct me in the proper road for repeating them to advantage. Note the references to algebra : All this supports the view that he held to a Law of Conservation of Matter. How would you state this law? What evidence can you cite in support of it? Later we will be writing chemical equations (in analogy to algebraic equations), and as with algebraic equations we may not lose anything. All chemical equations imply a conservation of mass. For now we will write word equations (rather than symbol equations). Such equations will be a major concern in the sophomore natural science. Our task is to unpack their meaning. 3. A table of the kind mentioned in the last line of Chapter VIII will be found on the next page. 4. Why does Lavoisier refer to a salt as a secondary order of combination (p. 109)? 5. Compare Lavoisier's criteria for what is an acid, a salifiable base, and a salt with your criteria in your lab. 118

121 119

122 On the Acidifying Principle Lavoisier seems to have been the first to propose that a single element is present as a component in all acids, and is responsible for their characteristic properties (Elements of Chemistry, p. 102). Can you think of any information available to him that might lead to questioning the hypothesis that oxygen is the acidifying principle? In support of Lavoisier s assumption that degree of oxygenation is involved in determining acidity, we may cite the following facts: Sulfuric acid is more strongly acidic in its properties than sulfurous acid and phosphoric acid is more acidic than phosphorous acid. Also, in the case of metals such as manganese, chromium, and tungsten, it is found that the more highly oxygenated oxides form acids and the less highly oxygenated oxides form what we now call bases. The crucial question is obviously whether all acids contain oxygen. Where Lavoisier is unable to show that a particular acid contains oxygen, he assumes that the radical or base of the acid has not yet been dissociated from oxygen. Of the 48 acids that he lists as known to him (Elements of Chemistry, pp ), the large majority were known to contain oxygen. In the years , however, chemists reached the conclusion that a number of the common acids do not contain oxygen. Among these are muriatic (our hydrochloric) and fluoric (our hydrofluoric) acids. The theory that oxygen is the acidifying principle was therefore abandoned. Let us examine briefly the case of muriatic acid. It is obtained by heating sea salt with sulfuric acid (see Elements of Chemistry, p. 104). A colorless gas with a sharp odor comes off. This in turn dissolves readily in water. The resulting solution has all the typically acidic properties. In 1774 Carl Wilhelm Scheele had already found that, when muriatic acid is added to a certain oxide of manganese, there is evolved a greenish-yellow gas with an irritating odor. He called the gas dephlogisticated muriatic acid. Then in 1785, Claude Berthollet, believing it to be a compound of the muriatic radical with oxygen, renamed it oxygenated muriatic acid. This is the name that Lavoisier used (Elements of Chemistry, p. 105). It was finally given its present name of chlorine (from the Greek [chloros], meaning greenish-yellow ) by Humphry Davy in 1811, who had come to the conclusion that the gas was an element. Davy showed that chlorine and hydrogen react together when ignited or when placed in sunlight to form the same colorless gas that is formed by the reaction of sulfuric acid on sea salt. In particular, he showed that the water vapor which previous investigators had always found among the products of this reaction could be eliminated by properly drying the reactants. Moreover, he showed that many metals react either with the muriatic acid gas or with its aqueous solution, replacing the hydrogen in the compound and yielding a chloride salt of the metal the same salt as was obtained in many cases by the direct action of chlorine on the metal. 1 When an electric current 22 was passed through a concentrated solution of muriatic acid in water, chlorine was released at 1 This is of course what we saw in Experiment 4, Part 1. 2 We will consider the decomposition of some substances by an electric current in Chapter VI, and you will consider in detail the nature of electricity itself in Senior Natural Science. 120

123 the wire where the current entered the solution, and hydrogen at the wire where the current left the solution. All these experiments, and others, indicate that hydrogen and chlorine are components of muriatic acid, and persuaded Davy that chlorine was an element and not, say, an oxide of some as of yet unknown substance. From the definition of element given by Lavoisier (Elements of Chemistry, p. 60) it must be clear that, whereas one can show definitely that some pure substances are composite, there is no similar possibility of demonstrating that a pure substance is an element. But every method thought of for decomposing chlorine failed. Therefore it seems that not all acids contain oxygen. Is there any other element or substance that might constitute the acidifying principle of acids? A case can be made for hydrogen, 3 as follows: (a) Non-metallic oxides such as those of sulfur, phosphorous, and carbon exhibit typical acidic properties (sour taste, effect on litmus paper, reaction with certain metallic oxides to produce salts, etc.) only when water is present. Can you cite your own experimental evidence in support of this claim? Thus, the possibility arises that these oxides react with the water to form composites that contain not only oxygen but also hydrogen since water contains both. (b) All acids, including both the oxyacids like phosphoric and sulfuric, and the hydracids like hydrochloric, react with such metals as zinc and iron to produce hydrogen. Is this assertion congruent with your observations in Experiment 4? In addition, quantitative studies show that the amount of acid decreases in these reactions. A salt of the metal is formed in its place. It is in fact the same salt that formed by reaction of the metallic oxides with the acid. (Recall how a phlogistonist would explain how the same salt could be formed in those two different ways.) The salt shares with the acids that subset of properties of all chlorides. It is a plausible assumption that the metal has simply replaced the hydrogen of the acid, and that hydrogen is responsible for the acidic properties of acids. On this view, it becomes necessary to revise Lavoisier s terminology, and to speak of the oxides of phosphorous, sulfur and carbon not as acids but as acidic anhydrides (acids minus water). The case with bases is analogous. Metal oxides themselves do not seem to exhibit basic properties (at least those properties we have used for identifying bases), but in the presence of water many do exhibit basic properties. Thus we might consider metal oxides as basic anhydrides. Can you cite experimental evidence in support of this claim? The metal oxides (basic anhydrides) which dissolved in or combined with water produced what are called metal hydroxides. Evaluate the damage, if any, done to Lavoisier s system by the change in the acidifying principle discussed above. There is an objection to the assertion that hydrogen is the acidifying principle. Many substances that contain hydrogen, for instance, grain alcohol and sugar, are not acidic. Why this is so will be left unexplained for the present. At least it seems to be the case that all acids are hydrogen-bearing compounds, though perhaps not vice versa. We might speculate that there must be more than one way for hydrogen to be present in composite substances, but without much more evidence at this time this will have to remain merely a speculation. In Chapter VIII we will consider some evidence that will support this speculation. 3 Davy, and later Pierre Dulong, proposed the hydrogen-theory of acids. 121

124 APPENDIX TO CHAPTER II: St. Thomas Aquinas on Change of Density [Optional Reading to be read after Lavoisier, Elements of Chemistry, Chapters I and II] (Commentary on the Physics, book 4, lect. 14, nn. 545, and [a selection from the comments on Physics, IV, 9, 217a21-b11]; translation by C. Decaen) 545. Dicit ergo primo quod quidam philosophi fuerunt, qui opinati sunt quod vacuum sit in corporibus, accipientes rationem ex raro et denso. Videbatur enim eis quod rarefactio et condensatio fieret propter vacuum intrinsecum corporibus. Si vero non esset sic rarum et densum, dicebant quod non erat possibile ut partes alicuius corporis coirent, idest subintrarent ad invicem, et quod aliquod corpus calcaretur, idest comprimeretur per condensationem 552. Deinde cum dicit: Nos autem dicimus etc., solvit praemissam rationem. Tota autem vis praemissae rationis in hoc consistit, quod rarefactio et condensatio fiat per vacuum. Unde hic obviat Aristoteles ostendens quod contingit rarefieri et condensari sine vacuo et cum aer multus existens reducitur ad minorem quantitatem per condensationem, vel ex minori in maiorem per rarefactionem, eadem materia est quae fit utrumque in actu, scilicet magnum et parvum, prius existens ad haec in potentia. Non ergo condensatio fit per hoc quod aliquae aliae partes subintrando adveniant; vel rarefactio per hoc quod partes inhaerentes extrahantur, ut existimabant ponentes vacuum inter corpora; sed per hoc quod materia earundem partium accipit nunc maiorem, nunc minorem quantitatem, ut sic rarefieri nihil aliud sit, quam materiam recipere maiores dimensiones per reductionem de potentia in actum; condensari autem e converso. Sicut autem materia est in potentia ad determinatas formas, ita etiam est in potentia ad determinatam quantitatem. Unde rarefactio et condensatio non procedit in rebus naturalibus in infinitum He says, therefore, that there were some philosophers who thought that there is a vacuum within bodies, taking an argument from the rare and the dense. For it appeared to them that rarefaction and condensation occur on account of a vacuum intrinsic to bodies. In truth, if the rare and the dense were not thus, they said that it would not be possible that parts of any body could contract, i.e., steal inward toward each other, and that any body be compressed, i.e., be pressed together, through condensation 552. Next, when he says, We, however, say, etc., he resolves the aforesaid argument. The whole power of the aforesaid argument consists in this, that rarefaction and condensation come to be [only] through a vacuum. Whence Aristotle opposes this, showing that something can be rarefied and condensed without a vacuum [W]hen much existing air is reduced to a lesser quantity through condensation, or from the lesser to the greater through rarefaction, it is the same matter that becomes each in act (namely, great and small), existing before in potency with respect to these. Therefore condensation does not come to be through this, that certain other parts come to it by steeling inward, nor does rarefaction come to be through this, that inhering parts are drawn outward, as some think, positing a vacuum among the bodies. Rather, [it happens] through this: that the matter of the same parts takes now a greater, now a lesser quantity, such that being rarefied is nothing other than matter receiving greater dimensions through a reduction from potency into act, and being condensed is the converse. However, just as matter is in potency to determinate forms, so also it is in potency to a determinate quantity. Whence in natural things rarefaction and condensation do not proceed into infinity. 122

125 CHAPTER III Further Developments in the New Chemistry: Weight Laws Claude Louis Berthollet Selections from Essay on Chemical Statics (1803) 1 INTRODUCTION 1. The powers which produce chemical phenomena are all derived from the mutual attraction of the molecules 2 of bodies. The name affinity has been given to this mutual attraction to distinguish it from astronomical [gravitational] attraction. It is probable that the two are the same property. Astronomical attraction, however, is exercised only between masses placed at a distance, where the shape of the molecules, the spaces within them, and their particular attributes have no influence. Its effects, always proportional to the mass and to the inverse of the square of the distances, can be rigorously submitted to calculation. The effects of chemical attraction, or affinity, are on the contrary so altered by particular conditions, often indeterminate, that they cannot be deduced from a universal principle; rather, they must be determined one by one. Only some of these effects can be sufficiently separated from other phenomena so as to admit of the precision of calculation. Thus only observations can establish the chemical properties of bodies, or the affinities by which they engage in mutual action under definite conditions. However, since it is very probable that affinity does not differ in its origin from general attraction, it should equally be subject to the laws that mechanics has determined for phenomena which are caused by the action of mass. 3 For the same reason, it is natural to think that the 1 [Translated in by Joseph & Caroline Haggarty from C. L. Berthollet, Essai de statique chimique, Vols. I & II (Paris: Firmin Didot, 1803).] 2 [It would be premature to assume that Berthollet or, for that matter, any of the chemists we read until Avogadro in Chapter VII intends by molecule precisely the same notion as that entailed by the atomic theory we have today. Indeed, the original meaning of the word is little bulk, or tiny mass (from moles and the diminuitive icula).] 3 [In 1801 Berthollet published a book entitled Researches into the Laws of Affinity which presented experimental evidence that chemical affinity was not absolute, but was dependent on the quantity or mass of the chemicals exerting the action: I propose to prove that elective affinities do not act as absolute forces by virtue of which one substance in a combination would be displaced by some other. Instead, in all compositions and decompositions caused by elective affinity, the object of the combination [A] is divided between the substances [B and C] whose actions are opposed, and the proportions of this division are determined not only by the strength of the affinity of these substances, but also by the quantity with which 123

126 more universal the principles reached by chemical theory, the more analogous to mechanical principles they will be. But only by the path of observation can chemical principles reach that degree of universality which we can already point out. The immediate effect of a substance s affinity is always a combination; thus all the effects produced by chemical action are a consequence of the formation of some combination. Every substance which has a tendency to enter into combination acts by reason of its affinity and its quantity. These truths form the ultimate term to which all chemical observations resolve. Two points must be observed, however. First: In order to explain the phenomena which they produce, or to compare them to each other, one must regard different tendencies to combination as so many forces which contribute to one result, or which, by their opposition, destroy one other. Second: A substance s chemical action does not depend solely on the affinity and the quantity of the parts which compose it. It also depends on the state of these parts whether due to their present combination, their affinity is concealed to a greater or lesser degree, or due to their expansion or contraction, their mutual distance varies. These are the conditions which, by modifying the properties of the elementary parts of a substance, form what I call its constitution. In order to arrive at the analysis of a chemical action, one must take into account not only each one of these conditions, but even more, the circumstances to which they are in some way related. The universal law governing chemical action that substances act by virtue of their affinity and quantity is modified in its effects not only by cohesive force, but also by the expansive action of caloric, i.e., of the cause of heat, which is the principle of expansibility. All natural phenomena take place in the atmosphere, which often contributes to their generation by its force of compression, by its temperature, or by the combination of the parts composing it. It is therefore necessary to have an accurate knowledge of the qualities of the atmosphere in these three respects. The result of the different factors which intervene during chemical action is sometimes a combination whose proportions are constant. Sometimes, by contrast, the proportions of the combinations which are formed are not fixed, but vary according to the circumstances in which they are produced. The first case requires that the accumulation of those forces which would change the proportions be equal to those which tend to maintain the present state of combination. But when this obstacle is overcome, chemical action continues to produce its proper effect by reason of the strength of the affinities and of the quantities of the substances which exercise them. I have attempted to ascertain the conditions which thus limit the proportions in some combinations and which seem to interrupt the process of chemical action. they act. Thus the quantity can compensate for the strength of the affinity so as to produce the same degree of saturation. If I establish that the quantity of a substance can compensate for the strength of its affinity, it will follow that a substance s action is proportional to the quantity of it necessary to produce a certain degree of saturation. I call that quantity which is the measure of the capacity of different substances to effect saturation their [active] mass. 124

127 ON COMBINATION 36. In the preceding chapters, I first considered the effects of the mutual affinity which produces the cohesion of molecules, and then those which arise from the action opposed to the cohesive force and from the liquid which tends towards the destruction of that force. But all chemical action between two different substances produces an effect analogous to that caused by the mutual affinity of similar molecules: such action forms, or tends to form, a union among them which is the product of their mutual affinity and which varies according to the strength of this action and according to the resistance against it. To this union of two substances, as well as to the act which produces it, is given the name combination. From this it follows that a solution is a true combination, and that its action, even at its weakest, is due to the same cause. The only difference between a solution and a combination in the ordinary sense concerns the aspect under which each is considered. In the case of a solution, one attends principally to the liquidity which a solid body acquires through combination, and above all to the uniformity of the parts of the composite liquid; the same applies to a gaseous solution. In the case of combination in the ordinary sense, one attends principally to the other properties of the composite which has been formed properties which result from the union of its elements by comparing them to those which belonged to the substances which combined. In most cases, the solution is merely due to a weak combination which has not caused the characteristic properties of the dissolved body to disappear. One consequence of the preceding considerations is that, in combination, we are bound to discover the same laws which we have observed in the chemical action which produces solution. 38. If we consider what is observed in the mutual combination of two antagonistic substances an acid and an alkali, for example we find that the acidity diminishes in proportion as the quantity of the alkali increases, and there arises a degree of saturation in which the acidity and alkalinity have both disappeared and become latent. If, however, one continues to add alkali, its character reappears and becomes more and more dominant. One therefore sees, first, that acidity and alkalinity saturate each other and can become alternately dominant according to the proportion in which the combination occurs. Moreover, there is no impediment, no pause in the progress of the combination and of the saturation which accompanies it unless the cohesive force or elasticity produce a separation 4 in which there appear proportions fixed by one of these two conditions. And secondly, one sees that the acidic and alkaline properties diminish according to the degree of the saturation undergone by the acid and the alkali, such that one discovers in the most intense chemical action the same characteristics which we observed in a very weak degree when a solution is produced. 4 [The precipitation of an insoluble solid or the effervescence of a gas.] 125

128 39. Chemists, struck by the fact that they find definite proportions in many combinations, have often regarded it as a universal property of combinations that they are constituted in constant proportions. Thus they hold that, when a neutral salt receives an excess of an acid or of an alkali, the homogenous substance which results is a solution of neutral salt in a free portion of the acid or alkali. This is an hypothesis whose only foundation is a distinction between solution and combination a hypothesis in which the properties which cause a separation are confused with the affinity which produces a combination. One must, however, recognize the circumstances which can determine that combinations will separate 5 in a certain state, and which thereby set limits to the effects of the general law of affinity. It is not always at the term of neutralization that separation can come into effect. The acid tartrate of potash separates and crystallizes more easily than the neutral tartrate does: are we to say that it is the latter which is held in solution by the excess acid? 6 I believe that I can limit myself to this example for the moment. 40. In consequence of what has just been set forth, it is necessary to distinguish two kinds of saturation. The first is the limit of the chemical action which one substance can engage in with another under the given circumstances: for example, one says that the water is saturated with a salt when it cannot dissolve any more of it, even though neither the properties of salt nor those of water have undergone saturation. The other kind of saturation is the term at which the antagonistic properties of a substance have been disguised by one another, and have reached an equilibrium which produces a state of indifferenence called neutralization. This second kind of saturation is rarely encountered at the same point as the first. 42. Several points follow from the foregoing. The first is that chemical action, the strongest as well as the weakest, is exerted by reason of the mutual affinity of the substances and by reason of their quantities found in the sphere of activity. The second is that chemical action diminishes on account of saturation. The third is that there is no point at which chemical action causes fixed proportions; it is instead in the forces which oppose chemical action that one must seek the limits of its power and the limits of the proportions of the combinations formed by it. The final point is that two effects of chemical action must be distinguished: that by which it produces mutual saturation, and that which brings about changes in constitution. ASSORTED PASSAGES ON SEPARATION AND THE PROPORTIONS OF ELEMENTS IN VARIOUS COMBINATIONS 193. An interesting problem remains to be solved: namely, to identify the dispositions and the circumstances which determine that the proportions are fixed in certain combinations, while in others they occur in all proportions 5 [Circumstances that cause the precipitation of solid or the effervescence of a gas.] 6 [When tartaric acid is halfway toward neutralization with potash, the material which is most readily crystallized out of solution is called acid tartrate of potash. It is less soluble in water than tartaric acid completely neutralized by potash (tartrate of potash).] 126

129 196. The cause of the separation of a substance which has entered the solid state is therefore the same as the cause of the proportions with which it separates. These proportions are those with which the cohesive force has strength sufficient for producing separation, and they must be constant when the circumstances are the same 197. Since the force by which a combination is formed produces a condensation, and thereby increases the effects of the mutual action [of the elements in the combination], these effects will occur especially at the term of saturation, where the two elements of the combination exert the greatest degree of their power, as long as they possess an equal disposition to solidity 7... In those combinations whose elements appear to have nearly equal dispositions to solidity, like the salts whose base is soda, potash, or ammoniac, and whose acid is muriatic, nitric, or acetic, the greatest degree of concentration should therefore be at the term of neutralization.it is thus in the neutral state that combinations whose elements have a nearly equal disposition [to solidity] 8 separate through crystallization because this is the point at which their condensation is the greatest [A] solid, a salt for example, dissolves in water in all proportions up to the extreme point which yields saturation, where the dissolving force finds itself weaker than the cohesive force opposed to it. But the level of saturation varies according to temperature, which diminishes the resistance caused by cohesion Metals which fuse into alloys dissolve in all proportions when the difference between their densities and fusibilities does not interrupt this mutual dissolution Substances which form glass also combine in all proportions up to the extreme point where the insolubility of some of them and the temperature present an obstacle to the formation of this solution which, being uniform and transparent, has all of the characteristics of a chemical combination wherein all properties have become common Many chemists, struck by the fixed points to which some oxidations are limited, suppose that there are always definite degrees to which combination with oxygen must submit. They ascribe to nature a balance which, subject to their own decrees, determines the proportions which combinations must take. And they do so without paying the least attention to the circumstances in which one can discover the causes which limit the action of substances that tend to combine causes whose influence theoretical considerations oblige us to evaluate. I must therefore show the following points. First, that the proportions of oxygen in the oxides depends on the same conditions which influence the other combinations. Secondly, that these proportions can vary progressively from the point at which the combination becomes possible up to that at which it attains the ultimate degree. Thirdly, that when this does not occur, it is merely because the conditions which I have identified present an obstacle to this progressive action. 7 [That is, insolubility.] 8 [Such as the aforementioned neutral salts.] 127

130 Joseph Louis Proust Researches on Copper 1 On Carbonate of Copper One hundred pounds of copper, dissolved in sulfuric or nitric acid and precipitated by the carbonate of soda or potash, invariably gives 180 pounds of green carbonate. 2 If this quantity is submitted to a gradual distillation it gives 10 pounds of water, which appears as essential to the color and composition of this carbonate as the carbonic acid itself, since this water only passes over successively and conjointly with the acid. Deprived of these two components the carbonate leaves 125 pounds of black oxide at the bottom of the retort. This oxide dissolves in nitric acid with heat without decomposing the acid. Likewise it dissolves in oxidized muriatic acid, from which, then, the oxygen escapes in bubbles, since copper is unable to combine with more than 25 parts of oxygen per 100. One may, then, in all analyses take 180 pounds of carbonate or 125 pounds of black oxide for 100 pounds of copper. Native carbonates of copper are also found in this ratio of oxidation. Here are the components of the artificial carbonate: Copper Oxygen Carbonic Acid Water [sic]... On Native Carbonate of Copper If 100 parts of this carbonate, dissolved in nitric acid and separated by the alkaline carbonates, gives us 100 parts of artificial carbonate, and if the base of these two combinations is the black oxide, we must recognize that invisible hand that holds the balance for us in the formation of compounds and fashions properties according to its will. We must conclude that nature operates not otherwise in the depths of the world than at its surface or in the hands of man. These ever-invariable proportions, these constant attributes, which characterize true compounds of art or of nature, in a word, this pondus naturae so well seen by Stahl; all this, I say, is no more at the power of the chemist than the law of election that presides at all combinations. From these considerations is it not right to believe that the native carbonate of copper will never differ from that which art produces in its imitation? Is there actually any difference between native carbonate of soda and the natural? No. Why, therefore, should there be any difference between those of copper or of other metals when no other perturbing cause has disarranged the 1 [Ann. Chim. (1799), 32: ] 2 [Green copper carbonate is also known as malachite.] 128

131 reciprocal forces of the factors of these combinations? The malachites of Aragon in nitric acid lose carbonic acid and leave onehundredth part of sandy clay. By precipitation we reproduce 99 parts of artificial carbonate in which we discover scarcely a grain of calcareous carbonate. This solution, made warm, never shows any nitrous gas, which proves well that copper completely refuses further oxidation. One hundred grains of the same, calcined in a crucible at a moderate temperature leaves 71 grains of black oxide. If we now subtract from this 2 parts for 100 of foreign earth, we have 69 to express the oxide contained in the malachite; but, differing only by a small fraction, these 69 grains correspond to 99 of artificial carbonate. There is, then, no difference between these two oxides, and in nature, as in art, the degree of their oxidation is evidently the same... The following extracts are from later papers by Proust.] But if it is found that in our hands metals cannot bind oxygen beyond the fixed ratios known to us, because the progress of their oxidation is suddenly checked by the action of the opposing forces specified by Berthollet, shall we also be obliged to believe that when nature does not proceed beyond these very same ratios in the oxides that she offers us, this is because her resources for oxidation are limited by the very same opposing forces as those that prevail in our laboratories? And yet this is what would have to be granted in order to account for the constant agreement we find between the composition and properties of nature s oxide and ours. This, I hold, involves an identity of causes that it will not be found easy to admit; on the contrary, we shall rather concur in the belief that the combinations that we make every day in our laboratories have a perfect resemblance to those of nature; this is due to the fact that the powers of nature hold invisible sway over all the operations of our arts. If we find it impossible to make an ounce of nitric acid, an oxide, a sulfide, or a drop of water, in ratios other than those that nature had assigned to them from all eternity, we must again recognize that there is a balance that, subject to the decrees of nature, regulates even in our laboratories the ratios of compounds. And even if some day we should succeed in clearly recognizing the causes that retard or accelerate the action of substances tending to combine, we could only flatter ourselves with knowing one more thing, namely, the means that nature uses to restrict compounds to the ratios in which we find them combined. But such knowledge, would it invalidate the principle I have proved? I think not, because the principle is only the corollary of the facts that we discover every day; there is nothing hypothetical about it; facts have led to it, facts alone can overthrow it... [Note: Berthollet believed that when mercury is dissolved in nitric acid under varying conditions of concentration and temperature, a variety of nitrates corresponding to a large number of different oxides is produced. But he had to explain why these nitrates, when treated with hydrochloric acid, always gave a mixture of only two salts, or chlorides, of fixed composition: the insoluble calomel (mercurous chloride) and the soluble corrosive sublimate (mercuric chloride).] To remove this difficulty, Berthollet says that the mercury passes into two 129

132 compounds of constant composition only at the moment when it can separate in these two combinations. Hence it would have to be assumed that, in mixing the muriatic acid with the nitrate, these two combinations are only formed at the precise moment when the separation of the soluble and the insoluble salts is initiated by the action of this acid. That is to say, the numerous oxides that in Berthollet s opinion give rise to as many different nitrates all present in the same solution, urged by the affinity of muriatic acid as much as by the insolubility of one of the chlorides about to be formed these oxides, I say, suddenly and simultaneously abandon the positions they had occupied in the series, to rush to its two extreme values, to place themselves just where are found the corrosive sublimate and the calomel, the only two compounds remaining after the operation. It must be admitted that this is a case of oxides behaving with much intelligence... If by raising the temperature we reduce the rate of an oxide that had reached the highest degree of oxidation, and that does not suffer the inconvenience of being volatile; or on the other hand, if by long-continued heating we raise a metal to this highest stage of oxidation, will it be permissible to believe with good reason that all the ascending and descending terms of oxidation, which by these means we can introduce between the extremes, represent as many different oxides? Certainly not! I will not recognize in this the ordinary course of nature. I do believe that in such cases we produce mixtures in all possible ratios, of the oxide at the minimum with the oxide at the maximum... [A second citation, concerning the difference between compounds and mixtures, follows. It is taken from Journal de physique 63: 369 (1806).] But what difference, it will be asked, do you recognize between your chemical combinations and the unions of combinations, which latter you tell us nature restricts to no fixed ratios? Is the power that makes a metal dissolve in sulfur different from that which makes one metallic sulfide dissolve in another? I shall be in no hurry to answer this question, legitimate though it be, for fear of losing myself in a region not yet sufficiently lighted up by the science of facts. But my distinctions will, I hope, be appreciated all the same when I say: Is the attraction that makes sugar dissolve in water the same or not the same as that which makes a determinate quantity of carbon and hydrogen dissolve in another quantity of oxygen to form the sugar 3 of our plants? But that which we see clearly is that these two sorts of attractions are so different in their results that it is impossible to confound them. Thus the solution of niter in water is, for me, not at all like of that of azote in oxygen that produces nitric acid or that of nitric acid in potash that produces saltpeter. 4 The solution of ammonia in water is to my eyes not at all like that of hydrogen in azote that produces ammonia... Sulfide of antimony can dissolve in the lower oxide in an infinite number of ratios 3 [Sugar was known at this time to be composed of carbon, hydrogen, and oxygen. In Experiment 1 we observed the decomposition of sugar into carbon and water (which is composed of hydrogen and oxygen).] 4 [Saltpeter, another name for niter, is a salt commonly found to exude from rocks (whence its name); its chemical name is potassium nitrate, and was so named because it was commonly prepared from potash and nitric acid.] 130

133 that give rise to the livers, the glasses, the crocuses, and all the intermediate shades. But is it so with the antimony itself in its relations to sulfur? Do we know of solutions of the one substance in the other of two sulfides of antimony? In the unions termed compounds, nature imposes laws on itself and us, so that no chemist can make compounds in new proportions. Chemistry no longer confounds these two types of union, but needs names to distinguish them. Questions and Problems 1. If you still have a copy of your class results for Experiment 2, consider what relevance they may have to the dispute between Berthollet and Proust. 2. If one accepts Proust s position as the more defensible, what does it add to the science of affinities of which Lavoisier confessed ignorance (Elements of Chemistry, p. 59)? 3. In the writing of chemical equations, what has Proust added to the Lavoisierian equations? 4. Proust speaks of two sorts of attractions among substances (p. 130). Can you distinguish these? 5. Does Proust s evidence speak to all or only to some of the objections that Berthollet raises against asserting constant composition in composite substances? 6. Henceforth we will refer to the constant composition (of two or more elements) of pure substances as compounds. Among the substances referred to by Proust on the bottom of p. 130 and top of p. 131, can you decide which are compounds? How should we describe the other substances? 7. Berthollet seems to accept the constant composition of substances that precipitate out of solutions. Is this sufficient to satisfy Proust s assertion that there are constantcomposition substances? 8. When table salt in water is heated, water is driven off and table salt remains. When mercuric oxide is heated, oxygen is driven off and mercury remains. Saltwater is said to be a solution; mercuric oxide is said to be a compound. On what grounds is this distinction justified? 9. Are you able to compose an operational definition of a compound? * * * * * 131

134 Jeremias Benjamin Richter Extract from Rudiments of Stoichiometry 1 Mathematics includes all those sciences that refer to magnitude, and consequently a science lies more or less in the province of mathematics (geometry), according as it requires the determination of magnitudes. In chemical experiments this truth has often led me to the question, whether and how far chemistry is a part of applied mathematics; and especially in considering the well-known fact that two neutral salts, when they decompose each other, form again neutral compounds. The immediate consequence, in my opinion, could only be that there are definite relations between the magnitudes of the component parts of neutral salts. From that time I considered how these proportions could be made out, partly by exact chemical experiments, partly combining chemical with mathematical analysis. In my inaugural dissertation, published at Königsberg, in 1789, I made a slight attempt, but was not then supplied with the requisite chemical apparatus, nor was I sufficiently ready with all the requisite information, bearing on my present system, imperfect as it may be. The result, therefore, was very imperfect. I promised, however, not to let the matter rest with that imperfect essay, but to work out this branch with the accuracy and profundity of which I was capable, as soon as I was supplied with the requisite conveniences. This promise, I hope in the present volume, to make good, although I am far from believing that what I am now going to say will not be in need of still more thorough and accurate elaboration, for who will venture to limit the extent and power that is the destination of a young and budding science?... [A]s the mathematical portion of chemistry deals in a great measure with bodies that are either elements or substances incapable of being decomposed, and as it teaches also their relative magnitudes, I have been able to find no more fitting name for this scientific discipline than the word stoichiometry, from (stoicheion), which in the Greek language means a something that cannot be divided, and (metrein), which means to find out relative magnitudes... 1 [Anfangsgründe der Stöchyometrie oder Messkunst chymischer Elemente, vol. 1, Preface, published ] 132

135 DEFINITION 1 2 Stoichiometry is the science of measuring the quantitative proportions, or the proportions of the masses in which chemical elements stand in regard to each other. The mere knowledge of these relations might be called quantitative stoichiology... Principle 1 Every infinitely small particle of the mass of an element has an infinitely small part of the chemical attractive force of affinity... EXPERIENCE 5 In order to make a neutral compound out of two elements, it is needful, as each of the elements is of the same constitution at one time as at another, to take the same quantity for the first part formed as for the second part. For example, if two parts of lime require five parts of muriatic acid for solution, six parts of lime will require fifteen of the same acid. EXPERIENCE 6 When two neutral solutions are mixed, and a decomposition follows, the new resulting products are almost without exception neutral also, but if the solutions of one or both are not neutral before mixing, the products after mixture are also not neutral. Corollary 1 The elements must therefore have amongst themselves a certain fixed proportion of mass. To determine which, their neutral compounds generally give the best opportunity. 3 Corollary 2 If the weights of the masses of two neutral compounds that decompose each other are A and B, and the mass of the one element in A is a, and that of the one in B is b, then the masses of the elements in A are A a and a, and those in B are B b and b. The proportions of the masses of the elements in the neutral compounds before decomposition are A a : a and B b : b; but after decomposition the new products are a + B b and b + A a, and the proportion of the masses of the elements is a : B b, and b : A a. If the proportion of the masses in the compounds A and B is known, that in the new products is known also. If a + B b = C and b + A a = D, then a = C + b B = b + A D and C B = A D, so also D B = A C. In addition, b = a + B C = D A + a [Ibid., Vol. 1, pp. 121 ff.] 3 There is present in the element a certain subjectum to which the chemical attractive power or the affinity is bound; this is the mass of the element. 133

136 [The following is a French translation of a table of Richter s equivalents taken from Berthollet s Essai de Statique Chimique, Paris, 1803, Vol. I, p The numbers represent the weight units of each substance listed that are equivalent to (i.e., would saturate/neutralize) 1000 weight units of sulfuric acid. Richter considered all the bases listed to be elements. In this he follows Lavoisier. Bases Alumina Magnesia Ammoniac Lime Soda Strontia Potash Barytes Acids Fluoric Carbonic Sebacic Muriatic Oxalic Phosphoric Formic Sulfuric Succinic Nitric Acetic Citric Tartarous

137 CHAPTER IV Atoms Proposed John Dalton Extracts from A New System of Chemical Philosophy 1 Chapter 2: On the Constitution of Bodies There are three distinctions in the kinds of bodies, or three states, which have more especially claimed the attention of philosophical chemists: namely, those that are marked by the terms elastic fluids, liquids, and solids. A very familiar instance is exhibited to us in water, of a body which, in certain circumstances, is capable of assuming all three states. In steam we recognize a perfectly elastic fluid, in water, a perfect liquid, and in ice, a complete solid. These observations have tacitly led to the conclusion that seems universally adopted that all bodies of sensible magnitude, whether liquid or solid, are constituted of a vast number of extremely small particles, or atoms 2 of matter, bound together by a force of attraction, which is more or less powerful according to circumstances, and which, as it endeavors to prevent their separation, is very properly called in that view attraction of cohesion; but as it collects them from a dispersed state (as from steam into water) it is called attraction of aggregation, or more simply, affinity. Whatever names it may go by, they still signify one and the same power. It is not my design to call in question this conclusion, which appears completely satisfactory, but to show that we have hitherto made no use of it, and that the consequence of the neglect has been a very obscure view of chemical agency, which is daily growing more so in proportion to the new lights attempted to be thrown upon it. The opinions I more particularly allude to are those of Berthollet on the Laws of chemical affinity, such as that chemical agency is proportional to the mass, and that in all chemical unions there exist insensible gradations in the proportions of the constituent principles. The inconsistence of these opinions, both with reason and observation, cannot, I think, fail to strike everyone who takes a proper view of the phenomena. Whether the ultimate particles of a body, such as water, are all alike, that is, of the same figure, weight, &c., is a question of some importance. From what is known, we have no reason to apprehend a diversity in these particulars: If it does exist in water, it must equally exist in the elements constituting water, namely, hydrogen and oxygen. Now it is scarcely possible to conceive how the aggregates of dissimilar particles should be so uniformly the same. If some of 1 [From A New System of Chemical Philosophy (Manchester, England: 1808), Part I, pp ] 2 [ Atom is a transliteration of the Greek word (atomos), meaning uncut, or indivisible. ] 135

138 the particles of water were heavier than others, if a parcel of the liquid on any occasion were constituted principally of these heavier particles, it must be supposed to affect the specific gravity of the mass, a circumstance not known. Similar observations may be made on other substances. Therefore we may conclude that the ultimate particles of all homogeneous bodies are perfectly alike in weight, figure, &c. In other words, every particle of water is like every other particle of water; every particle of hydrogen is like every other particle of hydrogen, &c.... Chapter 3: On Chemical Synthesis 3 When any body exists in the elastic state, its ultimate particles are separated from each other to a much greater distance than in any other state; each particle occupies the center of a comparatively large sphere, and supports its dignity by keeping all the rest, which by their gravity or otherwise are disposed to encroach upon it, at a respectful distance. When we attempt to conceive the number of particles in an atmosphere, it is somewhat like attempting to conceive the number of stars in the universe; we are confounded with the thought. But if we limit the subject, by taking a given volume of any gas, we seem persuaded that, let the divisions be ever so minute, the number of particles must be finite; just as in a given space of the universe, the number of stars and planets cannot be infinite. Chemical analysis and synthesis go no farther than to the separation of particles one from another, and to their reunion. No new creation or destruction of matter is within the reach of chemical agency. We might as well attempt to introduce a new planet into the solar system, or to annihilate one already in existence, as to create or destroy a particle of hydrogen. All the changes we can produce consist in separating particles that are in a state of cohesion or combination, and joining those that were previously at a distance. In all chemical investigations it has justly been considered an important object to ascertain the relative weights of the simples that constitute a compound. But unfortunately the enquiry has terminated here; whereas from the relative weights in the mass, the relative weights of the ultimate particles or atoms of the bodies might have been inferred, from which their number and weight in various other compounds would appear, in order to assist and to guide future investigations, and to correct their results. Now it is one great object of this work to show the importance and advantage of ascertaining the relative weights of the ultimate particles, both of simple and compound bodies, the number of simple elementary particles that constitute one compound particle, and the number of less compound particles that enter into the formation of one more compound particle. If there are two bodies, A and B, which are disposed to combine, the following is the order in which the combinations may take place, beginning with the most simple: namely, 3 [A New System of Chemical Philosophy, pp and ] 136

139 1 atom of A + 1 atom of B = 1 atom of C, binary. 4 1 atom of A + 2 atoms of B = 1 atom of D, ternary. 2 atoms of A + 1 atom of B = 1 atom of E, ternary. 1 atom of A + 3 atoms of B = 1 atom of F, quaternary. 3 atoms of A + 1 atom of B = 1 atom of G, quaternary. &c The following general rules may be adopted as guides in all our investigations respecting chemical synthesis. 1st. When only one combination of two bodies can be obtained, it must be presumed to be a binary one, unless some cause appear to the contrary. 2d. When two combinations are observed, they must be presumed to be a binary and a ternary. 3d. When three combinations are obtained, we may expect one to be a binary, and the other two ternary. 4th. When four combinations are observed, we should expect one binary, two ternary, and one quaternary, &c. 5th. A binary compound should always be specifically heavier than the mere mixture of its two ingredients. 6th. A ternary compound should be specifically heavier than the mixture of a binary and a simple, which would, if combined, constitute it; &c. 7th. The above rules and observations usually apply when two bodies, such as C and D, D and E, &c., are combined. From the application of these rules to the chemical facts already well ascertained, we deduce the following conclusions: 1st. That water is a binary compound of hydrogen and oxygen, and the relative weights of the two elementary atoms are as 1 : 7, nearly; 2d. That ammonia is a binary compound of hydrogen and azote, the relative weights of the two atoms are as 1 : 5, nearly; 3d. That nitrous gas is a binary compound of azote and oxygen, the atoms of which weigh 5 and 7 respectively, that nitric acid is a binary or ternary compound according as it is derived, and consists of one atom of azote and two of oxygen, together weighing 19; that nitrous oxide is a compound similar to nitric acid, and consists of one atom of oxygen and two of azote, weighing 17; that nitrous acid is a binary compound of nitric acid and nitrous gas, weighing 31; that oxynitric acid is a binary compound of nitric acid and oxygen, weighing 26; 4th. That carbonic oxide is a binary compound, consisting of one atom of charcoal, and one of oxygen, together weighing nearly 12; that carbonic acid is a ternary compound (but sometimes binary) consisting 4 [Dalton elsewhere explains his language of speaking of a binary atom : I have chosen the word atom to signify those ultimate particles in preference to particle, molecule, or any other diminutive term because I conceive it is much more expressive; it includes in itself the notion of indivisible, which the other terms do not. It may, perhaps, be said that I extend the application of it too far when I speak of compound atoms; for instance, I call an ultimate particle of carbonic acid a compound atom. Now, though this atom may be divided, yet it ceases to become carbonic acid, being resolved by such division into charcoal and oxygen. Hence I conceive there is no inconsistency in speaking of compound atoms and that my meaning cannot be misunderstood. (Dalton s Manuscript Notes, Royal Institution Lecture 18, January 30, 1810.)] 137

140 of one atom of charcoal, and two of oxygen, weighing 19; &c. In all these cases the weights are expressed in atoms of hydrogen, each of which is denoted by unity. In the sequel, the facts and experiments from which these conclusions are derived, will be detailed, as well as a great variety of others from which are inferred the constitution and weight of the ultimate particles of the principal acids, the alkalis, the earths, the metals, the metallic oxides and sulfurets, the long train of neutral salts, and in short, all the chemical compounds that have hitherto obtained a tolerably good analysis. Several of the conclusions will be supported by original experiments. From the novelty as well as importance of the ideas suggested in this chapter, it is deemed expedient to give plates, exhibiting the mode of combination in some of the more simple cases. A specimen of these accompanies this first part. The elements or atoms of such bodies as are conceived at present to be simple are denoted by a small circle with some distinctive mark, and the combinations consist in the juxtaposition of two or more of these; when three or more particles of elastic fluids are combined together in one, it is to be supposed that the particles of the same kind repel each other, and therefore take their stations accordingly. PLATE IV. This plate contains the arbitrary marks or signs chosen to represent the several chemical elements or ultimate particles. ELEMENTS Simple 1. Hydrogen its rel. weight 1 2. Azote 5 3. Carbone or charcoal 5 4. Oxygen 7 5. Phosphorus 9 6. Sulfur Magnesia Lime Soda Potash

141 11. Strontites Barytes Iron Zinc Copper Lead Silver Platina Gold Mercury 167 Binary 21. An atom of water or steam, composed of 1 of oxygen and 1 of hydrogen, retained in physical contact by a strong affinity, and supposed to be surrounded by a common atmosphere of heat, its relative weight = An atom of ammonia, composed of 1 of azote and 1 of hydrogen = An atom of nitrous gas, composed of 1 of azote and 1 of oxygen = An atom of olefiant gas, composed of 1 of carbone and 1 of hydrogen = An atom of carbonic oxide composed of 1 of carbone and 1 of oxygen = 12. Ternary 26. An atom of nitrous oxide, 2 azote + 1 oxygen = An atom of nitric acid, 1 azote + 2 oxygen =

142 28. An atom of carbonic acid, 1 carbone + 2 oxygen = An atom of carburretted hydrogen, 1 carbone + 2 hydrogen = 7. Quaternary 30. An atom of oxynitric acid, 1 azote + 3 oxygen = An atom of sulfuric acid, 1 sulfur + 3 oxygen = An atom of sulfuretted hydrogen, 1 sulfur + 3 hydrogen = An atom of alcohol, 3 carbone + 1 hydrogen = 16. Quinquenary 34. An atom of nitrous acid, 1 nitric acid + 1 nitrous gas = 31. Sextenary 35. An atom of acetous acid, 2 carbone + 2 water = 26. Septenary 36. An atom of nitrate of ammonia, 1 nitric acid + 1 ammonia + 1 water = An atom of sugar, 1 alcohol + 1 carbonic acid = 35. Enough has been given to show the method; it will be quite unnecessary to devise characters and combinations of them to exhibit to view in this way all the subjects that come under investigation; nor is it necessary to insist upon the accuracy of all these compounds, both 140

143 in number and weight; the principle will be entered into more particularly hereafter, as far as respects the individual results. It is not to be understood that all those articles marked as simple substances are necessarily such by the theory; they are only necessarily of such weights. Soda and Potash, such as they are found in combination with acids, are 28 and 42 respectively in weight; but according to Mr. Davy s very important discoveries, they are metallic oxides; the former then must be considered as composed of an atom of metal, 21, and one of oxygen, 7; and the latter, of an atom of metal, 35, and one of oxygen, 7. Or, soda contains 75 per cent. metal and 25 oxygen; potash, 83.3 metal and 16.7 oxygen. It is particularly remarkable that, according to the above-mentioned gentleman s essay on the Decomposition and Composition of the fixed alkalis, in the Philosophical Transactions (a copy of which essay he has just favored me with), it appears that the largest quantity of oxygen indicated by these experiments was, for potash 17, and for soda, 26 parts in 100, and the smallest 13 and 19. * * * * * Questions and Problems: 1. Dalton s atomic symbols allow us to write chemical equations without using words. Balanced equations are those with the same numbers of each kind of atom on each side of the equation. Write balanced equations, using these symbols, for the compounds: water, nitrous gas, and nitrous acid. Under each symbol or aggregate of symbols indicate the relative weight represented by the number of atoms you have indicated. Appreciate that a balanced atomic equation is an assertion about the relative weights of reactiving substances and their products. 2. What is your judgment of Dalton s rules? 3. How does Dalton determine the number and weights of the atoms contained in the compounds he discusses in the paragraph on the bottom of p. 137 and top of p. 138? 4. There are two common oxides of carbon known by weight. If one accepts Dalton s rule #2, how does one determine whether the two common oxides of carbon are a) or b)? (The latter pair is, of course, Dalton s conclusion.) 5. The law of multiple proportions is demonstrated, among other compounds, by the two common oxides of carbon: 6 g of carbon may combine with 8 g of oxygen to form one common oxide, or with 16 g of oxygen to form another. Besides the two common oxides of carbon, there is a third oxide of carbon known, although it is difficult to prepare. In this oxide, 6 g of carbon combines with 12 g of oxygen. This seems to indicate that one atom of carbon combines with 1 ½ atoms of oxygen! Can you reconcile the existence of this compound with Dalton s atomic theory? (Here we have used the preferred modern atomic weights instead of Dalton s.) 6. Why does Dalton suppose that the particles of the same kind repel each other? 141

144 Joseph Louis Gay-Lussac Memoir on the Combination of Gaseous Substances With Each Other 1 Substances, whether in the solid, liquid, or gaseous state, possess properties that are independent of the force of cohesion; but they also possess others that appear to be modified by this force (so variable in its intensity), and that no longer follow any regular law. The same pressure applied to all solid or liquid substances would produce a diminution of volume differing in each case, while it would be equal for all elastic fluids. Similarly, heat expands all substances; but the dilatations of liquids and solids have hitherto presented no regularity, and it is only those of elastic fluids which are equal and independent of the nature of each gas. The attraction of the molecules in solids and liquids is, therefore, the cause that modifies their special properties; and it appears that it is only when the attraction is entirely destroyed, as in gases, that bodies under similar conditions obey simple and regular laws. At least, it is my intention to make known some new properties in gases, the effects of which are regular, by showing that these substances combine amongst themselves in very simple proportions, and that the contraction of volume that they experience on combination also follows a regular law. I hope by this means to give a proof of an idea advanced by several very distinguished chemists that we are perhaps not far removed from the time when we shall be able to submit the bulk of chemical phenomena to calculation. It is a very important question in itself, and one much discussed amongst chemists, to ascertain if compounds are formed in all sorts of proportions. Mr. Proust, who appears first to have fixed his attention on this subject, is of the opinion that the metals are susceptible of only two degrees of oxidation, a minimum and a maximum; but led away by this seductive theory, he has seen himself forced to entertain principles contrary to physics in order to reduce to two oxides all those that the same metal sometimes presents. Mr. Berthollet thinks, on the other hand reasoning from general considerations and his own experiments that compounds are always formed in very variable proportions, unless they are determined by special causes, such as crystallization, insolubility, or elasticity. Lastly, Dalton has advanced the idea that compounds of two bodies are formed in such a way that one atom of one unites with one, two, three, or more atoms of the other. 2 It would follow from this mode of looking at compounds that they are formed in constant proportions, the existence of intermediate bodies being excluded, and in this respect Dalton s theory would resemble that of Mr. Proust; but Mr. Berthollet has already strongly opposed it in the Introduction he has written to Thomson s Chemistry, and we shall see that in reality it is not entirely exact. Such is the state of the question now under discussion; it is still very far from receiving its solution, but I hope that the facts that I now proceed to set forth, facts that had entirely escaped the notice of chemists, will contribute to its elucidation. Suspecting, from the exact ratio of 100 of oxygen to 200 of hydrogen, 3 which Mr. Humboldt 1 [ Mémoire sur la combinaison des substances gazeuses les unes avec les autre, Mémoires de la Société d Arcueil 2 (1809), pp ] 2 Dalton has been led to this idea by systematic considerations; and one may see from his work, A New System of Chemical Philosophy, p. 213, and from that of Thomson, Vol. 6, that his researches have no connection with mine. 3 [The ratio given is that of combining volumes. In this paper, combining ratios are generally given by volume, 142

145 and I had determined for the proportions of water, that other gases might also combine in simple ratios, I have made the following experiments. I prepared fluoboric, 4 muriatic, and carbonic gases, and made them combine successively with ammonia gas. 100 parts of muriatic gas 5 saturate precisely 100 parts of ammonia gas, and the salt that is formed from them is perfectly neutral, whether one or other of the gases is in excess. Fluoboric gas, on the contrary, unites in two proportions with ammonia gas. When the acid 6 gas is put first into the graduated tube, and the other gas is then passed in, it is found that equal volumes of the two condense, and that the salt formed is neutral. But if we begin by first putting the ammonia gas into the tube, and then admitting the fluoboric gas in single bubbles, the first gas will then be in excess with regard to the second, and there will result a salt with excess of base, composed of 100 of fluoboric gas and 200 of ammonia gas. If carbonic gas 7 is brought into contact with ammonia gas by passing it sometimes first, sometimes second into the tube, there is always formed a sub-carbonate 8 composed of 100 parts of carbonic gas and 200 of ammonia gas. It may, however, be proved that neutral carbonate of ammonia would be composed of equal volumes of each of these components. Mr. Berthollet, who has analyzed this salt, obtained by passing carbonic gas into the sub-carbonate, found that it was composed of parts by weight of carbonic gas and of ammonia gas. Now, if we suppose it to be composed of equal volumes of its components, we find from their known specific gravity that it contains by weight: of carbonic acid of ammonia, a proportion differing only slightly from the preceding. If the neutral carbonate of ammonia could be formed by the mixture of carbonic gas and ammonia gas, as much of one gas as of the other would be absorbed; and since we can only obtain it through the intervention of water, we must conclude that it is the affinity of this liquid that competes with that of the ammonia to overcome the elasticity of the carbonic acid, and that the neutral carbonate of ammonia can only exist through the medium of water. Thus we may conclude that muriatic, fluoboric, and carbonic acids take exactly their own unless specifically identified as by weight. ] 4 Mr. Thenard and I have given the name of fluoboric gas to that particular gas which we obtained by distilling pure fluoride of lime with vitreous boracic acid. 5 [ Muriatic gas is muriatic acid gas.] 6 [ Alkaline is in the original.] 7 [ Carbonic gas, here and throughout the paper, is carbonic acid gas.] 8 [ Sub-carbonate : Lavoisier called the neutral salt formed by carbonic acid and ammoniac the carbonate of ammoniac. But Gay-Lussac describes a non-neutral salt of these two substances in which the acid is deficient. Since this salt contains a smaller proportion of carbonic acid than does the neutral carbonate, it is called a sub-carbonate.] 9 [Gay-Lussac has elsewhere accepted the following specific weights (air = unity): carbonic acid gas ; ammonia gas If equal volumes of these combine to form the sub-salt, their combining weights must be to one another as their specific weights. Of a total of 100 parts, then, and are those that will be to one another as is to ] 143

146 volume of ammonia gas to form neutral salts, and that the last two take twice as much to form sub-salts. It is very remarkable to see acids so different from one another neutralize a volume of ammonia gas equal to their own; and from this we may suspect that if all acids and all alkalies could be obtained in the gaseous state, neutrality would result from the combination of equal volumes of acid and alkali. 10 It is not less remarkable that, whether we obtain a neutral salt or a sub-salt, their elements combine in simple ratios that may be considered as limits to their proportions. Accordingly, if we accept the specific gravity of muriatic gas determined by Mr. Biot and myself, 11 and those of carbonic gas and ammonia given by Mssrs. Biot and Arago, we find that dry muriate of ammonia is composed [by weight] of: Ammonia or Muriatic acid a proportion very far from that of Mr. Berthollet: 100 of ammonia, 213 of acid. In same way, we find that the sub-carbonate of ammonia contains: Ammonia, or Carbonic acid, And the neutral carbonate: Ammonia, or Carbonic acid, It is easy from the preceding results to ascertain the ratios of the capacity of fluoboric, muriatic, and carbonic acids; for since these three gases saturate the same volume of ammonia gas, their relative capacities will be inversely as their densities, allowance having been made for the water contained in muriatic acid. We might even now conclude that gases combine with each other in very simple ratios; but I shall still give some fresh proofs. 10 [Gay-Lussac s speculation, if borne out, would certainly provide a welcome basis for the understanding of neutral salts. Nevertheless, it is not true that neutral salts are always formed by quantities of acid and alkali which, if gaseous, would occupy equal volumes as we will see later, in Avogadro s work.] 11 As muriatic acid contains one-fourth its weight of water, we must only take three-fourths of the density for that of real muriatic acid. [Note that Gay-Lussac still accepts Lavoisier s oxygen theory of acids, so he believes the muriatic acid contains oxygen. In experimental work a few years after publishing this paper Gay-Lussac provided evidence that some acids do not contain oxygen, thus weakening Lavoisier s theory of the acidifying principle.] 144

147 According to the experiments of Mr. Amédée Berthollet, ammonia is composed of: 100 of nitrogen, 300 of hydrogen, by volume. I have found (1st. vol. of the Societe d'arcueil) that sulfuric acid is composed of: 100 of sulfurous gas, 50 of oxygen gas. When a mixture of 50 parts of oxygen and 100 of carbonic oxide 12 (formed by the distillation of oxide of zinc with strongly calcined charcoal) is inflamed, these two gases are destroyed and their place taken by 100 parts of carbonic acid gas. Consequently carbonic acid may be considered as being composed of: 100 of carbonic oxide gas, 50 of oxygen gas. Davy, from the analysis of various compounds of nitrogen with oxygen, has found the following proportions by weight: Nitrogen Oxygen Nitrous oxide Nitrous gas Nitric acid Reducing these proportions to volumes, we find: Nitrogen Oxygen Nitrous oxide Nitrous gas Nitric acid The first and the last of these proportions differ only slightly from 100 to 50, and 100 to 200; it is only the second that diverges somewhat from 100 to 100. The difference, however, is not very great, and is such as we might expect in experiments of this sort; and I have assured myself that it is actually nil. On burning the new combustible substance from potash 13 in 100 parts by volume of nitrous gas, there remained over exactly 50 parts of nitrogen, the weight of which, deducted from that of the nitrous gas (determined with great care by Mr. Berard at Arcueil), yields as result that this gas is composed of equal parts by volume of nitrogen with oxygen: Nitrogen Oxygen Nitrous oxide Nitrous gas Nitric acid From my experiments, which differ very little from those of Mr. Chenevix, oxygenated muriatic acid is composed by weight of: Oxygen Muriatic acid [The carbonic oxide referred to is the first oxide of carbon, which is now called carbon monoxide. In what follows he will refer to the second oxide of carbon as carbonic gas and carbonic acid, which is now called carbon dioxide. ] 13 [This substance was discovered by Davy and is now called potassium. We will read of Davy s experiment in Chapter VI.] 145

148 Converting these quantities into volumes, we find that oxygenated muriatic acid 14 is formed of: Muriatic gas Oxygen gas a proportion very nearly: Muriatic gas 300 Oxygen gas 100 Thus it appears evident to me that gases always combine in the simplest proportions when they act on one another; and we have seen in reality in all the preceding examples that the ratio of combination is 1 to 1, 1 to 2, or 1 to 3. It is very important to observe that in considering weights there is no simple and finite relation between the elements of any one compound; it is only when there is a second compound between the same elements that the new proportion of the element that has been added is a multiple of the first quantity. Gases, on the contrary, in whatever proportions they may combine, always give rise to compounds whose elements by volume are multiples of each other. Not only, however, do gases combine in very simple proportions, as we have just seen, but the apparent contraction of volume that they experience on combination has also a simple relation to the volume of the gases, or at least to one of them. I have said, following Mr. Berthollet, that 100 parts of carbonic oxide gas, prepared by distilling oxide of zinc and strongly calcined charcoal, produce 100 parts of carbonic gas on combining with 50 of oxygen. It follows from this that the apparent contraction of the two gases is precisely equal to the volume of oxygen gas added. 15 The density of carbonic gas is thus equal to that of carbonic oxide plus half the density of oxygen gas; 16 or, conversely, the density of carbonic oxide gas is equal to that of carbonic gas, minus half that of oxygen gas. Accordingly, taking the density of air as unity, we find the density of carbonic oxide gas to be , instead of experimentally determined by Cruickshanks. 17 We know, besides, that a given volume of oxygen produces an equal volume of carbonic acid; consequently, oxygen gas doubles its volume on forming carbonic oxide gas with carbon, and so does carbonic gas on being passed over red-hot charcoal. Since oxygen produces an equal volume of carbonic gas, and the density of the latter is well known, it is easy to calculate the proportion of its elements. In this way we find that carbonic gas is composed [by weight] of: of carbon, of oxygen, and carbonic oxide of: of carbon, 14 [See footnote 11.] 15 [A total of 150 parts of carbonic oxide and oxygen produce only 100 parts by volume of carbonic gas. Thus the two combining gases have apparently contracted their total volume by 50 parts an amount equal to the initial volume of the oxygen.] 16 [This relation among densities is easier to deduce if we restate the proportions of the gases as follows: 1 volume of carbonic acid gas is the product of 1 volume of carbonic oxide gas combined with ½ volume of oxygen gas. ] 17 [Since Gay-Lussac regards the densities of oxygen and carbonic acid gas as well-established, he can use the previous relation to calculate a more reliable value for the density of carbonic oxide gas.] 146

149 57.01 of oxygen Pursuing a similar course, we find that if sulfur takes 100 parts of oxygen to produce sulfurous acid, it takes 150 parts to produce sulfuric acid. As a matter of fact, we find that sulfuric acid, according to the experiments of Mssrs. Klaproth, Bucholz, and Richter, is composed of 100 parts by weight of sulfur and 138 of oxygen. On the other hand, sulfuric acid is composed of 2 parts by volume of sulfurous gas, and 1 of oxygen gas. Consequently, the weight of a certain quantity of sulfuric acid should be the same as that of 2 parts of sulfurous acid and 1 of oxygen gas, i.e., 2 x 2.265, plus = , seeing that, according to Kirwan, sulfurous gas weighs 2.265, the density of air being taken as unity. But from the proportion of 100 of sulfur to 138 of oxygen, this quantity contains of oxygen, and if we subtract from it there will remain for the weight of oxygen in 2 parts of sulfurous acid, or for the weight of oxygen contained in 1 part. Now, as this last quantity only differs by 2 percent from , which represents the weight of 1 part of oxygen gas, it must be concluded that oxygen gas, in combining with sulfur to form sulfurous gas, only experiences a diminution of a fiftieth of its volume, and this would probably be nil if the data I have employed were more exact. On this last supposition, using Kirwan s value for the specific gravity of sulfurous gas, we should find that this acid is composed of: of sulfur, of oxygen. But if, adopting the preceding proportions for sulfuric acid, we allow, as appears probable, that 100 of sulfurous gas contain 100 of oxygen gas, and that 50 have still to be added to convert it into sulfuric acid, [it will be]: of sulfur 92.0 of oxygen. Its specific gravity, calculated on the same suppositions, and referred to that of air, would be , instead of as Kirwan found directly. 18 Phosphorus is very closely connected with sulfur, seeing that both have nearly the same specific gravity. Consequently phosphorous should take up twice as much oxygen to become phosphorous acid, as to pass from this state into phosphoric acid. Since the latter is composed, according to Rose, of: of phosphorus, of oxygen, it follows that phosphorous acid should contain: phosphorus, 76.0 of oxygen. 18 In order to remove these differences it would be necessary to make new experiments on the density of sulfurous gas, on the direct union of oxygen gas with sulfur to see if there is contraction, and on the union of sulfurous gas with ammonia gas. I have found, it is true, on heating cinnabar in oxygen gas, that 100 parts of this gas only produce 93 of sulfurous gas. It also appeared as if less sulfurous gas than ammonia gas was necessary to form a neutral salt. But as these experiments have not been done in suitable conditions especially the last, which could only be made in presence of water, the sulfurous gas decomposing and precipitating sulfur immediately on being mixed with the ammonia gas I intend to repeat them and to determine exactly all the conditions before drawing any conclusion from them. This is all the more necessary, as sulfurous gas can be used to analyze sulfuretted hydrogen gas, if its proportions are well known. 147

150 We have seen that 100 parts of nitrogen gas take 50 parts of oxygen gas to form nitrous oxide, and 100 of oxygen gas to form nitrous gas. In the first case, the contraction is a little greater than the volume of oxygen added; for the specific gravity of nitrous oxide, calculated on this hypothesis, is , while that given by Davy is But it is easy to show, from some of Davy s experiments, that the apparent contraction is precisely equal to the volume of oxygen gas added. On passing the electric spark through a mixture of 100 parts of hydrogen and 97.5 of nitrous oxide, the hydrogen is destroyed and 102 parts of nitrogen remain, including that quantity that is almost always mixed with the hydrogen, and a little of the latter gas that has escaped combustion. The residue, after making all corrections, would be very nearly equal in volume to the nitrous oxide employed. Similarly, on passing the electric spark through a mixture of 100 parts of phosphuretted hydrogen and 250 of nitrous oxide, water and phosphoric acid are formed, and exactly 250 parts of nitrogen remain another evident proof that the apparent contraction of the elements of nitrous oxide is equal to the whole volume of oxygen added. From this circumstance, its specific gravity referred to that of air should be The apparent contraction of the elements of nitrous gas appears, on the other hand, to be nil. If we admit, as I have shown, that it is composed of equal parts of oxygen and nitrogen, we find that its density, calculated on the assumption that there is no contraction, is 1.036, while that determined directly is Saussure found that the density of water vapor is to that of air as 10 is to 14. Assuming that the contraction of volume of the two gases is only equal to the whole volume of oxygen added, we find instead of this a ratio of 10 to 16. This difference, and the authority of a physicist so distinguished as Saussure, would seem to be enough to make us reject the assumption I have just made; but I shall mention several circumstances that render it very probable. First, it has a very strong analogy in its favor; secondly, Mr. Trales found by direct experiment that the ratio of the density of the water vapor to air is 10 to 14.5, instead of 10 to 14; thirdly, although we do not know very exactly the volume occupied by water on passing into the elastic state, we do know, from the experiments of Watt, that a cubic inch of water produces very nearly a cubic foot of steam, i.e., a volume 1728 times as great. Now, adopting Saussure s ratio, we find only 1488 for the volume occupied by water when it is converted into steam; but adopting the ratio of 10 to 16, we should have Finally, the refraction of water vapor, calculated on the assumption of the ratio 10 to 14, is a little greater than the observed refraction; but that calculated from the ratio of 10 to 16 is much more in harmony with the results of the experiment. These, then, are the considerations that go to make the ratio 10 to 16 very probable. Ammonia gas is composed of three parts by volume of hydrogen and one of nitrogen, and its density compared to air is But if we suppose the apparent contraction to be half of the whole volume, we find for the density. Thus it is proved, by this almost perfect concordance, that the apparent contraction of its elements is precisely half of the total volume, or rather double the volume of the nitrogen. I have already proved that oxygenated muriatic gas is composed of 300 parts of muriatic gas and 100 of oxygen gas. Admitting that the apparent contraction of the two gases is half the whole volume, we find for its density, and by experiment I have also assured myself by several experiments that the proportions of its elements are such that it forms neutral salts with the metals. For example, if we pass oxygenated muriatic gas over copper, there is formed a slightly acid green muriate, and a little oxide of copper is precipitated, because the salt cannot be obtained perfectly neutral. It follows from this that in all the muriates, as in oxygenated muriatic 148

151 acid, the acids reduced to volume is thrice the oxygen. It would be the same for carbonates and fluorides, the acids of which have for equal volumes the same saturation capacity as muriatic acid. We see, then, from these various examples, that the contraction experienced by two gases on combination is in almost exact relation with their volume, or rather with the volume of one of them. Only very slight differences exist between the densities of compounds obtained by calculation and those given by experiment, and it is probable that, on undertaking new researches, we shall see them vanish entirely. Recalling the great law of chemical affinity, that every combination involves an approximation 19 of the elementary particles, it is difficult to conceive why carbonic oxide gas should be lighter than oxygen. 20 Indeed, that is the principal reason that has led Mr. Berthollet to assume the existence of hydrogen in this gas, and thus explain its low density. But it seems to me that the difficulty arises from supposing that the approximation of the elementary particles is represented in gases by the diminution of volume that they suffer on combination. 21 This supposition is not always true, and we might cite several gaseous combinations, the constituent particles of which would be brought very close together, although there is not only no diminution of volume, but even a dilatation. Such, for example, is nitrous gas, whether we consider it as being formed directly from nitrogen and oxygen, or from nitrous oxide and oxygen. In the first case, there is no diminution of volume; 22 and in the second, there would be dilatation, for 100 parts of nitrous oxide and 50 of oxygen would produce 200 of nitrous gas. We know too that carbonic gas represents an exactly equal volume of oxygen, and that the affinity that unites its elements is very powerful. Nevertheless, if we admitted an immediate relation between the condensation of the elements and the condensation of volume, we should conclude, contrary to experiment, that there is no condensation. Otherwise it would be necessary to suppose that if carbon were in the gaseous state it would combine in equal volumes (or in any other proportion) with oxygen, and that the apparent condensation would then be equal to the whole volume of the gaseous carbon. But if we make this supposition for carbonic acid, we may also make it for carbonic oxide, by assuming, for instance, that 100 parts of gaseous carbon would produce 100 parts of the gas on combining with 50 parts of oxygen. However it may stand with these suppositions, which only serve to make it conceivable that oxygen can produce a compound lighter than itself by combining with a solid substance, we must admit, as a truth founded on a great number of observations, that the condensation of the particles of two combining substances, in particular of two gases, has no immediate relation to the condensation of volume, since we often see that whilst one is very great the other is very small or even nil. The observation that the gaseous combustibles combine with oxygen in the simple ratios 19 Approximation : id est, an approach to one another. 20 Oxygen being a constituent of carbonic oxide, how can the whole be lighter than the part? Lighter, that is, volume for volume. 21 [That is, it is a mistake to suppose that any mutual approach of the respective particles of combining gases is necessarily reflected in a diminution of the volume they afterwards occupy. Note that Gay-Lussac here is rejecting the 5th Rule propounded by Dalton.] 22 [Since, as we saw above, 100 volumes of nitrogen and 100 volumes of oxygen yield 200 volumes of nitrous gas.] 149

152 of 1 to 1, 1 to 2, 1 to ½, can lead us to determine the density of the vapors of combustible substances, or at least to approximate closely to that determination. For if we suppose all combustible substances to be in the gaseous state, a specified volume of each would absorb an equal volume of oxygen, or twice as much, or else half; and as we know the proportion of oxygen taken up by each combustible substance in the solid or liquid state, it is sufficient to convert the oxygen into volumes, and also the combustible, under the condition that its vapor shall be equal to the volume of oxygen, or else double or half this value. For example, mercury is susceptible of two degrees of oxidation, and we may compare the first one to nitrous oxide. Now according to Mssrs. Fourcroy and Thenard, 100 parts of mercury absorb 4.16, which reduced to gas would occupy a space of These 100 parts of mercury reduced to vapor should therefore occupy twice the space, viz., We thence conclude that the density of mercury vapor is greater than that of oxygen, and that that metal on passing from the liquid to the gaseous state assumes a volume 961 times as great. I shall not discuss more of these determinations, because they are only based on analogies, and it is besides easy to multiply them. I shall conclude this Memoir by examining if compounds are formed in constant or variable proportions, as the experiments of which I have just given an account lead me to the discussion of these two opinions. According to Dalton s ingenious idea, that combinations are formed from atom to atom, the various compounds that two substances can form would be produced by the union of one molecule of the one with one molecule of the other, or with two, or with a greater number, but always without intermediate compounds. Thomson and Wollaston have indeed described experiments that appear to confirm this theory. Thomson has found that super-oxalate of potash contains twice as much acid as is necessary to saturate the alkali; and Wollaston, that the subcarbonate of potash contains, on the other hand, twice as much alkali as is necessary to saturate the acid. The numerous results I have brought forward in this Memoir are also very favorable to the theory. But Mr. Berthollet, who thinks that combinations are made continuously, cites in proof of his opinion the acid sulfates, glass, alloys, mixtures of various liquids all of which are compounds with very variable proportions, and he insists principally on the identity of the force that produces chemical compounds and solutions. Each of these two opinions has, therefore, a large number of facts in its favor; but although they are apparently utterly opposed, it is easy to reconcile them. We must first of all admit, with Mr. Berthollet, that chemical action is exercised indefinitely in a continuous manner between the molecules of substances, whatever their number and ratio may be, and that in general we can obtain compounds [composés] with very variable proportions. But then we must admit at the same time that apart from insolubility, cohesion, and elasticity, which tend to produce combinations [combinaisons] in fixed proportions chemical action is exerted more powerfully when the elements are in simple ratios or in multiple proportions among themselves, and that compounds are thus produced that separate out more easily. In this way we reconcile the two opinions, and maintain the great chemical law, that whenever two substances are in the presence of each other they act in their sphere of activity according to their masses, and give rise in general to compounds with very variable proportions, unless these proportions are determined by special circumstances. 150

153 Conclusion I have shown in this Memoir that the combinations of gaseous substances with each other are always formed in very simple ratios, so that representing one of the terms by unity, the other is 1, 2, or at most 3. These ratios by volume are not observed with solid or liquid substances, nor when we consider weights, and they form a new proof that it is only in the gaseous state that substances are in the same circumstances and obey regular laws. It is remarkable to see that ammonia gas neutralizes exactly its own volume of gaseous acids; and it is probable that if all acids and alkalies were in the elastic state, they would all combine in equal volumes to produce neutral salts. The capacity of saturation of acids and alkalies measured by volume would then be the same, and this might perhaps be the true manner of determining it. The apparent contraction of volume suffered by gases upon combining is also very simply related to the volume of one of them, and this property likewise is peculiar to gaseous substances. * * * * * 151

154 APPENDIX TO CHAPTER IV: Dalton on On Gay-Lussac s Laws 1 [Optional Reading] Some observations on nitric acid, and the other compounds of azote and oxygen, have been made by Gay-Lussac, in the ad. Vol. of the Mémoires d Arcueil. He contends that one measure of oxygenous gas unites to two measures of nitrous gas to form nitric acid, and to three measures to form nitrous acid. Now I have shown that 1 measure of oxygen may be combined with 1.3 of nitrous gas, or with 3.5, or with any intermediate quantity whatever, according to circumstances, which he seems to allow; what, then, is the nature of the combinations below 2, and above 3, of nitrous gas? No answer is given to this but the opinions founded upon an hypothesis that all elastic fluids combine in equal measures, or in measures that have some simple relation one to the other, as 1 to 2, 1 to 3, 2 to 3, etc. In fact, his notion of measures is analogous to mine of atoms; and if it could be proved that all elastic fluids have the same number of atoms in the same volume, or numbers that are as 1, 2, 3, etc., the two hypotheses would be same, except that mine is universal, and his applies only to elastic fluids. Gay-Lussac could not but see that a similar hypothesis had been entertained by me, and abandoned as untenable; however, as he has revived the notion, I shall make a few observations upon it, though I do not but doubt he will soon see its inadequacy. Nitrous gas is, according to Gay-Lussac, constituted of equal measures of azote and oxygen which, when combined, occupy the same volume as when free. He quotes Davy, who found azote, and oxygen by weight, in nitrous gas. He converts these into volumes, and finds them after the rate of 100 azote to oxygen, taking the specific gravities according to Biot and Arago. But that Davy has overrated the oxygen 12 % he shows by burning potassium in nitrous gas, when 100 measures afforded just 50 of azote. The degree of purity of the nitrous gas, and the particulars of the experiment, are not mentioned. This one result is to stand against the mean of three experiments of Davy, and may or may not be more correct, as hereafter shall appear. Dr. Henry s analysis of ammonia embraces that of nitrous gas also; he finds 100 measures of ammonia require 120 of nitrous gas for their saturation. Now this will apply to Gay- Lussac s theory in a very direct manner; for, according to him, ammonia is formed of 1 measure of azote and 3 of hydrogen, condensed into a volume of 2; it follows, then, that 100 ammonia require 75 oxygen to saturate the hydrogen; 2 hence 120 nitrous gas should contain 75 oxygen, instead of 60, or 100 should contain 62.5, instead of 50. Here either the theory of Gay-Lussac or the experience of Dr. Henry must give results wide of the truth. In regard to ammonia too, it may further be added, that neither is the ratio of azote to hydrogen 1 to 3, nor is the volume of ammonia doubled by decomposition, according to the experiments of Berthollet, Davy, and Henry, made with the most scrupulous attention to accuracy, to which may be added my own. There is another point of view in which this theory of Gay-Lussac is unfortunate, in regard to ammonia and nitrous gas: 1 measure of azote with 3 of hydrogen, forms 2 of ammonia; 1 [An appendix to A New System of Chemical Philosophy, part II, published in 1810, pp ] 2 [Dalton is assuming that Gay-Lussac will admit that Hydrogen and Oxygen combine in a ratio of 2 : 1, by volume. Thus, since the volume of the Hydrogen in the 100 measures of Ammonia is 150 (while that of Nitrogen is 50), the measure of Oxygen that saturates the Hydrogen would be 75.] 152

155 and 1 measure of azote with 1 of oxygen, forms 2 of nitrous gas; now, according to a wellestablished principle in chemistry, 3 1 measure of oxygen ought to combine with 3 of hydrogen, or with one half as much, or twice as much; but no one of these combinations takes place. If Gay-Lussac adopts my conclusions, namely, that 100 measures of azote require about 250 hydrogen to form ammonia, and that 100 azote require about 120 oxygen to form nitrous gas, he will perceive that the hydrogen of the former would unite to the oxygen of the latter, and form water, leaving no excess of either further than the unavoidable errors of experiments might produce; and thus the great chemical law would be preserved. The truth is, I believe, that gases do not unite in equal or exact measures in any one instance; when they appear to do so, it is owing to the inaccuracy of our experiments. In no case, perhaps, is there a nearer approach to mathematical exactness, than in that of 1 measure of oxygen to 2 of hydrogen; but here, the most exact experiments I have ever made, gave 1.97 hydrogen to 1 oxygen. * * * * * 3 [That is, the Law of Equivalents.] 153

156 154

157 CHAPTER V Revisiting the Law of Equivalence and the Law of Multiple Proportions William Hyde Wollaston A Synoptic Scale of Chemical Equivalents 1 When the nature of any saline compound is proposed as the subject of inquiry to an analytic chemist, the questions that occur for his consideration are so varied and so numerous that he will seldom be disposed to undertake a series of original experiments for the purpose of satisfying his inquiries, so long as he can rely upon the accuracy of those results that have been obtained by the labor of others who have preceded him in this field of patient investigation. If, for instance, the salt under examination be the common blue vitriol, or crystallized sulfate of copper, the first obvious questions are, (1) How much sulfuric acid does it contain? (2) How much oxide of copper? (3) How much water? He may not be satisfied with these first steps in the analysis, but may desire to know further the quantities (4) of sulfur, (5) of copper, (6) of oxygen, (7) of hydrogen. As a means of gaining this information, he naturally considers the quantities of various reagents that may be employed for discovering the quantity of sulfuric acid: (8) how much barytes, (9) carbonate of barytes, or (10) nitrate of barytes would be requisite for this purpose? (11) How much lead is to be used in the form of (12) nitrate of lead; and when the precipitate of (13) sulfate of barytes or (14) sulfate of lead are obtained, it will be necessary that he should also know the proportion that either of them contains of dry sulfuric acid. He may also endeavor to ascertain the same point by means of (15) the quantity of pure potash, or (16) of carbonate of potash requisite for the precipitation of the copper. He might also use (17) zinc or (18) iron for the same purpose, and he may wish to know the quantities of (19) sulfate of zinc, or (20) sulfate of iron that will then remain in the solution. These, and very many more questions of the same kind, which it would be tedious to specify, and needless to enumerate, engage the thoughts, and will occupy much of the time of every experimental chemist, unless he can have recourse to some record of former analyses on which he can depend. The scale, which I am about to describe, is designed to answer at one view all of these questions, with reference to most of the salts contained in the table, not merely expressing numerically the proportions by which the desired answers may be calculated, but directly indicating the actual weights of the several ingredients, contained in any assumed weight of the salt under consideration, and also the actual quantities of several reagents that may be used, and of the precipitates that would be obtained by each. In the formation of this scale, it is requisite in the first place to determine the proportions in which the different known chemical bodies unite with each other, and to express these 1 [Philosophical Transactions 1814: 1-22 (read to the Royal Society on November 4, 1813).] 155

158 proportions in such terms that the same substance shall always be represented by the same number. It is to Richter that we are originally indebted for this mode of expression, and for having first observed that law of permanent proportions on which the possibility of this numerical representation is founded. The proportions assigned to various salts by his predecessors Bergman, Wenzel, and Kirwan were incompatible with this mode of notation. If we return to Bergman s treatise De Analysi Aquarum, we find it stated that in sulfate of potash 40 of acid are combined with 52 of potash, or that 100 of sulfuric acid take 130 of potash. In muriate of potash, 61 of the alkali are said to be combined with 31 of acid, which is in the proportion of 130 to 66, so that the same quantity of potash that is saturated by 100 sulfuric acid, requires of muriatic 66. But if we make a similar estimate by means of lime, since sulfate of lime is said to contain 46 acid combined with 32 lime, 100 of acid would require And in muriate of lime, since 44 of lime are said to be combined with 31 of acid, thence 69.5 of lime would require 49. So that in this instance it would appear that the equivalent to 100 sulfuric acid, instead of being 66 muriatic, is 49; which, if true, would defeat our attempts to express the same body always by the same number. In comparing the analyses of Wenzel with each other, we find the same inconsistency. If we select sulfate of ammonia, and muriate of ammonia, we obtain 67.3 as the equivalent of muriatic acid. But by comparison of sulfate of magnesia with muriate of magnesia, it would appear to be 73 instead of In referring to the tables of Kirwan, a similar obstacle presents itself to the determination of the quantity of muriatic acid that is equivalent to a given weight of sulfuric acid. When the comparison is made by means of potash, the result would make it appear that 68.3 is the relative weight of muriatic acid. But, if the compounds of these acids with lime be employed in the computation, the result of 68.3 gives only 59. Richter remarked, on observing this sort of inconsistency, that if sulfate of potash formed according to the proportions of Kirwan were decomposed by muriate of lime, there should be found a large excess of alkali in the solution. But, on the contrary, by direct experiment he found that neutral salts, when mixed, remained in all cases neutral, and consequently, that the same weight of muriatic acid would in all cases be found equivalent to the same quantity of sulfuric acid; and therefore [they] might be conveniently expressed, in stating the compositions of salts, by the same number. He estimates this acid at 712, as the equivalent to 1000 dry sulfuric acid, the number assumed as his standard of comparison, to which all other numbers for acids, alkalis, and earths are adapted. It could not escape the penetration of Mr. Berthollet, that there exist numerous deviations from this law of neutralization, and cases of prevailing affinity dependent upon a redundance 2 of one or other ingredient in a mixture of salts. But he was not so happy in detecting the definite law by which many, at least, of these deviations are governed. It has since been found that when a base unites with a larger portion of acid than is sufficient to saturate it, the quantity combined is then an exact simple multiple of the former, thus exhibiting a new modification of the law of definite proportions, rather than any exception to it. The first instance in which the same body was supposed to unite with different doses of 2 [That is, a surplus.] 156

159 another, in such proportions that one of these doses is a simple multiple of the other, was noticed by Mr. Higgins, 3 who conceived, rather than actually observed to occur, certain successive degrees of oxidation of azote, and represented the series of its combinations with oxygen to be: Azote 1 with 2 oxygen making nitrous gas. Azote 1 with 3 oxygen making red nitrous vapor. Azote 1 with 4 oxygen making yellow nitrous acid. Azote 1 with 5 oxygen making white nitric acid. He at the same time added his opinion, that such are the proportions in which these gases unite to each other by bulk, 4 having before observed one instance of union by exactly double bulk in the formation of water by the combustion of hydrogen and oxygen, 5 and expressed his persuasion that the number of particles in a given bulk of the different gases is the same, and that the number of particles in the compounds of azote and oxygen are successively in the proportions above stated. But though Mr. Higgins, in the instance of the union of hydrogen with oxygen, anticipated the law of bulks observed by Mr. Gay Lussac, with respect to the union of gases, and in his conception of union by ultimate particles clearly preceded Mr. Dalton in his atomic views of chemical combination, he appears not 6 to have taken much pains to ascertain the actual prevalence of that law of multiple proportions by which the atomic theory is best supported, and it is in fact to Mr. Dalton that we are indebted for the first correct observation of such an instance of a simple multiple in the union of nitrous gas with oxygen. In his endeavors to determine the composition of the atmosphere, he found that the quantity of oxygen contained in 100 measures of common air would combine with either 36 or 72 measures of nitrous gas, according to certain variations in the mode of conducting the experiment. 7 Chemists in general, however, appear to have been by no means duly impressed with the importance of this observation of Mr. Dalton, till they were in possession of other facts observed by Dr. Thomson and myself, 8 in a more tangible form, with regard to neutral and superacid or subacid of salts, which could be made the subjects of more deliberate and less equivocal experiments; and it is, perhaps, owing to the repetition and confirmation of them by Mr. 3 A comparative view of the phlogistic and antiphlogistic theories, 1789, p [ Bulk here appears to mean volume. On the next page he appears also to mean volume when he speaks of quantity. ] 5 [In Chapter IV we will read about Gay-Lussac s discovery pertaining to the combination of gas volumes, and we will witness a demonstration of the same experiment as that recorded here, but in reverse. Recall that Lavoisier, in composing water from hydrogen and oxygen gases (Elements of Chemistry, p. 93), mentions that he must use volumes in a ratio of two to one in order to yield only water. He appears, however, to make nothing of this ratio.] 6 In straw-colored nitrous acid, the proportion appears to be four to one; but the colorless contains about five of dephloghisticated to one of phlogisticated air. Comparative View, p Manchester Mem. Vol. V - Nich. Journal, Vol. XIII, p Phil. Trans. 1808, p Ditto, p

160 Berthollet, 9 that they have attracted the attention of other chemists, who are now ready to admit that the term binacid correctly expresses the relation of many superacid salts to neutrals consisting of the same ingredients... Since that time the additional instances in which the same law has been observed to prevail are become so numerous, especially with regard to different degrees of oxidation, that we have the greatest reason to presume that it is universal, and that on such analyses that are found not to accord with this general observation, we are warranted in suspecting some degree of inaccuracy in one order or other of the results compared together. According to Mr. Dalton s theory, by which these facts are best explained, chemical union in the state of neutralization takes place between single atoms of the substances combined; and in cases where there is a redundance of either ingredient, then two or more atoms of this kind are united to only one of the other. According to this view, when we estimate the weights of equivalents, Mr. Dalton conceives that we are estimating the aggregate weights of a given number of atoms, and consequently the proportion that the ultimate single atoms bear to each other. But since it is impossible in several instances, where only two combinations of the same ingredients are known, to discover which of the compounds is to be regarded as consisting of a pair of single atoms, and since the decision of these questions is purely theoretical, and by no means necessary to the formation of a table adapted to most practical purposes, I have not been desirous of warping my numbers according to an atomic theory, 10 but have endeavored to make practical convenience my sole guide, and have considered the doctrine of simple multiples, on which that of atoms is founded, merely as a valuable assistant in determining, by simple division, the amount of those quantities that are liable to such definite deviations from the original law of Richter. Having some time since computed for private use a series of supposed atoms, I had assumed oxygen as the decimal unit of my scale, in order to facilitate the estimation of those numerous combinations that it forms with other bodies. But, though in the present table of Equivalents, I have retained the same unit, and have taken care to make oxygen equally prominent for the same reason as before, as well as on account of the important part it performs in determining the affinities of bodies by the different proportions in which it is united to them; nevertheless the real measure by which most bodies are compared to each other, in any experiments that I have made, and to which I have, in fact, endeavored to find equivalents, is a determinate quantity of carbonate of lime. This is a compound that may be regarded as most distinctly neutral. It is most easy to obtain in a state of uniform purity; most easy to analyze (as a binary compound); it is a most convenient measure for the powers of acids; and affords the most distinct expression for the comparative neutralizing powers of alkalis. Consequently, the first question to be resolved is, by what number are we to express the relative weight of carbonic acid, if oxygen be fixed at 10. It seems to be very well ascertained that a given quantity of oxygen yields exactly an equal measure of carbonic acid by union with carbon; and since the specific gravities of these gases are as 10 to 13.77, 11 or as 20 to 27.54, the 9 Mem. D.Arcueil, Tom II, p [Look, for example, in the Numerical Table of Equivalents, under iron, at the weight of oxygen in the red iron oxide. What would an atomist make of its weight?] 11 Biot and Arago, : :: 10 :

161 weight of carbon may be justly represented by 7.54, which, in this instance, is combined with 2 of oxygen forming the deutoxide, and carbonic oxide being the protoxide will be duly represented by Carbonic acid having consequently been assumed as 27.54, it follows from the analysis of carbonate of lime, which by heat loses 43.7 per cent. of acid, and leaves 56.3 of base, that they are combined on the proportion of to 35.46, and consequently that lime must be represented by 35.46, and carbonate of lime by 63. If I would proceed in the series for the purpose of estimating the reliance to be placed on preceding analyses, I might dissolve 63 of carbonate of lime in muriatic acid, and by evaporating to perfect dryness should obtain about muriate of lime, 13 and by deducting the weight of the lime should learn, by means of the difference 34.1, what is to be considered as dry muriatic acid. But since lime is now known, by the brilliant discoveries of Sir Henry Davy, to be a metallic body united with oxygen, 14 this salt may also be viewed as a binary compound in a different light as oxymuriate of calcium; in which case we must transfer the weight of 10 oxygen to the muriatic acid, making 44.1 of oxymuriatic acid combined with calcium. Or, lastly, if with the same distinguished chemist, we regard it as chloride of calcium, its place in the scale of equivalents is the same 69.56, and the portion of matter here added to the calcium, whether it retain its late name of oxymuriatic acid, or revert to its original one of dephlogisticated marine acid, or assume its new one of chlorine, will be rightly represented by 44.1, which expresses a bare fact without reference to any theory, and affords the means of estimating the proportion of this constituent in all muriatic compounds, without need of controversy respecting its simple or compound nature, which may never admit of any argument that will be deemed conclusive by all parties. With the same latitude of interpretation may be understood muriate of potash or of soda in the scale of equivalents; and the relative weights of mere potash or soda may, perhaps, be determined better by means of these compounds than by any other, because they are not liable to be superacid, and are not decomposed by heat. If to a quantity of muriatic acid, which, by previous trial, I know would dissolve 100 of carbonate of lime, I add 100 grains of crystallized carbonate of potash, and [with what is left of the muriatic acid] after the addition find that it will dissolve only 49.8 of carbonate of lime; I hence infer that 100 of this carbonate [of potash] is equivalent to 50.2 carbonate of lime, and consequently that is the equivalent to 63 in the table. Next, if I combine of crystallized carbonate of potash with an excess of muriatic acid, and evaporate to dryness, I expel the whole of the water with all redundant acid, and I find 93.2 of neutral salt; and whether I call it muriate of potash, or chloride of potassium, or by any 12 [Deut- and proto- are prefixes from Greek words meaning second and first ; they are analogous to our di- and mono- prefixes, also from Greek words, but meaning double and single. ] 13 In Dr. Marcet s experiments on the composition of muriate of lime, referred to in his Analysis of the Water of the Dead Sea, carbonate gave 56.1 of muriate of lime, and : 56.1 :: 63 : [As Lavoisier anticipated in his Elements of Chemistry, Ch. XVI. The decomposition of lime, soda, and potash into metals and oxygen will be considered in Chapter VI of this manual.] 159

162 other name, with any other views, I may deduct 34.1 as dry muriatic acid (whether real or imaginary 15 ), and infer the equivalent for potash to be 59.1, even though there should, in fact, be only 49.1 of potassium present, requiring 10 of oxygen 16 to convert it into potash. The next question that occurs relates to the composition of this crystallized carbonate of potash, which I am induced to call bi-carbonate 17 of potash, for the purpose of marking more decidedly the distinction between this salt and that which is commonly called a subcarbonate, 18 and in order to refer at once to the double dose of carbonic acid contained in it. With reference to carbonate of lime also, I must necessarily consider it as a supercarbonate, for if I add a solution of this salt to a neutral solution of muriate of lime, a considerable effervescence takes place, from a redundance of carbonic acid beyond what is necessary to saturate the lime. If I saturate of this salt with nitric acid, taking due precautions not to expel any of the fluid along with the gas that escapes, it loses about 55 of carbonic acid, which is the double of But if, previous to the saturation, I heat the salt moderately red, it loses 38.8, consisting of 27.5 carbonic acid and 11.3 water, after which the addition of an acid expels only 27.5, or a single dose of carbonic acid. 19 I have in this experiment made use of nitric acid in order that the resulting compound might guide me in the selection from among further estimates that are extremely discordant with regard to the equivalent of that acid. 20 The proportion of nitrate of potash, which I have obtained by evaporating such a solution by a heat just sufficient to fuse the residuum, gave at the lowest in three experiments 126, for the equivalent of nitrate of potash; from which, if we deduct 59.1 potash, there will remain 66.9 as the apparent equivalent of dry nitric acid. Consequently, I have no hesitation in preferring the estimate 21 to be obtained from Richter s analysis of nitrate of potash, which gives 67.45, from which, if we subtract one portion of azote 17.54, there remains 49.91, so nearly 5 portions of oxygen, that I consider the truth to be , or From this sketch of the mode in which such an inquiry may be pursued, wherever it is necessary to make any original experiments, it will be fully understood what is meant by 15 Its separate existence is certainly imaginary, for it can no more be obtained uncombined than dry sulfuric acid, or dry nitric acid. [Compare with On the Acidifying Principle, above.] 16 If all the steps in the series, by which the number 49.1 is inferred, be correct, this should be exactly without any fraction; and the proportion assigned to muriate of potash by Berzelius is sufficiently near, to show that there can be no considerable error: : : : 49.1 : I avoid using the term carbonate of potash for either of these salts, because it has been applied to both, and consequently is liable to be misunderstood when standing alone. 18 [A bi-carbonate is the same as a supercarbonate. It has twice as much carbonic acid in it per weight of potash as has the subcarbonate. The bi-carbonate is made by bubbling large amounts of carbonic acid gas through a solution of potash in water. The bi-carbonate of potash may then be crystallized out of this solution. On heating, it loses half of its carbonic acid gas and becomes the subcarbonate of potash.] 19 Phil. Trans. 1808, p [See the final paragraph of this essay, after the Data Table.] : 53.3 : : 59.1 : 67.45, quoted in Mem. d Arcueil, II

163 equivalents, and in what manner the series might be continued. I have, however, in most instances drawn my inferences from former analyses, and indeed in all where I could find coincidences between different authorities sufficient to give confidence in their results. But with respect to oxalic acid, I again found a difficulty in deciding among the discordant results of different analyses, and was obliged to have recourse to direct experiment. 100 grains of bin-oxalate of potash (commonly called salt of sorrel) were subjected to a degree of heat sufficient to destroy the oxalic acid, and to convert the salt into a subcarbonate of potash. 22 A quantity of muriatic acid was then poured on this residuum, and afterwards saturated with carbonate of lime; and an equal quantity of the same acid was saturated with carbonate of lime alone. By the excess of carbonate dissolved in the latter instance, it was found that 100 binoxalate of potash was equivalent to 40.9 carbonate of lime; and hence the equivalent to 63 carbonate of lime will be 154 of the bin-oxalate of potash. After deducting 59.1 potash, the remainder, 94.9 divided by 2, gives for the equivalent of dry oxalic acid. I therefore again adopt the result of the very industrious and ever accurate Berzelius, obtained by means of oxalate of lead, that litharge 23 are combined with 100 oxalic acid, which are in the proportion of litharge to 47.0 oxalic acid. Such a degree of accordance between methods totally different appears highly satisfactory, and seems to show that in attempts to determine the same point by means of lime, some compounds may possibly be formed at the same time differing in the proportions of acid and base, as in the cases of oxalate and bin-oxalate of strontia observed by Dr. Thomson, and that erroneous inferences may have been drawn from precipitates in which they are blended. With the exception of those instances that I have enumerated, there are few in which I have found it necessary to make any new experiments, as I have met with coincidences between the independent results of others sufficient to satisfy me in their correctness; and accordingly I have adopted such determinations without any pretentions to improve upon them by new experiments of my own. It is not my design, in the table that follows this paper, to attempt a complete enumeration of all those elements or compounds that I suppose to be well ascertained, but merely to include some of those which most frequently occur. I do not offer it as an attempt to correct the estimates that have been formed by others, but as a method in which their results may be advantageously applied in forming an easy approximation to any object of our inquiries. The means by which this is effected may be in part understood by inspection of the Plate I. [p. 172], in which will be seen the list of substances intended to be estimated, arranged on one or the other side of a scale of numbers in the order of their relative weights, that the series of numbers placed on a sliding scale can at pleasure be moved, so that any number expressing the weight of a compound may be brought to correspond with the place of that compound in the adjacent column. The arrangement is then such that the weight of any ingredient in its composition, of any reagent to be employed, or precipitate that might be obtained in its analysis, will be found opposite to the point at which its respective name is placed. In order to show more clearly the use of this scale, the Plate exhibits two different 22 [Oxalic acid contains carbon, and when salts of oxalic acid are decomposed by heat, carbonates are formed.] 23 Ann. De Chimie, No [Litharge is a lead oxide.] 161

164 situations of the slider, in one of which oxygen is 10, the other bodies being in their due proportion to it, so that carbonic acid being 27.54, and lime 35.46, carbonate of lime is placed at 63. In the second figure, the slider is represented drawn upwards till 100 corresponds to muriate of soda; and accordingly the scale then shows how much of each substance contained in the table is equivalent to 100 of common salt. It shows, with regard to the different views of the analysis of this salt, that it contains 46.6 of dry muriatic acid, and 53.4 of soda, or 39.8 of sodium, and 13.6 oxygen; or if viewed as chloride of sodium, that it contains 60.2 chlorine, and 39.8 sodium. With respect to reagents, it may be seen that 283 nitrate of lead, containing 191 of litharge employed to separate the muriatic acid, would yield a precipitate of 237 muriate of lead, and that there would then remain in solution nearly 146 nitrate of soda. It may at the same time be seen that the [muriatic] acid in this quantity of [common] salt would serve to make 232 corrosive sublimate 24 containing red oxide of mercury, or would make 91.5 muriate of ammonia, composed of 6 muriatic gas (or hydromuriatic acid) and 29.5 ammonia. The scale shows also that, for the purpose of obtaining the whole of the [muriatic] acid in distillation, the quantity of oil of vitriol 25 required is nearly 84, and that the residuum of this distillation would be 122 dry sulfate of soda, from which might be obtained, by crystallization, 277 of Glauber salt containing 155 water of crystallization. These and many more such answers appear at once by bare inspection, as soon as the weight of any substance intended for examination is made by motion of the slider correctly to correspond with its place in the adjacent column. With respect to the method of laying down the divisions of this scale, those who are accustomed to the use of other sliding-rules, and are practically acquainted with their properties, will recognize upon the slider itself the common Gunter s line of numbers (as it is termed), and will be satisfied that the results that it gives are the same that would be obtained by arithmetical computation. Those who are acquainted with the doctrine of ratios, and with the use of logarithms as measures of ratios, will understand the principle on which this scale is founded, and will not need to be told that all the divisions are logometric, and consequently that the mechanical addition and subtraction of ratios, here performed by juxtaposition, corresponds in effect to the multiplication and division of the numbers by which those ratios are expressed in common arithmetical notation. To others who are not equally conversant with nature of logarithms, and consequently have not so correct a conception of the magnitudes of ratios, some further explanation of the mode in which the scale of equivalents is constructed will, I presume, be acceptable. They will observe that the series of natural numbers are not placed at equal intervals on the scale; but that at all equal intervals are found numbers that bear the same proportion to each other. In fig. 3 [in Plate I.], some of the larger intervals alone are represented on a line similarly divided. The succession of intervals, marked A, B, C, D, E, are all equal, and at these points of division are placed numbers 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, which increase progressively by the same ratio. And since the series 3 : 6 : 12 : 24 increase in the same ratio of 1 to 2, these intervals a, b, c, d, e, are the same as the former. At another succession of different yet equal intervals, marked F, G, H, I, 24 [The mercuric chloride discussed by Proust and Berthollet. Cf. pp ] 25 [Aqueous, or hydrated, sulfuric acid; see the Numerical Table of Equivalents, under Sulfuric Acid (dry).] 162

165 are placed numbers 1, 3, 9, 27, which increase regularly by an equal ratio of 1 to 3; and by means of a pair of compasses it would be found that the interval from 2 to 6, or from 6 to 18 (which are in the same ratio of 1 to 3), is exactly equal to FG, the interval between 1 and 3. As any single space represents only one ratio, so the sum of any 2 or 3 equal spaces represents a double or triple ratio. If 1 be increased 3 times by the ratio of 1 to 2, it becomes 8, which bears to 1 triple the ratio of 2 to 1. This ratio is therefore rightly represented by AD, which is the triple of AB. The distances of the intermediate numbers 5, 7, 10, 11, 13, etc. from 1, are likewise made proportional to the ratios that they bear to 1, and are easily laid down by means of a table of logarithms; for as these are arithmetic measures of the ratios that all numbers bear to unity, the spaces proportional to them become linear representations of the same quantities. As the entire spaces AD, AE represent the ratios of 8 and of 16 respectively to 1, so the difference DE represents the ratio of 8 and 16, which stand at D and E, to each other. And in the same manner, any other space kl represents correctly the ratio of 7 to 13; so that the measure of a fraction expressed by quantities that are incommensurate is rendered as obvious to sight, as that of any single multiple. And if a pair of compasses be opened to this interval, and transferred to any other part of the scale, the points of the compasses will be found to rest upon numbers bearing the same proportion to each other as those from which the interval was transferred. It is exactly in this manner that the various points on the column of equivalents indicate the several quantities sought in any given position of the slider. The relative distances at which the articles are placed represent so many different openings of the compasses rendered permanent and presented to view at once. In the table, which I shall place at the end of this communication, the relation of the various substances enumerated to each other is expressed by numbers. In the engraved scale of equivalents, the ratios of these numbers are represented by logometric intervals at which they are placed, their several positions being determined by those of their respective numbers on the slider, which is logometrically divided. Consequently all the several points in the column of equivalents will indicate numbers in the same due proportions to each other, whatever part of the scale may be presented to them. Those who seek information may obtain it by inspection; those who already possess it may be able to correct the positions of some articles by direct comparison with the best analyses upon record, in whatever numbers the results of those analyses may happen to be expressed. I hope that without trespassing too much on the time of the Society I shall have rendered the principal and practical use of this scale intelligible. I trust that it will prove useful as an assistant to chemists in general. It will at least serve for a specimen of the extreme facility of mechanical approximation, which may very frequently be advantageously substituted for computations that are often more laborious than the accuracy of our data warrants; and if it tends to introduce into more general use that valuable instrument, the common sliding-rule, it will be the means of saving no inconsiderable portion of time to those who are engaged in scientific pursuits. 163

166 Numerical Table of Equivalents Hydrogen (a) 1.32 Oxygen Water Carbon (b) Oxygen = Carbonic acid Sulfur (f) Oxygen = 50 Sulfuric acid Phosphorus (g) Oxygen = 37.4 Phosphoric acid Azote (o) Oxygen = Nitric acid (q) Muriatic acid (dry) (e) Oxygen = 44.1 Oxymuriatic acid Chlorine 44.1= Oxymur Hydro.= Muriatic gas Oxalic acid (b) 47.0 Ammonia (p) 21.5 Soda (l) Oxygen = 29.1 Sodium Potash (m) Oxygen = 49.1 Potassium Magnesia (n) 24.6 Lime (c) Oxygen = Calcium Strontia (k) 69 Barytes (i) 97 Iron (r) Oxygen = + 15 Oxygen = 44.5 Green Oxid. of Iron 49.5 Red Oxide Copper (t) Oxygen = 50 Black Oxid. Of Copp. Zinc (s) Oxygen = 51 Oxid. of Zinc Mercury (v) Oxygen = Red Oxid. of Merc. = Merc. = 261 Protoxid Merc. Lead (d) Oxygen = Litharge Silver (u) Oxygen = 145 Oxid.Silv. in Muriate Subcarb. of C. acid = 76.5 Bi-Carb.of 164

167 Ammonia Subcarb. of Soda C. acid Water = Ammonia BiCarb. Of Soda Subcarb. of Potash C.acid Water = BiCarb. of Potash Carbonate of Lime 63 Carbonate of Barytes Carbonate of Lead 167 Sulfuric acid (dry) Water 11.3 = 61.3 Oil of Vitriol (sp.gr. 1.85) Sulfate of Soda Water = Glauber Salt Sulfate of Potash Sulfate of Magnesia (n) Water 79.3 = Epsom Salt Sulfate of Lime Water = Selenite Sulfate of Strontia Sulfate of Barytes Sulfate of Copper 156,6 = 1 Acid + 1 Oxid. + 5 Water 56.6 Sulfate of Iron = 1 Acid + 1 Oxid. + 7 Water 79.3 Sulfate of Zinc = 1 Acid + 1 Oxid. + 7 Water 79.3 Sulfate of Lead Nitric Acid (dry) (q) Water = 90.2 Liquid Nitric Acid (sp.gr. 1.50) Nitrate of Soda Nitrate of Potash Nitrate of Lime Nitrate of Barytes

168 Nitrate of Lead Muriate of Ammonia 66.9 = 1 Acid + 1 Ammonia + 1 Water Muriate of Soda 73.2 Muriate of Potash Oxygen = Hyper-Oxymuriate of Potash Muriate of Lime 69.6 Muriate of Barytes Water 22.6 = Crystallized Muriate of Barytes Muriate of Lead Muriate of Silver Corrosive Sublimate = 1 Acid + 1 Oxygen + 1 Mercury Calomel = 1 Acid + 1 Oxygen + 2 Mercury Phosphate of Lead Oxalate of Lead Bin-Oxalate Potash of = 2 Acid + 1 Potash Data on which the Table is founded (1) Composition of Water : : : Oxygen 10 : Hydrogen (a) Oxygen Water (2) Specific Gravities : : : 2 Oxygen 20 : Carbonic acid (b) (3) Carbonate of Lime 43.7 : 56.3 : : Carb. acid : Lime (c) (4) Carbonate of Lead 16.5 : 83.5 : : Carb. acid : Litharge - 10 Oxygen Lead (d) (5) Litharge 7.15 : : : Oxygen 10 : Lead (d) 166

169 (6) Muriate of Lime from Carbonate of Lime : 56.1 : : Carb. Lime 63 : 69.6 Mur. Lime Lime 34.1 Muriatic acid (e) (7) Muriate of Lead : 100 : : Litharge : 34.1 Muriatic acid (e) (8) Sulfate of Lead 279 : 100 : : Litharge : 50.0 Sulfuric acid -30 (= 3 Oxygen) 20 Sulfur (f) (9) Galena : : : Lead : 20 Sulfur (f) (10) Galena 85.1 : 13 : : Lead : 19.8 Sulfur (f) (11) Phosphate of Lead : 100 : : Litharge : 37.4 Phosphoric acid -20 (2 Oxygen) 17.4 Phosphorus (g) (12) Phosphoric acid : : : Phosph. acid 37.4 : 20 Oxygen Phosph. acid 17.4 Phosphorus (g) (13) Oxalate of Lead : 100 : : Litharge : 47.0 Oxalic acid (h) (14) Carbonate of Barytes 100 : : : Carb. acid : 97 Barytes (i) (15) Sulfate of Barytes 34 : 66 : : Sulph. acid 50 : 97 Barytes (j) (16) Sulfate of Strontia 42 : 58 : : Sulph. acid 50 : 69 Strontia (k) (17) Common Salt 134 : 88 : : Chlorine 44.1 : 29 Sodium (l) Mur. acid Soda (18) Common Salt 100 : : : Mur. acid 34.1 : 39.1 Soda (19) Subcarbonate of Soda : : : Carb. acid : 39.1 Soda (20) Muriate of Potash 100 : : : Mur. acid 34.1 : 59.1 Potash (m) Potassium (21) Muriate of Potash Oxymur. acid or Chlorine from Potassium 32 : 60.8 : : Potassium 49.0 : 93.2 Mur. Potash 167

170 (22) Sulfate of Magnesia 67 : 33 : : Sulph. acid 50 : 24.6 Magnesia (n) Sulph. Magnesia (23) Epsom Salt : 48.5 : : 7 Water 79.3 : 74.4 Sulph. Magnesia (24) Specific Gravities : : : Hydrogen : Azote (o) 3 Hydrogen = 3 x = Ammonia (p) (25) Ammonia 1 Azote + 3 Hydrogen = Ammonia (26) Subcarb. Ammonia : : : Carb. acid : 21.6 Ammonia (p) (27) Bicarb. Ammonia 28.2 : 11.8 : : 2 Carb. acid 55.1 : Ammonia (p) (28) Nitrate of Potash 46.7 : 53.3 : : Potash : Nitric acid (q) (29) Nitric Acid 1 Azote + 5 Oxygen 50 + Azote = Nitric acid (q) 2 Water = 2 x = Liquid Nitric acid (30) Marble dissolved 476 : 681 3/4 : : Carb. Lime 63 : Liquid Nitric acid (31) Oxide of Iron 22.5 : 25.7 : : Oxygen 10 : 34.5 Iron (r) Oxide of Iron (32) Sulfate of Iron 28.9 : 25.7 : : Sulph. acid 50 : 44.5 Oxide of Iron (33) Oxide of Zinc : 100 : : Oxygen 10 : 41 Zinc (s) 40 Copper (t) +10 (34) Black Oxide of Copper 20 : 100 : : Oxygen 10 : 50 Oxide of Copper (35) Sulfate of Copper 32 : 32 : : Sulph. acid 50 : 50 Oxide of Copper (36) Muriate Silver : : : Mur. acid 34.1 : 145 Oxide of Silver Silver (u) 168

171 (37) Horn Silver 24.5 : 75.5 : : Chlorine 44.1 : 136 Silver (u) (38) Sulpheret Silver 14.7 : 100 : : Sulfur 20 : 136 Silver (u) (39) Red Oxide of Mercury 8 : 100 : : Oxygen 10 : 125 Mercury (v) (40) Red Oxide of Mercury 30 : 380 : : Oxygen 10 : Mercury (v) (41) Corrosive Sublimate 2 x 67 : 380 : : Chlorine 44.1 : Mercury (v) Red Oxide of Mercury 262 Protoxide (42) Protoxide 1 Oxygen + 2 Mercury : 262 Protoxide of Merc. (43) Protoxide 4 : 104 : : Oxygen 10 : 260 Protoxide of Merc. (44) Calomel 11.5 : 88.5 : : Mur. acid 35.1 : 262 Protoxide of Merc. Sources of Info : (1) Biot and Arago (2) Biot and Arago (3) Experiment (4) Berzelius (5) Berzelius (6) Marcet (7) Berzelius (8) Berzelius (9) Berzelius (10) Thomson (11) Berzelius (12) Rose (13) Berzelius (14) Berzelius (15) Klaproth (16) Berzelius (17) Davy (18) Berzelius (19) Berzelius (20) & (21) Berzelius (22) Henry (23) experiment (24) Biot and Arago (25) by hypothesis (26) Gay Lussac (27) Berthollet (28) Richter (29) by hypothesis (30) R. Phillips (31) Thenard (32) Berzelius (33) Gay Lussac (34) Chenevix (35) Proust (36) Marcet (37) Davy (38) Wenzel (39) Fourcroy & Thenard (40) Davy (41) Davy (42) by synthesis (43) Fourcroy (44) Chenevix Water(w) contained in crystallized Salts Sulfate of Copper... (45) 100 : 36.3 :: : 56.8 = 5 x Sulfate of Iron... (46) 100 : 45.4 :: : 79.0 = 7 x Sulfate of Zinc... (47) 100 : 44.3 :: : 79.8 = 7 x Sulfate of Magnesia (48) 100 : 51.5 :: : 79.3 = 7 x Glauber Salt... (49) 100 : 56 :: : = 10 x Muriate of Barytes... (50) 100 : 14.8 :: : 22.8 = 2 x (45) Berzelius (46) Berzelius (47) Lost by heat (48) by heat (49) Berzelius (50) Berzelius In this table I have selected in most cases double evidence from different sources, in order that the inferences might receive confirmation from their concurrence. Number (29) may be noticed as a result anticipated from preceding data, and found to coincide with remarkable 169

172 accuracy. In the distillation of nitric acid from nitre, the whole of the acid may be obtained, if we employ enough of sulfuric acid to convert the residuum into bi-sulfate of potash. In this case each portion of potash, from which dry nitric acid is separated, will displace the water from two equivalent quantities of sulfuric acid, and each portion of nitric acid weighing will be found combined with of water. Hence of liquid nitric acid so obtained would dissolve the equivalent 63 of carbonate of lime. And in fact, by an experiment carefully conducted on a large scale by Mr. Phillips, 1 it appears that 681¾ of such acid did dissolve 476 of marble, which is in the proportion of to 62.96, corresponding with the estimate within 1/1500 part, a degree of coincidence rarely to be found even in the repetition of the same experiment by the most skillful analyst. The specific gravity of this substance was found to be [On p. 172 is found a copy of Wollaston s Logometric Slide Rule.] Notes on the Reading 1. In reading the article by Wollaston, you should observe the following: a. Study with care the examples on pp You may scan the remaining examples in the reading. b. Study with care the Numerical Table of Equivalents; you may scan the data on which the table is founded. 2. What has been added to the science of affinities by Richter and Wollaston? What has been added to the balanced equations of Lavoisier? 3. Can you give a succinct statement of the Law of Equivalents? This law might be called the Law of Ex Aequali Proportions. Why? 4. The term radical refers to an element or (more commonly) a group of elements that act as a unit in a series of chemical reactions; e.g., the sulfate radical that is composed of sulfur and oxygen but that does not decompose in most chemical reactions. 5. The Law of Multiple Proportions is usually stated thus: When one element (or radical) combines with another element (or radical) in more than one proportion by weight, the ratio of weights of the second element (or radical) that will combine with a given fixed weight of the first element (or radical) will be as small whole numbers. 6. Examine the logometric scale on p. 172 and figure out how to use it use it. If time permits, answer the questions and problems on p Experimental Examination of the Pharm. Lond, by R. Phillips. 170

173 Wollaston s Equivalent Weight Slide Rule You will probably be supplied with a homemade Wollaston-slide rule. If so, notice that it has been prepared by cutting strips out of Wollaston s image on p. 172 and fixing them to an ordinary slide rule. If you need to construct such a slide rule, photocopy the image on p. 172 and tape it to a slide rule. Study this slide rule until you understand how to use it. Questions and Problems 1. In Experiment 4, all the solutions of salts and barytes were of equal concentration in terms of the number of equivalents of salt dissolved in the same volume of solution. Why was this done? All the acids and bases (except the barytes) contained six equivalents of acid or base per liter of solution. Do you see why one would expect that a given volume of Caustic Soda solution would require the same volume of Muriatic Acid solution for complete saturation of the base with acid? Do you also see why one would expect that a given volume of Sulfate of Potash would require the same volume of barytes solution to just complete the decomposition of the Sulfate of Potash? 2. How might one use Wollaston s scale of equivalents if one were to accept the Law of Multiple Proportions as valid? Does this law suggest that some elements (and radicals) will have multiple equivalent weights? 3. If a 44 g sample of a Carbon oxide (Carbonic Acid gas) is found to contain, on analysis, 12 g of Carbon and 32 g of Oxygen, (a) what is the percentage composition of the compound; i.e., the percentage of Carbon and the percentage of Oxygen? (b) How many grams of Oxygen would combine with 10 g of Carbon? 4. Using the log. scale of equivalents, answer the following questions: a. How many grams of water would be produced by burning Hydrogen in 10 g of Oxygen? b. How many grams of Chlorine would combine with 29 g of Sodium metal to form a fixed composition compound? c. How many grams of Calcium would react with the weight of Chlorine determined in (b)? d. How many grams of Copper would combine with 13.6 g of Oxygen? 171

174 Wollaston s Logometric Equivalent-Weight Slide Rule 172

175 CHAPTER VI: Chemical Combination and Electricity Introduction In Senior Natural Science you will consider the nature of electricity in some detail. However, in order to understand significant developments in chemistry in the nineteenth century, we need to have a brief, qualitative idea of what electricity is and how it is first known. The gold-colored, fossilized tree sap commonly called amber the Greeks called (electra), the feminine form of (electros), their word for a common alloy of silver and gold. The Greeks knew that this stone, when rubbed, especially with animal fur, has the unusual power of attracting light objects, and although they speculated about the cause of the mysterious phenomenon, little careful study was made of amber for centuries. In the late sixteenth century, however, William Gilbert 1 showed that a number of other substances besides amber gained an attractive power when rubbed, and dubbed such substances electrics, and said they possessed electricity. Before Lavoisier s time, in the mid-18th century, it was recognized that there are two types of electricity: one that could be put on amber ( resinous electricity ), and one that could be put on glass, e.g., by rubbing it with silk ( vitreous electricity ). Such bodies were said to possess a load, or in French a charge, of electricity. A body loaded with one kind of electric charge would attract and be attracted to a body loaded with the other, whereas bodies with the same kind of charge would repel each other. However, when attracting bodies were brought into contact, they would lose their electricity altogether. This neutralization would occur even if the two bodies were connected only by a metal substance, 2 which latter came to be called a conductor of electric charge. 3 At about this same time Benjamin Franklin proposed that electricity in bodies should be thought of as a single elastic electric fluid the parts of which are therefore mutually repulsive, and that all bodies contain this fluid. Those with too much, Franklin said, have a positive charge, and those with too little have a negative charge. Apparently thinking that the rubbing of amber is in effect a rubbing off of some of its electric fluid, Franklin supposed that resinous electricity is negative, and therefore vitreous electricity is positive. Franklin also surmised that the spark sometimes seen between two oppositely charged bodies as they come close together is in fact a pure form of this electric fluid; his famous kite-flying experiment likewise suggested that lightning was electric in nature. (Franklin did not, however, have the final word on the nature of electricity, as others proposed that there were two electric fluids, one corresponding to each kind of electricity, 4 and still others thought it was precipitous to speculate about electric 1 In Senior Natural Science you will read some of Gilbert s De Magnete, on the equally peculiar lodestone. 2 Compare this use of the word neutralize with that in the acid-base reactions examined earlier. 3 Most metals are good conductors, whereas most compounds and non-metals are poor conductors. 4 Although Franklin s theory readily explained why two positively charged bodies would repulse each other and two oppositely charged ones would attract, it could not explain why two negatively charged bodies would repell one 173

176 fluids at all; 5 what we have said, however, is sufficient for our purposes in the Sophomore Natural Science.) Not until a few years before Dalton was writing was there any way known for producing electricity in a sustained way, i.e., such that the charge could be produced as quickly as it was carried off by contact with a conductor. But in 1800 Alessandro Volta developed a new apparatus: The astonishing apparatus is nothing but an assemblage of a number of good conductors of a different kind, arranged in a certain manner: Thus, 30, 40, 60 pieces or more, of copper, or better of silver, each applied to a piece of tin, or, what is much better, of zinc, and an equal number of layers of water, or of some other fluid which is a better conductor than simple water, such as salt water, lye, etc., or pieces of cardboard, of leather, etc., well soaked in these fluids. I place then horizontally, on a table or any other stand, one of the metallic plates, for example, one of silver, and to this first I add a second of zinc; on this second I add a moistened disc; then another silver plate, followed immediately by another of zinc, to which I add another moistened disc. I thus continue in the same fashion, coupling a silver plate with one of zinc, and always in the same order, that is to say, always the silver below and the zinc above, or vice versa, according to how I began, and interposing between each of these couples a moistened disc; I continue, I say, to form from the several stages a column as high as can be sustained without falling. 6 He called two plates of dissimilar metals separated by a moistened disc a cell. The whole stack of cells, which he simply called a battery of cells, came to be called a voltaic pile. After attaching conducting metal strips to either end of the battery, when Volta brought the ends of the conductors together he produced a spark. Neither did the conductors become neutralized once the spark was produced; somehow the metals in the saltwater medium were producing an electric charge as fast as the conductors could carry it off. Volta had produced a current of electric charge. This electric current came to be thought of as a flow of positive charge or electricity through the conductor. It was noticed that the zinc plates in the voltaic pile corroded rapidly; moreover, crystals would sometimes form on the silver plates. It appeared that some sort of chemical reaction involving the metals and the saltwater produced and maintained the electric current, so not only another. Thus, Franklin s contemporary, Henry Cavendish proposed that there are two electric fluid, and that like fluids mutually repell, and unlike mutually attract. 5 Among others, Humphrey Davy s assistant, Michael Faraday whose extensive experimental and theoretical work with electricity and magnetism you will study in Senior Natural Science was cautious about the electrical fluid, saying its existence is entirely hypothetical, and [its] effects may perhaps depend on some property common to matter in general. And this is more probable because there is no known matter but what under certain circumstances can be made to exhibit these peculiar [electrical] phenomena (Chemistry Lectures, p. 10). 6 Alexander Volta, On the Electricity Excited by the Mere Contact of Conducting Substances of Different Kinds, Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society of London 90 (1800):

177 was the idea entertained that chemical reactions may have something to do with electricity, 7 but further it was asked whether perhaps electricity could be used to produce chemical reactions. The former notion would not be developed in a consistent way until the beginning of the twentieth century, but we will lay the groundwork for such a development in the paper by Berzelius (which we will read shortly), and when we consider valence in Chapter VIII. The possibility of using the voltaic pile to induce chemical reactions, however, was immediately put to use in the early nineteenth century through a process called electrolysis ( [lusis], loosening, or setting free ), which is the decomposition of a compound substance effected by an electric current. An example of this process is shown in Demonstration 9. 7 With time permitting, your tutor may demonstrate the electrical character of acids by manifesting the electric current that runs through an acid solution when two metals are immersed in it and connected by a conducting wire. (A galvanometer can be used to indicate the presence of a current; prolongation of the demonstration should indicate a decrease in acidity and current.) Do the results of this demonstration suggest that neither oxygen nor hydrogen, but rather something called electricity, is the acidifying principle? 175

178 Davy s Decomposition of the Alkalis and Salifiable Earths Recall Lavoisier s prediction that the alkalis and salifiable earths would probably prove to be composite substances. 8 At the end of a memoir of 1806, Davy made this suggestion: If a chemical union be of the nature that I have ventured to suppose, however strong the natural electrical energies of the elements of bodies may be, yet there is every probability of a limit to their strength; whereas the powers of our artificial instruments seem capable of indefinite increase. We may therefore hope that the new mode of analysis may lead us to the discovery of the true elements of bodies. 9 In 1807 Davy announced the decomposition of two alkalis by electricity: Potash, perfectly dried by ignition, is a non-conductor, yet it is rendered a conductor, by a very slight addition of moisture, which does not perceptibly destroy its aggregation; and in this state it readily fuses 10 and decomposes by strong electrical powers. A small piece of pure potash, which had been exposed for a few seconds to the atmosphere so as to give conducting power to the surface, was placed upon an insulated disc of platina, 11 connected with the negative side of a battery of 250 of the power of 6 and 4 (i.e., zinc and copper plates 6 in. and 4 in.) in a state of intense activity; and a platina wire, communicating with the positive side, was brought in contact with the upper surface of the alkali. The whole apparatus was in the open atmosphere. Under these circumstances a vivid action was soon observed to take place. The potash began to fuse at both its points of electrization. There was a violent effervescence at the upper surface (+); at the lower, or negative surface, there was no liberation of elastic fluid; but small globules having a high metallic lustre, and being precisely similar in visible characteristics to quicksilver, appeared, some of which burnt with explosion and bright flame as soon as they were formed, and others remained, and were merely tarnished, and finally covered with a white film that formed on their surfaces. These globules numerous experiments soon showed to be the substance I was in search of, and a peculiar inflammable principle the basis of potash. 12 We are told by John Davy that when his brother saw the minute globules of potassium burst through the crust of potash, and take fire as they entered the atmosphere, he could not contain his joy he actually bounded about the room in ecstatic delight; and some little time was required for him to compose himself sufficiently to continue the experiment. An entry in Davy s notebook concludes with the statement: Capital experiment, proving the decomposition of potash. 8 Elements of Chemistry, ch. XVI. 9 Quoted in Partington, A Short History of Chemistry, p That is, it liquefies. 11 That is, platinum. 12 Partington, A Short History of Chemistry, pp

179 This discovery was made on the 6th of October, 1807; sodium was discovered in a similar manner a few days later. In 1808 Davy also decomposed some of the salifiable earths. He named the new elements he obtained magnesium, calcium, strontium, and barium. Now we can confidently describe soda as sodium oxide, potash as potassium oxide, barytes as barium oxide, lime as calcium oxide, strontia as strontium oxide, and magnesia as magnesium oxide. Later even argill was shown to be aluminum oxide and siles silicon oxide. 13 In view of the above, what becomes of the fourth and fifth classes of substances listed by Morveau et al. (pp )? With the discovery of the compositeness of soda, etc., the names of some compounds were changed (though the inertia of custom kept some chemists using the older names). For example, carbonate of soda became carbonate of sodium, or, following the modern convention of naming the more electropositive element first, sodium carbonate. The composition of the compound remained the same, of course, but the analysis might be reported differently: carbonate of soda contained 58.5% by weight of soda and 41.5% carbonic acid (anhydrous); sodium carbonate contained 43.4% by weight of sodium and 41.5% carbonic acid (anhydrous) and 15.1% oxygen not in carbonic acid. 13 Several of these oxides were later shown to contain a small amount of hydrogen, and so were called hydroxides. Hydrogen s miniscule weight made it difficult to detect. 177

180 Jöns Jacob Berzelius The Electro-chemical Theory 1 In many carefully made experiments, Volta has observed that two metals put in contact become electric, and that this is the cause of the phenomena of the electric pile. Davy later showed that this electrical state increases due to the force of mutual affinities of the bodies used, and that this effect can be produced, and even seen, by means of certain precautions, in all bodies that have affinity for each other. It also follows from the experiments of Davy that temperature, which, as we know, increases affinity, also increases the intensity of the electrical state in bodies that are in contact, but that, this mechanical contact being followed by combination, all signs of electricity immediately cease; that is to say, at the instant when, in favorable circumstances, they burst into flame, the electrical division, or the charge that could be perceived, disappears. These facts agree well with the conjecture that the opposite electricities in the bodies that combine mutually neutralize each other at the moment of combination, and then the fire is produced in the same manner as in the electric discharge. But if these bodies which are united and have ceased to be electric should again be separated, and their elements be restored to the isolated state with their original properties, they must recover the electrical state destroyed by the combination; or indeed, in other terms, if these combined bodies are restored for any reason to their original electrical state, which had vanished at their union, they must separate, and reappear with their original properties. Hisinger and I have observed that when the electric pile exerts its action on a conducting liquid, the elements of this liquid separate, oxygen and the acids are repelled from the negative pole toward the positive, and the combustible bodies as well as the salifiable bases from the positive pole toward the negative. We believe we now know with certitude that bodies that are likely to combine show free, opposite electricities that increase in force as they approach the temperature at which combination occurs, until, at the instant of union, the electricity disappears with an elevation of temperature that is often so great that they burst into flame. On the other hand, we have the same certainty that combined bodies, exposed in a suitable form to the action of the electric fluid produced by discharge of a pile, are separated and regain their original chemical and electrical properties at the same time that the electricity that acted on them disappears. In the actual state of our knowledge, the most probable explanation of combustion and the ignition that results from it is then: that in all chemical combinations there is neutralization of opposing electricities, and that this neutralization produces fire in the same manner that it produces it in the discharge of the electric jar, the electric pile, and thunder, without being accompanied, in these latter phenomena, by chemical combination... The experiments made on the mutual electrical relations of bodies have taught us that they can be divided into two classes: electropositive and electronegative. The simple bodies that belong to the first class, as well as their oxides, always take up positive electricity when they 1 [In 1819, Berzelius put forward his electrochemical or dualistic theory, which dominated the chemical world for many years. His ideas were expressed in a small book, Essai sur la Théorie des Proportions chimiques et sur l influence chimique de l électricite, Paris, The following selection, taken from pp , expresses the fundamental ideas of the theory.] 178

181 meet simple bodies or oxides belonging to the second class; and the oxides of the first class always behave with the oxides of the other like salifiable bases with acids. It has been believed that the electrical series of combustible bodies differs from that of their oxides; but although the different degrees of oxidation of several bodies present exceptions, the electrical order of combustible bodies agrees in general with that of their oxides, in such a way that the strongest degrees of oxidation in the affinity of different radicals are like those between the radicals themselves. In arranging the bodies in the order of their electrical nature, there is formed an electrochemical system that, in my opinion, is more fit than any other to give an idea of chemistry. I will speak more of this later. Oxygen is, of all bodies, the most electronegative. As it is never positive relative to any other, and as, according to all chemical phenomena known up to the present, it is not probable that any element of our globe can be more electronegative, we recognize in it an absolute negative. Also, in the electrochemical system, it is the only body whose electrical relations are invariable. The others vary in this sense, that one body can be negative with respect to a second, and positive with respect to a third: for example, sulfur and arsenic are positive relative to oxygen and negative relative to metals. The radicals of fixed alkalis and alkaline earths are, on the contrary, the most electropositive bodies; but they differ somewhat in degree; and, at the positive extreme of the electrical series, there is no body as electropositive as oxygen is electronegative. 2 [The applications of this theory are illustrated by the following extract, taken from the French edition of Berzelius s textbook, Paris, 1831, volume 4.] The electrochemical properties of oxidized substances depend almost always exclusively on the unipolarity of their electropositive element, that is to say, of their radical. The oxide is ordinarily electronegative with regard to other oxides when its radical is negative with regard to their radicals, and vice versa. For example, sulfuric acid is electronegative in relation to all metallic oxides, for the reason that sulfur is negative with respect to all metals. The oxides of potassium and zinc are, on the contrary, electropositive with regard to all oxidized substances, to the radicals of which potassium and zinc are positive. This fact, the cause of which we are unable to explain, rectifies an inexact idea on the principle of acidity that in the antiphlogistic theory has been thought to be oxygen. We find now that it resides in the radical of the acid and that oxygen plays such an indifferent role that it enters equally into the strongest salifying bases, that is to say, the electropositive oxides, and in the strongest acids or electronegative oxides. Sometimes it happens, however, that a positive oxide acquires by higher oxidation less electropositive properties approaching electronegative, as, for example, stannic oxide and the acids of manganese. But in the strongest bases, such as potash and soda, an addition of oxygen may well destroy the positive action without, nevertheless, producing a negative; it is thus that the strongly salifying bases form peroxides... If these electrochemical views are correct, it follows that all chemical combination depends solely on two opposing forces, positive and negative electricity, and that thus each 2 [Since Berzelius s time only the element fluorine, which had not yet been discovered, has been established as more electronegative than oxygen.] 179

182 combination should be composed of two parts united by the effect of their electrochemical reaction, provided that there exists no third force. Whence it follows that each compound substance, regardless of the number of its constituent principles, may be divided into two parts, of which one is electrically positive and the other negative. Thus, for example, sulfate of soda is not composed of sulfur, oxygen, and sodium, but of sulfuric acid and soda, which both may again be divided into two elements, one positive and the other negative. Similarly alum cannot be considered as directly composed of its elements but should be regarded as the product of the reaction of sulfate of aluminum, a negative element, and sulfate of potash, a positive element. In this manner the electrochemical view equally well justifies what I have already detailed on particular compounds of the first, second, and third orders, etc. * * * * * Questions and Problems 1. Using Berzelius s theory, explain the combination of potassium with oxygen to form potassium oxide, the combination of sulfur with oxygen to form sulfuric acid (anhydrous), and the combination of these products to form sulfate of potash (potassium sulfate). 2. Free elements merely mechanically mixed do not migrate to any noticeable extent when placed between charged poles. Thus they seem to behave as though they were electrically neutral. Also, some compounds (known to be compounds by their method of formation and by indirect method of decomposition) do not electrolyze under the conditions familiar to Davy and Berzelius; the carbon oxides are examples. Can these phenomena be accommodated by Berzelius s theory? If electricity explains why atoms come together, can they explain their cohesion in a molecule, since at this point the electricity disappears, as Berzelius put it on p. 178? 3. Does Berzelius s theory add to the science of affinities? Does it make a significant contribution to the explanation of the nature of chemical substances and chemical combinations? You may find it fruitful to compare it to the teaching of Aristotle and St. Thomas on how elements are preserved in combination. 4. Consider the following words of Jean Baptiste Dumas about Berzelius s electro-chemical theory after it had gained wide acceptance in the mid-19 th century: These electrochemical conceptions, this special polarity which has been assigned to the elementary atoms, do they really rest on such evident facts that they may be accepted as articles of faith? Or, if we regard them only as hypotheses, do they possess the property of adapting themselves to the facts, are they capable of explaining them, can we assume them with such complete certainty that in chemical investigations they appear as useful guides? We must admit that such is not the case. 3 How certain does it seem that electricity is the cause of chemical combination, based on what we have seen? In the further development of the atomic theory (in the remaining chapters of this manual), we will see some of the consequences of the Berzelius s theory. 3 Quoted in Partington, Short History of Chemistry, p

183 CHAPTER VII: Determination of Atomic and Molecular Weights Lorenzo Amadeo Avogadro Essay on a Manner of Determining the Relative Masses of the Elementary Molecules of Bodies, and the Proportions in Which They Enter into these Compounds 1 Mr. Gay-Lussac has shown in an interesting memoir that gases always unite in a very simple proportion by volume, and that when the result of the union is a gas, its volume is also very simply related to those of its components. But the quantitative proportions of substances in compounds seem only to depend on the relative number of molecules 2 that combine, and on the number of composite molecules that result. It must then be admitted that very simple relations also exist between the volumes of gaseous substances and the numbers of simple or compound molecules that form them. The first hypothesis to present itself in this connection, and apparently even the only admissible one, is the supposition that the number of integral molecules in any gases is always the same for equal volumes, or always proportional to the volumes. Indeed, if we were to suppose that the number of molecules contained in a given volume were different for different gases, it would scarcely be possible to conceive that the law regulating the distance of molecules could give in all cases relations between the volume and the number of molecules so simple as those that the facts just detailed compel us to acknowledge. On the other hand, it is very well conceivable that the molecules of gases being at such a distance that their mutual attraction cannot be exercised, their varying attraction for caloric may be limited to condensing a greater or smaller quantity around them, without the atmosphere formed by this fluid having any greater extent in the one case than in the other, and, consequently, without the distance between molecules varying; or, in other words, without the number of molecules contained in a given volume being different. Dalton, it is true, has proposed a hypothesis directly opposed to this, namely, that the quantity of caloric is always the same for the molecules of all bodies whatsoever in the gaseous state, and that the greater or less attraction for caloric only results in producing a I 1 [Journal de Physique, LXXIII (1811), pp ] 2 [Avogadro has been accused of inconsistency in his use of the term molecule, but a careful perusal of his paper will show that he uses it with its qualifying adjectives quite consistently, as follows: Molecule (translated molecule): without qualification means in modern chemical phraseology either atom or molecule. Molecule integrante (translated integral molecule): means molecule in general, but is usually only applied to compounds. Molecule constituante (translated constituent molecule): is employed to denote the molecule of an elementary substance. Molecule elementaire (translated elementary molecule) stands for the atom of an elementary substance.] 181

184 greater or less condensation of this quantity around the molecules, and thus varying the distance between the molecules themselves. But in our present ignorance of the manner in which this attraction of the molecules for caloric is exerted, there is nothing to decide us a priori in favor of the one of these hypotheses rather than the other; and we should rather be inclined to adopt a neutral hypothesis, which would make the distance between the molecules and the quantities of caloric vary according to unknown laws, were it not that the hypothesis we have just proposed is based on that simplicity of relation between the volumes of gases on combination, which would appear to be otherwise inexplicable. Setting out from this hypothesis, it is apparent that we have the means of determining very easily the relative masses of the molecules of substances obtainable in the gaseous state, and the relative number of these molecules in compounds; for the ratios of the masses of the molecules are then the same as those of the densities of the different gases at equal temperature and pressure, and the relative number of molecules in a compound is given at once by the ratio of the volumes of the gases that form it. For example, since the numbers and express the densities of the two gases oxygen and hydrogen compared to that of atmospheric air as unity, and the ratio of the two numbers consequently represents the ratio between the masses of equal volumes of these two gases, it will also represent on our hypothesis the ratio of the masses of their molecules. Thus the mass of the molecule of oxygen will be about 15 times that of the molecule of hydrogen, or, more exactly, as to 1. In the same way the mass of the molecule of nitrogen will be to that of hydrogen as to , that is, as 13, or more exactly , to 1. On the other hand, since we know that the ratio of the volumes of hydrogen and oxygen in the formation of water is 2 to 1, it follows that water results from the union of each particle of oxygen with two particles of hydrogen. Similarly, according to the proportions established by Mr. Gay-Lussac for the elements of ammonia, nitrous oxide, nitrous gas, and nitric acid, ammonia will result from the union of one molecule of nitrogen with three of hydrogen, nitrous oxide from one molecule of oxygen with two of nitrogen, nitrous gas from one molecule of nitrogen with one of oxygen, and nitric acid from one of nitrogen with two of oxygen. There is a consideration that appears at first sight to be opposed to the admission of our hypothesis with respect to compound substances. It seems that a molecule composed of two or more elementary molecules should have its mass equal to the sum of the masses of these molecules; and that in particular, if in a compound one molecule of one substance unites with two or more molecules of another substance, the number of compound molecules should remain the same as the number of molecules of the first substance. Accordingly, on our hypothesis when a gas combines with two or more times its volume of another gas, the resulting compound, if gaseous, must have a volume equal to that of the first of these gases. Now, in general, this is not actually the case. For instance, the volume of water in the gaseous state is, as Mr. Gay-Lussac has shown, twice as great as the volume of oxygen that enters into it, or, what comes to the same thing, equal to that of the hydrogen instead of being equal to that of the oxygen. But a means of explaining facts of this type in conformity with our hypothesis presents itself easily enough; we suppose, namely, that the constituent molecules of any simple gas whatever (i.e., the molecules that are at such a distance from each other that they cannot exercise their mutual action) are not II 182

185 formed of a solitary elementary molecule, but are made up of a certain number of these molecules united by attraction to form a single one; and further, that when molecules of another substance unite with the former to form a compound molecule, the whole molecule that should result splits up into two or more parts (or integral molecules) composed of half, quarter, etc., the number of elementary molecules going to form the constituent molecule of the first substance (or, what comes to the same thing, combined with a number equal to this last of half-molecules, quarter-molecules, etc., of the second substance); so that the number of integral particles of the compound becomes double, quadruple, etc., what it would have been if there had been no splitting-up, and exactly what is necessary to satisfy the volume of the resulting gas. 3 On reviewing the various compound gases most generally known, I only find examples of duplication of the volume relatively to the volume of that one of the constituents that combines with one or more volumes of the other. We have already seen this for water. In the same way, we know that the volume of ammonia gas is twice that of the nitrogen that enters into it. Mr. Gay-Lussac has also shown that the volume of nitrous oxide is equal to that of the nitrogen that forms part of it, and consequently is twice that of the oxygen. Finally, nitrous gas, which contains equal volumes of nitrogen and oxygen, has a volume equal to the sum of the two constituent gases, that is to say, double that of each of them. Thus in all cases there must be a division of the molecule into two; but it is possible that in other cases the division might be into four, eight, etc. The possibility of this division of compound molecules might have been conjectured a priori; for otherwise the integral molecules of bodies composed of several substances with a relatively large number of molecules, would come to have a mass excessive in comparison with the molecules of simple substances. We might therefore imagine that nature had some means of bringing them back to the order of the latter, and the facts have pointed out to us the existence of such means. Besides, there is another consideration that would seem to make us admit in some cases the division in question: For how could one otherwise conceive a real combination between two gaseous substances uniting in equal volumes without condensation, such as takes place in the formation of nitrous gas? Supposing the molecules to remain at such a distance that the mutual attraction of those of each new gas could not be exercised, we cannot imagine that a new attraction could take place between the molecules of one gas and those of the other. But on the hypothesis of division of the molecule, it is easy to see that the combination really reduces two different molecules to one, and that there would be contraction by the whole volume of one of the gases if each compound molecule did not split up into two molecules of the same nature. Mr. Gay-Lussac clearly saw that, according to the facts, the diminution of volume on combination of gases cannot represent the approximation of their elementary molecules. The division of molecules on combination explains to us how these two things may be made independent of each other. Dalton, on arbitrary suppositions as to the most likely relative number of molecules in compounds, has endeavored to fix ratios between the masses of the molecules of simple III 3 Thus, for example, the integral molecule of water will be composed of a half-molecule of oxygen with one molecule, or, what it the same thing, two half-molecules of hydrogen. 183

186 substances. Our hypothesis, supposing it well-founded, puts us in a position to confirm or rectify his results from precise data, and, above all, to assign the magnitude 4 of compound molecules according to the volumes of the gaseous compounds, which depend partly on the division of molecules entirely unsuspected by this physicist. Thus Dalton supposes 5 that water is formed by the union of hydrogen and oxygen, molecule to molecule. From this, and from the ratio by weight of the two components, it would follow that the mass of the molecule of oxygen would be to that of hydrogen as 7½ to 1 nearly, or, according to Dalton s evaluation, as 6 to 1. This ratio on our hypothesis is, as we saw, twice as great, namely as 15 to 1. As for the particle of water, its mass ought to be roughly expressed by = 17 (taking for unity that of hydrogen), if there were no division of the molecule into two; but on account of this division it is reduced to half, 8½, or more exactly 8.537, as may also be found directly by dividing the density of aqueous vapor (Gay-Lussac) 6 by the density of hydrogen This mass only differs from 7, that assigned to it by Dalton, by the difference in values for the composition of water; so that in this respect Dalton s result is approximately correct from the combination of two compensating errors the error in the mass of the molecule of oxygen, and his neglect of the division of the molecule. Dalton supposes that in nitrous gas the combination of nitrogen and oxygen is molecule to molecule, we have seen on our hypothesis that this is actually the case. Thus Dalton would have found the same molecular mass for nitrogen as we have, always supposing that of hydrogen to be unity, if he had not set out from a different value for that of oxygen, and if he had taken precisely the same value for the quantities of the elements in nitrous gas by weight. But by supposing the molecule of oxygen to be less than half what we find, he has been obliged to make that of nitrogen also equal to less than half the value we have assigned to it, viz., 5 instead of 13. As regards the molecule of nitrous gas itself, his neglect of the division of the molecule makes his 28 result approach ours; he has made = 11, whilst according to us it is about = 2 =14, or more exactly, = , as we also find by dividing , the density of nitrous gas 2 according to Gay-Lussac, by Dalton has likewise fixed in the same manner as the facts have given us, the relative number of molecules in nitrous oxide and in nitric acid, and in the first case the same circumstance has rectified his result for the magnitude of the molecule. He makes ( ) it 6 + (2 x 5) = 16, whilst according to our method it should be = , a 2 number that is also obtained by dividing , Gay-Lussac s value for the density of nitrous oxide, by the density of hydrogen. In the case of ammonia, Dalton s supposition as to the relative number of molecules in its 4 [That is, the relative weight of the compound molecule.] 5 In what follows I shall make use of the exposition of Dalton s ideas given in Thomson s System of Chemistry. 6 [On p. 148 Gay-Lussac gave the ratio of the weights to be 10 to 16, which is the same as : 1. All of the values for the densities cited for the rest of this section can be found on p. 148.] 184

187 composition is on our hypothesis entirely at fault. He supposes nitrogen and hydrogen to be united in it molecule to molecule, whereas we have seen that one molecule of nitrogen unites with three molecules of hydrogen. According to him the particle of ammonia would be = 6; according to us it should be (13 + 3) divided by 2 = 8, or more exactly 8.119, as may also be deduced directly from the density of ammonia gas. The division of the molecule, which does not enter into Dalton s calculations, partly corrects in this case also the error that would result from his other suppositions. VI Let us now apply our hypothesis to some metallic substances. Mr. Gay-Lussac 7 assumes that mercurous oxide, in the formation of which 100 parts by weight of mercury absorb 4.16 of oxygen, according to Fourcroy and Thenard, is analogous to nitrous oxide, i.e., that the mercury, supposed gaseous, is combined in it with half its volume of oxygen gas, which on our hypothesis is to say that one molecule of oxygen combines with two molecules of mercury. Supposing this to be the case, the density of mercury gas ought to be to that of oxygen as 100 to 8.32, which would give as its density, taking that of air as unity, and for the mass of the molecule of mercury 181, taking as unity that of hydrogen. On this supposition mercuric oxide, which contains twice as much oxygen, should be formed of mercury and oxygen united molecule to molecule; but some reasons lead me to think that it is mercurous oxide that represents this last case, and that in mercuric oxide one molecule of mercury combines with two of oxygen. Then the density of mercury gas, and the mass of its molecule, would be double what they are on the preceding hypothesis, viz., 26½ for the first, and 362 for the second. In this assumption I am supported from analogies drawn from other metals, and particularly from iron. It follows from the experiments of different chemists, carefully discussed by Hassenfratz, that the two best known oxides of iron, the black oxide and the red oxide, are composed respectively of 31.8 and 45 parts by weight of oxygen to 100 of iron. We see that the second of these two quantities of oxygen is nearly half as great again as the first, so we are naturally led to suppose that in the first oxide one molecule of iron combines with two molecules of oxygen, and in the second with three. If that is so, and if we admit that the proportion for the black oxide to be the more exact, the proportion for the red oxide would be 47.7 for 100 of iron, which comes very near to the proportion found directly by Proust, viz., 48. The mass of a molecule of iron will therefore be to the mass of a molecule of oxygen as 100 to 15.9, which gives about 94 with regard to hydrogen as unity. It would appear from this that there should be another oxide of iron that would contain 15.9 of oxygen to 100 of iron, and this is perhaps the white oxide, although the experiments hitherto performed point to this substance containing a greater proportion of oxygen. Now the two oxides of mercury of which we have spoken, one of which contains twice as much oxygen as the other, should apparently be analogous to this last oxide of iron and to the black oxide, the red oxide having no analogue in the case of mercury. In the same way the other molecules present for the most part two oxides in which the quantities of oxygen are as 1 to 2, so that from the proportion of their elements by weight, we may determine in the same manner the mass of their molecules. I find, for example, 206 for the molecule of lead, 198 for that of silver, 123 for 7 [See p. 150.] 185

188 copper, etc. 8 VII We shall now make a few applications of our principles to saline compounds, which will furnish us with the opportunity of examining an important point in the theory of these compounds. Mr. Gay-Lussac has shown that the neutral carbonate, fluoborate, and muriate of ammonia are composed of equal volumes of ammonia gas and of the respective acids. Let us pause to consider the carbonate. On our hypothesis, this salt is composed of one molecule of ammonia, i.e. (according to the values previously given and independently of any division), of one molecule of carbon, two of oxygen, and three of hydrogen, which would give for the mass of its molecule; but admitting the division into two which had already taken place in the components, this molecule is reduced to It would be brought down again to half this number, if there were another division on the union of the acid with the alkali. Mr. Gay-Lussac has suspected 9 that the equality of volume between a gaseous alkali and acid, which by their union form a neutral salt, may be general. That is as much as to say, on our hypothesis, that neutral salts are composed of acid and alkali united molecule to molecule; but certain considerations appear to be opposed to the admission of this principle in all its generality. The idea of acidity, alkalinity, and neutrality which still seems to me the most conformable to the phenomena is that which I have given in my Memoir on this subject (Journal de Physique, tome lxix.). According to it, all substances form amongst themselves a series, in which they play the part of acid or alkali with respect to one another; and this series is the same as that on which depends the positive or negative electricity they develop on mutual contact. I express by the term oxygenicity the property in virtue of which substances are ranked in this scale, placing first those which play the part of an acid with respect to the others. In this scale there is a point about which are placed the substances we term neutral, above it are those which are absolutely acid, below it are those which are alkaline, when their state of aggregation permits them to exhibit these qualities. Lastly, composite substances occupy in this scale a place intermediate between those of which they are composed, having regard to the degree of the oxygenicity and to the proportion 8 I shall here add a few words regarding the molecule of potassium. Davy, assuming that potash is formed from potassium and oxygen united molecule to molecule, has fixed the mass of the molecule of potassium at 40.5, in accordance with the quantity of oxygen by weight in the substance, and has taken the molecule of oxygen to be 7.5. Assuming, as we have done, this last molecule to be nearly twice as great, the molecule of potassium will also be doubled, viz., about 81, if we adopt the other assumptions of Davy. But it may be that in potash one molecule of potassium takes two of oxygen, in which case we should again have to double the last value and make it 162. It might also be (for the analogy drawn from other metals is not in this case a very safe guide) that two molecules of potassium combine with one of oxygen, which would bring back the molecule of potassium to It is on the assumption of this last value for the molecule of potassium that Davy finds 32.9 for that of oxymuriatic acid, calculating from the composition of muriate of potash, and assuming that this salt is formed of one molecule of potassium with one of acid. If we suppose the molecule of potassium to have a different mass, we must admit another relative number of molecules in the muriate, since both from our hypothesis and from the density of the gas, 32.9 is very nearly the molecule of oxymuriatic acid. On the supposition that the molecule of potassium is 81, and that in sulfide of potassium the combination is molecule to molecule, the molecule of sulfur will be about 27 instead of 13.5, as found by Davy on the latter assumption, which will bring about between this result and that derived from sulfurous acid according to our calculations the agreement that exists between Davy s values. 9 [Gay-Lussac proposed this notion on p. 144.] 186

189 by weight of these constituent substances; so that a neutral substance results from the combination of two substances, one acid, the other alkaline, in a certain proportion. 10 The recognition of the simple ratios observed on combination, and in particular in cases where neutral substances are the result, leads us now to a more exact manner of conceiving the state of neutrality. The oxygenicity in two bodies that combine cannot be supposed to have such a relation to the masses of their molecules that, from the union of certain definite numbers of these molecules, there should result a certain definite degree of oxygenicity that would be that of neutrality, and would only depend, as we have already assumed for oxygenicity in general, on the proportion by weight and the degree of oxygenicity of the components. It appears, then, that the we must admit that the degree of oxygenicity that corresponds to neutrality is not quite fixed, although approximating more or less to a fixed limit, and that this state depends on the excess of mass of one of the components (from which the acid or alkaline quality might result) being prevented from exercising these qualities by the simple combination with the contrary principle that retains it by its attraction, although the compound otherwise might have a state of aggregation permitting it to act as an acid or an alkali, if it were endowed with these qualities. The excess of mass thus held back is that which is necessary to complete a certain simple relation between the number of combining molecules. Thus amongst the different simple ratios in which molecules can combine, there is one which gives neutrality; that, namely, which gives the compound approximating most closely to the definite point of oxygenicity mentioned above, so that if, in the compound formed according to this ratio, one of the component principles let one molecule of the other escape, or took up one in addition, then the compound would diverge further from this precise point, about which there oscillate, as it were, the oxygenicities of the various neutral compounds. And it is this point that would give the neutral state in the combination of two substances that could combine in all proportions, or in ratios expressible by any number of molecules whatever. It is evident that this way of regarding the neutrality of compound substances reconciles the theory given in the Memoir quoted with the ideas put forward by Mr. De Laplace on this point, and expounded by Mr. Hauy in his Traité de Physique. According to this theory it is evident that if the oxygenicity of two acids and two alkalies that combine respectively in pairs is not extremely different, and if at the same time the mass of the molecule of one of the acids is not in a different ratio to its alkali from that of the other acid with regard to its own alkali, then the ratio between the numbers of molecules that gives neutrality may be the same in both compounds; but in the contrary case, the ratio may vary in such a way that instead of the equality of volumes, or of combination of molecule to molecule that we see between carbonic and a few other acids on the one hand and ammonia on the other, there may be other simple ratios such as 1 to 2, etc., which give the neutral state. Nevertheless, the simplicity that will always exist amongst these ratios, in conjunction with the information we may obtain from other sources as to the mass of the molecules and the degree of oxygenicity of the components, will sometimes put us in a position to determine, or at least conjecture, what are the simple ratios that may occur in a given case; but it is the task of experiment to confirm these theoretical estimates. 10 The properties of oxymuriatic acid, as Davy conceives them, being analogous to those of oxygen, are not at all extraordinary from this point of view; they simply show that this substance is very oxygenic. I had already remarked in my Memoir that the properties of the alkalies, supposed to be oxides, are easily explained according to these ideas. 187

190 VIII It will have been in general remarked on reading this Memoir that there are many points of agreement between our special results and those of Dalton, although we set out from a general principle, and Dalton has only been guided by considerations of detail. This agreement is an argument in favor of our hypothesis, which is at bottom merely Dalton s system furnished with a new means of precision from the connection we have found between it and the general fact established by Mr. Gay-Lussac. Dalton s system supposes that compounds are made in general in fixed proportions, and this is what experiment shows with regard to the more stable compounds and those more interesting to the chemist. It would appear that it is only combinations of this sort that can take place amongst gases, on account of the enormous size of the molecules that would result from ratios expressed by larger numbers, in spite of the division of the molecules, which is in all probability confined within narrow limits. We perceive that the close packing of the molecules in solids and liquids, which only leaves between the integral molecules distances of the same order as those between the elementary molecules, can give rise to more complicated ratios, and even to combinations in all proportions; but these compounds so too will be of a different type from those with which we have been concerned, and this distinction may serve to reconcile Mr. Berthollet s ideas as to compounds with the theory of fixed proportions. 11 * * * * * Questions on the Reading: 1. Are Avogadro s hypotheses consistent with Berzelius s theory of electro-chemistry and Dalton s supposition that particles of the same kind repel each other and (cf. p. 138)? That is, what is the plausibility of a molecule composed of an oxygen atom combined with another oxygen atom? 2. When Avogadro specifies that the number of molecules in a given volume is the same for all gases he does not claim to know that number how could he? nor does his law require that the number be known, but only that it exist. The number was, however, finally determined at the beginning of the 20 th century by Jean Perrin, who named the number after him: Avogadro s number is x molecules in 22.4 liters of any gas. 11 [Although he wrote it in French, one of the two common languages being used in most chemistry publications at this time, for almost half a century Avogadro s paper remained largely unknown or ignored outside of Italy. As a result, chemists continued to struggle with the apparent conflict between Gay-Lussac s law and Dalton s atomic theory during this period. However, in 1860 at an international conference in Karlsruhe, Germany, Stanislao Cannizzaro would deliver a speech that would free Avogadro s theory from obscurity; we will read Cannizzaro s paper shortly. In 1856 Avogadro himself passed away, his ideas still generally unrecognized.] 188

191 Modern Chemical Symbols 12 In 1814, Berzelius published an article entitled On the Chemical Signs, and the Method of Employing Them to Express Chemical Proportions. In criticizing the pre-daltonian alchemical symbols, he wrote, They owed their origin, no doubt, to the mysterious relation supposed by the alchemists to exist between the metals and the planets, and to the desire that they had of expressing themselves in a manner incomprehensible to the public. Berzelius commended the work of fellow-laborers in the anti-phlogistic revolution (e.g., Dalton) in designing new signs. He continued, but, though we must acknowledge that these signs were very well contrived, and very ingenious, they were of no use; because it is easier to write an abbreviated word than to draw a figure, which has but little analogy with letters, and which, to be legible, must be made of a larger size than our ordinary writing. Berzelius then proposed his system: The chemical signs ought to be letters, for the greater facility of writing, and not to disfigure a printed book... I shall take, therefore, for the chemical sign, the initial letter of the Latin name for each elementary substance... Further, since the names of some elements have the same initial letters, the single letters were given to non-metals; e.g., for carbon, hydrogen, oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen we have C, H, O, S, and N. For metals that have an initial letter the same as a nonmetal, the first two distinctive letters were used; e.g., for copper, sodium, tin, and antimony (whose Latin names are cuprium aes, natrium, stannum, and stibium) we have Cu, Na, Sn, and Sb. Some slight modifications in this procedure were made by Berzelius and others. This system is the one we use to this day. You will find a list of chemical symbols in the Appendix to Chapter IX, at the back of the manual. Berzelius s interest went beyond convenient labeling. His symbols were destined solely to facilitate the expression of chemical proportions. Thus the symbols are to be used in writing out chemical formulas that specify the ratios of atoms in the compounds. For example, H 2 O means that water is composed of molecules of two atoms of hydrogen and one of oxygen. The subscript refers to the number of atoms of the element whose letter symbol immediately precedes the subscript. If brackets are present, as in calcium hydroxide, Ca(OH) 2, then the subscript indicates that all the atoms inside the brackets, here being OH, are taken twice. 13 Thus, H 2 SO 4 means that sulfuric acid is composed of molecules of two atoms of hydrogen, one of sulfur, and four of oxygen. If atomic weights are established for the elements, then the ratio of atoms also implies a weight ratio. For example, if the atomic weight of H is 1, and of O is 16, then the formula H 2 O tells us that water contains two parts by weight of hydrogen for sixteen parts by weight of oxygen. We can now replace word equations with symbol equations. Thus carbon plus oxygen yields carbon dioxide becomes: C + O 2 = CO 2. If the relative atomic weight of H is taken as 1 (that is, it is the standard for reference) and the relative atomic weight of oxygen is considered as 8 (which is near the weight Dalton gives it), is it possible to establish a formula for water? If so, how does it compare with H 2 O? If 12 This may be taken up any time before Canizzaro s paper, but it may be best saved until after reading Avogadro where the distinction between molecules and atoms is introduced, and the constitution of water settled. 13 Berzelius actually used superscripts. (Superscripts now are reserved for describing ion-charge.) In the rest of this manual, although Cannizzaro and others used superscripts, we have followed the modern notation. 189

192 it is different, how can one decide which (if indeed either) is correct? A balanced equation is one in which the atomic constitution of all the substances reacted are known and indicated on the left-hand side, and the atomic constitution of all the substances produced are known and are indicated on the right-hand side, and the number of atoms of each element is the same on either side of the equation. In balancing a given equation keep in mind two rules: 1. The Law of Conservation of Matter must be adhered to (and no transmutation of elements is allowed). The number of atoms of an element must be the same on each side of the equation. 2. A coefficient (which refers to the number of molecules taken) may be changed in balancing an equation, but a subscript (which specifies the atomic composition of the given molecule of the given substance, and is based on the Law of Fixed Proportions) may not be changed. Example: Given that hydrogen gas and oxygen gas are observed to saturate one another and produce water, balance the equation describing the reaction. H 2 + O 2 = H 2 O This format violates Rule 1: it is not balanced. H 2 + O 2 = H 2 O 2 2H 2 + O 2 = 2H 2 O This format conforms to Rule 1, but it violates Rule 2, so it is also incorrect. This format follows both rules, and is therefore correct. * By convention, if a reactant (a substance on the left-hand side of an equation) or product (a substance on the right-hand side) is a gas at room temperature, an arrow pointing upward is placed after the substance, or a horizontal line is drawn above the said substance. If a reactant or product is appreciably water insoluble, an arrow pointing downward is placed after the symbol. Questions and Problems 1. Dalton (whose symbols were quickly supplanted by those of Berzelius) raised the following objection to the new symbols: Berzelius s symbols are horrifying; a young student in chemistry might as soon learn Hebrew as make himself acquainted with them. As a young student in chemistry, do you agree? 2. Balance the following equations: a) Experiment 4: Caustic soda (sodium hydroxide) plus muriatic (hydrochloric) acid yields table salt (sodium chloride) and water. NaOH + HCl = NaCl + H 2 O 190

193 (b) Experiments 2 and 4: Magnesium burnt in oxygen yields magnesium oxide. Mg + O 2 = MgO (c) Proust s green carbonate of copper. Cu + O 2 + CO 2 + H 2 O = CuCO 3 Cu(OH) 2 All one molecule. (d) Experiment 4: Muriate of barites (barium chloride) plus sulfate of potash (potassium sulfate) yield sulfate of barites (barium sulfate) and muriate of potash (potassium chloride). BaCl 2 + K 2 SO 4 = BaSO 4 + KCl (e) Demonstration 10: Sodium metal dropped in water decomposes the water, yielding hydrogen gas and caustic soda (sodium hydroxide). Na + H 2 O = NaOH + H 2 (f) Experiment 4: Calcium added to water yields calcium hydroxide and hydrogen gas. Ca + H 2 O = CaO 2 H 2 + H 2 or = Ca(OH) 2 + H 2 Note that the first way of writing the product is more old-fashioned: It shows component molecules. Whereas the second way designates the OH (or hydroxide) radical, as this usually acts as a unit during chemical reactions. Analogously, sulfuric acid could be written as H 2 O SO 3 (the old-fashioned way) or H 2 SO 4. Note: In some of the above molecular formulas (e.g., H 2 O, O 2 ) we have accepted Avogadro s argument as correct. Which are the best-defined formulas for the above compounds and how one defends such formulas will be dealt with shortly. 191

194 Pierre-Louis Dulong and Alexis-Thérèse Petit Extracts from Researches on Certain Important Points about the Theory of Heat 1 Considerations founded upon the group of laws pertaining to the proportions of chemical compounds now make it possible to form ideas about the constitution of bodies which, although arbitrarily established in several points, nevertheless cannot be regarded as vague and absolutely sterile speculations. Moreover, we are persuaded that certain properties of matter would present themselves under more simple forms and would permit themselves to be expressed by more regular and less complicated laws if one could relate them to the elements on which they immediately depend. Accordingly, we have tried to introduce the most certain of the results of the atomic theory into the study of a few of the properties that appear more intimately tied to the individual action of the material molecules. The success that we have already obtained makes us hope not only that considerations of this kind will be able to contribute powerfully to further progress in physical science, but that the corpuscular theory will, in its turn, receive from them a new degree of probability, and that it will discover sure means of discerning the truth when different hypotheses seem equally plausible. Among the properties of matter to which the considerations that we have just indicated may be applied, we will first choose, as having especially fixed our attention, those which depend on the action of heat. In directing our operations in a suitable manner, we have been led to discover some simple relations between phenomena whose connection had not been perceived before. However, as the numerous points of view under which these phenomena can be considered give to the investigation which we have begun an extent which does not permit one to include all their parts at the same time, we have thought it would be useful to make known at present the results at which we have already arrived. We shall now present in one table the specific heats of several elementary bodies, limiting ourselves to those determinations about which we no longer feel any doubt. 1 [Recherches sur quelques points importants de la Théorie de la Chaleur, which appeared in Annales de Chimie et de Physique, vol. 10 (1819).] 192

195 Specific Heats 2 Relative Weights of the Atoms 3 Product of the Weight of Each Atom Times the Corresponding Capacity Bismuth Lead Gold Platinum Tin Silver Zinc Tellurium Copper Nickel Iron Cobalt Sulfur To make clear the law that we are about to announce, in the preceding table we have added to the specific heats 5 of various elementary substances the relative weights of their atoms. These weights are derived, as is well known, from the ratios in which the weighable quantities of elementary substances combine together. The care that for some years has been devoted to the determination of the proportions of the constituents in the majority of chemical compounds 2 [The specific heat capacity of water is taken as 1.] 3 [The relative weight of the oxygen atom is taken as 1.] 4 [Apparently a misprint for ] 5 [Recall from the Measurement Manual that a heat capacity refers to the amount of heat, for example in calories, required to raise or to lower the temperature of any weight body one degree (e.g., centigrade). A specific heat capacity, or specific heat, refers to the amount of heat required to raise (or lower) the temperature of a given unit weight (e.g., a gram) of a substance one degree.] 193

196 leaves very slight uncertainty in the values that we have used. However, as there exists no rigorous means of ascertaining the actual number of atoms of each species that enter into a combination, it is to be concluded that there is always some arbitrariness in fixing the specific weight of elementary molecules; but the resulting uncertainty at most concerns only two or three numbers that stand in the simplest ratios to one another. The reasons that have guided us in our choice will be sufficiently explained by what follows. For the moment we will confine ourselves to saying that none of the determinations we have arrived at are out of accord with the bestestablished chemical analogies. We can, by means of the figures contained in the preceding tables, now easily calculate the ratios that exist between the capacities of atoms differing in kind. Let us note, therefore, that to proceed from the specific heats furnished by observation to the specific heats of the particles themselves it is but necessary to divide the former by the number of particles contained in equal weights of the substances compared. Now it is obvious that these numbers of particles are, for equal weights of matter, reciprocally proportional to the densities of the atoms. 6 We arrive, then, at the desired result by multiplying each [specific heat] capacity obtained by experiment by the weight of the corresponding atom. It is these different products that have been arranged in the last column of the table. The very inspection of these numbers shows a comparison too remarkably simple not to indicate immediately the existence of a physical law susceptible of being generalized and extended to all elementary substances. In effect, the products in question, which express the capacities of different atoms, approach equality to such a degree that it is impossible that the very slight differences that are noticed are due to anything other than the inevitable errors either in the measurement of the capacities or in the chemical analyses, especially if it is noticed that in certain cases the errors arising from these two sources may be in the same direction and consequently may be found multiplied in the result. The number and diversity of the substances on which we have worked forbids considering the relation we have just indicated as simply fortuitous, and the following law may be justly concluded: Atoms of all simple substances have exactly the same capacity for heat. In recalling what we have said previously concerning the kind of uncertainty that is still attached to the fixation of the specific weights of atoms, it will easily be perceived that, should one adopt a supposition regarding the density of the particles different from that which we have made, the law which we have just established would be modified. But in every case, this law will consist in the expression of a simple relation between the weights and the specific heats of elementary atoms, and it is felt that, having to choose between equally probable hypotheses, we ought to decide in favor of that which would establish the simplest relationship between the elements compared. Whatever the principle adopted on this relation, moreover, it may henceforth serve as a control on the results of chemical analysis and, in certain cases, even offer the most exact means of arriving at a knowledge of the proportions of certain combinations. But if, in the continuation 6 [Notice that Dulong and Petit speak of the densities of the atoms, not the densities of the bulk substances; they seem to be referring to the (relative) weight per atom for a given substance. Whence Dulong and Petit speak of the densities of the atoms and, in the next sentence, the weight of the corresponding atom as the same thing. Thus they are really saying that for the same weight of two elements, the number of particles in one is to the number of particles in the other as the atomic weight of the other is to the atomic weight of the one. Is this proportion justifiable?] 194

197 of our work, no fact arises to weaken the probability of the opinion that we now prefer, it will be found to much advantage to fix in a definite and uniform manner the specific weights of the atoms of all simple substances that may be submitted to direct observation. The law that we have just enunciated appears to be independent of the form of the substances, provided, however, that they are considered in the same circumstances. * * * * * 195

198 Stanislao Cannizzaro Sketch of A Course of Chemical Philosophy 1 [First Lecture] I believe that the progress of science made in these last years has confirmed the hypothesis of Avogadro, of Ampère, and of Dumas on the similar constitution of substances in the gaseous state; that is, that equal volumes of these substances, whether simple or compound, contain an equal number of molecules: not, however, an equal number of atoms, since the molecules of the different substances, or those of the same substance in its different states, 2 may contain a different number of atoms, whether of the same or of a diverse nature. In order to lead my students to the conviction that I have reached myself, I wish to place them on the same path as that by which I have arrived at it the path, that is, of the historical examination of chemical theories. I commence, then, in the first lecture by showing how, from the examination of the physical properties of gaseous bodies, and from the law of Gay-Lussac on the volume relations between components and compounds, there arose almost spontaneously the hypothesis alluded to above, which was first of all enunciated by Avogadro, and shortly afterward by Ampère. Analyzing the conception of these two physicists, I show that it contains nothing contradictory to known facts, provided that we distinguish, as they did, molecules from atoms; provided that we do not confuse the criteria by which the number and the weight of the former are compared, with the criteria that serve to deduce the weight of the latter; and provided that, finally, we have not fixed in our minds the prejudice that whilst the molecules of compound substances may consist of different numbers of atoms, the molecules of the various simple substances must all contain either one atom, or at least an equal number of atoms. [Second Lecture] In the second lecture I set myself the task of investigating the reasons why this hypothesis of Avogadro and Ampère was not immediately accepted by the majority of chemists. I therefore expound rapidly the work and ideas of those who examined the relationships of the reacting quantities of substances without concerning themselves with the volumes that these substances occupy in the gaseous state; and I pause to explain the ideas of Berzelius, by the influence of which the hypothesis above cited appeared to chemists out of harmony with the facts. I examine the order of the ideas of Berzelius, and show how, on the one hand, he developed and completed the dualistic theory of Lavoisier by his own electro-chemical hypothesis, and how, on the other hand, influenced by the atomic theory of Dalton (which had been confirmed by the experiments of Wollaston), he applied this theory and took it for his guide in his later 1 [ Letter of Professor Stanislao Cannizzaro to Professor S. De Luca: Sketch of A Course of Chemical Philosophy, Given in the Royal University of Genoa, from Il Nuovo Cimento, vol. 7 (1858), pp Published as a booklet in 1859.] 2 [See footnote 3.] 196

199 researches, bringing it into agreement with the dualistic electro-chemical theory, whilst at the same time he extended the laws of Richter and tried to harmonize them with the results of Proust. I bring out clearly the reason why he was led to assume that the atoms, whilst separate in simple bodies, should unite to form the atoms of a compound of the first order, and these in turn, uniting in simple proportions, should form composite atoms of the second order, and why (since he could not admit that when two substances gave a single compound, a molecule of one and a molecule of the other, instead of uniting to form a single molecule, should change into two molecules of the same nature) he could not accept the hypothesis of Avogadro and Ampère, which in many cases leads to the conclusion just indicated. I then show how Berzelius, being unable to escape from his own dualistic ideas, and yet wishing to explain the simple relations discovered by Gay-Lussac between the volumes of the gaseous compounds and their gaseous components, was led to formulate a hypothesis very different from that of Avogadro and of Ampère, namely, that equal volumes of simple substances in the gaseous state contain the same number of atoms, which in combination unite intact; how, later, the vapor densities of many simple substances having been determined, he had to restrict this hypothesis by saying that only simple substances that are permanent gases obey this law; how, not believing that composite atoms even of the same order could be equidistant in the gaseous state under the same conditions, he was led to suppose that in the molecules of hydrochloric, hydriodic, and hydrobromic acids, and in those of water and sulfuretted hydrogen, there was contained the same quantity of hydrogen, although the different behavior of these compounds confirmed the deductions from the hypothesis of Avogadro and Ampère. I conclude this lecture by showing that we have only to distinguish atoms from molecules in order to reconcile all the experimental results known to Berzelius, and have no need to assume any difference in constitution between permanent and coercible, or between simple and compound gases, in contradiction to the physical properties of all elastic fluids. [Third Lecture] In the third lecture I pass in review the various researches of physicists on gaseous bodies, and show that all the new researches from Gay-Lussac to Clausius confirm the hypothesis of Avogadro and of Ampère that the distances between the molecules, so long as they remain in the gaseous state, do not depend on their nature, nor on their mass, nor on the number of atoms they contain, but only on their temperature and on the pressure to which they are subjected. [Fourth Lecture] In the fourth lecture I pass under review the chemical theories since Berzelius: I pause to examine how Dumas, inclining to the idea of Ampère, had habituated chemists who busied themselves with organic substances to apply this idea in determining the molecular weights of compounds; and what were the reasons that had stopped him half-way in the application of this theory. I then expound, in continuation of this, two different methods the one due to Berzelius, the other to Ampère and Dumas which were used to determine formulae in inorganic and in organic chemistry respectively until Laurent and Gerhardt sought to bring both parts of the science into harmony. I explain clearly how the discoveries made by Gerhardt, Williamson, Hofmann, Wurtz, Bethollet, Frankland, and others on the constitution of organic compounds 197

200 confirm the hypothesis of Avogadro and Ampère, and how that part of Gerhardt s theory that corresponds best with the facts and best explains their connection is nothing but the extension of Ampère s theory, that is, its complete application, already begun by Dumas. I draw attention, however, to the fact that Gerhardt did not always consistently follow the theory that had given him such fertile results; since he assumed that equal volumes of gaseous bodies contain the same number of molecules only in the majority of cases, but not always. I show how he was constrained by a prejudice, the reverse of that of Berzelius, frequently to distort the facts. Whilst Berzelius, on the one hand, did not admit that the molecules of simple substances could be divided in the act of combination, Gerhardt supposes that all the molecules of simple substances are divisible in chemical action. This prejudice forces him to suppose that the molecule of mercury and of all the metals consists of two atoms, like that of hydrogen, and therefore that the compounds of all the metals are of the same type as those of hydrogen. This error even yet persists in the minds of chemists, and has prevented them from discovering amongst the metals the existence of biatomic radicals perfectly analogous to those lately discovered by Wurtz in organic chemistry. From the historical examination of chemical theories, as well as from physical researches, I draw the conclusion that to bring into harmony all the branches of chemistry we must have recourse to the complete application of the theory of Avogadro and Ampère in order to compare the weights and the numbers of the molecules; and I propose in the sequel to show that the conclusions drawn from it are invariably in accordance with all physical and chemical laws hitherto discovered. [Fifth Lecture] I begin in the fifth lecture by applying the hypothesis of Avogadro and Ampère to determine the weights of molecules even before their composition is known. On the basis of the hypothesis cited above, the weights of the molecules are proportional to the densities of the substances in the gaseous state. If we wish the densities of vapors to express the weights of the molecules, it is expedient to refer them all to the density of a simple gas taken as unity, rather than to the weight of a mixture of two gases, such as air. Hydrogen being the lightest gas, we may take it as the unit to which we refer the densities of other gaseous bodies, which in such a case express the weights of the molecules compared to the weight of the molecule of hydrogen = 1. Since I prefer to take as common unit for the weights of the molecules and for their fractions, the weight of a half and not of a whole molecule of hydrogen, I therefore refer the densities of the various gaseous bodies to that of hydrogen = 2. If the densities are referred to air = 1, it is sufficient to multiply by to change them to those referred to that of hydrogen = 1; and by to refer them to the density of hydrogen = 2. I write the two series of numbers, expressing these weights in the following manner: 198

201 Names of Substances Densities or weights of one volume, the volume of Hydrogen being made = 1, i.e., the weights of a whole molecule of Hydrogen taken as unity Densities referred to that of Hydrogen = 2, i.e., weights of the molecules referred to the weight of half a molecule of Hydrogen taken as unity Hydrogen 1 2 Oxygen, ordinary Oxygen, electrised Sulfur below 1000 ºC Sulfur * above 1000 ºC Chlorine Bromine Arsenic Mercury Water 9 18 Hydrochloric Acid Acetic Acid *This determination was made by Bineau, but I believe it requires confirmation. The numbers expressing the densities are approximate: We arrive at a closer approximation by comparing them with those derived from chemical data, and bringing the two into harmony. Whoever wishes to refer the densities to hydrogen = 1 and the weights of the molecules to the weight of half a molecule of hydrogen, can say that the weights of the molecules are all represented by the weight of two volumes. I myself, however, for simplicity of exposition, prefer to refer the densities to that of hydrogen = 2, and so the weights of the molecules are all represented by the weight of one volume. From the few examples contained in the table, I show that the same substance in its different allotropic 3 states can have different molecular weights, without concealing the fact that the experimental data on which this conclusion is founded still require confirmation. I assume that the study of the various compounds has been begun by determining the weights of the molecules, i.e., their densities in the gaseous state, without inquiring if they are 3 [Different forms of the same element existing in the same state (solid, liquid, or gas) are known as allotropic forms, or allotropes. Allotropy is exhibited by a number of elements, especially nonmetals. Oxygen and ozone (electrised oxygen) are allotropes. Sulfur and phosphorous each have several allotropic forms.] 199

202 simple or compound. I then come to the examination of the composition of these molecules. If the substance is undecomposable, we are forced to admit that its molecules are made up by weight of one and the same kind of matter. If the body is composite, its elementary analysis is made, and thus we discover the constant relations between the weights of its components contained; then the weight of the molecule is divided into parts proportional to the numbers expressing the relative weights of the components contained in the molecule of the compound, referred to the same unit as that to which we refer the weights of all the molecules. By this method I have constructed the following table: Name of Substance Weight of one volume, i.e., weight of the molecule referred to the weight of half a molecule of Hydrogen = 1 Component weights of one volume, i.e., component weights of the molecule, all referred to the weight of half a molecule of Hydrogen = 1 Hydrogen 2 2 Hydrogen Oxygen, ordinary Oxygen Oxygen, electrised Oxygen Sulfur below 1000 ºC Sulfur Sulfur above 1000 ºC(?) Sulfur Phosphorous Phosphorous Chlorine Chlorine Bromine Bromine Iodine Iodine Nitrogen Nitrogen Arsenic Arsenic Mercury Mercury Hydrochloric acid Chlorine, 1 Hydrogen Hydrobromic acid Bromine, 1 Hydrogen Hydriodic acid Iodine, 1 Hydrogen Water Oxygen, 2 Hydrogen 4 [This question mark is in the original, perhaps indicating (as in the previous table) that there is some uncertainty about the vapor density at this temperature.] 200

203 Name of Substance Weight of one volume, i.e., weight of the molecule referred to the weight of half a molecule of Hydrogen = 1 Component weights of one volume, i.e., component weights of the molecule, all referred to the weight of half a molecule of Hydrogen = 1 Ammonia Nitrogen, 3 Hydrogen Arseniuretted Hydrogen Arsenic, 3 Hydrogen Phosphuretted Hydrogen Phosphorous, 5 3 Hydrogen Calomel Chlorine, 200 Mercury Corrosive Sublimate Chlorine, 200 Mercury Arsenic Trichloride Chlorine, 75 Arsenic Protochloride of Phosphorous Chlorine, 32 Phosphorous Perchloride of Iron Chlorine, 112 Iron Protoxide of Nitrogen Oxygen, 28 Nitrogen Binoxide of Nitrogen Oxygen, 14 Nitrogen Carbonic Oxide Oxygen, 12 Carbon Carbonic Acid Oxygen, 12 Carbon Ethylene 28 4 Hydrogen, 24 Carbon Propylene 42 6 Hydrogen, 36 Carbon Acetic Acid, hydrated 60 4 Hydrogen, 32 Oxygen, 24 Carbon Acetic Acid, anhydrous Hydrogen, 48 Oxygen, 48 Carbon Alcohol 46 6 Hydrogen, 16 Oxygen, 24 Carbon Ether Hydrogen, 16 Oxygen, 48 Carbon All the numbers contained in the preceding table are comparable among themselves, being referred to the same unit. And to fix this well in the minds of my pupils, I have recourse to a very simple artifice: I say to them, namely, Suppose it to be shown that the half molecule of hydrogen weighs a millionth of a milligram, then all the numbers of the preceding table become concrete numbers, expressing in millionths of a milligram the concrete weights of the molecules 5 [Although the atomic weight of phosphorus implied in this and the protochloride of phosphorus is 32, this quantity does not evenly divide the above molecular weight of phosphorus. Does a submultiple of it? If not, is this a problem for Cannizzaro s method?] 201

204 and of their components; the same thing would follow if the common unit had any other concrete value, and so I lead them to gain a clear conception of the comparability of these numbers, whatever be the concrete value of the common unit. Once this artifice has served its purpose, I hasten to destroy it by explaining how it is not possible in reality to know the concrete value of this unit; but the clear ideas remain in the minds of my pupils, whatever may be their degree of mathematical knowledge. I proceed pretty much as engineers do when they destroy the wooden scaffolding that has served them to construct their bridges, as soon as these can support themselves. But I fear that you will say, Is it worth the trouble and the waste of time and ink to tell me of this very common artifice? I am, however, constrained to tell you that I have become attached to this pedagogic expedient, having had such great success with it amongst my pupils, and thus I recommend it to all those who, like myself, must teach chemistry to youths not well accustomed to the comparison of quantities. Once my students have become familiar with the importance of the numbers as they are exhibited in the preceding table, it is easy to lead them to discover the law that results from their comparison. Compare, I say to them, the various quantities of the same element contained in the molecule of the free substance and in those of all its different compounds, and you will not be able to escape the following law: The different quantities of the same element contained in different molecules are all whole multiples of one and the same quantity, which, always being entire, has the right to be called an atom. Thus: One molecule of free hydrogen contains 2 of hydrogen = 2 x 1 of hydrochloric acid 1 = 1 x 1 of hydrobromic acid 1 = 1 x 1 of hydriodic acid 1 = 1 x 1 of hydrocyanic acid 1 = 1 x 1 of water 2 = 2 x 1 of sulfuretted hydrogen 2 = 2 x 1 of formic acid 2 = 2 x 1 of ammonia 3 = 3 x 1 of gaseous phosphuretted hydrogen 3 = 3 x 1 of acetic acid 4 = 4 x 1 of ethylene 4 = 4 x 1 of alcohol 6 = 6 x 1 of ether 10 = 10 x 1 Thus all the various weights of hydrogen contained in the different molecules are integral multiples of the weight contained in the molecule of hydrochloric acid, which justifies our having taken it as common unit of the weights of the atoms and of the molecules. The atom of hydrogen is contained twice in the molecule of free hydrogen. In the same way it is shown that the various quantities of chlorine existing in different molecules are all whole multiples of the quantity contained in the molecule of hydrochloric acid, that is, of 35.5; and that the quantities of oxygen existing in the different molecules are all whole multiples of the quantity contained in the molecule of water, that is, of 16, which quantity is half 202

205 of that contained in the molecule of free oxygen, and an eighth part of that contained in the molecule of electrised oxygen (ozone). 6 Thus: One molecule of free oxygen contains 32 of oxygen = 2 x 16 One molecule of ozone contains 128 of oxygen = 8 x 16 One molecule of water contains 16 of oxygen = 1 x 16 One molecule of ether contains 16 of oxygen = 1 x 16 One molecule of acetic acid contains 32 of oxygen = 2 x 16 etc. One molecule of free chlorine contains 71 of chlorine = 2 x 35.5 One molecule of hydrochloric acid contains 35.5 of chlorine = 1 x 35.5 One molecule of corrosive sublimate contains 71 of chlorine = 2 x 35.5 One molecule of chloride of arsenic contains of chlorine = 3 x 35.5 One molecule of chloride of tin contains 142 of chlorine = 4 x 35.5 etc. In a similar way may be found the smallest quantity of each element that enters as a whole into the molecules that contain it, and to which may be given with reason the name of atom. In order, then, to find the atomic weight of each element, it is necessary first of all to know the weights of all or of the greater part of the molecules in which it is contained and their composition. If it should appear to any one that this method of finding the weights of molecules is too hypothetical, then let him compare the composition of equal volumes of substances in the gaseous state under the same conditions. He will not be able to escape the following law: The various quantities of the same element contained in equal volumes either of the same element or of its compounds are all whole multiples of one and the same quantity; that is, each element has a special numerical value by means of which and of integral coefficients the composition by weight of equal volumes of the different substances in which it is contained may be expressed. Now, since all chemical reactions take place between equal volumes, or integral multiples of them, it is possible to express all chemical reactions by means of the same numerical values and integral coefficients. The law enunciated in the form just indicated is a direct deduction from the facts: but who is not led to assume from this same law that the weights of equal volumes represent the molecular weights, although other proofs are wanting? I thus prefer to substitute in the expression of the law the word molecule instead of volume. This is advantageous for teaching, because, when the vapor densities cannot be determined, recourse is had to other means for deducing the weights of the molecules of compounds. The whole substance of my course consists in this: to prove the exactness of these latter methods by showing that they lead to the same results as the vapor density when both kinds of method can be adopted at the same time for determining molecular weights. 6 [Ozone is an unstable form of oxygen often produced in large quantities by lightning and in smaller ones by electric sparks, and had been discovered and identified by Its name is taken from the Greek (ozein), meaning to be odorous, from its distinctive smell. Cannizzaro s method would indicate that the molecule of ozone is O 8 ; it turned out later to be O 3.] 203

206 The law enunciated above, called by me the law of atoms, contains in itself that of multiple proportions and that of simple relations between the volumes; which I demonstrate amply in my lecture. After this I easily succeed in explaining how, expressing by symbols the different atomic weights of the various elements, it is possible to express by means of formulae the composition of their molecules and of those of their compounds, and I pause a little to make my pupils familiar with the passage from gaseous volume to molecule, the first directly expressing the fact and the second interpreting it. Above all, I study to implant in their minds thoroughly the difference between molecule and atom. It is possible indeed to know the atomic weight of an element without knowing its molecular weight; this is seen in the case of carbon. A great number of the compounds of this substance being volatile, the weights of the molecules and their composition may be compared, and it is seen that the quantities of carbon that they contain are all integral multiples of 12, which quantity is thus the atom of carbon and expressed by the symbol C; but since we cannot determine the vapor density of free carbon 7 we have no means of knowing the weight of its molecule, and thus we cannot know how many times the atom is contained in it. Analogy does not in any way help us, because we observe that the molecules of the most closely analogous substances (such as sulfur and oxygen), and even the molecules of the same substance in its allotropic states, are composed of different numbers of atoms. We have no means of predicting the vapor density of carbon; the only thing that we can say is that it will be either 12 or an integral multiple of 12 (in my system of numbers). The number that is given in different treatises on chemistry as the theoretical density of carbon is quite arbitrary, and a useless datum in chemical calculations; it is useless for calculating and verifying the weights of the molecules of the various compounds of carbon, because the weight of the molecule of free carbon may be ignored if we know the weights of the molecules of all its compounds; it is useless for determining the weight of the atom of carbon, because this is deduced by comparing the composition of a certain number of molecules containing carbon, and the knowledge of the weight of the molecule of this last would scarcely add a datum more to those that are already sufficient for the solution of the problem. Anyone will easily convince himself of this by placing in the following manner the numbers expressing the molecular weights derived from the densities and the weights of the components contained in them: Names of compounds of Carbon Weights of the Molecules referred to the atom of Hydrogen Weights of the components of the molecules referred to the weight of the atom of Hydrogen taken as unity Formulae, making H = 1; C = 12; O = 16; S = 32 Carbonic Oxide Carbon, 16 Oxygen CO Carbonic Acid Carbon, 32 Oxygen CO 2 Sulfide of Carbon Carbon, 64 Sulfur CS 2 Marsh Gas Carbon, 4 Hydrogen CH 4 7 [Carbon sublimes at 4800 C.] 8 [Methane gas, the natural gas most frequently used for household heating and cooking.] 204

207 Names of compounds of Carbon Weights of the Molecules referred to the atom of Hydrogen Weights of the components of the molecules referred to the weight of the atom of Hydrogen taken as unity Formulae, making H = 1; C = 12; O = 16; S = 32 Ethylene Carbon, 4 Hydrogen C 2 H 4 Propylene Carbon, 6 Hydrogen C 3 H 6 Ether Etc. 74 Etc. 48 Carbon, 10 Hydrogen, 16 Oxygen Etc. C 4 H 10 O Etc.. In the list of molecules containing carbon there might be placed also that of free carbon if the weight of it were known; but this would not have any greater utility than what we would derive by writing in the list one more compound of carbon; that is, it would do nothing but verify once more that the quantity of carbon contained in any molecule, whether of the element itself or of its compounds, is 12 or n x 12 = Cn, n being an integral number. I then discuss whether it is better to express the composition of the molecules of compounds as a function of the molecules of the components, or if, on the other hand, it is better, as I commenced by doing, to express the composition of both in terms of those constant quantities that always enter by whole numbers into both, that is, by means of the atoms. Thus, for example, is it better to indicate in the formula that one molecule of hydrochloric acid contains the weight of half a molecule of hydrogen and half a molecule of chlorine, or that it contains an atom of one and an atom of the other, pointing out at the same time that the molecules of both of these substances consist of two atoms? Should we adopt the formulae made with symbols indicating the molecules of the elements, then many coefficients of these symbols would be fractional, and the formula of a compound would indicate directly the ratio of the volumes occupied by the components and by the compounds in the gaseous state. This was proposed by Dumas in his classical memoir, Sur quelques points de la Théorie atomique (Annales de Chimie et de Physique, tom. 33, 1826). To discuss the question proposed, I give to the molecules of the elements symbols of a different kind from those employed to represent the atoms, and in this way I compare the formulae made with the two kinds of symbols: Atoms or Molecules Symbols of the molecules of the Elements and formulae made with these symbols 9 Symbols of the atoms of the Elements and formulae made with these symbols Numbers expressing their weight Atom of Hydrogen H 1/2 H 1 Molecule of Hydrogen H H [The font we are using to indicate Cannizzaro s notation following molecules is not identical to his, but merely similar.] 205

208 Atoms or Molecules Symbols of the molecules of the Elements and formulae made with these symbols 9 Symbols of the atoms of the Elements and formulae made with these symbols Numbers expressing their weight Atom of Oxygen O 1/2 = Oz 1/8 O 16 Molecule of Ordinary Oxygen Molecule of Electricised Oxygen (Ozone) O O 2 32 Oz O Atom of Sulfur S 1/2 = Sa 1/6 S 32 Molecule of Sulfur (1000 +) Molecule of Sulfur (1000 & -) S S 2 64 Sa S Molecule of Water HO 1/2 = HOz 1/8 H 2 O 18 Molecule of Sulfurretted Hydrogen HS 1/2 = HSa 1/6 H 2 S 34 These few examples are sufficient to demonstrate the inconveniences associated with the formulae indicating the composition of compound molecules as a function of the entire component molecules, which may be summed up as follows: 1. It is not possible to determine the weight of the molecules of many elements the density of which in the gaseous state cannot be ascertained. 2. If it is true that oxygen and sulfur have different densities in their different allotropic states, that is, if they have different molecular weights, then their compounds would have two or more formulae according as the quantities of their components were referred to the molecules of one or the other allotropic state. 3. The molecules of analogous substances (such as sulfur and oxygen) being composed of different numbers of atoms, the formulae of analogous compounds would be dissimilar. If we indicate, instead, the composition of the molecules by means of the atoms, it is seen that analogous compounds contain in their molecules an equal number of atoms. It is true that when we employ in the formulae the symbols expressing the weights of the molecules, i.e., of equal volumes, the relationship between the volumes of the components and those of the compounds follows directly; but this relationship is also indicated in the formulae expressing the number of atoms; it is sufficient to bear in mind that the atom represented by a symbol is either the entire molecule of the free substance or a fraction of it, that is, it is sufficient to know the atomic formula of the free molecule. Thus, to take an example, it is sufficient to know that the atom of oxygen, O, is one-half of the molecule of ordinary oxygen and an eighth 206

209 part of the molecule of electrised oxygen to know that the weight of the atom of oxygen is represented by 1/2 volume of free oxygen and 1/8 of electrised oxygen. In short, it is easy to accustom students to consider the weights of the atoms as being represented either by a whole volume or by a fraction of a volume, according as the atom is equal to the whole molecule or to a fraction of it. In this system of formulae, those which represent the weights and the composition of the molecules, whether of elements or of compounds, represent the weights and the composition of equal gaseous volumes under the same conditions. The atom of each element is represented by that quantity of it that constantly enters as a whole into equal volumes of the free substance or of its compounds; it may be either the entire quantity contained in one volume of the free substance or a simple sub-multiple of this quantity. [Sixth Lecture] This foundation of the atomic theory having been laid, I begin in the following lecture the sixth to examine the constitution of the molecules of the chlorides, bromides, and iodides. Since the greater part of these are volatile, and since we know their densities in the gaseous state, there cannot remain any doubt as to the approximate weights of the molecules and so of the quantities of chlorine, bromine, and iodine contained in them. These quantities being always integral multiples of the weights of chlorine, bromine, and iodine contained in hydrochloric, hydrobromic, and hydriodic acids, i.e., of the weights of the half molecules, there can remain no doubt as to the atomic weights of these substances, and thus as to the number of atoms existing in the molecules of their compounds, whose weights and compositions are known. A difficulty sometimes appears in deciding whether the quantity of the other element combined with one atom of these halogens 10 is 1, 2, 3, or n atoms in the molecule; to decide this, it is necessary to compare the composition of all the other molecules containing the same element and find out the weight of this element that constantly enters as a whole. When we cannot determine the vapor densities of the other compounds of the element whose atomic weight we wish to determine, it is necessary then to have recourse to other criteria to know the weights of their molecules and to deduce the weight of the atom of the element. What I am to expound in the sequel serves to teach my pupils the method of employing these other criteria to verify or to determine atomic weights and the composition of molecules. I begin by making them study the following table of some chlorides, bromides, and iodides whose vapor densities are known; I write their formulae, certain of justifying later the value assigned to the atomic weights of some elements existing in the compounds indicated. I do not omit to draw their attention once more to the atomic weights of hydrogen, chlorine, bromine, and iodine, being all equal to the weights of half a molecule, and represented by the weight of half a volume, which I indicate in the following table: 10 [Recall that halogens (from halys, meaning salt ) are elements that combine with other radicals usually metals to form salts. This is what the analogy among these elements consists in.] 207

210 Symbol Weight Weight of the atom of Hydrogen or half a molecule represented by the weight of ½ a volume H 1 Weight of the atom of Chlorine or half a molecule represented by the weight of ½ volume Cl 35.5 Weight of the atom of Bromine or half a molecule represented by the weight of ½ volume Br 80 Weight of the atom of Iodine or half a molecule represented by the weight of ½ volume I 127 These data being given, there follows the table of some compounds of the halogens: Names of the Chlorides Weights of equal volumes in the gaseous state, under the same conditions, referred to the weight of ½ volume of Hydrogen = 1; i.e., weights of the molecules referred to the weight of the atom of Hydrogen = 1 Composition of equal volumes in the gaseous state, under the same conditions, i.e., composition of the molecules, the weights of the components being all referred to the weight of the atom of Hydrogen taken as unity, i.e., the common unit adopted for the weights of atoms and molecules Formulae expressing the composition of the molecules or of equal volumes in the gaseous state under the same conditions Free Chlorine Chlorine Cl 2 Hydrochloric Acid Cl, 1 Hydrogen HCl Protochloride of Mercury (Calomel) Bichloride of Mercury, or Corrosive Sublimate Cl, 200 Mercury HgCl Cl, 200 Mercury HgCl 2 Chloride of Ethyl Cl, 5 H, 24 C C 2 H 5 Cl Chloride of Acetyl Cl, 24 C, 3 H, 16 O C 2 H 3 OCl Chloride of Ethylene Cl, 4 H, 24 C C 2 H 4 Cl 2 208

211 Names of the Chlorides Weights of equal volumes in the gaseous state, under the same conditions, referred to the weight of ½ volume of Hydrogen = 1; i.e., weights of the molecules referred to the weight of the atom of Hydrogen = 1 Composition of equal volumes in the gaseous state, under the same conditions, i.e., composition of the molecules, the weights of the components being all referred to the weight of the atom of Hydrogen taken as unity, i.e., the common unit adopted for the weights of atoms and molecules Formulae expressing the composition of the molecules or of equal volumes in the gaseous state under the same conditions Chloride of Arsenic Cl, 75 Arsenic AsCl 3 Protochloride of Phosphorus Cl, 32 Phosphorus PCl 3 Chloride of Boron Cl, 11 Boron BCl 3 Bichloride of Tin Cl, Tin SnCl 4 Bichloride of Titanium Cl, 56 Titanium TiCl 4 Chloride of Silicon Cl, 28 Silicon SiCl 4 Chloride of Zirconium Cl, 89 Zirconium ZrCl 4 Chloride of Aluminum Cl, 54 Aluminium Al 2 Cl 6 Perchloride of Iron Cl, 112 Iron Fe 2 Cl 6 Sesquichloride of Chromium Cl, 106 Chromium Cr 2 Cl 6 I stop to examine the composition of the molecules of the two chlorides and the two iodides of mercury. There can remain no doubt that the protochloride contains in its molecule the same quantity of chlorine as hydrochloric acid, that the bichloride contains twice as much, and that the quantity of mercury contained in the molecules of both is the same. The supposition made by some chemists that the quantities of chlorine contained in the two molecules are equal, and on the other hand that the quantities of mercury are different, is supported by no valid reason. The vapor densities of the two chlorides having been determined, and it having been observed that equal volumes of them contain the same quantity of mercury, and that the quantity of chlorine contained in one volume of the vapor of calomel is equal to that contained in the same volume of hydrochloric acid gas under the same conditions, whilst the quantity of chlorine contained in one volume of corrosive sublimate is twice that contained in an equal volume of calomel or of hydrochloric acid gas, the relative molecular composition of the two chlorides cannot be doubtful. The same may be said of the two iodides. Does the constant quantity of mercury existing in the molecules of these compounds, and represented by the number 200, correspond to one or more atoms? The observation that in these compounds the same quantity of mercury is combined with one or two atoms of chlorine or of iodine, would itself incline us to believe that 209

212 this quantity is that which enters always as a whole into all the molecules containing mercury, namely, the atom; whence Hg = 200. To verify this, it would be necessary to compare the various quantities of mercury contained in all the molecules of its compounds whose weights and composition are known with certainty. Few other compounds of mercury besides those indicated above lend themselves to this; still there are some in organic chemistry the formulae of which express well the molecular composition; in these formulae we always find Hg 2 = 200, chemists having made Hg = 100 and H = 1. This is a confirmation that the atom of mercury is 200 and not 100, no compound of mercury existing whose molecule contains less than this quantity of it. For verification I refer to the law of the specific heats of elements and of compounds. 11 I call the quantity of heat consumed by the atoms, or the molecules, the product of their weights into their specific heats. I compare the heat consumed by the atom of mercury with that consumed by the atoms of iodine and of bromine in the same physical state, and find them almost equal, which confirms the accuracy of the relation between the atomic weight of mercury and that of each of the two halogens, and thus also, indirectly, between the atomic weight of mercury and that of hydrogen, whose specific heats cannot be directly compared. Thus we have: Name of Substance Atomic Weight Specific Heat Heat required to heat unit weight 1 ºC Products of specific heats by atomic weight Heat required to heat the atom 1 ºC Solid Bromine Iodine Solid Mercury The same thing is shown by comparing the specific heats of the different compounds of mercury. Woestyn and Garnier have shown that the state of combination does not notably change the calorific capacity of the atoms; and since this is almost equal in the various elements, the molecules would require, to heat them 1º, quantities of heat proportional to the number of atoms that they contain. If Hg = 200, that is, if the formulae of the two chlorides and iodides of mercury are HgCl, HgI, HgCl 2, HgI 2, it will be necessary that the molecules of the first pair should consume twice as much heat as each separate atom, and those of the second pair three times as much; and this is so in fact, as may be seen in the following table: 11 [This is of course referring to the law discovered by Dulong and Petit. The quantity of heat consumed by the atom is what they called the heat capacity of the atom.] 210

213 Formulae of the compounds of mercury Weights of their molecules = p Specific heats of unit weight = c Specific heats of the molecules = p x c Number of atoms in the molecules = n Specific heats of each atom = p x c/n HgCl HgI HgCl HgI Thus the weight 200 of mercury, whether as an element or in its compounds, requires to heat it 1º the same quantity of heat as 127 of iodine, 80 of bromine, and almost certainly as 35.5 of chlorine and 1 of hydrogen, if it were possible to compare these two last substances in the same physical state as that in which the specific heats of the above named substances have been compared. But the atoms of hydrogen, iodine, and bromine are half their respective molecules: Thus it is natural to ask whether the weight 200 of mercury also corresponds to half a molecule of free mercury. It is sufficient to look at the table of numbers expressing the molecular weights to perceive that if 2 is the molecular weight of hydrogen, the weight of the molecule of mercury is 200, i.e., equal to the weight of the atom. In other words, one volume of vapor, whether of protochloride or protoiodide, whether of bichloride or of biniodide, contains an equal volume of mercury vapor; so that each molecule of these compounds contains an entire molecule of mercury, which, entering as a whole into all the molecules, is the atom of this substance. This is confirmed by observing that the complete molecule of mercury requires for heating it 1º, the same quantity of heat as half a molecule of iodine, or half a molecule of bromine. It appears to me, then, that I can sustain that what enters into chemical actions is the half molecule of hydrogen and the whole molecule of mercury: Both of these quantities are indivisible, at least in the sphere of chemical reactions currently known. You will perceive that with this last expression I avoid the question if it is possible to divide this quantity further. I do not fail to apprise you that all those who faithfully applied the theory of Avogadro and of Ampére have arrived at this same result. First, Dumas and afterwards Gaudin showed that the molecule of mercury, differing from that of hydrogen, always entered as a whole into compounds. On this account Gaudin called the molecule of mercury monatomic, and that of hydrogen biatomic. However, I wish to avoid the use of these adjectives in this special sense, because today they are employed, as you know, in a very different sense, that is, to indicate the different capacity for saturation of the radicals. 12 The formulae of the two chlorides of mercury having been demonstrated, I next compare them with that of hydrochloric acid. The atomic formulae indicate that the constitution of the protochloride is similar to that of hydrochloric acid, if we consider the number of atoms existing in the molecules of the two: If, however, we compare the quantities of the components with those that exist in their free molecules, then a difference is perceived. 12 [This use of terms was at the time being followed by Gerhardt, Dumas, and others using a system of types, which we will consider shortly.] 211

214 To make this evident I bring the atomic formulae of the various molecules under examination into comparison with the formulae made with the symbols expressing the weights of the entire molecules, placing them in the manner that you see below: Symbols of the Molecules of the elements and formulae of their compounds made with these symbols, i.e., symbols and formulae representing the weights of equal volumes in the gaseous state Symbols of the Atoms of the elements, and formulae of their compounds made with these symbols Numbers expressing their corresponding weights Atom of Hydrogen H 1/2 H 1 Molecule of Hydrogen H H 2 2 Atom of Chlorine Cl 1/2 Cl 35.5 Molecule of Chlorine Cl Cl 2 71 Atom of Bromine Br 1/2 Br 80 Molecule of Bromine Br Br Atom of Iodine I 1/2 I 127 Molecule of Iodine I I Atom of Mercury Hg Hg 200 Molecule of Mercury Hg Hg 200 Molecule of Hydrochloric Acid Molecule of Hydrobromic Acid Molecule of Hydroiodic Acid Molecule of Protochloride of Mercury Molecule of Protobromide of Mercury Molecule of Protoiodide of Mercury H 1/2 Cl 1/2 HCl 36.5 H 1/2 Br 1/2 HBr 81 H 1/2 I 1/2 HI 128 HgCl 1/2 HgCl HgBr 1/2 HgBr 280 HgI 1/2 HgI

215 Symbols of the Molecules of the elements and formulae of their compounds made with these symbols, i.e., symbols and formulae representing the weights of equal volumes in the gaseous state Symbols of the Atoms of the elements, and formulae of their compounds made with these symbols Numbers expressing their corresponding weights Molecule of Bichloride of Mercury Molecule of Bibromide of Mercury Molecule of Biniodide of Mercury HgCl HgCl HgBr HgBr HgI HgI The comparison of these formulae confirms still more the preference that we must give to the atomic formulae, which indicate also clearly the relations between the gaseous bodies. It is sufficient to recall that whilst the atoms of chlorine, bromine, iodine, and hydrogen are represented by the weight of 1/2 volume, the atom of mercury is represented by the weight of a whole volume. 13 I then come to the examination of the two chlorides of copper. The analogy with those of mercury leads us to suppose that they have a similar atomic constitution, but we cannot verify this directly by determining and comparing the weights and the compositions of the molecules, as we do not know the vapor densities of these two compounds. The specific heats of free copper and of its compounds confirm the atomic constitution of the two chlorides of copper deduced from the analogy with those of mercury. Indeed, the composition of the two chlorides leads us to conclude that if they have the formulae CuCl, CuCl 2, the atomic weight of copper indicated by Cu is equal to 63, which may be seen from the following proportions: Ratio between the components expressed by numbers whose sum = 100 Ratio between the components expressed by atomic weights Protochloride of Copper Cl : Cu 35.5 Cl : 63 Cu Bichloride of Copper Cl : Cu 71 Cl : 63 Cu Now 63 multiplied by the specific heat of copper gives a product practically equal to that given by the atomic weight of iodine or of mercury into their respective specific heats. Thus: 63 x = 6 Atomic weight of copper Specific heat of copper 13 [It is worth noting that, by arguing that the molecule of mercury (and later, that of other metals) is the same as the atom of mercury, Cannizzaro is implicitly modifying Avogadro s hypothesis that all substances in the elastic state are diatomic.] 213

216 The same quantity of heat is required to heat the weight of 63 of copper in its compounds through 1º. Thus: Formulae of the compounds of copper Weights of their molecules = p Specific heats of unit weights = c Specific heats of the molecules = p x c Number of atoms in the molecules = n Specific heat of each atom = p x c/n CuCl CuI After this comes the question whether this quantity of copper that enters as a whole into the compounds, the calorific capacity of the atoms being maintained, is an entire molecule or a submultiple of it. The analogy of the compounds of copper with those of mercury would make us inclined to believe that the atom of copper is a complete molecule. But having no other proof to confirm this, I prefer to declare that there is no means of knowing the molecular weight of free copper until the vapor density of this substance can be determined. I then go on to examine the constitution of the chlorides, bromides, and iodides of potassium, sodium, lithium, and silver. Each of these metals makes with each of the halogens only one well characterized and definite compound; of none of these compounds is the vapor density known; we are therefore in want of the direct means of discovering whether in their molecules there are one, two, or more atoms of the halogens. But their analogies with the protochloride of mercury, HgCl, and with the protochloride of copper, CuCl, and the specific heats of the free metals and of their compounds make us assume that in the molecules of each of these compounds there is one atom of metal and one of halogen. According to this supposition, the atomic weight of potassium is K = 39, that of sodium Na = 23, that of silver Ag = 108. These numbers multiplied by the respective specific heats give the same product as the atomic weights of the substances previously examined: Name of Substance Atomic Weight = p Specific heats of unit weight = c Specific heats of the atoms = p x c Solid Bromine Iodine Solid Mercury Copper Potassium Sodium Silver Besides this, the specific heats of chlorides, bromides, and iodides of these metals confirm 214

217 the view that their molecules contain the same number of atoms of the two components. Thus: Formulae and names of the compounds KCl Chl. of Potassium NaCl Chl. of Sodium AgCl Chl. of Silver KBr Brom. of Pot. NaBr Brom. of Sodium AgBr Brom. of Silver KI Iod. of Potassium NaI Iod. of Sodium AgI Iodide of Silver Weights of their molecules = p Specific heats of unit weight = c Specific heats of the molecules = p x c Number of atoms in the molecules = n Specific heat of each molecule = p x c/n Are the atoms of potassium, sodium, lithium, and silver equal to ½ molecule, like that of hydrogen, or equal to a whole molecule, like that of mercury? As the vapor densities of these elements are wanting, we cannot answer the question directly; I will give you later some reasons that incline me to believe that the molecules of these elements, like that of hydrogen, are composed of two atoms. Gold makes with each of the halogens two compounds. I show that the first chloride is analogous to calomel, i.e., that it has AuCl as its formula. The atomic weight of gold deduced from the composition of the protochloride to which this formula is given corresponds to the law of specific heats, as may be seen from what follows: x = Au Specific heat of Gold I show in the sequel that the first or only chlorides of the following metals have a constitution similar to the bichloride of mercury and that of copper; that is, for each atom of metal they contain two atoms of chlorine. Not knowing the density in the gaseous state of these lower or only chlorides, we cannot 215

218 show directly the quantity of chlorine existing in their molecules, yet the specific heats of these free metals and of their compounds show what I have said above. I write the quantities of these different elements combined with the weight of two atoms of chloride in the lower or only chlorides, and confirm in these quantities the properties of the other atoms; I write the formulae of the lower chlorides, bromides, and iodides all as MCl 2, and verify that they correspond to the laws of specific heats of compound substances. Names of Substances Symbols and weights of the atoms Specific heats of unit weight Specific heats of the atoms Iodine I = Solid Mercury Hg = Copper Cu = Zinc Zn = Lead Pb = Iron Fe = Manganese Mn = Tin Sn = Platinum Pt = Calcium Ca = Magnesium Mg = 24 Barium Ba = 137 Formulae of the compounds Weights of their molecules = p Specific heats of unit weight = c Specific heats of the molecules = p x c Number of atoms in the molecules = n Specific heat of each atom = p x c / n HgCl ZnCl SnCl MnCl [The columns to the right of Ca, Mg and Ba are blank in the original. You recall that calcium and magnesium are very reactive, both readily oxidizing with minimal heating. Perhaps this complicates finding their specific heat capacities.] 216

219 Formulae of the compounds Weights of their molecules = p Specific heats of unit weight = c Specific heats of the molecules = p x c Number of atoms in the molecules = n Specific heat of each atom = p x c / n PbCl MgCl CaCl BaCl HgI PbI Some of the metals indicated above make other compounds with chlorine, bromine, and iodine, whose molecular weights may be determined and compositions compared; in such cases the values found for the atomic weights are confirmed. Thus, for example, a molecule of perchloride of tin weighs 259.6, and contains of tin (= Sn) and 142 of chlorine (= Cl 4 ). A molecule of perchloride of iron weighs 325, and contains 112 of iron (= Fe 2 ) and 213 of chlorine (= Cl 6 ). For zinc there are some volatile compounds that confirm the atomic weight fixed by me. Chemists, believing chloride of zinc to be the same type as hydrochloric acid, made the atom of zinc Zn = 33, that is, half of that adopted by me; having then prepared some compounds of zinc with the alcohol radicals, they were astonished that, expressing the composition by formulae corresponding to gaseous volumes equal to those of other well-known compounds, it was necessary to express the quantity of zinc contained in the molecule by Zn 2. This is a necessary consequence of the quantity of zinc represented by other chemists by Zn 2 being only a single atom, which is equivalent in its saturation capacity to two atoms of hydrogen. Since in the sequel of my lectures I return to this argument, you will therefore find it spoken of later in this abstract. Are the atoms of all these metals equal to their molecules or to a simple sub-multiple of them? I gave you the above reasons that make me think it probable that the molecules of these metals are similar to that of mercury; but I warn you now that I do not believe my reasons to be of such value as to lead to that certainty that their vapor densities would give us, if we only knew them. Reviewing what I show in the lecture of which I have given you an abstract, we find it amounts to the following: Not all the lower chlorides corresponding to the oxide with one atom of oxygen have the same constitution; some of them contain a single atom of chlorine, others two, as may be seen in the following list: HCl - Hydrochloric acid HgCl - Protochloride of Mercury CuCl - Protochloride of Copper HgCl 2 - Bichloride of Mercury CuCl 2 - Bichloride of Copper ZnCl 2 - Chloride of Zinc 217

220 KCl - Chloride of Potassium NaCl - Chloride of Sodium LiCl - Chloride of Lithium AgCl - Chloride of Silver AuCl - Protochloride of Gold PbCl 2 - Chloride of Lead CaCl 2 - Chloride of Calcium SnCl 2 - Protochloride of Tin PtCl 2 - Protochloride of Platinum Regnault, having determined the specific heats of the metals and of many of their compounds, had observed that it was necessary to modify the atomic weights attributed to them namely, to divide by 2 those of potassium, sodium, and silver, leaving the others unaltered; or, vice versa, to multiply these latter by 2, leaving unaltered those of potassium, sodium, silver, and hydrogen. From this he drew the conclusion that the chlorides of potassium, sodium, and silver, are analogous to calomel (protochloride of mercury) and to protochloride of copper; on the other hand, that those of zinc, lead, calcium, etc., are analogous to corrosive sublimate and to bichloride of copper; but he supposed that the molecules of calomel and of the analogous chlorides all contained 2 atoms of metal and 2 of chlorine, whilst the molecules of corrosive sublimate and the other analogous chlorides contained 1 atom of metal and 2 of chlorine. Here follows the list of the formulae proposed by Regnault. H 2 Cl 2 - Hydrochloric acid Hg 2 Cl 2 - Protochloride of Mercury Cu 2 Cl 2 - Protochloride of Copper K 2 Cl 2 - Chloride of Potassium Na 2 Cl 2 - Chloride of Sodium Li 2 Cl 2 - Chloride of Lithium Ag 2 Cl 2 - Chloride of Silver HgCl 2 - Bichloride of Mercury CuCl 2 - Bichloride of Copper ZnCl 2 - Chloride of Zinc PbCl 2 - Chloride of Lead CaCl 2 - Chloride of Calcium etc. etc. Au 2 Cl 2 - Protochloride of Gold In truth, using the data for specific heat alone, it is not possible to decide whether the molecules of the chlorides written in the first horizontal line are MCl or M 2 Cl 2 ; the only thing that can be said is that they contain the same number of atoms of metal and of chlorine. But knowing the densities in the gaseous state of hydrochloric acid and of the two chlorides of mercury, and thus the weights of their molecules, we can compare their composition and decide the question; and I have already explained to you how I show to my pupils that the molecules of the two chlorides of mercury contain the same weight of mercury, and that the molecule of one of them contains the same quantity of chlorine as hydrochloric acid, i.e., ½ molecule of free chlorine, whilst the molecule of the other chloride contains twice as much. This shows with 218

221 certainty that the two formulae Hg 2 Cl 2, HgCl 2, are inexact, because they indicate that in the molecules of the two chlorides there is the same quantity of chlorine and different quantities of mercury, which is precisely the opposite of what is shown by the vapor densities. The formulae proposed by me harmonize the results furnished by the specific heats and the gaseous densities. Now I wish to direct your attention to an inconsistency of Gerhardt. From the theory of Avogadro, Ampére, and Dumas, that is, from the comparison of the gaseous densities as representing the molecular weights, Gerhardt drew arguments in support of the view that the atoms of hydrogen, of chlorine, and of oxygen are half molecules; that the molecule of water contains twice as much hydrogen as of hydrochloric acid; that in the molecule of ether there is twice as much of the radical ethyl as in that of alcohol; and that to form one molecule of anhydrous monobasic acid two molecules of hydrated acid must come together and yet Gerhardt did not extend to the whole of chemistry the theory of Ampére, but arbitrarily, in opposition to its precepts, assumed that the molecules of chloride of potassium, of bichloride of mercury, in fact of all the chlorides corresponding to the protoxides, had the same atomic constitution as hydrochloric acid, and that the atoms of all the metals were, like that of hydrogen, a simple submultiple of the molecule. I have already explained to you the reasons that show the contrary. After having demonstrated the constitution of the chlorides corresponding to the oxides containing one atom of oxygen, I postpone the study of the other chlorides to another lecture, and now define what I mean by capacity for saturation of the various metallic radicals. If we compare the constitution of the two kinds of chlorides, we observe that one atom of metal is now combined with one atom of chlorine, now with two; I express this by saying that in the first case the atom of metal is equivalent to 1 of hydrogen, in the second case to 2. Thus, for example, the atom of mercury, as it is in calomel, is equivalent to 1 of hydrogen, whereas in corrosive sublimate it is equivalent to 2; the atoms of potassium, sodium, and silver are equivalent to 1 of hydrogen, the atoms of zinc, lead, magnesium, calcium, etc., to 2. Now it is seen from the study of all chemical actions that the number of atoms of the various substances that combine with one and the same quantity of chlorine combine also with one and the same quantity of oxygen, of sulfur, or of any other substance, and vice versa. Thus, for example, if the same quantity of chlorine that combines with a single atom of zinc, or lead, or calcium combines with 2 atoms of hydrogen, of potassium, or of sodium, then the same quantity of oxygen or of any other substance that combines with a single atom of the first will combine with two of the second. This shows that the property possessed by the first atoms of being equivalent to 2 of the second depends on some cause inherent either in their own nature or in the state in which they are placed before combining. We express this constant equivalence by saying that each atom of the first has a saturation capacity twice that of each of the second. These expressions are not new to science, and we now only extend them from compounds of the second order to those of the first order. For the same reasons given by chemists when they say that phosphoric acid assumes various saturation capacities without changing in composition, it may also be said that the atom of mercury and that of copper assume different saturation capacities according as they are found in the protochlorides or in the bichlorides. Thus, I express the fact that the atoms of these two metals, being equivalent to 1 atom of hydrogen in the protochlorides, tend, in double decompositions, to take the place of a single atom of hydrogen, whilst in the bichlorides they tend to take the place of 2 atoms of hydrogen. For the same reason that we say there are three 219

222 different modifications of phosphoric acid combined with various bases, we may also say that there are two different modifications of the same radical mercury or copper. I call the radicals of the protochlorides and of the corresponding salts, mercurous and cuprous ; those of the bichlorides and of the corresponding salts are called mercuric and cupric radicals. To express the various saturation capacities of the different radicals, I compare them to that of hydrogen or of the halogens, according as they are electro-positive or electro-negative. An atom of hydrogen is saturated by one of a halogen, and vice versa. I express this by saying that the first is a monatomic electro-positive radical and the second a monatomic electro-negative radical: Thus, potassium, sodium, lithium, silver, and the mercurous and cuprous radicals are monatomic electro-positive radicals. The biatomic radicals are those that, not being divisible, are equivalent to 2 of hydrogen or to 2 of chlorine; among the electro-positive radicals there are the metallic radicals of the mercuric and cupric salts, of the salts of zinc, lead, magnesium, calcium, et cetera, and amongst the electro-negative we have oxygen, sulfur, selenium, and tellurium, i.e., the amphidic substances. There are, besides, radicals that are equivalent to three or more atoms of hydrogen or of chlorine, but I postpone the study of these until later. Before finishing the lecture I take care to make clear that the law of equivalents must be considered as a law distinct from the law of atoms. The latter in fact only says that the quantities of the same element contained in different molecules must be integral multiples of one and the same quantity, but it does not predict, for example, that an atom of zinc is equivalent to 2 of hydrogen not only in its compounds with chlorine, but in all other compounds in which they may replace each other. These constant relations between the numbers of atoms of various substances that displace one another, whatever may be the nature and the number of the other components, is a law that restricts the number of possible combinations, and sums up with greater definiteness all the cases of double decomposition. Genoa, 12th March

223 Notes on the Reading 1. With the establishment of the ratios of numbers of atoms in the molecules of compounds, it became common to specify the number of atoms when naming a compound: e.g., manganese dioxide (MnO 2 ); sulfur trioxide (SO 3 ); carbon tetrachloride (CCl 4 ); phosphorus pentachloride (PCl 5 ); etc. If the atoms are present in the compound in 1:1 ratio, then no prefixes are used; e.g., sodium chloride (NaCl). Several radicals, such as the nitrate radical (NO 3 ), kept their names in compounds; e.g., potassium nitrate (KNO 3 ). The sulfate (SO 4 ), carbonate (CO 3 ), and phosphate (PO 4 ) radicals are other common radicals. None of these radicals exist independently; they are always combined with something else; e.g., sodium carbonate (Na 2 CO 3 ). 2. The atomic weights established by Cannizzaro s method are those still in use today (with some improvements in precision). When you need to select an atomic weight hereafter, read it off the table in the Appendix to Chapter IX, at the back of the Manual. You should now understand how these numbers may be determined. 3. Cannizzaro uses the term double decompositions. This term will also occur in subsequent readings. In Experiment 1 you were introduced to the four main classes of chemical reactions: Simple combination: A + B AB (Why not C?) Simple decomposition: AB A + B Single displacement: A + BC B + AC Double decomposition: AB + CD AD + BC (Also referred to as double displacement) Exercises with Cannizzaro s Method The empirical formula of a compound is one that specifies the correct ratio of atoms in a molecule of that compound in simple whole number ratios. A molecular formula is one that specifies the number of atoms of each element in a molecule of the compound; e.g., the empirical formula of hydrogen peroxide is HO, but the molecular formula is H 2 O 2. (This is the distinction underlying Cannizzaro s dispute with Regnault toward the end of the reading.) In determining the empirical formulas of compounds from weight (or percentage by weight) determinations, one must take into account the fact that atoms of different elements have different weights. If 100 g of water is found to contain 11 g of hydrogen and 89 g of oxygen, the formula of water is not HO 8, even though 11 divides 89 eight times. This would be true only if hydrogen and oxygen atoms had the same weight. To take into account the difference in atomic weights in the computation of an empirical formula, you might use the following procedure: Convert the experimental weights (or percentages by weight) into small weight units such that a hydrogen atom weighs one unit. For convenience, we can call these units atomic weight units (awu). Then divide by the atomic weights to get the ratio of atoms. Finally, simplify the ratio of atoms to a ratio of simple whole numbers by dividing by whichever number is smallest. This will yield either a simple whole number ratio, or a ratio that can be easily converted to a simple whole number ratio. Using the example of water, we first convert the 11 g of hydrogen to 11 awu of hydrogen and the 89 g of oxygen to 89 awu of oxygen. Then we divide by the atomic weights to get the ratio of atoms. Since 11 awu 1 = 11 and 89 awu 16 = 5.6, the ratio of atoms of hydrogen to atoms of oxygen is 11:5.6. To convert this ratio to simple whole numbers, divide both sides of the ratio by whatever number is smallest (i.e., 5.6), which leaves us with a simple whole number ratio of 2:1. Thus, the empirical formula is H 2 O. 1. In Experiment 1 you mixed 2.6 g of sulfur with 3.5 g of iron and heated it to produce a new substance. What is the probable empirical formula of the substance formed on heating? 2. It is found that 15.5 g of sodium oxide (Na 2 O) picks up 4.5 g of water to form a compound, sodium hydroxide. Write a probable empirical formula for this compound. 221

224 3. A 5.97 g sample of chloroform on analysis was found to contain 0.60 g of carbon, 0.05 g of hydrogen, and 5.32 g of chlorine. What is the probable empirical formula? 4. (a) A g sample of pure acetic acid was combusted in pure oxygen. The only substances produced, and their quantities, were carbon dioxide, g, and water, g. What elements were present in the acetic acid? What is the most probable empirical formula for acetic acid? (b) It was found that, when vaporized, 0.52 g of acetic acid occupied ml (at 0 C and a pressure of 760 mm of mercury). Given your conclusions in (a), what is the most probable molecular formula of acetic acid? The density of pure oxygen gas at 0 C and 760 mm pressure is g/l. (If it were later found that the volume of the same weight of acid was really 194 ml, how would this change your molecular formula?) 5. Platinum forms two chlorides, one of which contains 26.7% by weight Cl and the other 42.1% Cl. What are the empirical formulas for the two substances? 6. Using his molecular formulas, and the electro-chemical theory of Berzelius, Cannizzaro categorizes the atomic radicals as equivalent to a certain number of hydrogen atoms (if electro-negative) or chlorine atoms (if electro-positive). The radicals that Cannizzaro mentions explicitly are already included in the following table. Using the molecular formulas contained in the Cannizzaro reading, write in the following atomic radicals in the appropriate column: Bromine, Carbon, Nitrogen, Arsenic, Silicon, Iodine, Boron, Titanium, Aluminum, Phosphorus, Zirconium, Tin. Electro-Negative Radicals Electro-Positive Radicals =1H =2H =3H =4H or 4Cl =3Cl =2Cl =1Cl Hydrogen Magnesium Oxygen Chlorine Lithium Calcium Sulfur Sodium Zinc Selenium Potassium Lead Tellurium Silver Copper Mercury Copper Mercury 222

225 Dmitri Mendeleev On the 1860 Congress at Karlsruhe [The following letter was published in the St. Petersburg Gazette, No. 280 (1860). It was written to Professor A. A. Voskresenski of the University of St. Petersburg, Mendeleev s former teacher.] The chemical Congress just ended in Karlsruhe produced such a remarkable effect on the history of our science that I consider it a duty, even in a few words, to describe all the sittings of the Congress and the results that it reached. The essential reason for calling an international chemical congress was the wish to clarify and, if possible, agree on the basic difference that exists between the followers of different chemical schools. At first, Kekulé proposed to settle many questions: the question of the difference of molecules, atoms, and equivalents; the question of the size of the atomic weights; i.e., whether the particle of Gerhardt or the particle of Berzelius as changed by Liebig and Poggendorf, and now used by most men, should be accepted; further, the question of formulas; and finally, reasons for chemical effects. But at the first sitting, September 3rd, the meeting found it impossible in such a short time to clarify such a great number of questions, and so resolved to settle only the first two. There was chosen a commission of thirty members for the preliminary treatment of these two questions. S. Cannizzaro was finally also on it, whose animated speech, in justice, was met by general approval. In the second session of the Congress, September 4th, the commission reported the resolution it had worked out, of this content: It is decided to take a different understanding of molecules and atoms, considering as a molecule the amount of substance entering a reaction and determining physical properties, and considering as an atom the smallest amount of a substance included in a molecule. Further it reached an understanding about equivalents, considered as empirical, not depending on the understanding about atoms and molecules. On a vote on this resolution, most raised their hands. Who was against it? Timidly one hand was raised and then lowered. The result was unexpectedly unanimous and important. Understanding the difference between atoms and molecules, chemists of all countries understood the principle of the unitary system. Now when the principle is understood, the consequences will not admit of great inconsistencies. The third session, September 5th, was devoted to the questions of atomic weights, chiefly carbon: whether to accept the new weight of 12 or remain with the former one of 6, until then used by almost everyone. After a long debate, at its last session, September 6th, J. Dumas made a brilliant speech proposing to use the new atomic weight only in organic chemistry, leaving the old one for inorganic. Against this Cannizzaro spoke heatedly, showing that all should use the same atomic weight. There was no vote on this question, but the great majority took the side of Cannizzaro. To this I add the remark that in all the debates there was not one unfriendly word between both parties. All this, it seems to me, is full guarantee of the rapid success of the new ideas in the future. Half the chemists have already resolved not to vote against the ideas. D. Mendeleev, Heidelberg, September 7,

226 224

227 CHAPTER VIII: Structural Formulas and Valence Introduction: Gerhardt s System of Types. In the essay that will follow this section, Archibald Couper criticizes both Charles Gerhardt s system of types (also called the unitary system ) and his method of approaching the problem of chemical formulas (then called rational formulas ). To help you to understand better what Couper is criticizing, the following selections from Gerhardt s writings are presented: 1 Chemical formulas do not represent, and cannot represent, anything beyond relations and analogies; the best are those that make evident the greatest number of such relations and analogies... [I]t is their object to indicate in the simplest and most exact manner possible the relations between various substances and the chemical changes occurring on their interaction. To represent a substance by rational formula is to embody by means of conventional signs a number of reactions in which this substance participates. 2 We will take acetic acid as an example of the above. Its molecular formula is C 2 H 4 O 2, as you may have determined in a problem in the previous chapter. Some important reactions of acetic acid are listed below: (i) The acid with some metals, or metallic hydroxides, gives a salt formed by the metal displacing one-fourth the hydrogen in the acid: 2C 2 H 4 O 2 + Mg = (C 2 H 3 O 2 ) 2 Mg + H 2 C 2 H 4 O 2 + NaOH = (C 2 H 3 O 2 )Na + H 2 O (ii) The action of phosphorous pentachloride on acetic acid results in one atom of chlorine replacing both an atom of oxygen and an atom of hydrogen (i.e., an hydroxyl group): 5C 2 H 4 O 2 + PCl 5 = 5C 2 H 3 O Cl + H 3 PO 4 + H 2 O (iii) Heating a mixture of the sodium salt and the sodium hydroxide gives sodium carbonate and the hydrocarbon methane (a gas): C 2 H 3 O 2 Na + NaOH = Na 2 CO 3 + CH 4 (iv) The products of an electrolysis of acetic acid are carbon dioxide, hydrogen, and ethane: 2C 2 H 4 O 2 = 2CO 2 + H 2 + C 2 H 6 1 Much of the commentary that follows is taken from Ida Freund, The Study of Chemical Composition: An Account of its Method and Development (Dover, 1968), pp Charles Gerhardt, Traité de chimie organique, volume 4 (Paris, 1856), pp. 563 et seq. 225

228 These reactions find their representation in the formulas: (i) C 2 H 3 O 2 H, (ii) C 2 H 3 O OH, (iii) CH 4 CO 2, (iv) CH 3 CO 2 H. Gerhardt continues: Is a rational formula permanently binding, or in other words, can a substance have one rational formula only? A combination of two or three simple atoms, such as HCl or K 2 S, cannot be decomposed in more ways than one, but if the number of atoms in the molecule is greater, it is evident that the double decompositions that the molecule can undergo can be various. This is especially true of organic substances. 3 August Kekulé, at that time a disciple of Gerhardt, further explained: The rational formulas are decomposition formulas, and in the present state of the science they can be nothing else; they aim at giving a representation of the chemical nature of a substance by a notation that indicates the atomic groups that remain unattacked in a series of reactions (i.e., the radicals), or by emphasizing the components that, in certain often recurring changes, play an important part (i.e., types). Any formula that represents certain changes is rational, but amongst different such formulas, that one is most rational that simultaneously represents the greatest number of changes... The formula showing the greatest amount of resolution into its component parts will most completely represent the nature of the substance to which it belongs. 4 According to these views any one of the formulas given above for acetic acid has its legitimacy, but that which represents it by CH 3 C O H is the best, because it is consistent with the greatest number of reactions in fact, all four reactions above. The formulas recognize the presence within the molecule of certain definite compound residues, or radicals that is, an element or a group of elements that during a whole series of chemical reactions remain together. However, Gerhardt specifies his understanding of radicals by saying that unlike the majority of chemists, I look upon radicals in a sense of relation, and not in that of substances which are isolated or can be isolated. 5 These radicals were found to be endowed with a definite and characteristic substituting and combining power, which Gerhardt characterized in terms of a type or typical substance. Thus he describes this to be the principal work of the chemist: To arrange organic compounds in series, that is, to determine the laws according to which the properties in a given type are modified by substitution of an element or group of elements for other elements, this is the constant purpose of the chemist philosopher. These thousands of compounds which he produces in his laboratory are for him, however, the terms which serve him to construct his series. Today, in the imperfect state of the science, there is still need for many terms; but later, knowledge of certain series 3 Ibid. 4 Friedrich August Kekulé, Liebig s Ann. Chem., vol. 6 (1858), p Gerhardt, Traité de chimie organique, p

229 will eliminate direct study of many other terms whose properties he will be able to predict with the same certainty as he predicts today the properties of propionic or valeric alcohols, even though he has not yet obtained these alcohols. In the state of the science, organic compounds can be related to three or four types, each capable of giving series which resemble those represented by formic and stearic acids, potash, and sulfuric acids. 6 Elsewhere Gerhardt gives the following examples: In order to compare the radicals amongst themselves, I propose to refer them all to the radical of hydrogen, and consequently I named them monatomic, diatomic, triatomic according to the quantity of hydrogen that they are capable of replacing in the type H 2 O; i.e., according as to whether they are equivalent to 1, 2, or 3 atoms of hydrogen, so for instance in [ethyl] alcohol and in ether: C 2 H 5 C 2 H 5 O O H C 2 H 5 C 2 H 5, the ethyl radical, is monatomic because it replaces H (one atom of hydrogen) in the type water. In anhydrous or hydrated sulfuric acid: SO 2 O SO 2 O 2 H 2 SO 2, the radical sulfuryl, is diatomic because it replaces H 2 (two atoms of hydrogen) in the type water... But since one and the same substance can be represented by two or more different rational formulas according to the special double decomposition that it is intended to indicate, it is evident that a substance can also be formulated in terms of different radicals. So nitric acid can be depicted by the three formulas: NO 2 NO N O O 2 O 3 H H H in which the radicals NO 2, NO, and N have different equivalents. NO 2 is the equivalent for H, NO is the equivalent of H 3, and N is the equivalent of H 5, because these three radicals must be replaced by different quantities of hydrogen in order to form water, thus: 7 6 Gerhardt, Ann. Chim. Phys., vol. 37 (1853), p Gerhardt, Traité, p

230 H H 3 H 5 O O 2 O 3 H H H Gerhardt further explains his system by saying: In deriving a body from the water type I intend to express that to this body, considered as an oxide, there correspond a chloride, a bromide, a sulfide, a nitride, etc., susceptible of double decompositions, or resulting from double decompositions, analogous to those presented by hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, sulfuretted hydrogen, ammonia, etc., or which give rise to the same compounds. The type is thus the unit of comparison for all the bodies which, like it, are susceptible of similar changes or result from similar changes. 8 Gerhardt used three other types besides that of water, and related all organic compounds to these inorganic types: water (H 2 O), hydrogen (H 2 ), hydrogen chloride (HCl), and ammonia (NH 3 ). He summarizes the other three types as follows: The hydrogen type can undergo the same substitutions as the water type and produce as many combinations. The compounds resembling marsh gas, 9 known as hydrides, are evidently related to hydrogen as alcohols are to water; the ethyl and methyl radicals correspond to the ethers of these alcohols. Aldehydes are to hydrogen as monobasic acids are to water; acetyl, benzoyl, and other oxygenated radicals correspond to acid anhydrides; the acetones, finally, as Mr. Chancel has already remarked, represent the esters of the aldehydes and consequently are to hydrogen as the esters of monobasic acids are to water. The hydrochloric acid type gives rise, on the one hand, to hydrochloric ethers, that is, to chlorides resembling chloride of potassium or chlorides of electropositive elements, when the substitution is effected by hydrocarbon groups; and, on the other hand, to electronegative chlorides corresponding to monobasic acids, like acetyl chloride or benzoyl chloride, when the same substitution is effected by groups contained in these monobasic acids. Finally, the ammonia type produces alkalis able to combine with acids, or amides able to combine with bases (oxide of silver, mercury, copper, etc.), according to whether the substitution on the hydrogens of the ammonia is effected by groups which give rise to bases (alcohols, organic oxides), or by groups which produce organic acids. The bodies resembling the hydrate of oxide of ammonia are represented at the other end of the series 8 Gerhadt, Ibid., p Now referred to as methane (CH 4 ). 228

231 by acid amides. It can be seen by this rapid summary how the application of the notion of series permits simplification of the general theory of organic compounds. They no longer terrify by their number and variety, for, instead of being formulated by special theories which lack any connection, as they are called ethers, amides, alkalis, or acids, they become simply terms whose properties can be predicted according to the place they occupy in the series. And what certainly adds to the advantage of such a system is the similarity of method of formation or decomposition which it expresses for all the bodies which it contains. Experiment shows, in fact, that organic compounds are almost all the result of double decompositions resembling those which we effect in mineral chemistry. 10 Thereby Gerhardt could represent most organic reactions as double decompositions, and by exchanging their hydrogens among certain groups, these types give rise to acids, to alcohols, to ethers, to hydrides, to radicals, to organic chlorides, to acetones, and to alkalis. 11 Unknown compounds could be predicted in large numbers by this scheme of classification. 12 When discussing the subject of formulas, Gerhardt repeatedly says: It is so prevalent an error to suppose the possibility of representing molecular constitution by means of chemical formulas, or in other words by the actual arrangement of the atoms, that I may find it impossible to persuade certain of my readers to the contrary... Chemical formulas are not intended to represent the arrangement of atoms. 13 It is fair to assume from his manner of writing that Gerhardt did not even contemplate a future possibility of such a representation. Couper had this very object for his aim. * * * * * 10 Gerhardt, Ann. Chim. Phys., vol. 37 (1853), pp Ibid. 12 See Gerhardt s tables in Traité de chimie organique, pp Gerhardt, Ibid., p

232 Archibald S. Couper On A New Chemical Theory 1 [Archibald Couper pioneered the idea of deducing structural formulas from the properties of the elements, but his research did not benefit from the work of Cannizzaro who helped to determine atomic weights and molecular formulas with greater accuracy. Couper, for example, treats each oxygen atom as a pair of oxygen atoms because he takes the atomic weight of oxygen to be 8, rather than 16. Consequently, the number of oxygen atoms in his molecular formulas should be halved. Similarly, in the first half of his essay he treats each carbon atom as a pair of carbon atoms because he takes the atomic weight of carbon to be 6, rather than 12. For the sake of the reader, the corrected molecular formulas have been added to the text in square brackets immediately following Couper s molecular formulas. To simplify his structural formulas, Couper does not draw all of the valence bonds between individual atoms, but frequently abbreviates. For example, he often draws a single dotted line from C to H 3, although he argues that each hydrogen atom bonds separately to carbon. To aid the reader, structural formulas with all of the bonds drawn in have been added to the text in square brackets following Couper s structural formulas. In some cases this requires drawing double bonds to satisfy the valence requirements. For example, since oxygen always has a valence of two, we draw two bonds between the carbon and the oxygen atom in the structural formula of carbon monoxide: C=O. Following the modern convention, the structural formulas in square brackets use solid lines to represent the chemical bonds that join one atom to another. It is worth noting that the French version of Couper s essay uses solid lines rather than the dotted lines found in the original English version. In some cases Couper uses outdated chemical symbols: Ka for calcium, Az for nitrogen, and Ph for phosphorus. The molecular and structural formulas in square brackets use the modern symbols: Ca for calcium, N for nitrogen, and P for phosphorus. The passages contained in curly brackets { } were included in the French version of this paper, but not in the original English version.] The end of chemistry is its theory. The guide in chemical research is a theory. It is therefore of the greatest importance to ascertain whether the theories at present adopted by chemists are adequate to the explanation of chemical phenomena, or are, at least, based upon the true principles that ought to regulate scientific research. Among those which have lately been developed, there is one, on account of its apparently numerous merits, which particularly claims investigation, and respecting which we deem that it would not be unprofitable were either new proofs of its scientific value furnished, or, on the contrary, should considerations be adduced establishing not only its inadequacy to the explanation, but its ultimate detriment to the progress of science. I allude to the system of types as advocated by Gerhardt. This system, striking alike for the breadth of its conception, and the logical and consequent manner in which it has been developed, has been controverted from the point of view afforded by theories less far-reaching than the one under consideration, and even based upon a one-sided and restricted appreciation of certain chemical reactions. The 1 [From Phil. Mag. (4) 16 (1858), pp ] 230

233 consequence is that this opposition has not impaired the favor with which the unitary system has been received, but has rather tended to display it in a more advantageous light. Imposing as this theory is, it is nevertheless all the more necessary to submit it to a strict investigation; for there is nothing so prejudicial in the search for truth as the blind spirit of conservation. A rational belief demands the test of a preliminary doubt. There are two conditions that every sound theory must fulfill: 1. It must be proved to be empirically true. 2. It must be no less philosophically true. I admit that this theory is for the most part empirically true, that is to say, it is not contradicted by many of the facts of the science. Evidence that this condition is only partially fulfilled is to be found: 1. In the circumstance that the peroxides, for instance, do not fit very satisfactorily into the types The principle of double decomposition cannot well be applied to the conversion of the anhydrous sulphuric acid into the hydrate of that acid by the action of one equivalent of water, the formulae of these bodies being, according to Gerhardt, in their free state O SO 2 [SO 3 ] and H 2 O. Combined, they become simply SH 2 O 4 [H 2 SO 4 ] The same remark applies in like manner to carbonic acid. In these instances the wonted consequence of Gerhardt is missed. The fact of the density of the vapor of these bodies being the same in the free as in the combined states may have prevented him from doubling the formulae of these anhydrous acids. The types of this theory being essentially types of double decomposition, this instance of simple combination diminishes somewhat the value of the otherwise great logical merit of this system. Having taken notice of such exceptions, the empirical truth of the theory may be otherwise admitted. {It remains to examine whether it fulfills the no less important condition that it is not found to be in disagreement with philosophical principles.} The philosophical test demands that a theory be competent to explain the greatest number of facts in the simplest possible manner. In applying this test, three aspects of it require to be taken into consideration: 1. As to the extension of the theory. 2. The explanation it affords of the facts. 3. The manner of this explanation. As to the first: This theory indeed brings every chemical combinate under a certain comparative point of view with every other. Herein apparently is its merit. Nevertheless, should our test be applied to its full extent, it will be found that it is fatal to this system, in other respects so imposing. The comparative point of view that it adopts is fundamentally false. As to the second: It does not explain the facts at all; consequently the most essential point of the test is unfulfilled. As to the third: This condition of the test is in like manner unfulfilled, from the fact of the second not being complied with. 2 [Consider hydrogen peroxide (H 2 O 2 ); could it be thought of as a member of the water type?] 231

234 Why is it that Gerhardt s theory so signally fails in these two essential requisites? Because it is based upon an old but vicious principle that has already retarded science for centuries. It begins with a generalization, and from this generalization deduces all the particular instances. But it does not come within the limits of a chemical paper to enter upon a discussion that is purely metaphysical. Nevertheless, the theory of Gerhardt can only be combated upon metaphysical grounds, because it is only in overturning a general principle of research that the theory can be proposed. Gerhardt s generalization lacks, moreover, the merit of being represented by a type having a known existence., from which he derives every chemical combinate, being in itself indefinite, cannot of course be contained or be produced in any definite body. That, however, which may be demanded of this type is that in itself it should afford at least an instance of that which it is meant to represent. Now the part n of the type represents the notion of indefinite multiples of. But not a single instance of a multiple of has been proved to exist; much less has it been proved that there exists, or can exist, multiples of this body in an indefinite series. 3 The perfection or imperfection of the type meant to represent the generalized notion is, however, a matter of comparatively inferior moment. It is the principle involved in this generalization which is essentially pernicious. Should the principle that is therein adopted be applied to the common events of life, it will be found that it is simply absurd. Suppose that someone were to systematize the formation of letters into words that formed the contents of a book. Were he to begin by saying that he had discovered a certain word which would serve as a type, and from which by substitution and double decomposition all the others are to be derived, that he by this means not only could form new words, but new books, and books almost ad infinitum, that the word also formed an admirable point of comparison with all the others, that in all this there were only a few difficulties, but that these might be ingeniously overcome, he would state certainly an empirical truth. At the same time, however, his method would, judged by the light of common sense, be an absurdity. But a principle which common sense brands with absurdity is philosophically false and a scientific blunder. Suppose the book that had formed the basis of this system were a German one, where all the words were found to be composed at least of two letters, still even in this language the viewing and systematizing of words as a series of double decompositions would be no less ridiculous. The sure and invincible method of arriving at every truth that the mind is capable of discovering is always one and the same. It is that, namely, of throwing away all generalization, of going back to first principles, and of letting the mind be guided by these alone. It is the same in common matters. It is the same in science. To reach the structure of words we must go back, seek out the undecomposable elements, viz. the letters, and study carefully their powers and bearing. Having ascertained these, the composition and structure of every possible word is revealed. It would be well to call to 3 [Consider, for example, how hydrated sulfuric acid and nitric acid are members of the type water on p For the former n = 2, for the latter (in one formula) n = 3.] 232

235 recollection the parallelism of chemical research with that of every other search after truth; for it has been in overlooking this that in chemistry false and vacillating theories have been advocated and a wrong route so often pursued. In mathematics the startingpoint is not generalizations, but axioms, ultimate principles. In metaphysics Descartes led the way of progress by analyzing till he thought he could reach some ultimate elements beyond which it was impossible for him to go, then studying their force and power, and proceeding synthetically. The recognition of this method wrought the regeneration of science and philosophy. On the other hand, look where Gerhardt s generalization of Williamson s generalization 4 leads him, and legitimately too a fact which his logical spirit clearly discerned. He is led not to explain bodies according to their composition and inherent properties, but to think it necessary to restrict chemical science to the arrangement of bodies according to their decomposition, and to deny the possibility of our comprehending their molecular constitution. Can such a view tend to the advancement of science? Would it not be only rational, in accepting this veto, to renounce chemical research altogether? These reflections naturally lead to the inquiry after another theory more adequate to satisfy the just demands that can be made upon it. There is one which, as it is still supported by many distinguished chemists, cannot be passed over altogether unnoticed. It is that of the theory of certain combinates in organic chemistry 5 which are to be viewed as analogous to, playing the part of, inorganic elements. These are denominated radicals, and are supposed to be contained in all organic chemical products. In addition to this, and also in connection with it, there is a doctrine describing many combinates to be copulated, conjugated, by addition. It is impossible here to enter upon any extensive criticism of this theory. I can only remark that it is not merely an unprofitable figure of language, but is injurious to science, inasmuch as it tends to arrest scientific inquiry by adopting the notion that these quasi elements contain some unknown and ultimate power which it is impossible to explain. It stifles inquiry at the very point where an explanation is demanded, by putting the seal of elements, of ultimate powers, on bodies that are known to be anything but this. Science demands the strict adherence to a principle in direct contradiction to this view. That first principle, without which research cannot advance a step, dare not be ignored; namely, that a whole is simply a derivative of its parts. As a consequence of this, it follows that it is absolutely necessary to scientific unity and research to consider these bodies as entirely derivative, and as containing no secret ultimate power whatever, and that the properties which these so-called quasi elements possess are a direct consequence of the properties of the individual elements of which they are made up. Nor is the doctrine of bodies being conjugated by addition a whit in advance of that which I have just been considering. This doctrine adopts the simple expedient of 4 [A. W. Williamson first proposed the idea of a water type in 1846; Gerhardt developed the notion and added to it the three other types.] 5 [Organic combinates are those compounds or compound radicals that are produced by living things, including materials obtained from deposits formed by once-living things, e.g., coal and petroleum. The great majority of these compounds contain at least carbon and hydrogen.] 233

236 dividing certain combinates, if possible, into two imaginary parts, of which one or both are bodies already known. Then it tells us that these two parts are found united in this body. But how they are united, or what force binds them together, it does not inquire. Is this explanation arbitrary? Is it instructive? Is it science? I may now be permitted to submit a few considerations relative to a more rational theory of chemical combination. As everything depends upon the method of research employed, it will in the first place be necessary to find one that may be relied upon. If the method is good and conscientiously carried out, stable and satisfactory results may be expected. If, on the contrary, it is vicious, we can only expect a corresponding issue. A satisfactory method is, however, not difficult to find, nor is it difficult in its application. The principle that ought to guide all research is in every case the same. It is that of analyzing till it is impossible to reach more simple elements, and of studying these elements in all their properties and powers. When all the properties and powers of the individual elements are known, then it will be possible to know the constitution of the combinates that their synthesis produces. It is necessary therefore in chemical research, in order to ascertain the various qualities and functions of the different elements: 1. To consider the whole of chemistry as one. 2. To take into consideration every known combinate, and to study the character, functions, and properties displayed by each element for itself, in each of these combinates, in all their different conditions and aspects. It is by a comparison of the different bodies among themselves that we are able to trace the part that is performed by each element separately. 3. To trace the general principles common to all the elements, noting the special properties of each. This method is essentially different from that where one class of bodies is chosen as a point for the restriction of our views of the properties of the others where only the qualities found in the first are to be measured out to the rest. I shall now proceed to inquire how its more thorough application tends to the development of a rational chemical theory. It has been found that there is one leading feature, one inherent property, common to all the elements. It has been denominated chemical affinity. It is discovered under two aspects: (1) affinity of kind; (2) affinity of degree. Affinity of kind is the special affinities manifested among the elements, the one for the other, &c., as carbon for oxygen, for chlorine, for hydrogen, &c. Affinity of degree 6 is the grades, or also limits of combination, which the elements display. For instance, C 2 O 2 [CO] and C 2 O 4 [CO 2 ] are the degrees of affinity of carbon for oxygen. 7 C 2 O 2 may be called the first degree, and C 2 O 4 may be termed the second degree, and, as a higher degree than this is not known for carbon, its ultimate 6 [Compare what Cannizzaro called capacity for saturation. ] 7 [The molecular formulas C 2 O 2 and C 2 O 4 are the molecular formulas for what modern chemists call carbon monoxide (CO) and carbon dioxide (CO 2 ), or the early chemists called carbonic oxide gas and carbonic acid gas respectively.] 234

237 affinity or combining limit. 8 Affinity of degree in an element may have only one grade. It may have, however, and generally has, more than one. Here then is an inherent property common to all elements, by the removal of which the chemical character of an element will be destroyed, and by virtue of which an element finds its place marked out in a complex body. It is such a property that is required to form the base of a system. Nor would its suitableness for this purpose be affected by the discovery that the elements are themselves composite bodies, which view the chemist is perhaps not unwarranted to adopt. 9 For in such a case the necessity would doubtless still be found to exist of adopting the principle of affinity, or something at least equivalent to it, as the basis of the explanation of chemical combinates. {At the moment, however, it is impossible to go back to simpler elements. It is necessary therefore in the meantime to start from the ascertained affinities and properties amongst the elements in order to arrive at the theory of their combinates.} In applying this method, I propose at present to consider the single element carbon. This body is found to have two highly distinguishing characteristics: 1. It combines with equal numbers of hydrogen, chlorine, oxygen, sulfur, &c. 2. It enters into chemical union with itself. These two properties, in my opinion, explain all that is characteristic of organic chemistry. This will be rendered apparent as I advance. This secondary property is, so far as I am aware, here signalized for the first time. Evidence as to its being a property of carbon may therefore be required. It will be found in the following: What is the link that binds together bodies composed of 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, &c., equivalents of carbon, and as many equivalents of hydrogen, oxygen, &c.? In these you may remove perhaps all the hydrogen or oxygen, and substitute so many equivalents of chlorine, &c. It is then the carbon that is united to carbon. Further, that it is not the hydrogen that is the binding element in these combinates is evident; thus: Here the whole four of hydrogen are not bound by a mutual affinity; for each element of hydrogen can be substituted for one of chlorine in regular series, beginning with the first and ending with the last. The atoms of oxygen are, on the contrary, united in pairs (which will be more fully developed hereafter), and only for two atoms of oxygen two of chlorine can be substituted; thus: 8 [What Couper here calls ultimate affinity or combining limit, and will later in this paper call combining power, and combining energy, is now also commonly called valence, or quantivalence. What he will shortly call free affinities are now commonly called open valences. ] 9 [Although we will not pursue the subject at length in this course, Couper asks an interesting question. Based on what we have seen this semester, is there any evidence that the so-called atoms are composite? Consider the multiple saturation capacities, or degrees of affinity, of some atoms, and even the problems with Berzelius s electro-chemical theory, given Avogadro s diatomic elemental molecules.] 235

238 In the same manner with bodies that contain multiples of C 2 [C] united to hydrogen, &c. Take the inverse of this. If the four atoms of hydrogen were bound together, we could evidently expect to form such bodies as: or for bodies like C 4 H 4, C 6 H 6, C 8 H 8, one would naturally expect to find the carbon substituted for chlorine, and find bodies like, H 6 Cl 6, H 8 Cl 8, &c. These bodies are not only unknown, but the whole history of hydrogen might be investigated and not a single instance be found to favor the opinion that it has any affinity for itself when in union with another element. Now, on the other hand, carbon remains chemically united to carbon, while perhaps 8 equivalents of hydrogen are exchanged for 8 equivalents of chlorine, as in naphthaline. Analogous to this is the conversion of [ethyl] alcohol,, and the hydrocarbide C 4 H 6 [C 2 H 6 ], into C 4 Cl 6 [C 2 Cl 6 ]. All the countless instances of substitution of chlorine, &c., tend in the same direction. They prove beyond doubt that carbon enters into chemical union with carbon, and that in the most stable manner. This affinity, one of the strongest that carbon displays, is perhaps only inferior to that which it possesses for oxygen. Another feature in the affinity of carbon is that it combines by degrees of two: thus, C 2 O 2 [CO] and C 2 O 4 [CO 2 ], C 4 H 4 [C 2 H 4 ] and C 4 H 6 [C 2 H 6 ], C 6 H 6 [C 3 H 6 ] and C 6 H 8 [C 3 H 8 ], C 8 H 8 [C 4 H 8 ] and C 8 H 10 [C 4 H 10 ], &c.; from these last it is especially evident that two is the combining grade of carbon. It becomes still more apparent when we compare the bodies C 4 H 4 [C 2 H 4 ] and C 4 H 5 Cl [C 2 H 5 Cl], that is, &c. Many such proofs might be added, while on the other hand there are no instances contradictory of this point. Hence the circumstance that it must ever remain impossible to isolate a combinate of the form C 2 H 3 [CH 3 ] or C 4 H 5 [C 2 H 5 ], &c. Carbon having only two grades of combination of two atoms each, a fact which is easily traced throughout all organic chemistry, this inherent property of the element may legitimately furnish two grand types for all its combinates: The first type will be nc 2 M 4 [ncm 4 ] [As an example of the first type, consider carbon dioxide C 2 O 4 [CO 2 ] where the application of the general formula becomes 1C 2 M 4 [1CM 4 ] = M 4 and the structural formula with all the valence bonds drawn in is O 2 =C 2 =O 2 [O=C=O]. Here the combining power of carbon is 4.] 236

239 The second type will be nc 2 M 4 mm [ncm 4 mm]. 11 As examples belonging to the first type, may be mentioned the alcohols of the aethylic form, their ethers, the fatty acids, &c. Thus methylic alcohol 12 has the form, and aethylic alcohol,. In these instances it will be observed that for each double atom of carbon the combining power is (4) four, which is the ultimate limit of combination for carbon in all bodies yet produced. In the latter instance it is apparent, inasmuch as if the combining limit of two C 2 s [Cs] be each reduced by 3 in hydrogen or oxygen, there still remains a combining power of one to each of the two C 2 s [Cs] which each expends in uniting with the other; therefore, or what is the same thing, belongs to the type nc 2 M 4 [ncm 4 ]. Again, the inherent properties of the elements may be viewed as dividing bodies into primary, secondary, tertiary, and so on, combinates. 13 These may be termed so many orders of complicity. Thus C 4 H 6 [C 2 H 6 ] is a primary combinate, or it belongs to the first order of complicity; but is a secondary combinate, 14 or belongs to the second order of complicity. C 2 O 2 [CO] and C 2 O 4 [CO 2 ] are primary, while C 2 O 4,2OH [HCO 3 ] and C 2 O 4,2OKa [CaCO 3 ] are secondary. A primary combinate is then nc 2 [nc] united to nm 4 or to nm4 mm2 in such a manner that the combining energy of the complement (nm 4, &c.) either potentially or actually does not extend beyond nc [As an example of the second type, consider carbon monoxide C 2 O 2 [CO] where the application of the general formula becomes 1C 2 M 4-1M 2 [1CM 4-1M 2 ] = M 2 and the structural formula with all the valence bonds drawn in is C 2 =O 2 [C=O]. Here the combining power of carbon is 2.] 12 [Now usually contracted as methanol. Likewise aethylic alcohol is now contracted as ethanol. They are sometimes referred to, respectively, as wood alcohol and grain alcohol, given how they were often produced through distillation of wood and grain. Methyl and ethyl come from combinations of [methy], wine, [aither], ether, and [hyle], matter, because they were thought to be radicals present in wine and ether, respectively.] 13 [Primary and secondary combinates should not be confused with the two types of carbon combinates.] 14 [Couper s C 4 H 6 O 2 is an instance of a secondary combinate because, as his structural formula indicates, the combining energy of the complement O is not all expended upon C 2 but is extended to H.] 237

240 A secondary combinate is one in which the combining energy of the complement is not all expended upon nc 2, but is extended further to one or more of the elements. On the same principle there are tertiary combinates, &c. These orders of complicity ought in reality to be subdivided. This, however, I do not think it necessary for the present to enter upon. It will now be understood why an alcohol belongs to the type nc 2 M 4, and on the same principle why a free aether belongs to the same type, thus: while they are at the same time secondary combinates. A secondary combinate, that is to say, a body belonging to the second order of complicity, is, as will be understood from the principle which forms the ground of the rational theory, a direct consequence of an inherent property of one or more of the elements which form the complement to the carbon. In the instance before us it is a certain property of the oxygen that is the cause of the secondary combinate. This property is the affinity which one atom of oxygen in combination always exerts towards another atom of oxygen likewise in combination. This affinity is modified by the electric position of the element to which the respective atoms of oxygen are bound. From this property results the fact that, in organic combinates, the atoms of oxygen are always found double. For instance, the combining limit of oxygen being two, when two molecules of: are set at liberty, the free affinities of the oxygen instantly produce the union of these molecules. The cause of the union of two molecules of C 2 H 3 has already been remarked. In the two cases, the causes of the union of the respective molecules are in so far different [sic] that the one is the result of a property of the carbon, while the other is a result of a property of the oxygen. The view here adopted of the nature of oxygen is, I am convinced, alone in conformity with the reactions where the properties of this body develop themselves. The vapor of anhydrous sulfuric acid, for instance, is conducted into anhydrous aether. The following will then be the reaction: entering into communication with, the two atoms of the oxygen of the sulfuric acid and the two atoms of the oxygen of the aether (now in presence of each other) being in different (perhaps different electric) conditions, mutually loosen their former affinities and reunite themselves to the (electrically?) different atoms of oxygen of these respective combinates. The same principle may naturally be expected to display itself with regard to acids and bases. The oxygen of an acid unites itself to the (electrically?) different oxygen 238

241 of water. The oxygen of a base on the same principle has an affinity for the electrically different oxygen of water. It will be observed: 1. That the oxygen of the water of an acid can only be expelled by that of a base, and vice versa. 2. It is to be remarked that it is not the metal of a base which exchanges places with the hydrogen of the hydrate of an acid; for if that were the case, the affinity of the oxygen of the metal, and also of the acid, would be greater for the oxygen of the water than the affinity of the hydrogen for that same oxygen. But this is not so. The very opposite is the truth. If one atom of hydrogen be withdrawn from the hydrate of an acid or from the hydrate of an oxide, it is universally accompanied by an atom of oxygen. It is evident, then, that the affinity between the positive and negative atoms of oxygen is less than that which attaches these atoms to the element with which they form a primary combinate. A consequence of this truth is that it is impossible to double the equivalent of oxygen, if the chemical equivalents are to be understood as not being in direct contradiction to any chemical truth or essential feature in the properties of an element. Carbon differs entirely in this respect from oxygen. There is no reaction found where it is known that C 2 [C] is divided into two parts. It is only consequent therefore to write, with Gerhardt, C 2 [C] as simply C, it being then understood that the equivalent of carbon is (12) twelve. 15 This value of the atom will be adopted in the following part of this paper. Sulfur, selenium, &c., being bodies displaying properties similar, not to carbon, but to oxygen, it will be necessary to retain the equivalent value that has generally been assigned to them. I have now shown how ordinary alcohol, C 2 H 6 O 2 [C 2 H 6 O], common aether, and the hydrocarbide, C 2 H 6, belong to the type ncm 4. The phenomena which necessitate this view of the constitution of these bodies have a like consequence in regard to the other alcohols, glycols, acids, and aethers of this series. Propyle alcohol 16 is: where it will be seen that the atom of carbon situated between the two others, on account of being chemically united to these, is reduced to the combining power of two for hydrogen, oxygen, &c. One combining power is given up to the carbon upon the one side, and a second to the carbon upon the other. It will be observed also, that the primary combinates ought in rigor to be 15 [You have here an example of one kind of difficulty that Cannizzaro cleared up. As noted above, Couper started his paper using a weight of 6 for carbon (cf. Dalton s weight of 5). As a consequence of this, every carbon atom in the foregoing was treated as two carbon atoms. From here on, and in his abstract (at the end of this paper), he uses 12 as the equivalent weight of carbon.] 16 [Now called isopropyl alcohol. ] 239

242 themselves enumerated in an inverse order. The type ncm 4 becomes then in reality the type CM 4. This enumeration, however, does not appear to possess any great practical utility, and it is perhaps preferable simply to denote it in an indefinite manner by adding n to the true type CM 4. In a like manner the butyle alcohol is to be viewed as:, and so on throughout all the series of these alcohols. The constitution of the aethers will be evident: represents the mixed butylic-ethylic aether. Formic acid is represented by the form ; acetic acid in a like manner:. Propionic acid is:. The constitution of glycol may be represented as follows:. represented as: In like manner as to the acids of these glycols, oxalic acid, for instance, may be. Respecting these acids, it may perhaps be allowable to suggest the possibility of the molecules having two poles, and that especially the atom of oxygen, situated at one or perhaps both, and near to two atoms of oxygen bound together, and forming no secondary combinate, may be in a state presenting great affinity for basic oxygen. Analogy with the electric poles may perhaps demand the opinion that all the negative oxygen be situated upon one side of the molecule. It will in that case be preferable to represent the oxalic acid as: 240

243 . Be that as it may, however, the rational method of investigation proves it to be a law that in acids of the type ncm 4 the presence of two atoms bound together so as to form only a primary part of the same molecule, and situated close to the negative oxygen, is necessary to the calling forth or production of this negative state. This is a particular instance, but it moreover shows generally how the electropositive or the electro-negative value of the elements mutually modify and condition the electro-positive or electro-negative value of each other when in combination. This law is different from the electric hypothesis that chemists have formerly defended, but which never could be traced throughout a thoroughgoing application of their views to organic chemistry. The law here distinctly enounced [sic] coincides exactly with, and is rendered apparent by, the application of the theory of chemical combination which I support. But to return. Glycerine is:, and glyceric acid. Glucose has been perhaps too little investigated to afford data sufficient to determine definitely its formula. Taking, however, mucic and saccharic acids as startingpoints, these bodies may be meanwhile represented as: the acids. 241

244 Glucose. 17 It will thus be seen that these combinates all belong to the type ncm 4. Many others might be added. For instance, tartaric acid:. And the bibasic acid produced from it by the action of heat will be perhaps:. It is my intention to consider, in a future communication, the second type, and to apply my views to the cyanogen combinates, &c. {In the meantime I shall only add the way in which I regard the constitution of the principal cyanogen compounds. Reasons altogether similar to those that make me regard 4 as the limit of the combining power of carbon lead me to assign 5 as the limit of combination of nitrogen. The first degree of combination of this element is met with in ammonia [NH 3 ] and equals 3. The second, which is equal to 5, is found, amongst other chemical compounds, in the chloride and in the oxide of ammonium [NH 4 Cl and NH 3 O], as well as in nitric acid [HNO 3 ]. From this it follows that carbon and nitrogen, combined in such a manner that both attain the limits of their combining power, will form a body the free affinity of which will be exerted in fixing one equivalent of hydrogen or of another element. Thus the formula of hydrocyanic acid will be: [ ] Cyanic acid will be: [ ], cyanuric acid: 17 [Couper has the wrong molecular formula for glucose. It is C 6 H 12 O 6.] 242

245 . In this last formula the atoms of carbon and of nitrogen are first linked by 2 units of affinity and not by 4, as in the first two examples.} Addendum to On a New Chemical Theory 18 (Note presented by Mr. Dumas) I have the honor to lay before the Academy the principal features of a new chemical theory that I propose for organic combinates. I go back to the elements themselves, of which I study the mutual affinities. This study is, in my opinion, sufficient for the explanation of all chemical combinates, without it being necessary to revert to unknown principles and to arbitrary generalizations. I distinguish two species of affinity, namely: (1) affinity of degree, & (2) elective affinity. By affinity of degree, I mean the affinity that one element exerts upon another with which it combines in several definite proportions. I call elective affinity that which different elements exert with different intensities upon one another. Taking carbon, for example, I find that it exerts its combining power in two degrees. These degrees are represented by CO 2 [CO] and CO 4 [CO 2 ], that is to say, by the oxide of carbon and carbonic acid, adopting for the equivalents of carbon and oxygen the numbers 12 & 8. So far as concerns its elective affinities, carbon differs from the other elements and exhibits, so to speak, a special physiognomy. The features that characterize this elective affinity of carbon are the following: (1) It combines with equal numbers of equivalents of hydrogen, of chlorine, of oxygen, of sulfur, et cetera, which can mutually replace one another so as to satisfy its combining powers. (2) It enters into combination with itself. These two properties suffice, in my opinion, to explain all that is presented as characteristic by organic chemistry. I believe that the second is pointed out here for the first time. In my opinion it accounts for the important and still unexplained fact of the accumulation of molecules of carbon in organic combinates. In these compounds where 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, etc., molecules of carbon are bound together, it is carbon which serves as link to carbon. 18 [From Comptes Rendus, 46 (1858), ] 243

246 It is not hydrogen that can bind together the elements of organic bodies. If, like carbon, it had the power to combine with itself, it would be possible to form the compounds of H 4 Cl 4, H 6 Cl 6, H 8 Cl 8. So far as oxygen is concerned, I admit that an atom of this body in combination exerts a powerful affinity upon a second atom of oxygen that is itself combined with another element. This affinity is modified by the electrical position of the elements to which the atoms of oxygen are respectively attached. The following explanation will make this conception understood. The highest combining power known for carbon is that of the second degree, that is to say, 4. The combining power of oxygen is represented by 2. All the combinates of carbon can be referred to two types. One of these is represented by the symbol ncm 4, the other by the symbol ncm 4 mm 2, where m < n, or else ncm 4 + mm 2, where n can become nil. 19 As examples of the first type, the alcohols, the fatty acids, the glycols, etc., may be added. Methylic and ethylic alcohols will be represented by the formulae: It will easily be seen that for methylic alcohol the limit of combination of the carbon is equal to 4, the carbon in it being combined with 3 of hydrogen and with 1 of the oxygen. This oxygen, of which the combining power is equal to 2, is in turn combined with another atom of oxygen, itself united to 1 of the hydrogen. In the case of ordinary alcohol, each of the two atoms of carbon satisfies its combining power, on the one hand, by uniting with 3 atoms of hydrogen or of hydrogen and oxygen, and, on the other hand, by uniting with the other atom of carbon. The oxygen is combined in the same manner as in the preceding example. In these cases it will be seen that the carbon belongs to the first type, each atom being combined in the second degree. In propylic alcohol 20, the combining power of the atom of carbon that is situated in the middle is reduced to 2 for hydrogen, since it is combined chemically with each of the two other atoms of carbon. Formulae analogous to those preceeding express the constitution of the other alcohols. The constitution of ether is represented by the formula:. 19 [It seems that there is a misprint here. Where he says ncm4 mm2, where m < n should read ncm4 mm2, where m n. See footnote 11 above for an example of the first type.] 20 [Now called isopropyl alcohol. ] 244

247 Formic acid is:, acetic acid is:. The constitution of glycol is represented by the formula:, that of oxalic acid by the formula:, or, if it is desired to join the negative oxygen to one of the poles of the molecule, by the formula: Be that as it may, however, it can be seen according to this theory that, in the constitution of organic acids of the first type, the presence of two atoms of oxygen combined together in such a manner that both are attached directly to the carbon and situated near the negative oxygen that is to say, near the oxygen which carries along with it the oxygen raised to an electro-positive state by its combination with one atom of a relatively electro-positive element; that the presence, I say, of these atoms of oxygen is necessary in order that the negative oxygen may find itself in that electrical state which gives to the body the properties generally described by the name of acids. This is a particular case of a general law, because it can be seen, according to this theory, how the electro-positive or electro-negative value of the elements mutually modifies and conditions the electro-positive or electro-negative value of the other elements. This law differs from the electric hypothesis that chemists have hitherto defended, but which has never been able to receive a complete application to their views on organic chemistry; that, on the contrary, which I advance, agrees perfectly with the application of the theory that I propose to [sic] the facts. There remains nothing for me but to add the manner in which I formulate salicylic acid and the terchlorophosphate of salicyl that I made known in a communication submitted to the Academy at its last sitting. 245

248 Salicylic acid: Terchlorophosphate of salicyl 21 : These formulae suffice, for the moment, to indicate my ideas on the constitution of bodies. 21 [This is an example of a tertiary combinate.] 246